F60 Feeder Management Relay Instruction Manual · PDF fileF60 Feeder Management Relay...

gGE Power Management

REGI STERED

F60 Revision: 1.8X

Manual P/N: 1601-0093-A4 (GEK106236)

Copyright 1999 GE Multilin

GE Multilin

215 Anderson Avenue, Markham, Ontario

Canada L6E 1B3

Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 294-8512

Internet: http://www.ge.com/indsys/pm/

Note: This relay may come from the factory with preset LED Panel 2 settings - see the‘Product Setup \ User-Programmable LEDs’ section for details and user options.

Manufactured under anISO9001 Registered system.

F60 Feeder Management RelayInstruction Manual

www.nationalswitchgear.com

Courtesy of NationalSwitchgear.com

gGE Power Management

ADDENDUMThis Addendum contains information that relates to the F60 relay, version 1.8X. This addendum lists anumber of information items that appear in the instruction manual GEK106236 (1601-0093-A4) butare not included in the current F60 operations.

The following functions/items are not yet available with the current version of the F60 relay:

• RTD inputs

• Signal Sources SRC 3 to SRC 6 (availability is pending for this release)

• Snapshots

ERRATA

• The UCA2 specifications are not yet finalized. There will be changes to the objects models described inAppendix B (UCA/MMS).

GE Multilin

215 Anderson Avenue, Markham, Ontario

Canada L6E 1B3

Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 294-8512Internet: http://www.ge.com/indsys/pm/



GE Power Management F60 Feeder Management Relay i

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES1.1.1 CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS ................................................................... 1-11.1.2 INSPECTION CHECKLIST........................................................................ 1-1

1.2 URPC® SOFTWARE1.2.1 HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS .................................. 1-21.2.2 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION .................................................................... 1-2

1.3 UR HARDWARE1.3.1 MOUNTING AND WIRING ........................................................................ 1-51.3.2 COMMUNICATIONS ................................................................................. 1-51.3.3 FACEPLATE DISPLAY.............................................................................. 1-61.3.4 FACEPLATE KEYPAD .............................................................................. 1-6

1.4 USING THE KEYPAD1.4.1 MENU NAVIGATION ................................................................................. 1-71.4.2 MENU HIERARCHY .................................................................................. 1-71.4.3 SETTINGS NOT PROGRAMMED............................................................. 1-81.4.4 RELAY PASSWORDS............................................................................... 1-81.4.5 FLEXLOGIC™ CUSTOMIZATION ............................................................ 1-81.4.6 COMMISSIONING ..................................................................................... 1-8

2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION2.1.1 OVERVIEW................................................................................................ 2-12.1.2 ORDERING................................................................................................ 2-3

2.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS2.2.1 PROTECTION ELEMENTS ....................................................................... 2-52.2.2 MONITORING............................................................................................ 2-72.2.3 METERING ................................................................................................ 2-72.2.4 INPUTS...................................................................................................... 2-72.2.5 POWER SUPPLY ...................................................................................... 2-82.2.6 OUTPUTS.................................................................................................. 2-82.2.7 COMMUNICATIONS ................................................................................. 2-82.2.8 ENVIRONMENTAL .................................................................................... 2-92.2.9 TYPE TESTS ............................................................................................. 2-92.2.10 PRODUCTION TESTS .............................................................................. 2-92.2.11 APPROVALS ............................................................................................. 2-92.2.12 MAINTENANCE......................................................................................... 2-9

3. HARDWARE 3.1 DESCRIPTIONS3.1.1 PANEL CUTOUT ....................................................................................... 3-13.1.2 MODULE WITHDRAWAL / INSERTION ................................................... 3-23.1.3 REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT ...................................................................... 3-33.1.4 REAR TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS........................................................... 3-4

3.2 WIRING3.2.1 TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM.................................................................... 3-53.2.2 CONTROL POWER................................................................................... 3-63.2.3 AC CURRENT TRANSFORMER INPUTS ................................................ 3-73.2.4 CT/VT MODULE ASSIGNMENTS ............................................................. 3-83.2.5 CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS ................................................................. 3-93.2.6 TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS........................................................ 3-143.2.7 RS232 FACEPLATE PROGRAM PORT ................................................. 3-153.2.8 CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS............................................................ 3-16



ii F60 Feeder Management Relay GE Power Management

TABLE OF CONTENTS

a RS485 PORTS......................................................................................... 3-16b 10BASE-F FIBER OPTIC PORT ............................................................. 3-17

3.2.9 IRIG-B ...................................................................................................... 3-18

4. HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1 URPC® SOFTWARE INTERFACE4.1.1 GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE.............................................................. 4-1

a CREATING A SITE LIST ........................................................................... 4-14.1.2 URPC® SOFTWARE OVERVIEW ............................................................ 4-2

a ENGAGING A COMMUNICATING DEVICE.............................................. 4-2b USING SETTINGS FILES.......................................................................... 4-2c CREATING / EDITING FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATIONS................................ 4-2d VIEWING ACTUAL VALUES ..................................................................... 4-2e VIEWING TRIGGERED EVENTS.............................................................. 4-3f CREATING INTERACTIVE SINGLE LINE DIAGRAMS ............................ 4-3g FILE SUPPORT ......................................................................................... 4-3

4.1.3 URPC® SOFTWARE MAIN WINDOW ...................................................... 4-44.1.4 MAIN WINDOW MENU BAR ..................................................................... 4-5

a FILE MENU................................................................................................ 4-5b EDIT MENU ............................................................................................... 4-6c SITE LIST MENU....................................................................................... 4-6d SETTINGS LIST MENU............................................................................. 4-7e VIEW MENU .............................................................................................. 4-8f ACTION MENU.......................................................................................... 4-9g WINDOW MENU...................................................................................... 4-10h HELP MENU ............................................................................................ 4-10

4.1.5 POP-UP MENUS ..................................................................................... 4-114.1.6 MAIN WINDOW TOOL BAR .................................................................... 4-124.1.7 DATA VIEW TOOL BAR .......................................................................... 4-12

4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE4.2.1 FACEPLATE ............................................................................................ 4-144.2.2 LED INDICATORS................................................................................... 4-14

a LED PANEL 1 .......................................................................................... 4-14b LED PANELS 2 & 3 ................................................................................. 4-16c CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDs ............................................................... 4-17

4.2.3 DISPLAY.................................................................................................. 4-204.2.4 KEYPAD .................................................................................................. 4-204.2.5 BREAKER CONTROL ............................................................................. 4-21

a CONTROL MODE SELECTION & MONITORING .................................. 4-21b FACEPLATE PUSHBUTTON (USER KEY) CONTROL .......................... 4-21c CONTROL OF TWO BREAKERS ........................................................... 4-21d CONTROL OF ONE BREAKER .............................................................. 4-22

4.2.6 MENUS .................................................................................................... 4-23a NAVIGATION........................................................................................... 4-23b HIERARCHY............................................................................................ 4-23

4.2.7 CHANGING SETTINGS........................................................................... 4-25a ENTERING NUMERICAL DATA.............................................................. 4-25b ENTERING ENUMERATION DATA ........................................................ 4-26c ENTERING ALPHANUMERIC TEXT....................................................... 4-26d RELAY SETTINGS NOT PROGRAMMED .............................................. 4-27e INITIAL PASSWORD SETUP.................................................................. 4-28f CHANGING EXISTING PASSWORD...................................................... 4-29

5. SETTINGS 5.1 OVERVIEW5.1.1 SETTINGS MAIN MENU ........................................................................... 5-15.1.2 INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS ............................................................. 5-45.1.3 INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES......................................................... 5-6



GE Power Management F60 Feeder Management Relay iii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

a BACKGROUND ......................................................................................... 5-6b CT/VT MODULE CONFIGURATIONS....................................................... 5-8c CT/VT INPUT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION SETTINGS ........................ 5-8

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP5.2.1 PASSWORD SECURITY......................................................................... 5-105.2.2 DISPLAY PROPERTIES.......................................................................... 5-115.2.3 COMMUNICATIONS ............................................................................... 5-125.2.4 REAL TIME CLOCK................................................................................. 5-135.2.5 OSCILLOGRAPHY .................................................................................. 5-145.2.6 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS............................................................. 5-16

a FACTORY PRESET LED PANEL 2 SETTINGS...................................... 5-165.2.7 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS.................................................................. 5-175.2.8 MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD ..................................................................... 5-185.2.9 INSTALLATION ....................................................................................... 5-18

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP5.3.1 AC INPUTS.............................................................................................. 5-19

a CURRENT BANKS .................................................................................. 5-19b VOLTAGE BANKS................................................................................... 5-20

5.3.2 POWER SYSTEM.................................................................................... 5-215.3.3 SIGNAL SOURCES ................................................................................. 5-225.3.4 BREAKER 1 / BREAKER 2...................................................................... 5-24

a BREAKER CONTROL ............................................................................. 5-24b BREAKER CONTROL SETTINGS .......................................................... 5-24

5.3.5 FLEXCURVE™ A / FLEXCURVE™ B..................................................... 5-27

5.4 FLEXLOGIC™5.4.1 INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC™....................................................... 5-28

a FLEXLOGIC™ RULES ............................................................................ 5-37b FLEXLOGIC™ EVALUATION ................................................................. 5-37

5.4.2 FLEXLOGIC™ PROCEDURE EXAMPLE ............................................... 5-385.4.3 FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION EDITOR....................................................... 5-455.4.4 FLEXLOGIC™ TIMERS........................................................................... 5-45

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS5.5.1 OVERVIEW.............................................................................................. 5-465.5.2 CURRENT ELEMENTS MENU ............................................................... 5-46

a INVERSE TIME OVERCURRENT CURVE CHARACTERISTICS .......... 5-48b PHASE TOC1 .......................................................................................... 5-57c PHASE IOC1 / IOC2 ................................................................................ 5-59d PHASE DIRECTIONAL 1(2) .................................................................... 5-60e NEUTRAL TOC1...................................................................................... 5-64f NEUTRAL IOC1 / IOC2 ........................................................................... 5-65g NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL 1(2)................................................................ 5-66h GROUND TOC1 ...................................................................................... 5-70i GROUND IOC1 / IOC2 ............................................................................ 5-71j NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC1 / TOC2 .................................................. 5-72k NEGATIVE SEQUENCE IOC1 / IOC2..................................................... 5-73

5.5.3 BREAKER FAILURE 1(2) ........................................................................ 5-74a BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION ....................................................... 5-76

5.5.4 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS MENU ................................................................ 5-86a UNDERVOLTAGE DEFINITE TIME CHARACTERISTICS ..................... 5-86b UNDERVOLTAGE INVERSE TIME CHARACTERISTICS...................... 5-87c PHASE UV1 / UV2................................................................................... 5-88d PHASE OV1............................................................................................. 5-90

5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS5.6.1 OVERVIEW.............................................................................................. 5-915.6.2 SETTING GROUPS MENU ..................................................................... 5-915.6.3 UNDERFREQUENCY.............................................................................. 5-935.6.4 SYNCHROCHECK 1(2) ........................................................................... 5-965.6.5 AUTORECLOSE.................................................................................... 5-100



iv F60 Feeder Management Relay GE Power Management

TABLE OF CONTENTS

5.6.6 DIGITAL ELEMENTS MENU ................................................................. 5-107a DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 ............................................................................ 5-107b CIRCUIT MONITORING APPLICATIONS............................................. 5-108

5.6.7 DIGITAL COUNTERS............................................................................ 5-1125.6.8 MONITORING ELEMENTS ................................................................... 5-115

a BREAKER 1(2) ARCING CURRENT..................................................... 5-1155.6.9 COLD LOAD PICKUPS ......................................................................... 5-117

5.7 INPUTS / OUTPUTS5.7.1 CONTACT INPUTS MENU.................................................................... 5-119

a CONTACT INPUT EXAMPLE................................................................ 5-119b CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLDS ........................................................ 5-120

5.7.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS.................................................................................. 5-121a SBO TIMER ........................................................................................... 5-122

5.7.3 REMOTE DEVICES............................................................................... 5-123a REMOTE INPUTS / OUTPUTS - OVERVIEW....................................... 5-123b LOCAL DEVICES - ID of Device for Transmitting GOOSE Messages .. 5-123c REMOTE DEVICES - ID of Device for Receiving GOOSE Messages .. 5-123

5.7.4 REMOTE INPUTS ................................................................................. 5-1245.7.5 CONTACT OUTPUTS ........................................................................... 5-1255.7.6 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS.............................................................................. 5-1275.7.7 REMOTE OUTPUTS - DNA BIT PAIRS ................................................ 5-1285.7.8 REMOTE OUTPUTS - UserSt BIT PAIRS............................................. 5-1295.7.9 RESETTING .......................................................................................... 5-129

5.8 TRANSDUCER I/O5.8.1 DCMA INPUTS ...................................................................................... 5-1305.8.2 RTD INPUTS ......................................................................................... 5-131

5.9 TESTING5.9.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................... 5-1325.9.2 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS.................................................................. 5-1325.9.3 FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS.............................................................. 5-132

6. ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 OVERVIEW6.1.1 ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU ................................................................ 6-1

6.2 STATUS6.2.1 CONTACT INPUTS ................................................................................... 6-36.2.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS...................................................................................... 6-36.2.3 REMOTE INPUTS ..................................................................................... 6-46.2.4 CONTACT OUTPUTS ............................................................................... 6-46.2.5 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS.................................................................................. 6-56.2.6 AUTORECLOSE........................................................................................ 6-56.2.7 REMOTE DEVICES STATUS.................................................................... 6-56.2.8 REMOTE DEVICES STATISTICS ............................................................. 6-66.2.9 DIGITAL COUNTERS................................................................................ 6-66.2.10 FLEX STATES ........................................................................................... 6-76.2.11 CLOCK....................................................................................................... 6-76.2.12 ETHERNET................................................................................................ 6-7

6.3 METERING6.3.1 METERING CONVENTIONS..................................................................... 6-86.3.2 SOURCES ................................................................................................. 6-96.3.3 SYNCHROCHECK .................................................................................. 6-126.3.4 AC INPUTS.............................................................................................. 6-13

a CURRENT BANKS .................................................................................. 6-13b VOLTAGE BANKS................................................................................... 6-13c FREQUENCY .......................................................................................... 6-13

6.3.5 TRANSDUCER I/O .................................................................................. 6-14



GE Power Management F60 Feeder Management Relay v

TABLE OF CONTENTS

a DCMA INPUTS ........................................................................................ 6-14b RTD INPUTS ........................................................................................... 6-14

6.4 RECORDS6.4.1 EVENT RECORD .................................................................................... 6-156.4.2 OSCILLOGRAPHY .................................................................................. 6-166.4.3 MAINTENANCE....................................................................................... 6-16

a BREAKER 1(2) ........................................................................................ 6-16

6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION6.5.1 MODEL INFORMATION .......................................................................... 6-176.5.2 FIRMWARE REVISIONS......................................................................... 6-17

7. COMMANDS ANDTARGETS

7.1 COMMANDS7.1.1 COMMANDS MENU .................................................................................. 7-17.1.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS...................................................................................... 7-17.1.3 CLEAR RECORDS .................................................................................... 7-27.1.4 RELAY MAINTENANCE ............................................................................ 7-2

7.2 TARGETS7.2.1 TARGETS MENU ...................................................................................... 7-3

a TARGET MESSAGES ............................................................................... 7-37.2.2 RELAY SELF-TESTS ................................................................................ 7-4

8. APPLICATION OFSETTINGS

8.1 APPLICATION GUIDELINES8.1.1 NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL ELEMENT ....................................................... 8-1

a SOURCE:................................................................................................... 8-1b POLARIZATION:........................................................................................ 8-1c ELEMENT CHARACTERISTIC ANGLE (ECA): ........................................ 8-2d LIMIT ANGLE (LA):.................................................................................... 8-2

9. COMMISSIONING 9.1 SETTINGS - PRODUCT SETUP9.1.1 PRODUCT SETUP .................................................................................... 9-1

9.2 SETTINGS - SYSTEM SETUP9.2.1 SYSTEM SETUP ....................................................................................... 9-7

a CURRENT BANKS .................................................................................... 9-7b VOLTAGE BANKS..................................................................................... 9-7c POWER SYSTEM...................................................................................... 9-8d SIGNAL SOURCES ................................................................................... 9-8e BREAKERS ............................................................................................... 9-9f FLEXCURVES ......................................................................................... 9-10

9.3 SETTINGS - FLEXLOGIC™9.3.1 FLEXLOGIC™ ......................................................................................... 9-12

a FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR .......................................................... 9-12b FLEXLOGIC TIMERS .............................................................................. 9-18

9.4 SETTINGS - GROUPED ELEMENTS9.4.1 GROUPED ELEMENTS .......................................................................... 9-21

a CURRENT ELEMENTS ........................................................................... 9-21b BREAKER FAILURE ELEMENTS ........................................................... 9-25c VOLTAGE ELEMENTS............................................................................ 9-26

9.5 SETTINGS - CONTROL ELEMENTS9.5.1 CONTROL ELEMENTS ........................................................................... 9-27



vi F60 Feeder Management Relay GE Power Management

TABLE OF CONTENTS

a SETTING GROUPS................................................................................. 9-27b UNDERFREQUENCY.............................................................................. 9-27c SYNCHROCHECK .................................................................................. 9-28d AUTORECLOSE...................................................................................... 9-28e DIGITAL ELEMENTS............................................................................... 9-29f DIGITAL COUNTERS.............................................................................. 9-32g BREAKER ARCING CURRENTS............................................................ 9-34h COLD LOAD PICKUPS ........................................................................... 9-34

9.6 SETTINGS - INPUTS / OUTPUTS9.6.1 INPUTS / OUTPUTS................................................................................ 9-35

a CONTACT INPUTS ................................................................................. 9-35b VIRTUAL INPUTS.................................................................................... 9-37c SBO TIMER ............................................................................................. 9-39d REMOTE DEVICES................................................................................. 9-40e REMOTE INPUTS ................................................................................... 9-41f CONTACT OUTPUTS ............................................................................. 9-42g VIRTUAL OUTPUTS................................................................................ 9-43h REMOTE OUTPUTS - DNA BIT PAIRS .................................................. 9-45i REMOTE OUTPUTS - UserSt BIT PAIRS............................................... 9-46j RESETTING ............................................................................................ 9-46

9.7 SETTINGS - TRANSDUCER I/O9.7.1 TRANSDUCER I/O .................................................................................. 9-47

a DCMA INPUTS ........................................................................................ 9-47b RTD INPUTS ........................................................................................... 9-48

9.8 SETTINGS - TESTING9.8.1 TESTING ................................................................................................. 9-49

a FORCE CONTACT INPUTS.................................................................... 9-49b FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS................................................................ 9-49

A. MODBUS® RTUPROTOCOL

A.1 OVERVIEWA.1.1 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................A-1A.1.2 PHYSICAL LAYER ....................................................................................A-1A.1.3 DATA LINK LAYER....................................................................................A-1A.1.4 CRC-16 ALGORITHM................................................................................A-3

A.2 FUNCTION CODESA.2.1 SUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES ...........................................................A-4A.2.2 FUNCTION CODE 03H/04H - READ ACTUAL VALUES OR SETTINGS.A-4A.2.3 FUNCTION CODE 05H - EXECUTE OPERATION ...................................A-5A.2.4 FUNCTION CODE 06H - STORE SINGLE SETTING ...............................A-6A.2.5 FUNCTION CODE 10H - STORE MULTIPLE SETTINGS ........................A-6

A.3 EXCEPTION RESPONSESA.3.1 EXCEPTION RESPONSES.......................................................................A-7

A.4 FILE TRANSFERSA.4.1 READING THE EVENT RECORDER........................................................A-8

a BASICS......................................................................................................A-8b DETAILS ....................................................................................................A-8c FILE FORMATS.........................................................................................A-8

A.4.2 READING OSCILLOGRAPHY DATA ........................................................A-9

A.5 MEMORY MAPPINGA.5.1 MODBUS® MEMORY MAP SUMMARY..................................................A-12A.5.2 MODBUS® MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS ........................................A-14A.5.3 MODBUS® MEMORY MAP .....................................................................A-31

B. UCA/MMS B.1 UCA/MMS OVERVIEW



GE Power Management F60 Feeder Management Relay vii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

B.1.1 UCA ...........................................................................................................B-1B.1.2 MMS...........................................................................................................B-1

a PROTOCOL IMPLEMENT AND CONFORM STATEMENT (PICS) ..........B-3b MODEL IMPLEMENTATION CONFORMANCE (MIC)..............................B-5

C. ABBREVIATIONS C.1 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS

D. REVISIONS D.1 CHANGE NOTESD.1.1 REVISION HISTORY.................................................................................D-1D.1.2 CHANGES TO F60 MANUAL ....................................................................D-1

E. LIST OF FIGURES ANDTABLES

E.1 FIGURES AND TABLESE.1.1 LIST OF FIGURES ....................................................................................E-1E.1.2 LIST OF TABLES.......................................................................................E-3

F. WARRANTY F.1 WARRANTY INFORMATION

INDEX



viii F60 Feeder Management Relay GE Power Management

TABLE OF CONTENTS



GE Power Management F60 Feeder Management Relay 1- 1

1 GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

11 GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

To help ensure years of trouble free operation, please read through this chapter for information to help guideyou through the initial installation procedures of your new relay.

1.1.1 CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS

Before attempting to install or use the relay, it is imperative that all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS in thismanual are reviewed to help prevent personal injury, equipment damage, and/or downtime.

1.1.2 INSPECTION CHECKLIST

• Open the relay packaging and inspect the relay for physical damage

• View the rear name-plate and verify that the relay is the correct model ordered

Figure 1–1: REAR NAME-PLATE

• Ensure that the following items have been included with the relay:

• instruction manual

• software CD

• mounting screws

• registration card (attached as the last page of the manual)

• Fill out the registration form and mail it back to GE Power Management (include the serial number locatedon the rear name-plate)

• For product information, instruction manual updates, and the latest software updates, please visit the GEPower Management Home Page.

Note: If there is any physical damage noticed on the relay, or any of the contents listed are missing,please contact GE Power Management immediately.

GE Power Management contact information and Call Center for product support:

GE Multilin215 Anderson AvenueMarkham, OntarioCanada L6E 1B3Telephone: (905) 294-6222, 1-800-547-8629 (North America only)

Fax: (905) 201-2098

Email: [email protected]

Home Page: http://www.ge.com/indsys/pm/



1-2 F60 Feeder Management Relay GE Power Management

1.2 URPC® SOFTWARE 1 GETTING STARTED

11.2 URPC® SOFTWARE 1.2.1 HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS

The Faceplate keypad+display or the URPC® software interface can be used to communicate with the relay.The URPC® software interface is the preferred method to edit settings and view actual values because the PCmonitor can display more information in a simple comprehensible format.

The following minimum requirements must be met for the URPC® software to properly operate on a PC.

Processor: Intel® Pentium 200 MMX

Memory: 16 Mb (32 Mb recommended)

Hard Drive: 20 Mb free space required before installation of URPC® software

O/S: Windows® NT 4.x or Windows® 9x

Hardware: CD ROM drive

Unused communications port (e.g. COM1)

1.2.2 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

Refer to the following instructions to install the URPC® software onto a PC:

1. Start the Windows® program.

2. Insert the URPC® software CD into the CD ROM drive.

3. If the installation program does not start automatically, from the Windows® Start menu, choose Run , typed:\SETUP.EXE and press Enter.

4. Follow the on-screen instructions to install the URPC® software. When the Welcome window appears,click on Next to continue with the installation procedure.




1 GETTING STARTED 1.2 URPC® SOFTWARE

1

5. When the Choose Destination Location window appears and if the software is not to be located in thedefault directory, click Browse and type in the complete path name including the new directory name.

6. Click Next to continue with the installation procedure.

7. The default program group where the application will be added to is shown in the Select Program Folderwindow. If it is desired that the application be added to an already existing program group, choose thegroup name from the list shown.

8. Click Next to begin the installation process.




1.2 URPC® SOFTWARE 1 GETTING STARTED

19. To launch the URPC application, click Finish in the Setup Complete window.

10. Subsequently, double click on the URPC® software icon to activate the application.

Refer to the HUMAN INTERFACES chapter in this manual and the URPC ® Software Help program formore information about the URPC ® software interface.




1 GETTING STARTED 1.3 UR HARDWARE

11.3 UR HARDWARE 1.3.1 MOUNTING AND WIRING

Please refer to the HARDWARE chapter for detailed relay mounting and wiring instructions. Review allWARNINGS and CAUTIONS .

1.3.2 COMMUNICATIONS

The URPC® software can communicate to the relay via the faceplate RS232 port, or the rear panel RS485 orEthernet ports. To communicate with the relay via the faceplate RS232 port, a standard “straight through” serialcable is used. The DB-9 male end is connected to the relay and the DB-9 or DB-25 female end is connected tothe PC COM1 or COM2 port as described in the HARDWARE chapter.

Figure 1–2: RELAY COMMUNICATIONS OPTIONS

To communicate with the relay rear RS485 port from a computer RS232 port, GE Multilin’s RS232/RS485 Con-verter box is needed. The RS232/RS485 converter box (catalog number F485) is connected to the computerusing a “straight through” serial cable. A shielded twisted pair (20, 22 or 24 AWG) cable is used to connect theconverter box to the relay rear communication port terminals. The converter box (+, -, GND) terminals are con-nected to the relay communication module (+, -, COM) terminals. Refer to section CPU COMMUNICATIONPORTS in the HARDWARE chapter for option details. The line should also be terminated in an RC network(i.e. 120 ohm, 1nF) as described in the HARDWARE chapter.




1.3 UR HARDWARE 1 GETTING STARTED

11.3.3 FACEPLATE DISPLAY

Figure 1–3: DISPLAY

All messages are displayed on a 2 x 20 character vacuum fluorescent display to make them visible under poorlighting conditions. Messages are displayed in English and do not require the aid of an instruction manual fordeciphering. While the keypad and display are not actively being used, the display will default to defined mes-sages. Any high priority event driven message will automatically override the default message and appear onthe display.

1.3.4 FACEPLATE KEYPAD

Figure 1–4: KEYPAD

Display messages are organized into pages under the main headings, Actual Values, Settings, Commands,and Targets. The key is used to navigate through the main heading pages. Each main heading page isfurther broken down into logical subgroup messages. The MESSAGE keys may be used to navi-gate through the subgroups.

The VALUE keys are used to scroll through variables in the setting programming mode. They will incre-ment and decrement numerical setting values. Alternatively, these values may be entered with the numerickeypad.

The key is used to store altered setting values. The key may be pressed at any time for contextsensitive help messages.

The key is used to initiate, and advance to, the next character in text edit mode or to enter a decimal point.The VALUE keys are used to scroll through alphanumeric values in text edit mode.

MENU

HELP

ESCAPE

ENTER

1

0 . +/-

2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

MESSAGE

VALUE




1 GETTING STARTED 1.4 USING THE KEYPAD

11.4 USING THE KEYPAD 1.4.1 MENU NAVIGATION

Press the key to display the desired header display page. The header title will flash momentarily andthe header display page will appear on the display. Each press of the key advances through the mainheading pages as illustrated.

1.4.2 MENU HIERARCHY

The setting and actual value messages are set up in a hierarchical format. The header display pages are indi-cated by the double scroll bar characters (), while sub-header pages are indicated by a single scroll barcharacter (). The header display pages are at the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header displaypages fall below this level. The MESSAGE and MESSAGE keys are used to move within a group ofheaders, sub-headers, setting values or actual values. Continually pressing the MESSAGE key from aheader display, displays more specific information for the header category. Conversely, continually pressingthe MESSAGE key from a setting value or actual value display will return to the header display.

ACTUAL VALUES SETTINGS COMMANDS TARGETS

ACTUAL VALUES STATUS

SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP

COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS

No ActiveTargets

Highest Level Lowest Level (Setting Value)


PASSWORD SECURITY

ACCESS LEVEL:Restricted

SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP




1.4 USING THE KEYPAD 1 GETTING STARTED

11.4.3 SETTINGS NOT PROGRAMMED

The relay is defaulted to the 'Not Programmed' state before it leaves the factory. This safeguards against theinstallation of a relay whose settings have not been entered. When powered up successfully, the TROUBLEindicator will be on and the IN SERVICE indicator off. In addition, a relay in the ‘Not Programmed’ state blockssignaling of any output relay. These conditions will remain until the relay is explicitly put in the 'Programmed'state.

Select the menu message PRODUCT SETUP \ INSTALLATION \ RELAY SETTINGS:. To put the relay in the'Programmed' state, press either of the VALUE keys once and then press . The faceplate INSERVICE indicator will now turn on and the TROUBLE indicator turn off.

The settings for the relay can be set up manually via the Faceplate Interface (refer to the SETTINGS chapter)or remotely via the URPC Software Interface (refer to the URPC Help program).

1.4.4 RELAY PASSWORDS

It is recommended that passwords be set up on the relay for each security level and assigned to specific per-sonnel. There are two user password security access levels:

1. COMMAND

The COMMAND access level restricts the user from making any settings changes, but allows the user toperform the following operations:

• operate breakers via faceplate pushbuttons

• change state of virtual inputs

• clear event records

• clear oscillography records

2. SETTING

The SETTING access level allows the user to make any changes to any of the setting values.

Refer to the HUMAN INTERFACES chapter, CHANGING SETTINGS section for complete instructions onsetting up security level passwords.

1.4.5 FLEXLOGIC™ CUSTOMIZATION

FlexLogic™ equation editing is required for setting up user-defined logic for customizing the relay operations.See section FLEXLOGIC™ in the SETTINGS chapter.

1.4.6 COMMISSIONING

Templated tables for charting all the required settings before entering them via the keypad are available in theCOMMISSIONING chapter.

RELAY SETTINGS:Not Programmed




2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION

2

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION 2.1.1 OVERVIEW

The F60 Feeder Management Relay is a microprocessor based relay designed for the protection of primaryfeeders. Overcurrent and undervoltage protection, directional current supervision, fault diagnostics, and RTUfunctions are provided. The UR Relay provides phase, neutral, ground and negative sequence, instantaneousand time overcurrent protection. The time overcurrent function provides multiple curve shapes or FlexCurve™

for optimum co-ordination.

Voltage and current metering is built into the relay as a standard feature. Current parameters are available asthe total waveform RMS magnitude or fundamental frequency only RMS magnitude and angle (phasor).

Diagnostic features include a sequence of records of 1024 time-tagged events. The internal clock used fortime-tagging can be synchronized with an IRIG-B signal. This precise time stamping allows the sequence ofevents to be determined throughout the system. A snapshot of measured parameters is recorded when anevent occurs to reflect the state of the relay at the exact time of the event. Events can also be programmed totrigger oscillography data capture which may be set to record the measured parameters before and after theevent for viewing on a portable computer (PC). These tools will significantly reduce troubleshooting time andsimplify report generation in the event of system faults.

A faceplate RS232 port may be used to connect a PC for programming settings and for monitoring actual val-ues. A variety of communications modules are available. Two rear RS485 ports are standard to allow indepen-dent access by operating and engineering staff. All serial ports use the Modbus® RTU protocol. The RS485ports may be connected to system computers with baud rates up to 115.2 kbps. The RS232 port has a fixedbaud rate of 19.2 kbps. Optional communications modules include a 10BaseF Ethernet interface which can beused to provide fast, reliable communications in noisy environments. Another option provides two 10BaseFfiber optic ports for redundancy. The Ethernet port supports MMS/UCA2 protocol.

The relay uses flash memory technology which allows field upgrading as new features are added.

The testing features can be used to verify and test settings and operations.

The following SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM illustrates the relay functionality using ANSI (American National Stan-dards Institute) device numbers.




2.1 INTRODUCTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2

Figure 2–1: SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM

Table 2–1: DEVICE NUMBERS AND FUNCTIONS

Device Number Function

25 Synchrocheck

27P - 1 & 2 Phase Undervoltage

50BF Breaker Failure 1

50NBF Breaker Failure 2

50G - 1 & 2 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent

50N - 1 & 2 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent

50P - 1 & 2 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent

50_2 - 1 & 2 Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent

51G Ground Time Overcurrent

51N Neutral Time Overcurrent

51P Phase Time Overcurrent

51_2 Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent

52 AC Circuit Breaker

59 Overvoltage

67N Neutral Directional

67P Phase Directional

79 Automatic Recloser

81U Underfrequency




2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION

2

2.1.2 ORDERING

The relay is available as a 19 inch rackmount horizontal unit, and consists of five UR module functions; PowerSupply, CPU, CT/VT DSP, Digital Input/Output, and Transducer Input/Output. Each of these modules can besupplied in a number of configurations which must be specified at the time of ordering. The informationrequired to completely specify the relay is provided in the following table. (Full details of the modules that areavailable for the relay are contained in the HARDWARE chapter.)

1Custom I/O configurations available. Consult factory with requirements.

Table 2–2: ORDER CODES

F60 - ÿÿÿÿ 00 - H C ÿÿÿÿ - F ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ - H ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ - M ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ P ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ U ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ W ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿBase Unit F60 | | | | | | | | | | | Base Unit

CPU A | | | | | | | | | | RS485 + RS485

C | | | | | | | | | | RS485 + 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2 and ModBus TCP/IP)

D | | | | | | | | | | RS485 + Redundant 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2 and ModBus TCP/IP)

Software Options 00 | | | | | | | | | No Software Options

Mounting H | | | | | | | | Horizontal

Faceplate C | | | | | | | Faceplate with Keypad & Display

Power Supply H | | | | | | 125/250 V

L | | | | | | 48 V

| | | | | |CT/VT DSP 8A | | | | | Standard 4CT/4VT

8B | | | | | Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT

| | | | |

Digital I/O 1 | XX XX XX XX No module

6A 6A 6A 6A 6A 2 Form-A & 2 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs

6B 6B 6B 6B 6B 2 Form-A & 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs

6C 6C 6C 6C 6C 8 Form-C Outputs

6D 6D 6D 6D 6D 16 Digital Inputs

6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 4 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs

6F 6F 6F 6F 6F 8 Fast Form-C Outputs

6G 6G 6G 6G 6G 4 Form-A Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs

6H 6H 6H 6H 6H 6 Form-A Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs

6K 6K 6K 6K 6K 4 Form-C & 4 Fast Form-C Outputs

| | | | |

Transducer I/O 1 | | 5F 5F 5F 8 dcmA Inputs




2.1 INTRODUCTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2

The following table displays the appropriate order codes of individual modules if replacement modules need tobe ordered separately.

2 NOTE: When ordering a replacement CPU module or front panel, please provide the serial number ofyour existing unit.

Table 2–3: ORDER CODES FOR ORDERING REPLACEMENT MODULES

UR - ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ - HPower Supply | 1H | 125/250 V

| 1L | 48 V

| | |

CPU 2 | 9A | RS485 + RS485

| 9C | RS485 + 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2 & ModBus TCP/IP)

| 9D | RS485+Redundant 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2 & ModBus TCP/IP)

Front Panel 2 | 3C | Front panel with display and keyboard

Digital I/O | 6A | 2 Form-A & 2 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs

| 6B | 2 Form-A & 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs

| 6C | 8 Form-C Outputs

| 6D | 16 Digital Inputs

| 6E | 4 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs

| 6F | 8 Fast Form-C Outputs

| 6G | 4 Form-A Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs

| 6H | 6 Form-A Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs

| 6K | 4 Form-C & 4 Fast Form-C Outputs

Transducer I/O | 5F | 8 dcmA Inputs

CT/VT DSP | 8A | Standard 4CT/4VT

| 8B | Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT

| 8C | Standard 8CT

L60 Inter-Relay Communications | 7Y | 125 V, 20 mA Channel Interface

| 7Z | 5 V, 20 mA Channel Interface

| |L90 Inter-Relay Communications | 7A | 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel

| 7B | 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel

| 7C | 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel

| 7D | 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel

| 7H | 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels

| 7I | 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels

| 7J | 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels

| 7K | 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels

| 7R | G.703, 1 Channel

| 7S | G.703, 2 Channels

| 7T | RS422, 1 Channel

| 7W | RS422, 2 Channels




2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2

2.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

2.2.1 PROTECTION ELEMENTS

PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND TOCCurrent: Phasor or RMS

Pickup Level: 0.000 pu to 30.000 pu in steps of0.001 pu

Dropout Level: 97% to 98% of Pickup

Level Accuracy: ± 0.75% of reading or ± 1% of rated(whichever is greater)from 0.1 to 2.0 x CT rating± 1.5% of reading > 2.0 x CT rating

Curve Shapes: IEEE Moderately/Very/ExtremelyInverseIEC (and B.S.) A/B/C and ShortInverseGE IAC Inverse, Short/Very/Extremely InverseI2tFlexCurve™ (Programmable)Definite Time (0.01s base curve)

Curve Multiplier: Time Dial = 0.00 to 600.00 in stepsof 0.01

Reset Type: Instantaneous/Timed (per IEEE)

Timing Accuracy: Operate @ > 1.03 x Actual Pickup± 3.5% of operate time or ± 4 ms(whichever is greater)

PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND IOCCurrent: Phasor only




Overreach: < 2 %

Pickup Delay: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 s

Reset Delay: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 s

Operate Time: < 20 ms @ 3 x Pickup @ 60Hz

Timing Accuracy: Operate @ 1.5 x Pickup± 3% or ± 4 ms(whichever is greater)

NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOCCurrent: Phasor




Curve Shapes: IEEE Moderately/Very/ExtremelyInverseIEC (and B.S.) A/B/C and ShortInverseGE IAC Inverse, Short/Very/Extremely InverseI2tFlexCurve™ (Programmable)Definite Time (0.01s base curve)


Reset Type: Instantaneous/Timed (per IEEE)

Timing Accuracy: Operate @ > 1.03 x Actual Pickup± 3.5% of operate time or ± 4 ms(whichever is greater)

NEGATIVE SEQUENCE IOCCurrent: Phasor




Overreach: < 2 %


Reset Delay: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 s

Operate Time: < 20 ms @ 3 x Pickup @ 60Hz

Timing Accuracy: Operate @ 1.5 x Pickup± 3% or ± 4 ms(whichever is greater)




2.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2

PHASE DIRECTIONALRelay Connection: 90° (quadrature)

Quadrature Voltage: ABC Phase Sequence: Phase A(VBC), Phase B (VCA), Phase C(VAB).

ACB Phase Sequence: Phase A(VCB), Phase B (VAC), Phase C(VBA).

Polarizing Voltage Threshold:

0.000 to 3.000 in steps of 0.001 pu

Current Sensitivity Threshold:

0.05 pu

Element Characteristic Angle (ECA):

0 to 359° in steps of 1°Angle Accuracy: ±1°Operation Delay: < 25 ms

NEUTRAL DIRECTIONALPolarization: Voltage (source VTs must be con-

nected in Wye), Current, or Dual

Polarizing Voltage: 3V_0*1∠ECA

Polarizing Current: IG

Polarizing Voltage Threshold:

0.000 to 3.000 in steps of 0.001 pu

Element Characteristic Angle (ECA):

0 to 359° in steps of 1°Angle Accuracy: ±1°Operation Delay: < 25 ms

BREAKER FAILURE - PHASE/NEUTRAL AMPCurrent: Phasor only




Overreach: < 2 %

Operate Time < 20 ms @ 3 x Pickup @ 60Hz

PHASE UNDERVOLTAGEVoltage: Phasor only


Dropout Level: 102 to 103 % of Pickup

Level Accuracy: ± 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V

Curve Shapes: GE IAV InverseDefinite Time (0.1s base curve)


Timing Accuracy: Operate @ < 0.90 x Pickup± 3.5% of operate time or ± 4 ms(whichever is greater)

PHASE OVERVOLTAGEVoltage: Phasor only


Dropout Level: 97 to 98 % of Pickup

Level Accuracy: ± 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V


Operate Time: <30 ms @ 1.10 x Pickup @ 60 Hz

Timing Accuracy: ± 3% or ± 4 ms (whichever isgreater)

UNDERFREQUENCYMinimum Signal: 0.00 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01 pu

Pickup Levels (6): 20.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01Hz

Dropout Level: Pickup + 0.03 Hz

Operate Time: At 3% beyond Pickup = 30-50 ms @50 Hz; 36-60 ms @ 50 Hz

Level Accuracy: ± 0.01 Hz

Time Delay: 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 s

Timer Accuracy: ± 3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater

SYNCHROCHECKMax Volt Difference: 0 to 100,000 V in steps of 1 V

Max Angle Difference: 0 to 100° in steps of 1°Max Freq Difference: 0.00 to 2.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz

Dead Source Function:None, LV1 & DV2, DV1 & LV2, DV1or DV2, DV1 Xor DV2, DV1 & DV2

AUTORECLOSURESingle breaker applications.

Up to 4 reclose attempts before lockout.

Independent dead time setting before each shot.

Possibility of changing protection settings after each shot,using FlexLogic™.





2

2.2.2 MONITORING

OSCILLOGRAPHYRecords: 1 to 64 (configurable)

Sampling Rate: 64 samples per power frequencycycle

Triggers: Any element pickup, dropout oroperateDigital input change of stateDigital output change of stateFlexLogic™ equation

Data: AC input channelsElement stateDigital input stateDigital output state

EVENT RECORDERCapacity: 1024 events

Time-tag: To 1 microsecond

Triggers: Any element pickup, dropout oroperateDigital input change of stateDigital output change of stateSelf-test events

2.2.3 METERING

RMS CURRENT - Phase, Neutral and GroundAccuracy: ± 0.25% of reading or ± 0.1% of

rated (whichever is greater)from 0.1 to 2.0 x CT rating± 1.0% of reading@ > 2.0 x CT rating

RMS VOLTAGEAccuracy: ± 0.25% of reading from 10 to 208 V

APPARENT POWER VAAccuracy: ± 1.0% of reading

REAL POWER WATTAccuracy: ± 1.0% of reading

@ PF between ± 0.8 and 1.0

REACTIVE POWER varAccuracy: ± 1.0% of reading

@ PF between ± 0.2 and 0.0

POWER FACTORAccuracy: ± 0.02

2.2.4 INPUTS

AC CURRENTCT Rated Primary: 1 to 50 000 A

CT Rated Secondary: 1 A or 5 A by connection

Frequency Range: 20 to 65 Hz

Relay Burden: < 0.2 VA @ rated secondary

Conversion Range: 0.01 to 46 x CT rating RMS sym-metrical

Current Withstand: 20 ms @ 250 times rated1 sec. @ 100 times ratedCont. @ 3 times rated

AC VOLTAGEVT Rated Secondary: 50.0 to 240.0 V

VT Ratio: 0.1 to 24000.0

Frequency Range: 20 to 65 Hz

Relay Burden: < 0.25 VA @ 120 V

Conversion Range: 1 to 275 V

Voltage Withstand: Cont. @ 260 V to neutral1 Min./Hr @ 420 V to neutral

CONTACT INPUTSDry Contacts: 1000 Ω Maximum

Wet Contacts: 300 VDC Maximum

Selectable Thresholds: 16 V, 30 V, 80 V, 140 V

Recognition Time: < 5 ms

IRIG-B INPUTAmplitude Modulation:1 to 10 Vp-p

DC Shift: TTL

Input Impedance: 22 kOhms

DCMA INPUTSCurrent Input (mAdc): 0 to -1, 0 to +1, - 1 to + 1, 0 to 5, 0 to

10, 0 to 20, 4 to 20 (programmable)

Input Impedance: 379 Ω ± 10%Conversion Range: - 1 to + 20 mAdc

Accuracy: ± 0.2% of full scale

Type: Passive





2

2.2.5 POWER SUPPLY

LOW RANGENominal DC Voltage: 48

Min./Max. DC Voltage:36 / 60

HIGH RANGENominal DC Voltage: 125 - 250 @ 0.7 A

Min./Max. DC Voltage:88 / 300

Nominal AC Voltage: 100 - 240 @ 50/60 Hz, 0.7 A

Min./Max. AC Voltage: 88 / 265 @ 48-62 Hz

ALL RANGESVolt Withstand: 2 x Highest Nominal Voltage

for 10 ms

Voltage Loss Hold-Up: 100 ms duration

Power Consumption: Typical = 35 VA

Max. = 60 VA

INTERNAL FUSE (Fast-acting)RATINGS

Low Range Power Supply:7.5A/600V

High Range Power Supply:5A/600V

INTERRUPTING CAPACITY

AC: 100,000 A RMS symmetrical

DC: 10,000 A

2.2.6 OUTPUTS

FORM-A RELAY

Make and Carry for

0.2 sec: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90

Carry Continuous: 6 A

Break @ L/R of

40 ms: 0.25 ADC max.

Operate Time: < 4 ms

Contact Material: Silver alloy

FORM-A VOLTAGE MONITOR

Applicable Voltage: Approx. 15 - 250 VDC

Trickle Current: Approx. 1 - 2.5 mA

FORM-A CURRENT MONITOR

Applicable Current: Approx. 80 - 100 mA

FORM-C AND CRITICAL FAILURE RELAYMake and Carry for

0.2 sec: 10 A

Carry Continuous: 6 A

Break @ L/R of

40 ms: 0.1 ADC max.

Operate Time: < 8 ms

Contact Material: Silver alloy

FAST FORM-C RELAYMake and Carry: 40 mA @ 48 VDC

Operate Time: < 0.6 ms

INTERNAL LIMITING RESISTOR

Power: 2 Watts

Resistance: 100 ohms

CONTROL POWER EXTERNAL OUTPUT(for Dry Contact Input)Capacity: 100 mA DC @ 48 VDC

Isolation: ± 300 Vpk


RS232Front Port: 19.2 kbps, Modbus® RTU

RS4851 or 2 Rear Ports: up to 115 kbps, Modbus® RTU,

Isolated together @ 36 Vpk

Typical Distance: 1200 m

ETHERNET PORT10BaseF: MMS/UCA2 and ModBus TCP/IP

820 nm, multi-mode, fiber optic withST connector

Redundant 10BaseF: MMS/UCA2 and ModBus TCP/IP

Power Budget: 10 db

Max Optical Ip Power: -7.7 dBm

Typical Distance: 1.65 km





2

2.2.8 ENVIRONMENTAL

Operating Temperatures:

-10° C to +60° C

Ambient StorageTemperatures:

-40° C to +80° C

Humidity (noncondensing):

Up to 95%

Altitude: Up to 2000 m

Installation Category: II

2.2.9 TYPE TESTS

Electrical Fast Transient:ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1EN 61000-4-4

Oscillatory Transient: ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1

Insulation Resistance: IEC 255-5

Dielectric Strength: IEC 255-6, Series C 2240VANSI/IEEE C37.90

Electrostatic Discharge:EN 61000-4-2

Surge Immunity: EN 61000-4-5

RFI Susceptibility: ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2EN 61000-4-3

Note: Type test report available upon request.

2.2.10 PRODUCTION TESTS

DIELECTRIC STRENGTHANSI/IEEE C37.90:

AC: CT, VT, Control Power & ContactInputs

DC: Contact Outputs

2.2.11 APPROVALS

APPROVALSUL Certification applied for.

CSA Certification applied for.

Manufactured under an ISO9001Registered system.

2.2.12 MAINTENANCE

CLEANING

Normally, cleaning is not required; but for situationswhere dust has accumulated on the faceplate dis-play, a dry cloth can be used.





2




3 HARDWARE 3.1 DESCRIPTIONS

3

3 HARDWARE 3.1 DESCRIPTIONS 3.1.1 PANEL CUTOUT

The relay is a 4RU, 19 inch rack configuration with a removable faceplate for switchgear mounting. The modu-lar design allows the relay to be easily upgraded or repaired by a qualified service person. The faceplate ishinged to allow easy access to the removable modules or removable for mounting on doors with limited reardepth. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the faceplate and must be removed when attemptingto access the keypad or RS232 communications port.

Case dimensions are as shown in Figure 3–1: UR RELAY MOUNTING AND DIMENSIONS DRAWING, alongwith panel cutout details for panel mounting. When planning the location of your panel cutout, ensure that pro-vision is made for the faceplate (17.75 inches wide) to swing open without interference to or from adjacentequipment.

The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate sits semi-flush with the panel or switchgear door, allowingthe operator access to the keypad and the RS232 communications port. The relay is secured to the panel withthe use of four screws supplied with the relay.

Figure 3–1: UR RELAY MOUNTING AND DIMENSIONS DRAWING




3.1 DESCRIPTIONS 3 HARDWARE

3

3.1.2 MODULE WITHDRAWAL / INSERTION

The relay, being modular in design, allows for the withdrawal and insertion of modules. Modules must only bereplaced with like modules in their original factory configured slots.

The faceplate can be opened to the left, once the sliding latch on the right side has been pushed up, as shownin the figure below. This allows for easy accessibility of the modules for withdrawal.

Figure 3–2: UR MODULE WITHDRAWAL/INSERTION

WITHDRAWAL : The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module, must be pulledsimultaneously in order to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power mustbe removed from the relay . The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that thesame or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot. Modules with current input provide automaticshorting of external CT circuits.

INSERTION: Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position. Theejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position asthe module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis,engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.

WARNING: Module withdrawal and insertion may only be performed when control power hasbeen removed from the unit. Inserting an incorrect module type into a slot mayresult in personal injury, damage to the unit or connected equipment, or undesiredoperation!

WARNING: Proper electrostatic discharge protection (i.e. static strap) must be used when com-ing in contact with modules while the relay is energized!




3 HARDWARE 3.1 DESCRIPTIONS

3

3.1.3 REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT

Figure 3–3: REAR TERMINAL VIEW

WARNING: Do not touch any rear terminals while the relay is energized!




3.1 DESCRIPTIONS 3 HARDWARE

3

3.1.4 REAR TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS

The relay follows a convention with respect to terminal number assignments which are three characters longassigned in order by module slot position, row number, and column letter. Two-slot wide modules take their slotdesignation from the first slot position (nearest to CPU module) which is indicated by an arrow marker on theterminal block.

Figure 3–4: EXAMPLE OF DSP & DIGITAL I/O MODULES IN F & H SLOTS




3 HARDWARE 3.2 WIRING

3

3.2 WIRING 3.2.1 TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM

Figure 3–5: TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM

9A

COM

COM

CP

U

D3b

D4b

D5b

D2a

D3a

D4a

D5a

D6a

D7b

RS485

COM 1

RS485

COM 2

IRIG-B

SURGE

8A / 8B

FFFFFFFF

8c

8a

5a

5c

7c

6a

7a

6c

VX

VA

VB

VC

CIRCUIT 1VOLTAGE INPUTS

VX

VA

VB

VC

1c

4a

FFFFFFFFFFFF

3c

CIRCUIT 1CURRENT INPUTS

2c

4c

1a

4b

1b

2a

3a

2b

3b

IA IB IC IG

IA5

IA1

IB5

IC5

IG5

IB1

IC1

IG1

FFFFFF5

a

5c

7c

6a

7a

6c

VA

VB

VC

CIRCUIT 1VOLTAGE INPUTS

VA

VB

VC

CONNECTION

AS REQUIRED

Ground at

Remote

Device

Shielded

twisted pairs

Co-axial

832710AY.CDR

(Rear View)

1

Power

Supply

9

CPU

8

CT/VT

6

I/O

6

I/O

*

6

I/O

*

6

I/O

*

6

I/O

*

MODULE ARRANGEMENT

JU MX LW KV BHT DN GS P FR

OPEN DELTA

VT CONNECTION (ABC)

A B CPOSITIVE WATTS

(5 Amp CT)

TYPICAL CONFIGURATIONTHE AC SIGNAL PATH IS CONFIGURABLE

52

CONTACTS SHOWN

WITH NO

CONTROL POWER

I

V

I

V

CONTACT IN 7a

CONTACT IN 7c

CONTACT IN 8a

CONTACT IN 8c

COMMON 7b

DIGITAL I/O 6B

1b

2b

3b

4b

5b

6b

1a

2a

3a

4a

5a

6a

1c

2c

3c

4c

5c

6c

1

5

2

6

3

4

8a

7b

7aH

H

H H

H

HH

H

H HH

H

H

H

H H

HH

H

H

H

H H

H

HH

HH

H

H HH

H

H

H

8c

7c

SURGE8b

CRITICAL

FAILURE

48 VDC

OUTPUT

CONTROL

POWER

HI

LO

PO

WE

RS

UP

PLY

1

FILTER

SURGE

3a

1b

8a

6b

8b

6a

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

3b

1a

2b

5b

TC

TC

2

1

VO

LT

AG

ES

UP

V.

VO

LT

&

CU

RR

EN

TS

UP

V.

RS-232

DB-9

(front)

UR COMPUTER

1

TXD RXD

RXD TXD

SGND SGND

1 8

3

2

20

7

6

4

5

22

25 PIN

CONNECTOR9 PIN

CONNECTOR

2 2

3 3

4 4

5 5

6 6

7 7

8 8

9 9

®F60 FEEDER MANAGEMENT RELAY

GE Power Management

No. 10AWG

Minimum

GROUND

BUS

AC or DC

DC

(D

CO

NLY

)

7a

1a

2b

7c

1c

7b

1b

8c

M

MM

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

8b

2c

8a

2a

4a

5b

4c

6b

3b

3a

6a

4b

5c

5a

3c

6c

6K

DIG

ITA

LI/

O

1

5

2

6

3

7

4

8

* Optional

6C

DIG

ITA

LI/

O

1

5

2

6

3

7

4

8

7a

1a

2b

7c

1c

7b

1b

8c

P

PP

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

8b

2c

8a

2a

4a

5b

4c

6b

3b

3a

6a

4b

5c

5a

3c

6c

6a

8a

5b

7b

5a

7a

6c

8c

5c

7c

CONTACT IN 1a

CONTACT IN 4c

COMMON 5b

COMMON 7b

COMMON 1b

COMMON 3b

CONTACT IN 2a

CONTACT IN 5a

CONTACT IN 3c

CONTACT IN 6a

CONTACT IN 8a

CONTACT IN 1c

CONTACT IN 3a

CONTACT IN 5c

CONTACT IN 7c

CONTACT IN 7a

CONTACT IN 2c

SURGE

CONTACT IN 4a

CONTACT IN 6c

CONTACT IN 8c

1a

8b

4c

2c

3a

3c

1c

3b

1b

4a

2a

6D

DIG

ITA

LI/

O

U

U U

U U

U U

U U

U U

U U

U U

U U

U U

U U

U U

U U

U U

U U

U U

U U

U U

U U

U U

U

U

CONTACT IN 5a

CONTACT IN 7a

CONTACT IN 5c

CONTACT IN 7c

CONTACT IN 6a

CONTACT IN 8a

CONTACT IN 6c

CONTACT IN 8c

COMMON 5b

COMMON 7b

SURGE

6a

8a

5b

7b

8b

5aW

W

W

W

W

W

W

W

W

W

W

W

W

W

W

W

W

W

W

W

W

W

WW

W

W

W

W

W

W

W

W

W

W

W

W

W

7a

6c

8c

5c

7c

6A

1

2

3

4

1a

2b

1c

1b

2c

2a

4a

4c

3b

3a

4b

3c

DIGITAL I/O I

V

I

V




3.2 WIRING 3 HARDWARE

3

3.2.2 CONTROL POWER

The power supply module of the relay can be ordered with either of two possible voltage ranges. Each rangehas a dedicated input connection for proper operation. The ranges are as shown below (see the TechnicalSpecifications section for details):

The power supply module provides power to the relay and supplies power for dry contact input connections.

Figure 3–6: CONTROL POWER CONNECTION

The power supply module provides 48 VDC power for dry contact input connections and a critical failure relay.(See figure: TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM). The critical failure relay is a Form-C that will be energized oncecontrol power is applied and the relay has successfully booted up with no critical self-test failures. If any of theon-going self-test features detect a critical failure or control power is lost, the relay will de-energize.

CAUTION: CONTROL POWER SUPPLIED TO THE RELAY MUST BE CONNECTED TO THEMATCHING POWER SUPPLY RANGE OF THE RELAY. IF THE VOLTAGE IS APPLIEDTO THE WRONG TERMINALS, DAMAGE MAY OCCUR.

Table 3–1: CONTROL POWER VOLTAGE RANGE

Range Nominal Voltage

LO 48 V

HI 125/250 V





3

3.2.3 AC CURRENT TRANSFORMER INPUTS

The CT/VT module may be ordered with a standard ground current input that is the same as the phase currentinputs (type 8A) or with a sensitive ground input (type 8B) which is 10 times more sensitive (see the Technical-Specifications section for more details). Each AC current input has an isolating transformer and an automaticshorting mechanism that shorts the input when the module is withdrawn from the chassis. There are no internalground connections on the current inputs. Current transformers with 1 to 50000 A primaries and 1A or 5A sec-ondaries may be used.

CT connections for both ABC and ACB phase rotations are identical, as shown in figure: TYPICAL WIRINGDIAGRAM.

The exact placement of a zero sequence CT, so that ground fault current will be detected, is shown below.Twisted pair cabling on the zero sequence CT is recommended.

Figure 3–7: ZERO SEQUENCE CORE BALANCE CT INSTALLATION

CAUTION: VERIFY THAT THE CONNECTION MADE TO THE RELAY NOMINAL CURRENT OF1A OR 5A MATCHES THE SECONDARY RATING OF THE CONNECTED CTS.UNMATCHED CTS MAY RESULT IN EQUIPMENT DAMAGE OR INADEQUATE PRO-TECTION.





3

3.2.4 CT/VT MODULE ASSIGNMENTS

Figure 3–8: CT/VT MODULE WIRING

NOTE: Wherever a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute with the Slot Position of the module.

1c

4a

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

8c

8a

3c

5a

5c

7c

CIRCUIT ~CURRENT INPUTS

6a

7a

6c

2c

VX

VA

VB

VC

4c

1a

4b

1b

2a

3a

2b

3b

CIRCUIT ~VOLTAGE INPUTS

8A / 8B

VX

VA

VB

VC IA IB IC IG

IA5

IA1

IB5

IC5

IG5

IB1

IC1

IG1

CTVTMDL.cdr(P/O 827719c2.cdr)





3

3.2.5 CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS

Every digital I/O module has a total of 24 terminal connections. They are arranged as 3 terminals per row, witha total of 8 rows. A given row of three terminals may be used for the outputs of one relay. For example, forForm-C relay outputs, the terminals connect to the normally open (NO), normally closed (NC), and commoncontacts of the relay. For a Form-A output, two of the terminals are used for the NO output and the third is usedfor current detection for supervision features. The configuration of the terminals for contact inputs is different.When a digital I/O module is ordered with contact inputs, they are arranged in groups of four and use two rowsof three terminals. Ideally, each input would be totally isolated from any other input. This would howeverrequire that every input have two dedicated terminals and limit the available number of contacts based on theavailable number of terminals. So, although each input is individually optically isolated, each group of fourinputs uses a single common as a reasonable compromise. This allows each group of four outputs to be sup-plied by wet contacts from different voltage sources (if required) or a mix of wet and dry contacts.

The tables below illustrate the module types (6A, etc.) and contact arrangements that may be ordered for therelay. Since an entire row is used for a single contact output, the name is assigned using the module slot posi-tion and row number. However, since there are two contact inputs per row, these names are assigned by mod-ule slot position, row number, and column position.

NOTE: Use of FORM-A Relay Outputs in High Impedance Circuits -

The Form-A output contacts are internally equipped with a voltage measuring cIrcuit across the contact. Thiscircuit has an impedance that can cause a problem when used in conjuction with external high input imped-ance monitoring equipment such as modern relay test set trigger circuits. These moniroring circuits may con-tinue to read the Form-A contact as being closed after it has closed and subsequently opened when measuredas an impedance.

The solution to this problem is to use the voltage measuring trigger input of the relay test set, and connect theForm-A contact through a voltage-dropping resistor to a DC voltage source. If the 48 VDC output of the powersupply is used as a source, a 500 Ohm x 10 Watt resistor is appropriate. In this configuration, the voltageacross either the Form-A contact or the resistor can be used to monitor the state of the output.


Table 3–2: DIGITAL I/O MODULE ASSIGNMENTS

~6A I/O MODULE ~6B I/O MODULE ~6C I/O MODULE

TerminalAssignment

Output orInput

TerminalAssignment

Output orInput

TerminalAssignment

Output

~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-C

~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-C

~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C

~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C

~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-C ~5 Form-C

~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-C ~6 Form-C

~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7 Form-C

~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8 Form-C





3

~6D I/O MODULE ~6E I/O MODULE

TerminalAssignment

Input TerminalAssignment

Output orInput

~1a, ~1c 2 Inputs ~1 Form-C




~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs




~6F I/O MODULE ~6G I/O MODULE ~6H I/O MODULE

TerminalAssignment

Output TerminalAssignment

Output orInput

TerminalAssignment

Output orInput

~1 Fast Form-C ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A




~5 Fast Form-C ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-A

~6 Fast Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-A

~7 Fast Form-C ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs

~8 Fast Form-C ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs

~6K I/O MODULE

TerminalAssignment

Output

~1 Form-C~2 Form-C~3 Form-C~4 Form-C~5 Fast Form-C~6 Fast Form-C~7 Fast Form-C~8 Fast Form-C





3

Figure 3–9: DIGITAL I/O MODULE WIRING ( Sheet 1 of 2 )

CONTACT IN 5a

CONTACT IN 5c

CONTACT IN 6a

CONTACT IN 6c

COMMON 5b

CONTACT IN 7a

CONTACT IN 7c

CONTACT IN 8a

CONTACT IN 8c

COMMON 7b

SURGE

6a

8a

5b

7b

8b

5a~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

7a

6c

8c

5c

7c

1a

2b

1c

1b

2c

2a

4a

4c

3b

3a

4b

3c

1

2

3

4

DIGITAL I/O 6E

I

V

I

V

CONTACT IN 7a

CONTACT IN 7c

CONTACT IN 8a

CONTACT IN 8c

COMMON 7b

DIGITAL I/O 6B

1b

2b

3b

4b

5b

6b

1a

2a

3a

4a

5a

6a

1c

2c

3c

4c

5c

6c

1

5

2

6

3

4

8a

7b

7a~

~ ~ ~~

~

~

~ ~ ~

~~

~

~

~ ~ ~

~

~~

~~

~ ~ ~~

~

~

~

~

~ ~

~

~~

8c

7c

SURGE8b

6C

DIG

ITA

LI/

O

1

5

2

6

3

7

4

8

7a

1a

2b

7c

1c

7b

1b

8c

~

~~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

8b

2c

8a

2a

4a

5b

4c

6b

3b

3a

6a

4b

5c

5a

3c

6c

6a

8a

5b

7b

5a

7a

6c

8c

5c

7c

CONTACT IN 1a

CONTACT IN 4c

COMMON 5b

COMMON 7b

COMMON 1b

COMMON 3b

CONTACT IN 2a

CONTACT IN 5a

CONTACT IN 3c

CONTACT IN 6a

CONTACT IN 8a

CONTACT IN 1c

CONTACT IN 3a

CONTACT IN 5c

CONTACT IN 7c

CONTACT IN 7a

CONTACT IN 2c

SURGE

CONTACT IN 4a

CONTACT IN 6c

CONTACT IN 8c

1a

8b

4c

2c

3a

3c

1c

3b

1b

4a

2a

6D

DIG

ITA

LI/

O

~

~ ~

~ ~

~ ~

~ ~

~ ~

~ ~

~ ~

~ ~

~ ~

~ ~

~ ~

~ ~

~ ~

~ ~

~ ~

~ ~

~ ~

~ ~

~ ~

~

~

CONTACT IN 5a

CONTACT IN 7a

CONTACT IN 5c

CONTACT IN 7c

CONTACT IN 6a

CONTACT IN 8a

CONTACT IN 6c

CONTACT IN 8c

COMMON 5b

COMMON 7b

SURGE

6a

8a

5b

7b

8b

5a~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

7a

6c

8c

5c

7c

6A

1

2

3

4

1a

2b

1c

1b

2c

2a

4a

4c

3b

3a

4b

3c

DIGITAL I/O I

V

I

V

IOMODULE.CDR(P/O 827719C2.CDR)





3

Figure 3–10: DIGITAL I/O MODULE WIRING ( Sheet 2 of 2 )





3

A dry contact has one side connected to terminal B3b. This is the positive 48 VDC voltage rail supplied by thepower supply module. The other side of the dry contact is connected to the required contact input terminal.Each contact input group has its own common (negative) terminal which must be connected to the DC nega-tive terminal (B3a) of the power supply module. When a dry contact closes, a current of 1 to 3 mA will flowthrough the associated circuit.

A wet contact has one side connected to the positive terminal of an external DC power supply. The other sideof this contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. In addition, the negative side of the externalsource must be connected to the relay common (negative) terminal of each contact input group. The maximumexternal source voltage for this arrangement is 300 VDC.

The voltage threshold at which each group of four contact inputs will detect a closed contact input is program-mable as 16 VDC for 24 Volt sources, 30 VDC for 48 Volt sources, 80 VDC for 110-125 Volt sources, and 140VDC for 250 Volt sources.

Figure 3–11: DRY AND WET CONTACT INPUT CONNECTIONS


Contact outputs may be ordered as Form-A or Form-C. The Form A contacts may be connected for externalcircuit supervision. These contacts are provided with voltage and current monitoring circuits used to detect theloss of DC voltage in the circuit, and the presence of DC current flowing through the contacts when the Form-Acontact closes. If enabled, the current monitoring can be used as a seal-in signal to ensure that the Form-Acontact does not attempt to break the energized inductive coil circuit and weld the output contacts.

CAUTION: CORRECT POLARITY MUST BE OBSERVED FOR ALL CONTACT INPUT CONNEC-TIONS OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE MAY RESULT.





3

3.2.6 TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS

Transducer input/output modules can receive input signals from external dcmA output transducers (DCMAINPUT) or resistance temperature detectors (RTD INPUT). Hardware and software is provided to receive sig-nals from these external transducers and convert these signals into a digital format for use as required.

Every transducer input/output module has a total of 24 terminal connections. These connections are arrangedas three terminals per row with a total of eight rows. A given row may be used for either inputs or outputs, withterminals in column "a" having positive polarity and terminals in column "c" having negative polarity. Since anentire row is used for a single input/output channel, the name of the channel is assigned using the module slotposition and row number.

Each module also requires that a connection from an external ground bus be made to terminal 8b.

The figure below illustrates the transducer module types (5F, etc.) and channel arrangements that may beordered for the relay.


Figure 3–12: TRANSDUCER I/O MODULE WIRING





3

3.2.7 RS232 FACEPLATE PROGRAM PORT

A 9 pin RS232C serial port is located on the relay’s faceplate for programming with a portable (personal) com-puter. All that is required to use this interface is a personal computer running the URPC software provided withthe relay. Cabling for the RS232 port is shown in the following figure for both 9 pin and 25 pin connectors.

Note that the baud rate for this port is fixed at 19200 bps .

Figure 3–13: RS232 FACEPLATE PORT CONNECTION





3

3.2.8 CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS

In addition to the RS232 port on the faceplate, the relay provides the user with two additional communicationport(s) depending on the CPU module installed.

Figure 3–14: CPU MODULE COMMUNICATIONS WIRING

a) RS485 PORTS

RS485 data transmission and reception are accomplished over a single twisted pair with transmit and receivedata alternating over the same two wires. Through the use of these port(s), continuous monitoring and controlfrom a remote computer, SCADA system or PLC is possible.

To minimize errors from noise, the use of shielded twisted pair wire is recommended. Correct polarity must alsobe observed. For instance, the relays must be connected with all RS485 “+” terminals connected together, andall RS485 “-” terminals connected together. The COM terminal should be connected to the common wire insidethe shield, when provided. To avoid loop currents, the shield should be grounded at one point only. Each relayshould also be daisy chained to the next one in the link. A maximum of 32 relays can be connected in this man-ner without exceeding driver capability. For larger systems, additional serial channels must be added. It is alsopossible to use commercially available repeaters to increase the number of relays on a single channel to morethan 32. Star or stub connections should be avoided entirely.

Lightning strikes and ground surge currents can cause large momentary voltage differences between remoteends of the communication link. For this reason, surge protection devices are internally provided at both com-munication ports. An isolated power supply with an opto-coupled data interface also acts to reduce noise cou-pling. To ensure maximum reliability, all equipment should have similar transient protection devices installed.

Both ends of the RS485 circuit should also be terminated with an impedance as shown in the figure: RS485SERIAL CONNECTION.

Table 3–3: CPU COMMUNICATION PORT OPTIONS

CPU Type COM 1 COM 2

9A RS485 RS485

9C 10BASE-F RS485

9D Redundant 10BASE-F RS485

9A

COM

COM

CP

U

D3b

D4b

D5b

D2a

D3a

D4a

D5a

D6a

D7b

RS485

COM 1

RS485

COM 2

IRIG-B

SURGE SURGE

10BaseT

10BaseF

COM

CP

U9

C

TEST ONLY

NORMAL

RS485

COM 2

IRIG-B

Tx

Rx

D7b

D6a

D4b

D5b

D3b

D5a

COM1

Tx1

Tx2

Rx1

Rx2

SURGE GROUNDD7b

D6a

D4b

D5b

D3b

10BaseT

10BaseF

10BaseF

D5a

COM

CP

U9

D

COM1

TEST ONLY

ALTERNATE

NORMAL

RS485

COM 2

IRIG-B

COMMOD.CDRP/O 827719C2.CDR





3

Figure 3–15: RS485 SERIAL CONNECTION

b) 10BASE-F FIBER OPTIC PORT

The fiber optic communication ports allow for fast and efficient communications between relays at 10 Mbps.Optical fiber may be connected to the relay supporting a wavelength of 820 nanometers in multimode. Opticalfiber is only available for CPU types 9C and 9D. The 9D CPU has a 10BaseF transmitter and receiver for opti-cal fiber communications and a second pair of identical optical fiber transmitter and receiver for redundancy.

The optical fiber sizes supported include 50/125 µm, 62.5/125 µm and 100/140 µm. The fiber optic port isdesigned such that the response times will not vary for any core that is 100 µm or less in diameter. For opticalpower budgeting, splices are required every 1 km for the transmitter/receiver pair (the ST type connector con-tributes for a connector loss of 0.2 dB). When splicing optical fibers, the diameter and numerical aperture ofeach fiber must be the same. In order to engage or disengage the ST type connector, only a quarter turn of thecoupling is required.

CAUTION: ENSURE THE DUST COVERS ARE INSTALLED WHEN THE FIBER IS NOT IN USE.DIRTY OR SCRATCHED CONNECTORS CAN LEAD TO HIGH LOSSES ON A FIBERLINK.

CAUTION: OBSERVING THE TRANSMITTER OUTPUT MAY CAUSE INJURY TO THE EYE.

DATA

SCADA/PLC/COMPUTER

COM

CHASSIS GROUND

DATA

RELAYSHIELD

827757A5.DWG

UP TO 32 DEVICES,

MAXIMUM 4000 FEET

LAST DEVICE

ZT

(*) PAIR

EACH END (TYPICALLY 120 Ohms and 1 nF)

(*) TERMINATING IMPEDANCE AT

TWISTED

ZT

(*)

Required

D2a RS485 +

RS485 -D3a

RS485 PORT

SURGED7b

COMP 485COMD4a

RS485 +D2a

485 -D3a

SURGED7b

COMP 485COMD4a

RELAY

485 +D2a

RELAY

485 -D3a

SURGED7b

COMP 485COMD4a

GROUND SHIELD AT

SCADA/PLC/COMPUTER ONLY

OR AT UR RELAY ONLY

36V





3

3.2.9 IRIG-B

Figure 3–16: IRIG-B CONNECTION

IRIG-B is a standard time code format that allows stamping of events to be synchronized among connecteddevices within 1 millisecond. The IRIG time code formats are serial, width-modulated codes which can beeither DC level shifted or amplitude modulated (AM). Third party equipment is available for generating theIRIG-B signal; this equipment may use a GPS satellite system to obtain the time reference so that devices atdifferent geographic locations can also be synchronized.




4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1 URPC® SOFTWARE INTERFACE

4

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1 URPC® SOFTWARE INTERFACE 4.1.1 GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE

The URPC® software provides a graphical user interface (GUI) as one of two human interfaces to a UR device.The alternate human interface is implemented via the device’s faceplate keypad and display (see FACEPLATEINTERFACE section in this chapter).

The URPC® software program provides users with a single facility to configure, monitor, maintain and trou-ble-shoot the operation of relay functions, connected over local or wide area communication networks.

The URPC® software interface can be used while disconnected (i.e. off-line) or connected (i.e. on-line) to a URdevice. In off-line mode, you can prepare a file of the device’s parameter settings for eventual downloading tothe device. In on-line mode, you can communicate with the device in real-time.

The URPC® software, provided with every UR device, can be run from any computer supporting Microsoft®

Windows® 95, 98, or NT.

The following figure illustrates an example URPC® software screen showing example Site List and SettingsList control bar tree menus, and the URPC® Help window. This chapter provides a summary of the basicURPC® software interface features. The URPC® Help program provides details for getting started and usingthe URPC® software interface.

a) CREATING A SITE LIST

To start using the URPC® program, a Site List must first be created. See the instructions in the URPC Help pro-gram under the topic “Creating a Site List”.

Figure 4–1: EXAMPLE URPC ® SOFTWARE SCREEN




4.1 URPC® SOFTWARE INTERFACE 4 HUMAN INTERFACES

4

4.1.2 URPC® SOFTWARE OVERVIEW

a) ENGAGING A COMMUNICATING DEVICE

You can use the URPC® software interface in on-line mode (relay connected) to directly communicate with aUR relay.

Communicating relays are organized and grouped by communication interfaces and into sites. Sites may con-tain any number of relays selected from the UR product series.

b) USING SETTINGS FILES

The URPC® software interface supports three ways of handling changes to relay settings:

• You can initially use the URPC® software interface in off-line mode (relay disconnected) to create or editrelay settings files for later writing to communicating relays.

• You can use the interface while connected to a communicating relay to directly modify any relay settingsvia relay data view windows, and then save the settings to the relay.

• You can create/edit settings files and then write them to the relay while the interface is connected to therelay.

Settings files are organized on the basis of file names assigned by the user. A settings file contains data per-taining to the following types of relay settings:

• Device Definition

• Product Setup

• System Setup

• FlexLogic

• Grouped Elements

• Control Elements

• Inputs/Outputs

• Testing

Factory default values are supplied and can be restored after any changes.

c) CREATING / EDITING FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATIONS

You can create or edit a FlexLogic™ equation in order to customize the relay. You can subsequently view theautomatically generated logic diagram.

d) VIEWING ACTUAL VALUES

You can view real-time relay data such as input/output status and measured parameters.





4

e) VIEWING TRIGGERED EVENTS

While the interface is in either on-line or off-line mode, you can view and analyze data generated by triggeredspecified parameters, via:

Event Recorder facility

The event recorder captures contextual data associated with the last 1024 events, listed in chronologicalorder from most recent to oldest.

Oscillography facility

The oscillography waveform traces and digital states are used to provide a visual display of power systemand relay operation data captured during specific triggered events.

f) CREATING INTERACTIVE SINGLE LINE DIAGRAMS

The URPC® software provides an icon-based interface facility for designing and monitoring electrical sche-matic diagrams of sites employing UR relays.

g) FILE SUPPORT

• Execution

Any URPC file which is double clicked or opened will launch the application, or provide focus to the alreadyopened application. If the file was a settings file (*.urs) which had been removed from the Settings List treemenu, it will be added back to the Settings List tree menu.

• Drag and Drop

The Site List and Settings List control bar windows are each mutually a drag source and a drop target fordevice-order-code-compatible files or individual menu items. Also, the Settings List control bar window and anyWindows Explorer directory folder are each mutually a file drag source and drop target.

New files which are dropped into the Settings List window are added to the tree which is automatically sortedalphabetically with respect to settings file names.

Files or individual menu items which are dropped in the selected device menu in the Site List window will auto-matically be sent to the on-line communicating device.





4

4.1.3 URPC® SOFTWARE MAIN WINDOW

The URPC® software main window supports the following primary display components:

a. Title bar which shows the pathname of the active data view

b. Main window menu bar

c. Main window tool bar

d. Site List control bar window

e. Settings List control bar window

f. Device data view window(s), with common tool bar

g. Settings File data view window(s), with common tool bar

h. Workspace area with data view tabs

i. Status bar

Figure 4–2: URPC ® SOFTWARE MAIN WINDOW





4

The display components can be re-organized for convenience by using appropriate commands in the:

• View Menu (see section on MAIN WINDOW MENU BAR)

• Pop-up Menus (see section on POP-UP MENUS)

• Window Menu (see section on MAIN WINDOW MENU BAR)

4.1.4 MAIN WINDOW MENU BAR

Figure 4–3: MAIN WINDOW MENU BAR

The above figure shows the complete menu bar. The Edit, Action, and Window menus only appear while adevice or file data view is open.

a) FILE MENU

Provides options for working with event recorder or oscillography files, and active data view plots.

Figure 4–4: FILE MENU

Open : Displays a dialog box for opening a selected device event recorder file (*.EVT) or oscillographyCOMTRADE file (*.CFG).

Save As : Displays a dialog box for saving the active data view file (oscillography or event recorder).

Convert : Converts the active oscillography view COMTRADE file from binary to ASCII format.

Print : Prints a graphical plot of the active data view window.

Print Layout : Displays a dialog box for selecting plotting parameters for graphical output. This command isonly available when an Oscillography or Phasor view is opened.

Print Preview : Displays a window showing a graphical plot of the active data view.

Print Setup : Displays a dialog box for selecting a printer and its properties.





4

Recent Files : Displays a list of up to four of the most recently opened view files. You can select any file tore-open it.

Exit : Closes all open views and shuts down the current session of the URPC software program. The user isprompted to save any unsaved data before the program can shut down.

b) EDIT MENU

Provides the copy action for working within a data view, and edit actions in single line diagram views.

Figure 4–5: EDIT MENU

Copy : Copies the current selection within the active data view to the clipboard memory buffer.

Copy Special : Copies the selection in a bitmap format.

Edit Devices : Used by the Single Line Diagram facility.

Edit Parameters : Used by the Single Line Diagram facility.

c) SITE LIST MENU

Provides options for working with various sites.

Figure 4–6: SITE LIST MENU

Edit Site List : Launches the Edit Site Properties view to allow changing of various options and settings for anysite or device.

Place Device On/Off Line : Toggles the currently selected device on or off line. When the device is off line, onlythe Device Definition information is shown in the Site List device menu tree.

Read Device Settings : Reads all the settings associated with a selected Settings item in the Site List andsaves them to the destination settings file selected in the Select Target File dialog box. The dialog box onlyappears when a specific Settings item is selected.

Print Device Information : Displays a dialog box for selecting any Settings, Targets, and Actual Values from aselected communicating device, for printing in an ASCII format to the currently selected printer.





4

Print Preview Device Information : Displays a dialog box for selecting any Settings, Targets, and Actual Val-ues from a selected communicating device, for print preview.

d) SETTINGS LIST MENU

Provides options for working with various settings files (*.URS).

Figure 4–7: SETTINGS LIST MENU

Add Settings File : Displays a dialog box for selecting an existing settings file which is added to the SettingsList.

New Settings File : Launches the Create New Settings File dialog box for entering parameter data. Createsthe new settings file and adds it to the Settings List.

Remove Settings File : Removes the selected settings file from the Settings List. The file is not removed fromdisk storage.

Edit Settings File Properties : Displays a dialog box for modifying any device definition parameter (e.g. OrderCode, Version) of a selected Settings File.

Check File For Errors :

Provides a table view check of any erroneous definitions between the selected target settings file and the ver-sion of the UR firmware.

Compare File With Defaults :

Provides a difference list of data items resulting from a comparison of the settings file with the factory defaultsdetermined by the relay order code and version.

Compare Settings Files :

Provides a difference list of version data items resulting from a comparison of two settings files. Setting valuedifferences are not compared.

Set To Factory Default Values :

Sets the entire or selected settings back to their factory default values.





4

Write Settings to Device : Displays a dialog box for selecting a device, and for sending to it the contents of aselected settings file.

Print Settings File : Displays a dialog box for selecting a printer and for printing pages of an ASCII listing of thecontents of a selected settings file.

Print Preview Settings File : Displays a window showing an ASCII listing of the contents of a selected settingsfile. This window includes page view and zoom controls, and the print command. The left mouse button zoomcursor is available in this window.

e) VIEW MENU

Provides options for working within the URPC® software program.

Figure 4–8: VIEW MENU

Toolbar : Hides/Shows the main window tool bar.

Status Bar : Hides/Shows the status bar (at the bottom edge).

Workspace Mode : Enables/Disables workspace view tabs.

Site List Control Bar : Hides/Shows the Site List window.

Settings List Control Bar : Hides/Shows the Settings List window.

Language : Selects the program language (currently - English, pending - Spanish).





4

f) ACTION MENU

Provides options for working with various data views. The menu items are enabled/disasbled according to thespecific data view. All of these menu items are also available on each data view window’s tool bar.

Figure 4–9: ACTION MENU

Save Settings : Saves the contents of the active data view to a selected device or file.

Restore Settings : Restores the contents of the active data view to their last saved version.

Default Settings : Resets the contents of the active data view to the factory default values for the associateddevice or file.

Preferences : Launches a preferences dialog box for those data views that support it.

Zoom Out : Restores the previous zoom setting for a data view which supports zooming with the left mousebutton.

Play : Used by the Oscillography facility.

Stop : Used by the Oscillography facility.





4

g) WINDOW MENU

Provides options on how data view windows are viewed and organized.

Figure 4–10: WINDOW MENU

Cascade : Arranges all open data view windows, overlapping one in front of the other.

Tile : Arranges all open data view windows, side by side, for simultaneous viewing on the screen.

Arrange Icons : Arranges the icons of all minimized data view windows onto rows at the bottom of the work-space area.

Close All : Closes all open data view windows.

The bottom section of this menu provides a list of the open data view windows. A checkmark signifies theactive window. Clicking another window entry makes that window the active window. Clicking any minimizedwindow entry will maximize it.

h) HELP MENU

Provides help on a variety of topics.

Figure 4–11: HELP MENU

Contents : Displays the contents of URPC® Help topics for online step-by-step help on various topics.

Search for Help on... : Displays the contents of URPC® Help topics for online step-by-step help on various top-ics.

Internet Link To GE POWER MANAGEMENT : Automatically launches either the Netscape or Microsoft Inter-net Explorer web browser (if installed) and opens the GE Power Management home page. Internet access isrequired for this function.

About URPC... : Displays the current version data for the installed URPC software.





4

4.1.5 POP-UP MENUS

Each of the Site List and Settings List windows supports a pop-up menu which is displayed by clicking the rightmouse button anywhere within the respective window.

The Site List pop-up menu includes a duplicate of the Site List Menu of the main window menu bar. The Set-tings List pop-up menu includes a duplicate of the Settings List Menu of the main window menu bar.

Figure 4–12: SITE LIST POP-UP MENU

Figure 4–13: SETTINGS LIST POP-UP MENU

Both pop-up menus also include the following menu items:

Allow Docking : Toggles allowing/disabling the docking of the corresponding Site/Settings List window. Dis-abling the docking allows the relevant window to be moved and sized anywhere in the main window. Allowingdocking and then moving the window towards the left or right side of the main window, causes the window tosnap into a docked position.





4

Hide : Hides the corresponding Site/Settings List window. You can use the main window View menu to re-dis-play the List window.

Select Item : Launches the data view window corresponding to the selected control bar menu item.

Float In Main Window : Floats the corresponding Site/Settings List window elsewhere in the main window. Dis-ables the Allow Docking command.

4.1.6 MAIN WINDOW TOOL BAR

Figure 4–14: MAIN WINDOW TOOL BAR

Open File : Selects a device event recorder file (*.EVT) or oscillography COMTRADE file (*.CFG).

Print : Allows printing of settings or graphed objects.

Print Preview : Displays an on-screen preview of what will be printed.

Clipboard Copy : Copies your current selection to the clipboard memory buffer.

About : Displays the current version data for the installed URPC® software.

4.1.7 DATA VIEW TOOL BAR

Figure 4–15: DATA VIEW TOOL BAR

Save Settings : Saves the contents of the active data view to a selected device or file.

Restore Settings : Restores the contents of the active data view to their last saved version.

Default Settings : Resets the contents of the active data view to the factory default values for theassociated device or file.

Preferences : Launches a preferences dialog box for those data views that support it.

Zoom Out : Restores the previous zoom setting for a data view which supports zooming with the leftmouse button.





4

About : Displays the current version data for the installed URPC® software.

Status : Provides the communications status. If the URPC® software is able to communicate with thedevice, the open data view window from the Site List menu will display a flashing Green LEDsymbol. If the URPC® software is unable to establish communications, the LED symbol will beflashing in Red.

If opening a data view window from the Settings List menu, the LED symbol will appear Greyand non-flashing.




4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4 HUMAN INTERFACES

4

4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4.2.1 FACEPLATE

The UR faceplate Keypad/Display/LEDs interface is one of two alternate human interfaces supported. Thealternate human interface is implemented via the URPC® software.

The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules. There is also a removable dust coverthat fits over the faceplate which must be removed in order to access the keypad. The following figure showsthe arrangement of the faceplate panels.

Figure 4–16: UR FACEPLATE ARRANGEMENT

4.2.2 LED INDICATORS

a) LED PANEL 1

Figure 4–17: LED PANEL 1

This panel provides several groups of LED indicators, several keys, and a communications port. The RESETkey is used to reset any latched LED indicator or target message, once the condition has been cleared (thereare other methods to reset these latched conditions as described in the SETTINGS \ PRODUCT SETUP \RESETTING section). The USER keys are used by the Breaker Control feature. The RS232 port is intendedfor connection to a portable PC.




4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

4

STATUS INDICATORS:

• IN SERVICE: Indicates that control power is applied; all monitored I/O and internal systems areOK; the relay has been programmed.

• TROUBLE : Indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem.

• TEST MODE: Indicates that the relay is in test mode.

• TRIP: Indicates that an output selected to be a “Trip” type has operated. This indicatoralways latches; the RESET command must be initiated, whenever a “Trip” typeoutput relay has operated, to reset this indicator.

• ALARM : Indicates that an output selected to be an “Alarm” type is currently operated. Thisindicator is never latched.

• PICKUP: Indicates that an element is picked up. This indicator is never latched.

EVENT CAUSE INDICATORS:

These indicate the input type that was involved in a condition detected by an element that is operated or has alatched flag waiting to be reset.

• VOLTAGE : Indicates voltage was involved.

• CURRENT: Indicates current was involved.

• FREQUENCY: Indicates frequency was involved.

• OTHER: Indicates a composite function was involved.

• PHASE A : Indicates phase A was involved.

• PHASE B : Indicates phase B was involved.

• PHASE C: Indicates phase C was involved.

• NEUTRAL/GROUND : Indicates neutral or ground was involved.





4

b) LED PANELS 2 & 3

Figure 4–18: LED PANEL 2 (TEMPLATE)

Figure 4–19: LED PANEL 3 (TEMPLATE)

These panels provide 48 amber LED indicators whose operation is controlled by the user. When shipped fromthe factory, the LEDs on these panels will have been labeled and programmed with defaults to operate appro-priately for each specific type of UR relay. The default settings controlling LED operation can be changed bythe end user; and as well, support for applying a customized label beside every LED is provided.

User customization of LED operation is of maximum benefit in installations where languages other thanEnglish are used to communicate with operators.

Refer to Chapter 5, the ‘PRODUCT SETUP \ USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS’ section, for the settings used toprogram the operation of the LEDs on these panels, and for factory preset LED panel 2 settings.





4

c) CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDs

Custom labeling of an LED-only panel is facilitated by downloading a ‘zip’ file from

http://www.ge.com/indsys/pm/drawings/ur/custmod.zip.

Opening this file will provide templates and instructions for creating appropriate labeling for the LED panel. Thefollowing three figures show the infornation in the downloadable file. The ‘CorelDRAW’ panel-templates pro-vide relative LED locations and located example-text (x) edit boxes. The figure below shows how toinstall/uninstall the custom panel labeling.

Figure 4–20: CUSTOMIZED LED PANEL INSTALLATION

827366A2.CDR

HOW TO INSTALL THE UR CUSTOMIZED DISPLAY

MODULE ON THE FRONT PANEL:

1-Remove the clear LEXAN FRONT COVER (P/N:1502-0014)

2-

3-t

Pop out LED MODULE and/orBLANK MODULE with a screwdriveras the picture shows. (Be careful notto damage the plastic)

First place the left side of the customized module back to the frontpanel frame, hen snap back the right side.

4-Put the clear LEXAN FRONT PANEL back to its place.

Push inand gently liftup the cover.

GROUP 8

GROUP 7

GROUP 6

GROUP 5

GROUP 4

GROUP 3

GROUP 2

GROUP 1

SETTINGS IN USE

LOCKED OUT

IN PROGRESS

DISABLED

ENABLED

RECLOSE

IN SYNCHRONISM

SOURCE 2 LIVE

SOURCE 1 LIVE

SYNCHROCHECK

TROUBLE

CLOSED

OPEN

BREAKER 2

TROUBLE

CLOSED

OPEN

BREAKER 1

F60 FEEDER MANAGEMENT RELAY

PICKUP

ALARM

TRIP

TEST MODE

TROUBLE

IN SERVICE

STATUS

USER 3

USER 2

USER 1

RESET

NEUTRAL/GROUND

PHASE C

PHASE B

PHASE A

OTHER

FREQUENCY

CURRENT

VOLTAGE

EVENT CAUSE

GROUP 8

GROUP 7

GROUP 6

GROUP 5

GROUP 4

GROUP 3

GROUP 2

GROUP 1

SETTINGS IN USE

LOCKED OUT

IN PROGRESS

DISABLED

ENABLED

RECLOSE

IN SYNCHRONISM

SOURCE 2 LIVE

SOURCE 1 LIVE

SYNCHROCHECK

TROUBLE

CLOSED

OPEN

BREAKER 2

TROUBLE

CLOSED

OPEN

BREAKER 1


PICKUP

ALARM

TRIP

TEST MODE

TROUBLE

IN SERVICE

STATUS

USER 3

USER 2

USER 1

RESET

NEUTRAL/GROUND

PHASE C

PHASE B

PHASE A

OTHER

FREQUENCY

CURRENT

VOLTAGE

EVENT CAUSE

GROUP 8

GROUP 7

GROUP 6

GROUP 5

GROUP 4

GROUP 3

GROUP 2

GROUP 1

SETTINGS IN USE

LOCKED OUT

IN PROGRESS

DISABLED

ENABLED

RECLOSE

IN SYNCHRONISM

SOURCE 2 LIVE

SOURCE 1 LIVE

SYNCHROCHECK

TROUBLE

CLOSED

OPEN

BREAKER 2

TROUBLE

CLOSED

OPEN

BREAKER 1


PICKUP

ALARM

TRIP

TEST MODE

TROUBLE

IN SERVICE

STATUS

USER 3

USER 2

USER 1

RESET

NEUTRAL/GROUND

PHASE C

PHASE B

PHASE A

OTHER

FREQUENCY

CURRENT

VOLTAGE

EVENT CAUSE

GROUP 8

GROUP 7

GROUP 6

GROUP 5

GROUP 4

GROUP 3

GROUP 2

GROUP 1

SETTINGS IN USE

LOCKED OUT

IN PROGRESS

DISABLED

ENABLED

RECLOSE

IN SYNCHRONISM

SOURCE 2 LIVE

SOURCE 1 LIVE

SYNCHROCHECK

TROUBLE

CLOSED

OPEN

BREAKER 2

TROUBLE

CLOSED

OPEN

BREAKER 1


PICKUP

ALARM

TRIP

TEST MODE

TROUBLE

IN SERVICE

STATUS

USER 3

USER 2

USER 1

RESET

NEUTRAL/GROUND

PHASE C

PHASE B

PHASE A

OTHER

FREQUENCY

CURRENT

VOLTAGE

EVENT CAUSE

R


( LED MODULE ) ( BLANK MODULE )PICKUP

ALARM

TRIP

TEST MODE

TROUBLE

IN SERVICE

STATUS

USER 3

USER 2

USER 1

RESET

NEUTRAL/GROUND

PHASE C

PHASE B

PHASE A

OTHER

FREQUENCY

CURRENT

VOLTAGE

EVENT CAUSE

R





4

Figure 4–21: LED PANEL CUSTOMIZATION TEMPLATES

TEMPLATE

CU

T

CU

T

CUT

CUT

TEMPLATE

BACKGROUNDTEMPLATE

WITH 3 WINDOWS

CUT OUT

CUT OUT

CUT OUT

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x





4

Figure 4–22: LED PANEL CUSTOMIZATION DETAILED INSTRUCTIONS

827366A2.CDR

Instruction for how to customize the UR Display module

1-From the cut out the updated (Using thecropmarks as a guide).

2-From the paper cut out the andthe .

HOW TO CUT:Transparency film TEMPLATE(S)

White glossy BACKGROUND TEMPLATE3 WINDOWS (Using the cropmarks as a guide)

1-Place the on top of. Line up the led lense’s windows with the cut out

. (Verify that the black outline is facing towards you.)2-Put one of the on top of the . Also make

sure the clear led lense windows and text are properly oriented.3-Snap the clear over the

and templates.

HOW TO ASSEMBLE:BACKGROUND TEMPLATE Custom display module

(P/N:1513-0069) 3WINDOWS

TEMPLATE(S) White glossy paper

Custom module cover (P/N:1502-0015) Customdisplay module (P/N:1513-0069)

YOU NEED:-Access to black and white or color printer (color preferred).-CorelDRAW version 5 or later software package

1 8.5”x11” Transparency film for color laser copies1 8.5”x11” White glossy paper1 Exacto knife1 Ruler1 Custom display module (P/N: 1513-0069)1 Custom module cover (P/N: 1502-0015)

Quantity Material

1-Select pull down menu.2-Select from pull down menu.3-Select the appropriate color printer.4-Press button. On tab for- choose- choose-Press

5-Press

HOW TO PRINT:Print one copy on the .Print one copy on the .

button. On tab for- choose

and-Press

6-And again.

Transparency FilmWhite Glossy paper

Options... LayoutPosition and size:

OKOK

FilePrint

Properties... Page SetupPaper Si e:Or entation: andscape

OK

zi L

Letter

Ce ter image

aintain aspect ratio

n

M

HOW TO EDIT:Add text in place of the Xs on the TEMPLATE(S) with from pulldown menu. Delete the X place holders as required.

E it Text... Te td x

A





4

4.2.3 DISPLAY

Figure 4–23: DISPLAY

All messages are displayed on a 2 x 20 character vacuum fluorescent display to make them visible under poorlighting conditions. Messages are displayed in English and do not require the aid of an instruction manual fordeciphering. While the keypad and display are not actively being used, the display will default to defined mes-sages. Any high priority event driven message will automatically override the default message and appear onthe display.

4.2.4 KEYPAD

Figure 4–24: KEYPAD

Display messages are organized into pages under the main headings, Actual Values, Settings, Commands,and Targets. The key is used to navigate through the main heading pages. Each main heading page isfurther broken down into logical subgroup messages. The MESSAGE keys may be used to navi-gate through the subgroups.

The VALUE keys are used to scroll through variables in the setting programming mode. They will incre-ment and decrement numerical setting values. Alternatively, these values may be entered with the numerickeypad.

The key is used to store altered setting values. The key may be pressed at any time for contextsensitive help messages.

The key is used to initiate, and advance to, the next character in text edit mode or to enter a decimal point.The VALUE keys are used to scroll through alphanumeric values in text edit mode.

MENU

HELP

ESCAPE

ENTER

1

0 . +/-

2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

MESSAGE

VALUE





4

4.2.5 BREAKER CONTROL

UR relays provide a feature to interface with circuit breakers that are associated with the relay. In many casesthe application will monitor the state of the breaker, which can be presented on faceplate LEDs, along with abreaker trouble indication. Breaker operations can be manually initiated from faceplate PUSHBUTTON(USER) keys, or automatically initiated from a FlexLogic™ operand. A setting is provided for a user to assign aname to each breaker; the user-assigned name will be used for the display of related flash messages. Thesefeatures are provided for two breakers; a user may of course use only those portions of the design relevant toa single breaker, which must be breaker No. 1.

The breaker function must be selected to ‘Enable’ to allow the operation of any function in this discussion. Forall of the following discussion it is assumed that breaker functions are Enabled.

a) CONTROL MODE SELECTION & MONITORING

Installations may require that a breaker is operated in the three-pole only mode (3-Pole), or in the one andthree-pole (1-Pole) mode, selected by setting. If the mode is selected as 3-pole, a single input is used to trackthe breaker open or closed position. If the mode is selected as 1-Pole, all three breaker pole states must beinput to the relay. These inputs must be in agreement to indicate the position of the breaker.

For all of the following discussion it is assumed that breaker PUSHBUTTON key control is Enabled.

b) FACEPLATE PUSHBUTTON (USER KEY) CONTROL

After the 30 minute interval during which command functions are permitted after a correct command passwordhas been entered, the user cannot open or close a breaker via the PUSHBUTTON (USER) keys, and the fol-lowing discussions begin from the not-permitted state.

c) CONTROL OF TWO BREAKERS

NOTE: For the following discussion, the symbol “(Name)” is used to represent the variable name thatcan be programmed by the user.

For this application, the relay is connected and programmed for both breaker No. 1 and breaker No. 2. TheUSER 1 key performs the selection of which breaker is to be operated by the USER 2 and USER 3 keys. TheUSER 2 key is used to manually close the breaker and the USER 3 key is used to manually open the breaker.





4

d) CONTROL OF ONE BREAKER

For this application the relay is connected and programmed for breaker No. 1 only. Operation for this applica-tion is identical to that described for two breakers.

BREAKER CONTROL SETUP EXAMPLE:

ENTER COMMANDPASSWORD

This flash message appears when the USER 1, USER 2 or USER 3 key ispressed. The correct COMMAND PASSWORD must be entered within 30minutes.

Press USER 1To Select Breaker

This flash message appears if the correct password is entered within thespecified time period.

This message will be maintained until the USER 1 key is pressed again orthe flash message presentation interval times out.

BKR1-(Name) SELECTDUSER 2=CLS/USER 3=OP

This message is displayed after the USER 1 key is pressed.

Three possible actions can be performed from this state as per (1), (2) and(3) below.

(1)

USER 2 OFF/ONTo Close BKR1-(Name)

If the USER 2 key is pressed, this flash message appears and a 20 secondtimer is initiated. If the USER 2 key is pressed again within the specified timeperiod, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an outputrelay to close breaker No. 1.

(2)

USER 3 OFF/ONTo Open BKR1-(Name)

If the USER 3 key is pressed, this flash message appears and a 20 secondtimer is initiated. If the USER 3 key is pressed again within the specified timeperiod, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an outputrelay to open breaker No. 1.

(3)


If the USER 1 key is pressed, this flash message appears and three possi-ble actions can be performed from this state as per (i), (ii) and (iii) below.

(i)

USER 2 OFF/ONTo Close BKR2-(Name)

If the USER 2 key is pressed, this flash message appears and a 20 secondtimer is initiated. If the USER 2 key is pressed again within the specified timeperiod, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an outputrelay to close breaker No. 2.

(ii)

USER 3 OFF/ONTo Open BKR2-(Name)

If the USER 3 key is pressed, this flash message appears and a 20 secondtimer is initiated. If the USER 3 key is pressed again within the specified timeperiod, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an outputrelay to open breaker No. 2.

(iii)


If the USER 1 key is pressed, this flash message appears and the threepossible actions can be repeated from this state as per (1), (2) and (3)described above.





4

4.2.6 MENUS

a) NAVIGATION

Press the key to display the desired header display page. The header title will flash momentarily andthe header display page will appear on the display. Each press of the key advances through the mainheading pages as illustrated.

b) HIERARCHY

The setting and actual value messages are set up in a hierarchical format. The header display pages are indi-cated by the double scroll bar characters (), while sub-header pages are indicated by a single scroll barcharacter (). The header display pages are at the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header displaypages fall below this level. The MESSAGE and MESSAGE keys are used to move within a group ofheaders, sub-headers, setting values or actual values. Continually pressing the MESSAGE key from aheader display, displays more specific information for the header category. Conversely, continually pressingthe MESSAGE key from a setting value or actual value display will return to the header display.

ACTUAL VALUES SETTINGS COMMANDS TARGETS




No ActiveTargets

Highest Level Lowest Level (Setting Value)


PASSWORD SECURITY







4

EXAMPLE MENU NAVIGATION SCENARIO:


Press the key until the header for the first Actual Values pageappears. This page contains system and relay status information. Repeat-edly press the MESSAGE keys to display the other actual valueheaders.


Press the key until the header for the first page of Settings appears.This page contains settings to configure the relay.


Press the MESSAGE key to move to the next Settings page. This pagecontains settings for system setup. Repeatedly press the MESSAGEkeys to display the other setting headers and then back to the first Settingspage header.

PASSWORD SECURITY

From the Settings page one header (Product Setup), press the MESSAGEkey once to display the first sub-header (Password Security).


Press the MESSAGE key once more and this will display the first settingfor Password Security. Pressing the MESSAGE key repeatedly will dis-play the remaining setting messages for this sub-header.

PASSWORD SECURITY

Press the MESSAGE key once to move back to the first sub-header mes-sage.

DISPLAY PROPERTIES

Pressing the MESSAGE key will display the second setting sub-headerassociated with the Product Setup header.

FLASH MESSAGETIME: 1.0 s

Press the MESSAGE key once more and this will display the first settingfor Display Properties.

DEFAULT MESSAGEINTENSITY: 25 %

To view the remaining settings associated with the Display Properties sub-header, repeatedly press the MESSAGE key. The last message appearsas shown.





4

4.2.7 CHANGING SETTINGS

a) ENTERING NUMERICAL DATA

Each numerical setting has its own minimum, maximum, and increment value associated with it. These param-eters define what values are acceptable for a setting.

Two methods of editing and storing a numerical setting value are available.

• 0 - 9 and (decimal point) - The relay numeric keypad works the same as that of any electronic calcu-lator. A number is entered one digit at a time. The leftmost digit is entered first and the rightmost digit isentered last. Pressing the MESSAGE key or pressing the ESCAPE key, returns the original value to thedisplay.

• VALUE - The VALUE key increments the displayed value by the step value, up to the maxi-mum value allowed. While at the maximum value, pressing the VALUE key again will allow the settingselection to continue upward from the minimum value. The VALUE key decrements the displayed valueby the step value, down to the minimum value. While at the minimum value, pressing the VALUE keyagain will allow the setting selection to continue downward from the maximum value.


For example, select the message PRODUCT SETUP \ DISPLAY PROPER-TIES \ FLASH MESSAGE TIME.

MINIMUM: 0.5MAXIMUM: 10.0

Press the key to view the minimum and maximum values. Press thekey again to view the next context sensitive help message.


As an example, set the flash message time setting to 2.5 seconds. Press theappropriate numeric keys in the sequence ‘2 . 5’. The display message willchange as the digits are being entered.

NEW SETTINGHAS BEEN STORED

Until the key is pressed, editing changes are not registered by therelay. Therefore, press the key to store the new value in memory. Thisflash message will momentarily appear as confirmation of the storing pro-cess. Numerical values which contain decimal places will be rounded-off ifmore decimal place digits are entered than specified by the step value.





4

b) ENTERING ENUMERATION DATA

Enumeration settings have data values which are part of a set, whose members are explicitly defined by aname. A set is comprised of two or more members.

Enumeration type values are changed using the VALUE keys. The VALUE key displays the nextselection while the VALUE key displays the previous selection.

c) ENTERING ALPHANUMERIC TEXT

Text settings have data values which are fixed in length, but user-defined in character. They may be comprisedof upper case letters, lower case letters, numerals, and a selection of special characters.

In order to allow the relay to be customized for specific applications, there are several places where text mes-sages may be programmed. One example is the MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD. To enter alphanumeric text mes-sages, the following procedure should be followed:

Example: to enter the text, “Breaker #1”

1. Press to enter text edit mode.

2. Press the VALUE or VALUE key until the character 'B' appears; press to advance the cursor tothe next position.

3. Repeat step 2 for the remaining characters: r,e,a,k,e,r, ,#,1.

4. Press to store the text.

5. If you have any problem, press the key to view the context sensitive help. Flash messages willsequentially appear for several seconds each. For the case of a text setting message, the key dis-plays how to edit and store a new value.


For example, the selections available for the PASSWORD SECURITY \ACCESS LEVEL are 'Restricted', 'Command', 'Setting', and ‘Factory Ser-vice’.

ACCESS LEVEL:Setting

If the ACCESS LEVEL needs to be set to 'Setting',

press the VALUE keys until the proper selection is displayed.

Press the key at any time for the context sensitive help messages.


Until the key is pressed, editing changes are not registered by therelay. Therefore, press the key to store the new value in memory. Thisflash message will momentarily appear as confirmation of the storing pro-cess.





4

d) RELAY SETTINGS NOT PROGRAMMED

To illustrate navigation through the message structure, an example of changing the 'RELAY SETTINGS: NotProgrammed' mode to 'Programmed' is shown below:

1. Press the key until the 'SETTINGS' header flashes momentarily and the ‘SETTINGS PRODUCTSETUP’ message appears on the display.

2. Press the MESSAGE key until the 'PASSWORD SECURITY' message appears on the display.

3. Press the MESSAGE key until the 'INSTALLATION' message appears on the display.

4. Press the MESSAGE key until the 'RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed' message appears on the dis-play.


When the relay is powered up successfully, the TROUBLE indicator will beon, the IN SERVICE indicator off, and this message displayed. This indicatesthat the relay is in the 'Not Programmed' state and safeguards against theinstallation of a relay whose settings have not been entered. This messagewill remain until the relay is explicitly put in the 'Programmed' state.

SETTINGS


PASSWORD SECURITY

DISPLAY PROPERTIES

COMMUNICATIONS

REAL TIME CLOCK

OSCILLOGRAPHY

USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS

FLEX STATE PARAMETERS

MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD

INSTALLATION






4

5. When the 'RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed' message appears on the display, press the VALUEkey or the VALUE key to change the selection to 'Programmed'.

6. Press the key.

7. When the 'NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED' message appears, the relay will be in 'Programmed'state and the 'IN SERVICE' indicator will turn on.

e) INITIAL PASSWORD SETUP

To illustrate navigation through the message structure, an example of changing a SETTING password isshown below.

1. Press the key until the 'SETTINGS' header flashes momentarily and the ‘SETTINGS PRODUCTSETUP’ message appears on the display.

2. Press the MESSAGE key until the ‘ACCESS LEVEL:’ message appears on the display.

3. Press the MESSAGE key until the ‘CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD:’ message appears on the dis-play.


RELAY SETTINGS:Programmed


SETTINGS


PASSWORD SECURITY


CHANGE COMMANDPASSWORD: No

CHANGE SETTINGPASSWORD: No

ENCRYPTED COMMANDPASSWORD: ----------

ENCRYPTED SETTINGPASSWORD: ----------





4

When the 'CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD' message appears on the display, press the VALUE key or theVALUE key to change the selection to Yes.

4. Press the key and the display will prompt you to 'ENTER NEW PASSWORD'.

5. Type in a numerical password (up to 10 characters) and press the key.

6. When the 'VERIFY NEW PASSWORD' message is displayed, re-type in the same password and press thekey.

7. When the 'NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED' message appears, your new SETTING PASSWORDwill be active.

f) CHANGING EXISTING PASSWORD

To change an existing password, follow the instructions in the previous section with the following exception. Amessage will prompt you to type in the existing password (for each security level) before a new password canbe entered.

In the event that a password has been lost (forgotten), submit the corresponding Encrypted Password from thePASSWORD SECURITY menu to the Factory for decoding.

CHANGE SETTINGPASSWORD: No

CHANGE SETTINGPASSWORD: Yes

ENTER NEWPASSWORD: ##########

VERIFY NEWPASSWORD: ##########

NEW PASSWORDHAS BEEN STORED





4




5 SETTINGS 5.1 OVERVIEW

5

5 SETTINGS 5.1 OVERVIEW 5.1.1 SETTINGS MAIN MENU


PASSWORD SECURITY

See page 5-10.

DISPLAY PROPERTIES

See page 5-11.

COMMUNICATIONS

See page 5-12.

REAL TIME CLOCK

See page 5-13.

OSCILLOGRAPHY

See page 5-14.


See page 5-16.


See page 5-17.

MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD

See page 5-18.

INSTALLATION

See page 5-18.


AC INPUTS

See page 5-19.

POWER SYSTEM

See page 5-21.

SIGNAL SOURCES

See page 5-22.

BREAKERS

See page 5-24.

FLEXCURVES

See page 5-27.

SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC

FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR

See page 5-45.

FLEXLOGIC TIMERS

See page 5-45.

SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS

PHASE CURRENT

See page 5-57.

NEUTRAL CURRENT

See page 5-64.

GROUND CURRENT

See page 5-70.




5.1 OVERVIEW 5 SETTINGS

5

NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT

See page 5-72.

BREAKER FAILURE

See page 5-74.

VOLTAGE ELEMENTS

See page 5-86.

SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS

SETTING GROUPS

See page 5-91.

UNDERFREQUENCY

See page 5-93.

SYNCHROCHECK

See page 5-96.

AUTORECLOSE

See page 5-100.

DIGITAL ELEMENTS

See page 5-107.

DIGITAL COUNTERS

See page 5-112.

MONITORING ELEMENTS

See page 5-115.

COLD LOAD PICKUP

See page 5-117.

SETTINGS INPUTS / OUTPUTS

CONTACT INPUTS

See page 5-119.

VIRTUAL INPUTS

See page 5-121.

REMOTE DEVICES

See page 5-123.

REMOTE INPUTS

See page 5-124.

CONTACT OUTPUTS

See page 5-125.

VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

See page 5-127.

REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA BIT PAIRS

See page 5-128.

REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt BIT PAIRS

See page 5-129.

RESETTING

See page 5-129.





5

SETTINGS TRANSDUCER I/O

DCMA INPUTS

See page 5-130.

RTD INPUTS

See page 5-131.

SETTINGS TESTING

FORCE CONTACT INPUTS

See page 5-132.

FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS

See page 5-132.





5

5.1.2 INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS

In the design of UR series relays, the term “element” is used to describe a feature that is based around a com-parator. The comparator is provided with an input (or set of inputs) that is tested against a programmed setting(or group of settings) to determine if the input is within the defined range that will set the output to logic 1, alsoreferred to as “setting the flag”. A single comparator may make multiple tests and provide multiple outputs; forexample, the time overcurrent comparator sets a Pickup flag when the current input is above the setting andsets an Operate flag when the input current has been at a level above the pickup setting for the time specifiedby the time-current curve settings. All comparators, except the Digital Element which uses a logic state as theinput, use analog parameter actual values as the input.

Elements are arranged into two classes, GROUPED and CONTROL. All elements which are classed asGROUPED elements are provided with eight sets of settings, in setting groups 1 through 8. The performanceof a GROUPED element is defined by the setting group that is active at a given time. The performance of aCONTROL element is defined by the settings in Group 1 at all times, independent of the selected active settinggroup.

Some settings for current and voltage elements are in per-unit (pu) calculated quantities:

pu quantity = ‘actual quantity’ / ‘base quantity’

• For current elements, the ‘base quantity’ is the nominal secondary or primary current of the CT. Where thecurrent source is the sum of two CTs with different ratios, the ‘base quantity’ will be the common secondaryor primary current to which the sum is scaled (i.e. normalized to the larger of the 2 rated CT inputs). Forexample, if CT1 = 300/5 A and CT2 = 100/5 A, then in order to sum these, CT2 is scaled to the CT1 ratio.In this case, the ‘base quantity’ will be 5A secondary or 300A primary.

• For voltage elements, the ‘base quantity’ is the nominal secondary or primary voltage of the VT.

The main characteristics of an element are shown on the element scheme logic diagram. This includes theinput(s), settings, fixed logic, and the output operands that are generated (abbreviations used on scheme logicdiagrams are contained in Appendix C). Some functions are common to most elements and are discussedbelow:

FUNCTION Setting

This setting is used to program the element to be operational when selected as Enabled. The factory default isDisabled. Once programmed to Enabled, any element associated with the Function becomes active and alloptions become available.

NAME Setting

This setting is used to uniquely identify the element.

SOURCE Setting

This setting is used to select the parameter or set of parameters to be monitored.

PICKUP Setting

For simple elements, this setting is used to program the level of the measured parameter above or below whichthe pickup state is established. In more complex elements, a set of settings may be provided to define therange of the measured parameters which will cause the element to pickup.

PICKUP DELAY Setting

This setting is used to set a time-delay-on-pickup, or on-delay, for the duration between the Pickup and Oper-ate output states.





5

RESET DELAY Setting

This setting is used to set a time-delay-on-dropout, or off-delay, for the duration between the Operate outputstate and the return to logic 0 after the input transits outside the defined pickup range.

BLOCK Setting

The default output operand state of all comparators is a logic 0 or “flag not set”. The comparator remains in thisdefault state until a logic 1 is asserted at the RUN input, allowing the test to be performed. If the RUN inputchanges to logic 0 at any time, the comparator returns to the default state. The RUN input is used to supervisethe comparator, similar to torque control of analog relays. The BLOCK input is used as one of the inputs toRUN control.

TARGET Setting

This setting is used to define the operation of an element target message. When set to Disabled, no targetmessage or illumination of a faceplate LED indicator is issued upon operation of the element. When set to Self-Reset, the target message and LED indication follow the Operate state of the element, and self-resets once theoperate element condition clears. When set to Latched, the target message and LED indication will remain vis-ible after the element output returns to logic 0 - until a RESET command is received by the relay.

EVENTS Setting

This setting is used to control whether the Pickup, Dropout or Operate states are recorded by the eventrecorder. When set to Disabled, element pickup, dropout or operate are not recorded as events.

When set to Enabled, an event is created for:

• (Element) PKP (pickup)

• (Element) DPO (dropout)

• (Element) OP (operate)

The DPO event is created when the measure and decide comparator output transits from the pickup state(logic 1) to the dropout state (logic 0). This could happen when the element is in the operate state if the resetdelay time is not ‘0’.





5

5.1.3 INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES

a) BACKGROUND

UR relays may be used on systems with either breaker-and-a-half or ring bus configurations. In these applica-tions, each of the two three-phase sets of individual phase currents (one associated with each breaker) couldbe used as an input to a breaker failure element. The sum of both breaker phase currents and 3I_0 residualcurrents may be required for the circuit relaying and metering functions. For a three-winding transformer appli-cation, it may be required to calculate watts and vars for each of three windings, using voltage from differentsets of VTs. All of these requirements can be satisfied with a single UR relay, which is equipped with sufficientCT and VT input channels, by selecting the parameter to be measured. A mechanism is provided for users tospecify the AC parameter (or group of parameters) to be used as the input to protection/control comparatorsand some metering elements.

Selection of the parameter(s) to be measured is partially performed by the design of a measuring element orprotection/control comparator, by identifying the type of parameter (fundamental frequency phasor, harmonicphasor, symmetrical component, total waveform RMS magnitude, phase-phase or phase-ground voltage etc.)to be measured. The user completes the selection process by selecting the instrument transformer input chan-nels to be used and some of the parameters calculated from these channels. The input parameters availableinclude the summation of currents from multiple input channels. For the summed currents of phase, 3I_0 andground current, current from CTs with different ratios are adjusted to a single ratio before the summation.

A mechanism called a "Source" is used to configure the routing of input CT and VT channels to measurementsub-systems. Sources, in the context of the UR family of relays, refers to the logical grouping of current andvoltage signals such that one Source will contain all of the signals required to measure the load or fault in aparticular power apparatus. A given Source could contain all or some of the following signals: three-phase cur-rents, single-phase ground current, three-phase voltages and an auxiliary voltage from a single VT for check-ing for synchronism.

A simple example to illustrate the concept of Sources, as applied to current inputs only, is in breaker-and-a-halfschemes as illustrated in the following figure, BREAKER-AND-A-HALF SCHEME. In this application, the cur-rent flow could be as shown by the labeled arrows. Some current flows through the upper bus bar to someother location or power equipment, and some of the current flows into transformer winding 1. The current intowinding 1 of the power transformer is the phasor sum (or difference) of the currents in CT1 and CT2 (whetherthe sum or difference is used, depends on the relative polarity of the CT connections). The same consider-ations apply to transformer winding 2. The protection elements need access to the net current for the protec-tion of the transformer, but some elements may need access to the individual currents from CT1 and CT2.





5

Figure 5–1: BREAKER-AND-A-HALF SCHEME

In conventional analogue or electronic relays, the sum of the currents is obtained from an appropriate externalconnection of all the CTs through which any portion of the current for the element being protected could flow.Auxiliary CTs are required to perform ratio matching if the ratios of the primary CTs to be summed are not iden-tical. In the UR platform, provisions have been included for all the current signals to be brought to the URdevice where grouping, ratio correction and summation are applied internally via configuration settings.

A major advantage of using internal summation is that the individual currents are available to the protectiondevice, as additional information to calculate a restraint current, for example, or to allow the provision of addi-tional protection features that operate on the individual currents such as breaker failure.

Given the flexibility of this approach, it becomes necessary to add configuration settings to the platform to allowthe user to select which sets of CT inputs will be summated to form the net current into the protected device.

The internal grouping of current and voltage signals forms an internal Source. This Source can be given a spe-cific name through the settings, and becomes available to protection and metering elements in the UR plat-form. Individual names can be given to each Source to help identify them more clearly for later use. Forexample, in the scheme shown in the above figure, BREAKER-AND-A-HALF SCHEME, the user would config-ure one Source to be the sum of CT1 and CT2 and could name this Source as 'Wdg 1 Current'.

Once the Sources have been configured, the user has them available as selections for the choice of input sig-nal for the protection elements and as metered quantities.





5

b) CT/VT MODULE CONFIGURATIONS

CT and VT input channels are contained in CT/VT modules in UR products. The type of input channel can bephase/neutral/other voltage, phase/ground current, sensitive ground current. The CT/VT modules calculatetotal waveform RMS levels, fundamental frequency phasors, symmetrical components and harmonics for volt-age or current, as allowed by the hardware in each channel. These modules may calculate other parametersas directed by the CPU module.

A CT/VT module can contain up to eight input channels numbered one through eight. The numbering of chan-nels in a CT/VT module corresponds to the module terminal numbering of 1 through 8 and is arranged as fol-lows; channels 1, 2, 3 and 4 are always provided as a group, hereafter called a "bank," and all four are eithercurrent or voltage, as are channels 5, 6, 7 and 8. Channels 1, 2, 3 and 5, 6, 7 are arranged as phase A, B andC respectively. Channels 4 and 8 are either another current or voltage.

Banks are ordered sequentially from the block of lower-numbered channels to the block of higher-numberedchannels, and from the CT/VT module with the lowest slot position letter to the module with the highest slotposition letter, as follows:

The UR platform allows for a maximum of three sets of three-phase voltages and six sets of three-phase cur-rents. The result of these restrictions leads to the maximum number of CT/VT modules in a chassis to three.The maximum number of Sources is six.

A summary of CT/VT module configurations is shown below.

c) CT/VT INPUT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION SETTINGS

Upon startup of the relay, configuration settings for every bank of current or voltage input channels in the relayare automatically generated, as determined from the order code. Within each bank, a channel identificationlabel is automatically assigned to each bank of channels in a given product. The ‘bank’ naming convention isbased on the physical location of the channels, required by the user to know how to connect the relay to exter-nal circuits. Bank identification consists of the letter designation of the slot in which the CT/VT module ismounted as the first character, followed by numbers indicating the channel, either 1 or 5.

For three phase sets of channels, the number of the lowest numbered channel will identify the set. For exam-ple, F1 represents the three-phase channel set of F1/F2/F3, where F is the slot letter and 1 is the first channelof the set of three channels.

Upon startup, the CPU configures the settings required to characterize the current and voltage inputs, and willdisplay them in the appropriate section in the sequence of the banks (as described above) as shown below fora maximum configuration:

F1, F5, M1, M5, U1, U5.

Increasing Slot Position Letter -->

CT/VT Module 1 CT/VT Module 2 CT/VT Module 3

< bank 1 > < bank 3 > < bank 5 >

< bank 2 > < bank 4 > < bank 6 >

Item Maximum Number

CT/VT Module 3

CT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 ground channel) 6

VT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 auxiliary channel) 3





5

The above section explains how the input channels are identified and configured to the specific applicationinstrument transformers and the connections of these transformers. The specific parameters to be used byeach measuring element and comparator, and some actual values are controlled by selecting a specificSource. The Source is a group of current and voltage input channels selected by the user to facilitate thisselection. With this mechanism, a user does not have to make multiple selections of voltage and current forthose elements that need both parameters, such as a distance element or a watt calculation. It also gathersassociated parameters for display purposes.

The basic idea of arranging a Source is to select a point on the power system where information is of interest.An application example of the grouping of parameters in a Source is a transformer winding, on which a threephase voltage is measured, and the sum of the currents from CTs on each of two breakers is required to mea-sure the winding current flow.




5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS

5

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5.2.1 PASSWORD SECURITY

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP PASSWORD SECURITY

There are two user levels of password security in the relay; Command and Setting. Operations under thesupervision of the passwords are:

Command : Operating the Breakers via faceplate pushbuttons,

Changing the state of virtual inputs,

Clearing the event records and associated snapshot records,

Clearing the oscillography records.

Setting : Changing any setting.

When the relay is shipped from the factory, the Command and Setting passwords are defaulted to 'Null'. Whena password is 'Null', the password security feature is disabled.

Programming a password code is required to enable each access level. A password consists of 1 to 10 numer-ical characters. When a ‘CHANGE ... PASSWORD’ message is set to ‘Yes’, the following message sequenceis invoked:

1. ENTER NEW PASSWORD: ____________

2. VERIFY NEW PASSWORD: ____________

3. NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED

In order to gain write access to a setting that is ‘Restricted’ to access, select the ACCESS LEVEL ‘Setting’value and then change the setting, or attempt to change the setting and then follow the prompt to enter the pro-grammed password. If the password is correctly entered, access will be allowed. If no keys are pressed forlonger than 30 minutes or control power is cycled, accessibility will automatically revert to the ‘Restricted’ level.

If an entered password is lost (or forgotten), consult the factory service department with the correspondingEncrypted Password number from the PASSWORD SECURITY menu.

NOTE: If the Setting password and Command password are set the same, the one password willallow access to commands and settings.

PASSWORD SECURITY


Range: Restricted, Command, Setting,Factory Service (for factory use only)

MESSAGECHANGE COMMANDPASSWORD: No

Range: No, Yes

MESSAGECHANGE SETTINGPASSWORD: No

Range: No, Yes

MESSAGEENCRYPTED COMMANDPASSWORD: ----------

Range: 0-9999999999Note: ---------- indicates no password

MESSAGEENCRYPTED SETTINGPASSWORD: ----------

Range: 0-9999999999Note: ---------- indicates no password




5 SETTINGS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5

5.2.2 DISPLAY PROPERTIES

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES

Some of the relay messaging characteristics can be modified to suit different situations using the display prop-erties settings.

Flash messages are status, warning, error, or information messages displayed for several seconds in responseto certain key presses during setting programming. These messages override any normal messages. The timea flash message remains on the display can be changed to accommodate different reading rates.

If no keys are pressed for a period of time, the relay will automatically display a default message. This time canbe modified to ensure messages remain on the screen long enough during programming or reading of actualvalues.

To extend the life of the phosphor in the vacuum fluorescent display, the brightness of the display can be atten-uated when default messages are being displayed. When interacting with the display using the faceplate keys,the display will always operate at full brightness.

DISPLAY PROPERTIES


Range: 0.5 To 10.0 in Steps of 0.1

MESSAGEDEFAULT MESSAGETIMEOUT: 300 s

Range: 10 To 900 in Steps of 1

MESSAGEDEFAULT MESSAGEINTENSITY: 25 %

Range: 25 %, 50 %, 75 %, 100 %





5


PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS

The relay is equipped with three independent serial ports. The RS232 port on the faceplate is intended for localuse and will respond regardless of the slave address programmed. Its baud rate is fixed at 19200 and parity isfixed as ‘none ’. The rear COM1 port type will depend on the CPU type ordered. It may be either an Ethernetport or RS485 port. The rear COM2 port is RS485.

The RS232 port may be connected to a personal computer running the URPC software. This software may beused for downloading or uploading setting files, viewing measured parameters, and upgrading the relay firm-ware to the latest revision.

For RS485 communications (supporting a subset of the Modbus® RTU protocol), each relay must have aunique address from 1 to 254. Address 0 is the broadcast address which all relays listen to. Addresses do nothave to be sequential, but no two relays can have the same address or conflicts resulting in errors will occur.Generally, each relay added to the link will use the next higher address starting at 1. A maximum of 32 relayscan be daisy-chained and connected to a DCS, PLC or PC using the RS485 ports. The IP address settingmessages will only appear if a relay is ordered with an Ethernet card. The Ethernet PRI & SEC Link Monitorsettings refer to the Primary & Secondary Fibre Channel link monitors.

The IP addresses are used with Modbus\TCP and MMS\UCA2 protocols. The NSAP address is used withMMS\UCA2 protocol over the OSI(CLNP/TP4) stack only (see also Appendix B).

NOTE: When the Ethernet IP, Gateway IP, or NSAP address is changed, it will not become active untilpower to the relay has been cycled (off - on).

COMMUNICATIONS

MODBUS SLAVEADDRESS: 254

Range: 1 to 254 in steps of 1

MESSAGERS485 COM1 BAUDRATE: 19200

Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600,115200; Only active if CPU type 9A is ordered

MESSAGERS485 COM1 PARITY:None

Range: None, Odd, EvenOnly active if CPU type 9A is ordered

MESSAGERS485 COM2 BAUDRATE: 19200

Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600,115200

MESSAGERS485 COM2 PARITY:None

Range: None, Odd, Even

MESSAGEETHERNET IP ADDRESS:

0. 0. 0. 0 Only active if CPU type 9C or 9D is ordered

MESSAGEGATEWAY IP ADDRESS:

0. 0. 0. 0 Only active if CPU type 9C or 9D is ordered

MESSAGE OSI NETWORK ADDRESS (NSAP)

Note: Click ‘MESSAGE ‘ key to enter address.Only active if CPU type 9C or 9D is ordered

MESSAGEDEFAULT GOOSE UPDATETIME: 60 s

Range: 1 to 60 in steps of 1 second(see Section: REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt BIT PAIRS)

MESSAGEETHERNET PRI LINKMONITOR: Disabled

Range: Disabled, EnabledOnly active if CPU type 9C or 9D is ordered

MESSAGEETHERNET SEC LINKMONITOR: Disabled

Range: Disabled, EnabledOnly active if CPU type 9C or 9D is ordered





5

5.2.4 REAL TIME CLOCK

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP REAL TIME CLOCK

The time/date stamp is used to track events for diagnostic purposes. The date and time may be entered manu-ally or synchronized to other relays using an IRIG-B signal. It has the same accuracy as an electronic watch,approximately +/- 1 minute per month. If the IRIG-B signal is not used, the clock must be periodically correctedeither manually through the faceplate or via the clock setting over the relay serial link. If synchronization toother relays is not necessary, then entry of the time and date from the faceplate keys is adequate.

Enter the current date using four digits for the year, two digits for the month, and two digits for the day. Forexample, August 27, 1999 would be entered as 1999/08/27. If entered from the faceplate, the new date willtake effect the moment the key is pressed. Enter the current time, by using two digits for the hour in 24hour time, two digits for the minutes, and two digits for the seconds. If entered from the faceplate, the new timewill take effect the moment the key is pressed. For example, 3:05 PM would be entered as 15:05:00,with the key pressed at exactly 3:05 PM. An IRIG-B signal may be connected to the relay to synchronizethe clock to a known time base and to other relays. If an IRIG-B signal is used, only the current year needs tobe entered.

If the relay serial communication link is used, then all the relays can keep time in synchronization with eachother. A new clock time is loaded into the relay via the communications port by a remote computer broadcast(address 0) for all the relays connected on the communications channel. Then all relays in the system begintiming at approximately the same instant (+/- a few ms).

REAL TIME CLOCK

DATE (YYYY/MM/DD):1999/01/04

Range: Year= 1990 to 2089, Month= 1 to 12,Day= 1 to 31,

MESSAGETIME (HH:MM:SS):00:00:00

Range: Hour = 0 to 23, Minute = 0 to 59, Second = 0 to 59

MESSAGEIRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE:None

Range: None, DC Shift, Amplitude Modulated





5

5.2.5 OSCILLOGRAPHY

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP OSCILLOGRAPHY

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP OSCILLOGRAPHY DIGITAL CHANNELS

Oscillography records contain waveforms captured at the sampling rate as well as other relay data at the pointof trigger. Oscillography records are triggered by a programmable FlexLogic™ operand. Multiple oscillographyrecords may be captured simultaneously.

The number of cycles which will be stored per record varies according to the number of DSPs installed and thenumber of records selected (i.e. the stored cycles per record decreases as the DSP module count increases).Refer to the OSCILLOGRAPHY CAPACITIES table for specific cycle counts.

The trigger position is programmable as a percent of the total buffer size (e.g. 10%, 50%, 75%, etc.). A triggerposition of 25% consists of 25% pre- and 75% post- trigger data. A new record may automatically overwrite anolder record if the trigger mode is set to ‘Automatic Overwrite’. The signal that can trigger ocsillography may beany FlexLogic™ parameter (element state, contact input, virtual output, etc.). The relay sampling rate is 64samples per cycle.

All eight channels per DSP are stored in the oscillography file. The analog channels are named ‘<slot let-ter><terminal number>-<I or V><phase A, B, or C; or 4th input>’. The fourth current input in a bank is called IG,and the fourth voltage input in a bank is called VN. For example; F2-IB designates the IB signal on terminal 2 ofthe DSP in slot F.

If there are no DSPs, no analog traces appear in the file; only the digital traces appear.

OSCILLOGRAPHY

NUMBER OF RECORDS:15 x NNN cycles

Range: 1, 2, ..., 64Note: the cycle count (NNN) is automatically computed.

MESSAGETRIGGER MODE:Automatic Overwrite

Range: Automatic Overwrite, Protected

MESSAGETRIGGER POSITION:

50%


MESSAGETRIGGER SOURCE:Off

Range: FlexLogic™ Operand

MESSAGE DIGITAL CHANNELS

DIGITAL CHANNELS

DIGITAL CHANNEL 1:Off


::

MESSAGEDIGITAL CHANNEL 64:Off


CAUTION: WHEN THE “NUMBER OF RECORDS” SETTING IS ALTERED, ALLOSCILLOGRAPHY RECORDS WILL BE CLEARED.





5

The number of records versus the number of cycles per DSP count per record are as follows:

Table 5–1: OSCILLOGRAPHY CAPACITIES

RecordCount

Length of Record (cycle count) RecordCount

Length of Record (cycle count)No DSP 1 DSP 2 DSP 3 DSP No DSP 1 DSP 2 DSP 3 DSP

1 910 144 78.0 53.5 33 77.8 12.3 6.63 4.502 682 108 58.4 40.2 34 75.6 11.9 6.38 4.383 546 86.1 46.8 32.0 35 73.6 11.6 6.25 4.254 455 71.8 38.9 26.8 36 71.6 11.3 6.13 4.135 390 61.5 33.4 22.9 37 69.8 11.0 5.88 4.006 342 53.8 29.1 20.0 38 68.0 10.8 5.75 4.007 303 47.9 25.9 17.8 39 66.4 10.4 5.63 3.888 273 43.0 23.4 16.0 40 64.8 10.1 5.50 3.759 248 39.1 21.3 14.5 41 63.3 10.0 5.38 3.63

10 227 35.9 19.4 13.4 42 61.9 9.75 5.25 3.6311 210 33.1 17.9 12.3 43 60.5 9.50 5.13 3.5012 195 30.8 16.6 11.4 44 59.1 9.25 5.00 3.3813 182 28.6 15.5 10.6 45 57.9 9.13 4.88 3.3814 171 26.9 14.5 10.0 46 56.6 8.88 4.75 3.2515 160 25.3 13.8 9.38 47 55.5 8.75 4.75 3.2516 152 23.9 12.9 8.88 48 54.4 8.50 4.63 3.1317 144 22.6 12.3 8.38 49 53.4 8.38 4.50 3.1318 136 21.5 11.6 8.00 50 52.3 8.25 4.38 3.0019 130 20.5 11.1 7.63 51 51.3 8.00 4.38 3.0020 124 19.5 10.6 7.25 52 50.4 7.88 4.25 2.8821 119 18.6 10.1 6.88 53 49.4 7.75 4.13 2.8822 114 17.9 9.63 6.63 54 48.5 7.63 4.13 2.7523 109 17.1 9.25 6.38 55 47.6 7.50 4.00 2.7524 105 16.5 8.88 6.13 56 46.9 7.38 4.00 2.7525 101 15.9 8.63 5.88 57 46.0 7.25 3.88 2.6326 97.3 15.3 8.25 5.63 58 45.3 7.13 3.88 2.6327 94.0 14.8 8.00 5.50 59 44.5 7.00 3.75 2.6328 90.8 14.3 7.75 5.25 60 43.9 6.88 3.75 2.5029 87.9 13.9 7.50 5.13 61 43.1 6.75 3.63 2.5030 85.1 13.4 7.25 5.00 62 42.5 6.63 3.63 2.5031 82.5 13.0 7.00 4.75 63 41.8 6.50 3.50 2.3832 80.1 12.6 6.75 4.63 64 41.1 6.50 3.50 2.38





5

5.2.6 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS

There are 48 amber LEDs across 2 relay faceplate LED panels. Each of these indicators can be programmedto become illuminated when a selected FlexLogic™ operand is in the logic 1 state. LEDs 1 through 24 inclusiveare on LED panel 2. LEDs 25 through 48 inclusive are on LED panel 3. Refer to Chapter 4 on Human Inter-faces (section - LED INDICATORS) for the locations of these indexed LEDs.

The settings in this menu are used to individually select the operand that controls these LEDs. Support forapplying user-customized labels to these LEDs is provided - see the section LED INDICATORS for details. Aselection of an operand in these settings will result in an operation of the LED that follows the state of the oper-and. If it is desired to maintain an LED illuminated after the operand has reset, a FlexLogic™ Latch can beemployed.

a) FACTORY PRESET LED PANEL 2 SETTINGS


LED 1 OPERAND:Off


MESSAGELED 2 OPERAND:Off


::

MESSAGELED 48 OPERAND:Off






5

5.2.7 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP FLEX STATE PARAMETERS

This feature provides a mechanism where any of 256 selected FlexLogic™ operand states can be used for effi-cient monitoring. The feature allows user-customized access to the FlexLogic™ operand states in the relay.The state bits are packed so that 16 states may be read out in a single Modbus register. The state bits can beconfigured so that all of the states which are of interest to the user are available in a minimum number of Mod-bus registers.

The state bits may be read out in the "Flex States" register array beginning at Modbus address 900 hex. 16states are packed into each register, with the lowest-numbered state in the lowest-order bit. There are 16 reg-isters in total to accommodate the 256 state bits.


PARAMETER 1:Off


MESSAGEPARAMETER 2:Off


::

MESSAGEPARAMETER 256:Off






5

5.2.8 MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD

Up to 5 separate messages can be posted in the Message Scratchpad menu. These messages may be notesthat pertain to the installation of the relay or for reminding operators to perform certain tasks. The messagesmay be entered from the faceplate keypad or a communications port.

To enter a 40 character message:

1. Select the user text message to be edited.

2. Press the key to enter text edit mode.

3. Use the VALUE key to scroll through the alphanumeric characters. A space is selected like a char-acter.

4. Press the key to advance the cursor to the next position.

5. Repeat step 3 and continue entering characters until the desired message is displayed.

6. The key may be pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages.

7. Press the key to store the new settings.

5.2.9 INSTALLATION

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP INSTALLATION

In order to safeguard against the installation of a relay whose settings have not been entered, the relay will notallow signaling of any output relay until ‘RELAY SETTINGS:’ is set to ‘Programmed’. This setting is defaulted to‘Not Programmed’ when the relay leaves the factory. The UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED self-test error messageis displayed automatically until the relay is put into the Programmed state.

The ‘RELAY NAME:’ setting allows the user to uniquely identify a relay. This name will appear on generatedreports. This name is also used to identify specific devices which are engaged in automatically sending/receiv-ing data over the Ethernet communications channel using the MMS/UCA2 protocol.

MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD

Text 1 Range: 2 x 20 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGEText 2 Range: 2 x 20 alphanumeric characters




INSTALLATION


Range: Not Programmed, Programmed

MESSAGERELAY NAME:Relay-1

Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters




5 SETTINGS 5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

5

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP 5.3.1 AC INPUTS

a) CURRENT BANKS

PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS CURRENT BANK X1

‘X’ = F, M, or U . ‘F’, ‘M’, and ‘U’ are module slot position letters. See also the section INTRODUCTION TO ACSOURCES.

Up to 6 banks of phase/ground CTs can be set.

These settings are critical for all features that have settings dependent on current measurements. When therelay is ordered, the CT/VT module must be specified to include a standard or sensitive ground input. As thephase CTs are connected in Wye (star), the calculated phasor sum of the three phase currents (IA + IB + IC =Neutral Current = 3Io) is used as the input for the neutral overcurrent elements. In addition, a zero sequence(core balance) CT which senses current in all of the circuit primary conductors, or a CT in a neutral groundingconductor may also be used. For this configuration, the ground CT primary rating must be entered. To detectlow level ground fault currents, the sensitive ground input may be used. In this case, the sensitive ground CTprimary rating must be entered. For more details on CT connections, refer to the HARDWARE chapter.

Enter the rated CT primary current values. For both 1000:5 and 1000:1 CTs, the entry would be 1000. For cor-rect operation, the CT secondary rating must match the setting (which must also correspond to the specific CTconnections used) - as elements are programmed in secondary amperes.

If AC inputs (banks of current) are to be summed as one source current, the following rule applies:

Example

SRC1=F1+F5+U1

Where: F1, F5 and U1 are banks of current with ratios of 500:1, 1000:1 and 800:1 respectively.

In this case, 1pu will be the highest primary current (1000) entered and the secondary current from the500:1 and 800:1 ratio CTs will be adjusted to that which would be created by a 1000:1 CT before summa-tion. If a protection element is set up to act on SRC1 currents, then PKP level 1pu will operate on 1000Amps primary.

The same rule will apply for sums of currents from CTs with different secondary taps (5 Amp and 1 Amp).

CURRENT BANK X1

PHASE CT X1PRIMARY: 1 A

Range: 1 to 65000 in steps of 1 A

MESSAGEPHASE CT X1SECONDARY: 1 A

Range: 1 A, 5 A

MESSAGEGROUND CT X1PRIMARY: 1 A

Range: 1 to 65000 in steps of 1 A

MESSAGEGROUND CT X1SECONDARY: 1 A

Range: 1 A, 5 A




5.3 SYSTEM SETUP 5 SETTINGS

5

b) VOLTAGE BANKS

PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK X1

‘X’ = F, M, or U . ‘F’, ‘M’, and ‘U’ are module slot position letters. See also the section INTRODUCTION TO ACSOURCES.

Up to 3 banks of phase/auxiliary VTs can be set.

With VTs installed, the relay can be used to perform voltage measurements, as well as power calculations.Enter the VT connection made to the system as ‘Wye’ or ‘Delta’. An open-delta source VT connection would beentered as ‘Delta’. See the typical wiring diagram in the HARDWARE chapter for details. The Nominal VT Sec-ondary Voltage setting is the voltage across the relay input channel terminals when nominal voltage is appliedto the VT primary.

On a source of 13.8 kV line-line at nominal voltage, with a 14400:120 Volt VT in the open-delta connection, thevoltage to be entered would be 115 V. For the Wye connection, the voltage to be entered would be 115 / √ 3 =66.4 V. For a VT primary to secondary turns ratio of 14400:120, the entry would be 120 (14400 / 120 = 120).

VOLTAGE BANK X5

PHASE VT X5CONNECTION: Wye

Range: Wye, Delta

MESSAGEPHASE VT X5SECONDARY: 120.0 V

Range: 50.0 to 240.0 in steps of 0.1

MESSAGEPHASE VT X5RATIO: 1.00 :1


MESSAGEAUXILIARY VT X5CONNECTION: Vag

Range: Vn, Vag, Vbg, Vcg, Vab, Vbc, Vca

MESSAGEAUXILIARY VT X5SECONDARY: 120.0 V


MESSAGEAUXILIARY VT X5RATIO: 1.00 :1






5

5.3.2 POWER SYSTEM

PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM

The power system NOMINAL FREQUENCY value is used as a default to set the digital sampling rate if thesystem frequency cannot be measured from the IA or VA channels of the CT/VT module. The phase sequenceof the power system is required to properly calculate sequence components and power parameters.

‘F’, ‘M’, and ‘U’ are module slot position letters; the following number (1 or 5) is the bank designation. See alsothe section INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES.

If there is insufficient magnitude on the selected FREQUENCY REFERENCE, the relay will look for anothersignal with sufficient magnitude and track to it. If there are no inputs with sufficient magnitude or if the FRE-QUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting has been set to "None", the sampling rate will track to the NOM-INAL FREQUENCY setting.

POWER SYSTEM

NOMINAL FREQUENCY:60 Hz


MESSAGEPHASE ROTATION:ABC

Range: ABC, ACB

MESSAGEFREQUENCY AND PHASEREFERENCE: None

Range: None, F1, F5, M1, M5, U1, U5Note: Only phase current/voltage inputs are displayed.

MESSAGEFREQUENCY TRACKING:Enabled

Range: Disabled, Enabled





5

5.3.3 SIGNAL SOURCES

PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES SOURCE 1

There are 6 identical Source setting menus available, numbered from 1 to 6.

"SRC 1" can be replaced by whatever name is defined by the user for the associated source.

‘F’, ‘M’, and ‘U’ are module slot position letters; the following number represents either the first bank of fourchannels (1, ,2 ,3 ,4) called ‘1’ or the second bank of channels (5, 6, 7, 8) called ‘5’ in a particular CT/VT mod-ule. See also the section INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES.

It is possible to select the sum of any combination of CTs. The first channel displayed is the CT to which all oth-ers will be referred. For example, the selection "F1+F5" indicates the sum of each phase from channels "F1"and "F5", scaled to "F1" secondary units.

The selection "None" will result in the hiding of the associated actual values.

The approach used to configure the AC Sources consists of several steps; first step is to specify the informa-tion about each CT and VT input. For CT inputs, this is the nominal primary and secondary current. For VTs,this is the connection type, ratio and nominal secondary voltage. Once the inputs have been specified, the con-figuration for each Source is entered, including specifying which CTs will be summed together.

USER SELECTION OF AC PARAMETERS FOR COMPARATOR ELEMENTS :

DSP modules automatically calculate all current and voltage parameters that can be calculated from the inputsavailable. Users will have to select the specific input parameters that are to be measured by every element, asselected in the element settings. The internal design of the element specifies which type of parameter to useand provides a setting for selection of the Source. In some elements where the parameter may be either funda-mental or RMS magnitude, such as phase time overcurrent, two settings are provided. One setting specifiesthe Source, the second selects between fundamental phasor and RMS.

AC INPUT ACTUAL VALUES :

The calculated parameters associated with the configured voltage and current inputs are displayed in the cur-rent and voltage input sections of Actual Values. Only the phasor quantities associated with the actual ACphysical input channels will be displayed here. All parameters contained within a configured Source are dis-played in the Sources section of Actual Values.

EXAMPLE USE OF SOURCES :

An example of the use of Sources, with a relay with three CT/VT modules, is shown below.

A relay could have the following hardware configuration:

SOURCE 1

SOURCE 1 NAME:SRC 1

Range: up to 6 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGESOURCE 1 PHASE CT:None

Range: None,F1, F5, F1+F5, ..., F1+F5+M1+M5+U1+U5

Note: only phase current inputs will be displayed.

MESSAGESOURCE 1 GROUND CT:None

Range: None,F1, F5, F1+F5, ..., F1+F5+M1+M5+U1+U5

Note: only ground current inputs will be displayed.

MESSAGESOURCE 1 PHASE VT:None

Range: None, F1, F5, M1, M5, U1, U5Note: only phase voltage inputs will be displayed.

MESSAGESOURCE 1 AUX VT:None

Range: None, F1, F5, M1, M5, U1, U5Note: only auxiliary voltage inputs will be displayed.





5

This configuration could be used on a two winding transformer, with one winding connected into a breaker-and-a-half system. The following figure shows the arrangement of Sources used to provide the functions required inthis application, and the CT/VT inputs that are used to provide the data.

Figure 5–2: EXAMPLE USE OF SOURCES

Increasing Slot Position Letter -->

CT/VT Module 1 CT/VT Module 2 CT/VT Module 3

CTs CTs VTs

CTs VTs ---





5

5.3.4 BREAKER 1 / BREAKER 2

PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP BREAKERS BREAKER 1 (2)

a) BREAKER CONTROL

A description of the operation of the breaker control and status monitoring features is provided in the HumanInterfaces chapter. Only information that is involved with programming of the associated settings is covered inthis section. These features are provided for two breakers; a user may use only those portions of the designrelevant to a single breaker, which must be breaker No. 1.

b) BREAKER CONTROL SETTINGS

BREAKER 1 FUNCTION:

This setting must be selected to ‘Enable’ to allow the operation of any breaker control feature.

BREAKER 1 PUSHBUTTON CONTROL:

This setting must be selected to ‘Enable’ to allow faceplate PUSHBUTTON operations.

BREAKER 1 NAME:

This setting is used to assign a user-defined name to the breaker, which will be used in flash messages relatedto breaker No. 1.

BREAKER 1

BREAKER 1FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGEBREAKER1 PUSH BUTTONCONTROL: Disabled


MESSAGEBREAKER 1 NAME:BKR1-Bkr 1

Range: ‘BKR1-’ followed by 6 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGEBREAKER 1 MODE:3-Pole

Range: 3-Pole, 1-Pole

MESSAGEBREAKER 1 OPEN:Off


MESSAGEBREAKER 1 CLOSE:Off


MESSAGEBREAKER 1φA/3-POLE:Off


MESSAGEBREAKER 1φB:Off


MESSAGEBREAKER 1φC:Off


MESSAGEBREAKER 1 EXT ALARM:Off


MESSAGEBREAKER 1 ALARMDELAY: 0.000 s

Range: 0.000 to 1 000 000.000 seconds in steps of 0.001seconds

MESSAGEMANUAL CLOSE RECAL1TIME: 0.000 s

Range: 0.000 to 1 000 000.000 seconds in steps of 0.001seconds





5

BREAKER 1 MODE:

This setting is used to select either 3-pole mode, where all breaker poles are operated simultaneously, or 1-pole mode where all breaker poles are operated either independently or simultaneously.

BREAKER 1 OPEN:

This setting is used to select an operand that will create a signal that can be programmed to operate an outputrelay to open breaker No. 1.

BREAKER 1 CLOSE:

This setting is used to select an operand that will create a signal that can be programmed to operate an outputrelay to close breaker No. 1.

BREAKER 1 ΦA/3-POLE:

This setting is used to select an operand, usually a contact input connected to a breaker auxiliary positiontracking mechanism. This input can be either a 52/a or 52/b contact which must be programmed to create alogic 0 when the breaker is open. If the mode is selected as 3-pole, this setting selects a single contact input asthe operand used to track the breaker open or closed position. If the mode is selected as 1-pole, the input men-tioned above is used to track phase A and settings BREAKER 1 ΦB and BREAKER 1 ΦC are provided toselect operands to track phases B and C respectively.

BREAKER 1 ΦB:

If the mode is selected as 3-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as 1-pole, this input isused to track phase B as above for phase A.

BREAKER 1 ΦC:

If the mode is selected as 3-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as 1-pole, this input isused to track phase C as above for phase A.

BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM:

This setting is used to select an operand, usually an external contact input, connected to a breaker alarmreporting contact.

BREAKER 1 ALARM DELAY:

This setting is used to program the delay interval during which a disagreement of status among the three poleposition tracking operands will not declare a pole disagreement, to allow for non-simultaneous operation of thepoles.

MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 TIME:

This setting is used to program the interval required to maintain setting changes in effect after an operator hasinitiated a manual close command to operate a circuit breaker.





5

Figure 5–3: DUAL BREAKER CONTROL SCHEME LOGIC





5

5.3.5 FLEXCURVE™ A / FLEXCURVE™ B

PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP FLEXCURVES FLEXCURVE A

Each of FlexCurve™ A and FlexCurve™ B have settings for entering times to Reset/Operate at the followingpickup levels: 0.00 - 0.98 / 1.03 - 20.00. This data is converted into 2 continuous curves by linear interpolationbetween data points. To enter a custom FlexCurve™, enter the Reset/Operate time (using the VALUEkeys) for each selected pickup point (using the MESSAGE keys) for the desired protection curve (A orB).

Table 5–2: FLEXCURVE™ TABLE

FLEXCURVE A

FLEXCURVE A TIME AT0.00 xPKP: 0 ms

Range: 0 To 65535 in steps of 1

Reset Time(ms)

Reset Time(ms)

Operate Time(ms)

Operate Time(ms)

Operate Time(ms)

Operate Time(ms)

0.00 0.68 1.03 2.9 4.9 10.5

0.05 0.70 1.05 3.0 5.0 11.0

0.10 0.72 1.1 3.1 5.1 11.5

0.15 0.74 1.2 3.2 5.2 12.0

0.20 0.76 1.3 3.3 5.3 12.5

0.25 0.78 1.4 3.4 5.4 13.0

0.30 0.80 1.5 3.5 5.5 13.5

0.35 0.82 1.6 3.6 5.6 14.0

0.40 0.84 1.7 3.7 5.7 14.5

0.45 0.86 1.8 3.8 5.8 15.0

0.48 0.88 1.9 3.9 5.9 15.5

0.50 0.90 2.0 4.0 6.0 16.0

0.52 0.91 2.1 4.1 6.5 16.5

0.54 0.92 2.2 4.2 7.0 17.0

0.56 0.93 2.3 4.3 7.5 17.5

0.58 0.94 2.4 4.4 8.0 18.0

0.60 0.95 2.5 4.5 8.5 18.5

0.62 0.96 2.6 4.6 9.0 19.0

0.64 0.97 2.7 4.7 9.5 19.5

0.66 0.98 2.8 4.8 10.0 20.0




5.4 FLEXLOGIC™ 5 SETTINGS

5

5.4 FLEXLOGIC™ 5.4.1 INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC™

In order to provide maximum flexibility to the user of a UR (Universal Relay) device, the arrangement of inter-nal digital logic combines fixed and user-programmed parameters. Logic upon which individual features aredesigned is fixed, and all other logic from digital input signals through elements or combinations of elements todigital outputs, is variable. The user has complete control of all variable logic through FlexLogic™. In general,the system receives analog and digital inputs which it uses to produce analog and digital outputs. The majorsub-systems of a generic UR relay involved in this process are shown in the following figure.

Figure 5–4: UR ARCHITECTURE OVERVIEW

The states of all digital signals used in a UR relay are represented by flags (or FlexLogic™ operands, whichare described in a later section). A digital "1" is represented by a 'set' flag. Any external contact change-of-statecan be used to block an element from operating, as an input to a control feature in a FlexLogic™ equa-tion, orto operate a contact output. The state of the contact input can be displayed locally or viewed remotely via thecommunications facilities provided. If it is desired to have a simple scheme where a contact input is used toblock an element, this selection is made when programming the element. This capability also applies to theother features that set flags: elements, virtual inputs, remote inputs, schemes, and human operators.

If more logic that is more complex than that presented above is required, it is implemented via FlexLogic™. Forexample, if it is desired to have the closed state of contact input H7a and the operated state of the phase und-ervoltage element block the operation of the phase time overcurrent element, the two control input states areprogrammed in a FlexLogic™ equation. This equation ANDs the two control inputs to produce a "virtual output"which is then selected when programming the phase time overcurrent to be used as a blocking input. Virtualoutputs can only be created by FlexLogic™ equations.

CONTACT

INPUTS

(Actual Values)

VIRTUAL

INPUTS

REMOTE

INPUTS

(GOOSE)

KEYPAD

ANALOG

OUTPUT

(D/A)

(dcma)

(Status)

URPC AND LAN COMMUNICATIONS

CONTROL

&

MONITORING

FEATURES

OR

DISPLAY

AND LEDs

REMOTE

OUTPUTS

(GOOSE)

RTD

Ohmsor

dcmAor

VTs

CTs

ANALOG

INPUT

(A/D)

DSP

(A/D)

CALCULATE

PARAMETERS

BLOCK

OPERATION

(EACH

ELEMENT)

MEASURING

AND

DECISION

ELEMENTS

FORM-A &

SCR ONLY

CONTACT

OUTPUTS

V I

FLEXLOGIC

EQUATIONS

Flags

VIRTUAL

OUTPUTS

(Flexlogic Operands)

FLEXLOGIC

COUNTERS

DISPLAY

DIGITAL

ELEMENTS




5 SETTINGS 5.4 FLEXLOGIC™

5

Traditionally, protective relay logic has been relatively limited. Any unusual applications involving interlocks,blocking, or supervisory functions had to be hardwired using contact inputs and outputs. FlexLogic™ mini-mizes the requirement for auxiliary components and wiring while making more complex schemes possible.

The logic that determines the interaction of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs is field programmablethrough the use of logic equations that are sequentially processed. The use of virtual inputs and outputs inaddition to hardware is available internally and on the communication ports for other relays to use (distributedFlexLogic™).

FlexLogic™ allows users to customize the relay through a series of equations that consist of operators andoperands. The operands are the states of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs. The operators are logicgates, timers and latches (with set and reset inputs). A system of sequential operations allows any combinationof specified operands to be assigned as inputs to specified operators to create an output. The final output of anequation is a numbered register called a virtual output. Virtual outputs can be used as an input operand in anyequation, including the equation that generates the output, as a seal-in or other type of feedback.

A FlexLogic™ equation consists of parameters that are either operands or operators. Operands have a logicstate of 1 or 0. Operators provide a defined function, such as an AND gate or a Timer. Each equation definesthe combinations of parameters to be used to set a VIRTUAL OUTPUT flag. Evaluation of an equation resultsin either a 1 (= ON, i.e. flag set) or 0 (= OFF, i.e. flag not set). Each equation is evaluated at least 4 times everypower system cycle.

Some types of operands are present in the relay in multiple instances; e.g. contact and remote inputs. Thesetypes of operands are grouped together (for presentation purposes only) on the faceplate display. The charac-teristics of the different types of operands are listed in the table: "FLEXLOGIC™ OPERAND TYPES".

Table 5–3: FLEXLOGIC™ OPERAND TYPES (Sheet 1 of 2)

Operand Type State Example Format Characteristics[Input Is ‘1’ (= ON) if...]

Element(Analog)

Pickup PHASE TOC1 PKP The tested parameter is presently above thepickup setting of an element which respondsto rising values or below the pickup setting ofan element which responds to falling values.

Dropout PHASE TOC1 DPO This operand is the logical inverse of theabove PKP operand.

Operate PHASE TOC1 OP The tested parameter has been above/belowthe pickup setting of the element for theprogrammed delay time, or has been at logic 1and is now at logic 0 but the reset timer hasnot finished timing.

Block NTRL DIR1 BLK The output of the comparator is set to theblock function.

Element(Digital)

Pickup DIG ELEM 1 PKP The input operand is at logic 1.

Dropout DIG ELEM 1 DPO This operand is the logical inverse of theabove PKP operand.

Operate DIG ELEM 1 OP The input operand has been at logic 1 for theprogrammed pickup delay time, or has beenat logic 1 for this period and is now at logic 0but the reset timer has not finished timing.





5

Element(Digital Counter)

Higher than COUNTER 1 HI The number of pulses counted is above theset number.

Equal to COUNTER 1 EQL The number of pulses counted is equal to theset number.

Lower than COUNTER 1 LO The number of pulses counted is below theset number.

Contact Input On Cont Ip On Voltage is presently applied to the input(external contact closed).

Off Cont Ip Off Voltage is presently not applied to the input(external contact open).

Virtual Input On Virt Ip 1 On The virtual input is presently in the ON state.

Remote Input On Remote I/P 1 On The remote input is presently in the ON state.

Contact Output(type Form-Acontact only)

Voltage On Cont Op 1 VOn Voltage exists across the contact.

Voltage Off Cont Op 1 VOff Voltage does not exists across the contact.

Current On Cont Op 1 IOn Current is flowing through the contact.

Current Off Cont Op 1 IOff Current is not flowing through the contact.

Virtual Output On Virt Op 1 On The virtual output is presently in the set state(i.e. evaluation of the equation whichproduces this virtual output results in a "1").

Fixed On On Logic 1

Off Off Logic 0

Table 5–3: FLEXLOGIC™ OPERAND TYPES (Sheet 2 of 2)

Operand Type State Example Format Characteristics[Input Is ‘1’ (= ON) if...]





5

Table 5–4: FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS (Sheet 1 of 4)

Operand Type Operand Syntax

Element PHASE TOC1 PKP At least one phase of TOC1 is picked up

PHASE TOC1 OP At least one phase of TOC1 is operated

PHASE TOC1 DPO At least one phase of TOC1 is dropped out

PHASE TOC1 PKP A Phase A of TOC1 is picked up

PHASE TOC1 PKP B Phase B of TOC1 is picked up

PHASE TOC1 PKP C Phase C of TOC1 is picked up

PHASE TOC1 OP A Phase A of TOC1 is operated

PHASE TOC1 OP B Phase B of TOC1 is operated

PHASE TOC1 OP C Phase C of TOC1 is operated

PHASE TOC1 DPO A Phase A of TOC1 is dropped out

PHASE TOC1 DPO B Phase B of TOC1 is dropped out

PHASE TOC1 DPO C Phase C of TOC1 is dropped out

PHASE IOC1 . . . Same set of operands as shown for PHASE TOC1

PHASE IOC2 . . . Same set of operands as shown for PHASE TOC1

PH DIR1 BLK A Phase A Directional 1 Block

PH DIR1 BLK B Phase B Directional 1 Block

PH DIR1 BLK C Phase C Directional 1 Block

PH DIR1 BLK Phase Directional 1 Block

PH DIR2 . . . Same set of operands as shown for PH DIR1

NEUTRAL TOC1 PKP Neutral TOC1 is picked up

NEUTRAL TOC1 OP Neutral TOC1 is operated

NEUTRAL TOC1 DPO Neutral TOC1 is dropped out

NEUTRAL IOC1 . . . Same set of operands as shown for NEUTRAL TOC1

NEUTRAL IOC2 . . . Same set of operands as shown for NEUTRAL TOC1

NTRL DIR1 BLK Neutral Directional 1 Block

NTRL DIR2 BLK Neutral Directional 2 Block

GROUND TOC1 . . . Same set of operands as shown for NEUTRAL TOC1

GROUND IOC1 . . . Same set of operands as shown for NEUTRAL TOC1

GROUND IOC2 . . . Same set of operands as shown for NEUTRAL TOC1

NEG SEQ TOC1 . . . Same set of operands as shown for NEUTRAL TOC1

NEG SEQ TOC2 . . . Same set of operands as shown for NEUTRAL TOC1

NEG SEQ IOC1 . . . Same set of operands as shown for NEUTRAL TOC1

NEG SEQ IOC2 . . . Same set of operands as shown for NEUTRAL TOC1

BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPA Breaker Failure 1 re-trip phase A (only for 1-pole schemes)

BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPB Breaker Failure 1 re-trip phase B (only for 1-pole schemes)

BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPC Breaker Failure 1 re-trip phase C (only for 1-pole schemes)





5

BKR FAIL 1 RETRIP Breaker Failure 1 re-trip 3-phase

BKR FAIL 1 T1 OP Breaker Failure 1 Timer 1 is operated



BKR FAIL 1 TRIP OP Breaker Failure 1 trip is operated

BKR FAIL 2 . . . Same set of operands as shown for BKR FAIL 1

PHASE UV1 PKP At least one phase of UV1 is picked up

PHASE UV1 OP At least one phase of UV1 is operated

PHASE UV1 DPO At least one phase of UV1 is dropped out

PHASE UV1 PKP A Phase A of UV1 is picked up

PHASE UV1 PKP B Phase B of UV1 is picked up

PHASE UV1 PKP C Phase C of UV1 is picked up

PHASE UV1 OP A Phase A of UV1 is operated

PHASE UV1 OP B Phase B of UV1 is operated

PHASE UV1 OP C Phase C of UV1 is operated

PHASE UV1 DPO A Phase A of UV1 is dropped out

PHASE UV1 DPO B Phase B of UV1 is dropped out

PHASE UV1 DPO C Phase C of UV1 is dropped out

PHASE UV2 . . . Same set of operands as shown for PHASE UV1

PHASE OV1 . . . Same set of operands as shown for PHASE UV1

SETTING GROUP ACT 1:

SETTING GROUP ACT 8

Setting group 1 is active:

Setting group 8 is active

SETTING GROUP EDIT 1:

SETTING GROUP EDIT 8

Setting group 1 is editable:

Setting group 8 is editable

UNDERFREQ PKP At least one level of underfrequency is picked up

UNDERFREQ OP At least one level of underfrequency is operated

UNDERFREQ DPO At least one level of underfrequency is dropped out

UNDERFREQ PKP1 Underfrequency level 1 is picked up

UNDERFREQ OP1 Underfrequency level 1 is operated

UNDERFREQ DPO1 Underfrequency level 1 is dropped out

UNDERFREQ...2 thru 6 Same set of operands as shown for UNDERFREQ...level 1

SYNC 1 DEAD S OP Synchrocheck 1 dead source is operated

SYNC 1 DEAD S DPO Synchrocheck 1 dead source is dropped out

SYNC 1 SYNC OP Synchrocheck 1 in synchronization is operated

SYNC 1 SYNC DPO Synchrocheck 1 in synchronization is dropped out







5

SYNC 1 CLS OP Synchrocheck 1 close is operated

SYNC 1 CLS DPO Synchrocheck 1 close is dropped out

SYNC 2 . . . Same set of operands as shown for SYNC 1

AR 1 ENABLED Auto reclose 1 is enabled

AR 1 RIP Auto reclose1 is in progress

AR 1 LO Auto reclose 1 is locked out

AR 1 BLK FRM MAN CLS Auto reclose 1 is temporarily disabled

AR 1 CLOSE Auto reclose 1 close command is issued

AR 1 SHOT CNT=0 Auto reclose 1 shot count is 0





AR 1 DISABLED Auto reclose 1 is disabled

DIG ELEM 1 PKP Digital Element 1 is picked up

DIG ELEM 1 OP Digital Element 1 is operated

DIG ELEM 1 DPO Digital Element 1 is dropped out

: :

DIG ELEM 16 PKP Digital Element 16 is picked up

DIG ELEM 16 OP Digital Element 16 is operated

DIG ELEM 16 DPO Digital Element 16 is dropped out

COUNTER 1 HICOUNTER 1 EQLCOUNTER 1 LO:

COUNTER 8 HICOUNTER 8 EQLCOUNTER 8 LO

Digital Counter 1 output is ‘more than’ comparison valueDigital Counter 1 output is ‘equal to’ comparison valueDigital Counter 1 output is ‘less than’ comparison value:

Digital Counter 8 output is ‘more than’ comparison valueDigital Counter 8 output is ‘equal to’ comparison valueDigital Counter 8 output is ‘less than’ comparison value

BKR ARC 1 OP Breaker Arcing 1 is operated

BKR ARC 2 OP Breaker Arcing 2 is operated

COLD LOAD 1 OP Cold Load Pickup 1 is operated

COLD LOAD 2 OP Cold Load Pickup 2 is operated

Breaker BREAKER 1 OFF CMD Breaker 1 OFF command

BREAKER 1 ON CMD Breaker 1 ON command

BREAKER 1 φA CLSD Breaker 1 phase A is closed

BREAKER 1 φB CLSD Breaker 1 phase B is closed

BREAKER 1 φC CLSD Breaker 1 phase C is closed







5

BREAKER 1 CLOSED Breaker 1 is closed

BREAKER 1 OPEN Breaker 1 is open

BREAKER 1 TROUBLE Breaker 1 trouble alarm

BREAKER 1 DISCREP Breaker 1 has discrepancy

BREAKER 1 MNL CLS Breaker 1 manual close

BREAKER 2 . . . Same set of operands as shown for BREAKER 1

Resetting RESET OP Reset command is operated

RESET OP (COMMS) Communications source of the reset command

RESET OP (OPERAND) Operand source of the reset command

RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON) Reset key (pushbutton) source of the reset command

Fixed Off Logic = 0. Does nothing and may be used as a delimiter inan equation list; used as ‘Disable’ by other features.

On Logic = 1. Can be used as a test setting.

Contact Input Cont Ip 1 On (will not appear unless ordered)

Cont Ip 2 On (will not appear unless ordered)

: :

Cont Ip 1 Off (will not appear unless ordered)

Cont Ip 2 Off (will not appear unless ordered)

: :

Virtual Input Virt Ip 1 On Flag is set, logic=1

: :

Virt Ip 32 On Flag is set, logic=1

Remote Input Remote I/P 1 On:

Remote I/P 32 On

Flag is set, logic=1:

Flag is set, logic=1

Contact Output(Voltage)

-from detector onForm-A outputonly

Cont Op 1 VOn (will not appear unless ordered)

Cont Op 2 VOn (will not appear unless ordered)

: :

Cont Op 1 VOff (will not appear unless ordered)

Cont Op 2 VOff (will not appear unless ordered)

: :

Contact Output(Current)

-from detector onForm-A outputonly

Cont Op 1 IOn (will not appear unless ordered)

Cont Op 2 IOn (will not appear unless ordered)

: :

Cont Op 1 IOff (will not appear unless ordered)

Cont Op 2 IOff (will not appear unless ordered)

: :

Virtual Output Virt Op 1 On Flag is set, logic=1

: :

Virt Op 64 On Flag is set, logic=1







5

Some operands can be re-named by the user. These are the names of the breakers in the breaker control fea-ture, the ID (identification) of contact inputs, the ID of virtual inputs, and the ID of virtual outputs. If the userchanges the default name/ID of any of these operands, the assigned name will appear in the relay’s list ofoperands. The default names are shown in the above FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS table.





5

The characteristics of the logic gates are tabulated in table: FLEXLOGIC™ GATE CHARACTERISTICS, andthe operators available in FlexLogic™ are listed in table: FLEXLOGIC™ OPERATORS.

Table 5–5: FLEXLOGIC™ GATE CHARACTERISTICS

Gates Number Of Inputs Output Is ‘1’ (= On) If...

NOT 1 input is ‘0’

OR 2 to 16 any input is ‘1’

AND 2 to 16 all inputs are ‘1’

NOR 2 to 16 all inputs are ‘0’

NAND 2 to 16 any input is ‘0’

XOR 2 only one input is ‘1’

Table 5–6: FLEXLOGIC™ OPERATORS

Operator Type Operator Syntax Description

Editor INSERT Used to insert a parameter in an equation list.

DELETE Used to delete a parameter from an equation list.

End END The first END encountered signifies the last entry in the list ofFlexLogic™ parameters that is processed.

Logic Gate NOT Logical Not

OR(2) 2 input Or gate

: :

OR(16) 16 input Or gate

AND(2) 2 input And gate

: :

AND(16) 16 input And gate

NOR(2) 2 input Nor gate

: :

NOR(16) 16 input Nor gate

NAND(2) 2 input Nand gate

: :

NAND(16) 16 input Nand gate

XOR(2) 2 input Exclusive Or gate

LATCH (S,R) Latch (Set, Reset) - reset-dominant

Timer TIMER 1 Timer as configured with FlexLogic™ Timer 1 settings

: :

TIMER 32 Timer as configured with FlexLogic™ Timer 32 settings

Assign = Virt Op 1. Assigns previous FlexLogic™ parameter to Virtual Output 1

Virtual Output : :

= Virt Op 64. Assigns previous FlexLogic™ parameter to Virtual Output 64





5

a) FLEXLOGIC™ RULES

When forming a FlexLogic™ equation, the sequence of entries in the linear array of parameters must followthese general rules:

1. Operands must precede the operator which uses the operands as inputs.

2. Operators have only one output. The output of an operator must be used to create a virtual output if it is tobe used as an input to two or more operators.

3. Assigning the output of an operator to a Virtual Output terminates the equation.

4. A timer operator (e.g. "TIMER 1") or virtual output assignment (e.g. " = Virt Op 1") may only be used once.If this rule is broken, a syntax error will be declared.

b) FLEXLOGIC™ EVALUATION

Each equation is evaluated in the order in which the parameters have been entered.

CAUTION: FLEXLOGIC™ PROVIDES LATCHES WHICH BY DEFINITION HAVE A MEMORYACTION, REMAINING IN THE SET STATE AFTER THE SET INPUT HAS BEENASSERTED. HOWEVER, THEY ARE VOLATILE; I.E. THEY RESET ON THE RE-APPLICATION OF CONTROL POWER.

WHEN MAKING CHANGES TO PROGRAMMING, ALL FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATIONSARE RE-COMPILED WHEN ANY NEW SETTING IS ENTERED, SO ALL LATCHESARE AUTOMATICALLY RESET. IF IT IS REQUIRED TO RE-INITIALIZE FLEX-LOGIC™ DURING TESTING, FOR EXAMPLE, IT IS SUGGESTED TO POWER THEUNIT DOWN AND THEN BACK UP.





5

5.4.2 FLEXLOGIC™ PROCEDURE EXAMPLE

An example of the process used to implement a particular set of logic required in an application follows. Thesequence of the steps outlined is quite important, as it should minimize the work necessary to develop the set-tings to be applied to the relay. Note that the example presented below in the figure: EXAMPLE LOGICSCHEME, is intended to demonstrate the procedure, not to solve a specific application situation.

In the logic example, it is assumed that some logic has already been programmed to produce Virtual Output 1and Virtual Output 2, and is only a part of the full set of equations used. When using FlexLogic™, it is importantto make a note when each Virtual Output is used - a Virtual Output designation (1 - 64) can only be properlyassigned once.

Figure 5–5: EXAMPLE LOGIC SCHEME

STEP 1:

The initial step in the process is to inspect the example logic diagram to determine that the required logic canbe implemented with the types of operators provided by FlexLogic™. If this is not possible, the logic will haveto be altered until this condition is satisfied. Once this is done, count the inputs to each gate to check that thenumber of inputs does not exceed the limits available in FlexLogic™, which is unlikely but possible. If the num-ber of inputs is too high, subdivide the inputs into multiple gates to produce an equivalent. For example, if it isrequired to have 25 inputs to an AND gate, connect inputs 1 through 16 to one AND(16), 17 through 25 toanother AND(9), and the outputs from these two gates to an AND(2).

Inspect each operator between the initial operands and final virtual outputs to determine if the output from theoperator is used as an input to more than one following operator. If so, the output of this operator must beassigned as a Virtual Output.

In the example shown in the figure: EXAMPLE LOGIC SCHEME, the output of the AND gate is used as aninput to both OR #1 and Timer 1, and must therefore be made a Virtual Output and be assigned the next avail-able number (i.e. Virtual Output 3). The final output must also be assigned to a Virtual Output as Virtual Output4, which will be programmed in the contact output section to operate relay H1 (i.e. Output Contact H1).

It is now determined that the required logic can be implemented in FlexLogic™ with two FlexLogic™ equa-tions, with outputs of Virtual Output 3 and Virtual Output 4 as shown in the figure: LOGIC EXAMPLE WITHVIRTUAL OUTPUTS.





5

Figure 5–6: LOGIC EXAMPLE WITH VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

STEP 2:

The next step is to prepare a logic diagram for the equation to produce Virtual Output 3, as this output will beused later as an operand in the equation for Virtual Output 4. (Create the equation for every output which willbe used as an operand first, so that when these operands are required they will already have been evaluatedand assigned to a specific Virtual Output.) The logic for Virtual Output 3 is shown in the figure: LOGIC FORVIRTUAL OUTPUT 3, with the final output assigned.

Figure 5–7: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3





5

STEP 3:

Next, prepare a logic diagram for Virtual Output 4, while replacing the logic ahead of Virtual Output 3 with asymbol identified as Virtual Output 3, as shown in the figure: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4.

Figure 5–8: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4

STEP 4:

Now program the FlexLogic™ equation for Virtual Output 3 by translating the logic into the available Flex-Logic™ parameters. The equation is formed one parameter at a time, until the required logic is complete. It isgenerally easier to start at the output end of the equation and work back towards the input in this process, asshown in the following steps. It is also recommended to list operator inputs from bottom to top. For demonstra-tion, the final output will be arbitrarily identified as parameter 99, and each preceding parameter decrementedby one in turn. Until one is accustomed to using FlexLogic™, it is suggested that a worksheet with a series ofcells marked with the arbitrary parameter numbers be prepared, as shown in the figure: FLEXLOGIC™WORKSHEET.

Figure 5–9: FLEXLOGIC™ WORKSHEET





5

STEP 5:

Following the procedure outlined, start with parameter 99, as follows:

99: The final output of the equation is Virtual Output 3, which is created by the operator "= Virt Op n". Thisparameter is therefore "= Virt Op 3."

98: The gate preceding the output is an AND, which in this case requires two inputs. The operator for this gateis a 2-input AND so the parameter is “AND(2)”. Note that FlexLogic™ rules require that the number ofinputs to most types of operators must be specified to identify the operands for the gate. As the 2-inputAND will operate on the two operands preceding it, these inputs must be specified, starting with the lower.

97: This lower input to the AND gate must be passed through an inverter (the NOT operator) so the nextparameter is “NOT”. The NOT operator will act upon the operand immediately preceding it, so next specifythe input to the inverter.

96: The input to the NOT gate is to be contact input H1c. The ON state of a contact input can be programmedto be set when the contact is either open or closed. Assume for this example the state is to be ON for aclosed contact. The operand is therefore "Cont Ip H1c On".

95: The last step in the procedure is to specify the upper input to the AND gate, the operated state of digitalelement 2. This operand is "DIG ELEM 2 OP".

Writing the parameters in numerical order can now form the equation for VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3:

• [95] DIG ELEM 2 OP

• [96] Cont Ip H1c On

• [97] NOT

• [98] AND(2)

• [99] = Virt Op 3

It is now possible to check that this selection of parameters will produce the required logic by converting the setof parameters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown in figure FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION &LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3, which is compared to figure: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3 as a check.

Figure 5–10: FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION & LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:NOTFLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:AND (2)FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:=Virt Op 3

97

98

99

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:DIG ELEM 2 OPFLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:Cont Ip H1c On

95

96AND

VIRTUALOUTPUT 3

827030A2.VSD





5

STEP 6:

Repeating the process described for VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3, select the FlexLogic™ parameters for VIRTUALOUTPUT 4.

99: The final output of the equation is VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4 which is parameter “= Virt Op 4".

98: The operator preceding the output is Timer 2, which is operand “TIMER 2". Note that the settings requiredfor the timer are established in the timer programming section.

97: The operator preceding Timer 2 is OR #2, a 3-input OR, which is parameter “OR(3)”.

96: The lowest input to OR #2 is operand “Cont Ip H1c On”.

95: The center input to OR #2 is operand “TIMER 1".

94: The input to Timer 1 is operand “Virt Op 3 On".

93: The upper input to OR #2 is operand “LATCH (S,R)”.

92: There are two inputs to a latch, and the input immediately preceding the latch reset is OR #1, a 4-input OR,which is parameter “OR(4)”.

91: The lowest input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 3 On".

90: The input just above the lowest input to OR #1 is operand “XOR(2)”.

89: The lower input to the XOR is operand “DIG ELEM 1 PKP”.

88: The upper input to the XOR is operand “Virt Ip 1 On".

87: The input just below the upper input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 2 On".

86: The upper input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 1 On".

85: The last parameter is used to set the latch, and is operand “Virt Op 4 On".

The equation for VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4 is:

• [85] Virt Op 4 On



• [88] Virt Ip 1 On

• [89] DIG ELEM 1 PKP

• [90] XOR(2)


• [92] OR(4)

• [93] LATCH (S,R)


• [95] TIMER 1

• [96] Cont Ip H1c On

• [97] OR(3)

• [98] TIMER 2

• [99] = Virt Op 4





5

It is now possible to check that the selection of parameters will produce the required logic by converting the setof parameters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown in figure: FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION &LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4, which is compared to figure: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4, as acheck.

Figure 5–11: FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION & LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4





5

STEP 7:

Now write the complete FlexLogic™ expression required to implement the required logic, making an effort toassemble the equation in an order where Virtual Outputs that will be used as inputs to operators are createdbefore needed. In cases where a lot of processing is required to perform considerable logic, this may be diffi-cult to achieve, but in most cases will not cause problems because all of the logic is calculated at least 4 timesper power frequency cycle. The possibility of a problem caused by sequential processing emphasizes thenecessity to test the performance of FlexLogic™ before it is placed in service.

In the following equation, VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3 is used as an input to both Latch 1 and Timer 1 as arranged inthe order shown below:

• DIG ELEM 2 OP

• Cont Ip H1c On

• NOT

• AND(2)

• = Virt Op 3

• Virt Op 4 On

• Virt Op 1 On

• Virt Op 2 On

• Virt Ip 1 On

• DIG ELEM 1 PKP

• XOR(2)

• Virt Op 3 On

• OR(4)

• LATCH (S,R)

• Virt Op 3 On

• TIMER 1

• Cont Ip H1c On

• OR(3)

• TIMER 2

• = Virt Op 4

• END

In the expression above, the VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4 input to the 4-input OR is listed before it is created. This istypical of a form of feedback, in this case, used to create a seal-in effect with the latch, and is correct.

STEP 8:

The logic should always be tested after it is loaded into the relay, in the same fashion as has been used in thepast. Testing can be simplified by placing an "END" operator within the overall set of FlexLogic™ equations.The equations will then only be evaluated up to the first "END" operator.

The "On" and "Off" operands can be placed in an equation to establish a known set of conditions for test pur-poses, and the "INSERT" and "DELETE" commands can be used to modify equations.





5

5.4.3 FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION EDITOR

PATH: SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR

There are 512 FlexLogic™ entries available, numbered from 1 to 512.

If a ‘disabled’ Element is selected as a FlexLogic™ entry, the associated state flag will never be set to ‘1’.

The ‘+/-‘ key may be used when editing FlexLogic™ equations from the keypad to quickly scan through themajor parameter types.

5.4.4 FLEXLOGIC™ TIMERS

PATH: SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC FLEXLOGIC TIMERS FLEXLOGIC TIMER 1

There are 32 identical FlexLogic™ timers available, numbered from 1 to 32.

These timers can be used as operators for FlexLogic™ equations.

TIMER 1 TYPE:

This setting is used to select the time measuring unit.

TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY:

This setting is used to set the time delay to pickup. If a pickup delay is not required, set this function to ‘0’.

TIMER 1 DROPOUT DELAY:

This setting is used to set the time delay to dropout. If a dropout delay is not required, set this function to ‘0’.

FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY 1:END

Range: FlexLogic™ parameters

MESSAGEFLEXLOGIC ENTRY 2:END


::

MESSAGEFLEXLOGIC ENTRY 512:END


FLEXLOGIC TIMER 1

TIMER 1TYPE: millisecond

Range: millisecond, second, minute

MESSAGETIMER 1 PICKUPDELAY: 0


MESSAGETIMER 1 DROPOUTDELAY: 0





5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5 SETTINGS

5

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5.5.1 OVERVIEW

Each element can be assigned up to 8 different sets of settings. The performance of any of these elements isdefined by the setting group that is active at a given time. Multiple setting groups provide the capability to con-veniently change protection settings for different operating situations (e.g. altered power system configuration,another season of the year). The active setting group can be pre-set or selected via the SETTING GROUPSmenu (see the section CONTROL ELEMENTS). See also the section INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS at thefront of this chapter.

5.5.2 CURRENT ELEMENTS MENU

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS

PHASE CURRENT

PHASE TOC1

MESSAGE PHASE IOC1

MESSAGE PHASE IOC2

MESSAGE PHASE DIRECTIONAL 1

MESSAGE PHASE DIRECTIONAL 2

NEUTRAL CURRENT

NEUTRAL TOC1

MESSAGE NEUTRAL IOC1

MESSAGE NEUTRAL IOC2

MESSAGE NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL 1

MESSAGE NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL 2

GROUND CURRENT

GROUND TOC1

MESSAGE GROUND IOC1

MESSAGE GROUND IOC2

NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT

NEG SEQ TOC1

MESSAGE NEG SEQ TOC2

MESSAGE NEG SEQ IOC1




5 SETTINGS 5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

5

The relay current elements menu consists of one time overcurrent element for each of phase, neutral, andground currents; two instantaneous overcurrent elements for each of phase, neutral, and ground currents; twotime overcurrent and two instantaneous elements for negative sequence currents; and two neutral and twophase directional current elements. These elements can be used for tripping, alarming, or other functions.

MESSAGE NEG SEQ IOC2





5

a) INVERSE TIME OVERCURRENT CURVE CHARACTERISTICS

The inverse time overcurrent curves used by the TOC (time overcurrent) Current Elements are the IEEE, IEC,GE Type IAC, and I2t standard curve shapes. This allows for simplified coordination with downstream devices.If however, none of these curve shapes is adequate, the FlexCurve™ may be used to customize the inversetime curve characteristics. The Definite Time curve is also an option that may be appropriate if only simple pro-tection is required.

Table 5–7: OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES

A time dial multiplier setting allows selection of a multiple of the base curve shape (where the time dial multi-plier = 1) that is selected with the curve shape setting. Unlike the electromechanical time dial equivalent, oper-ate times are directly proportional to the time multiplier setting value. For example, all times for a multiplier of10 are 10 times the multiplier 1 or base curve values. Setting the multiplier to zero results in an instantaneousresponse to all current levels above pickup.

Time overcurrent time calculations are made with an internal “energy capacity” memory variable. When thisvariable indicates that the energy capacity has reached 100%, a time overcurrent element will operate. If lessthan 100% energy capacity is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below the dropout threshold of97–98% of the pickup value, the variable must be reduced. Two methods of this resetting operation are avail-able, “Instantaneous” and “Timed”. The Instantaneous selection is intended for applications with other relays,such as most static relays, which set the energy capacity directly to zero when the current falls below the resetthreshold. The Timed selection can be used where the relay must coordinate with electromechanical relays.With this setting, the energy capacity variable is decremented according to the equation provided.

Note: Graphs of standard time-current curves on 11”x17” log-log graph paper are available uponrequest from the GE Multilin literature department. The original files are also available in PDFformat on the UR Software Installation CD and the GE Power Management Home Page.

IEEE IEC GE Type IAC Other

IEEE Extremely Inv. IEC Curve A (BS142) IAC Extremely Inv. I2t

IEEE Very Inverse IEC Curve B (BS142) IAC Very Inverse FlexCurve A

IEEE Moderately Inv. IEC Curve C (BS142) IAC Inverse FlexCurve B

IEC Short Inverse IAC Short Inverse Definite Time





5

IEEE CURVES

The IEEE time overcurrent curve shapes conform to industry standard curves and fit into the IEEE C37.112-1996 curve classifications for extremely, very, and moderately inverse. The IEEE curves are derived from theformulae:

where:

T = Operate Time (sec)TDM = Multiplier Setting

I = Input CurrentIpickup = Pickup Current Setting

A, B, p = ConstantsTRESET = reset time in sec. (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET:Timed)

tr = characteristic constant

Table 5–8: IEEE INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IEEE Curve ShapeConstants

A B p tr

IEEE EXTREMELY INVERSE 28.2 0.1217 2.0000 29.1

IEEE VERY INVERSE 19.61 0.491 2.0000 21.6

IEEE MODERATELY INVERSE 0.0515 0.1140 0.02000 4.85

T TDM AI

Ipickup--------------- p

1–-------------------------------- B+×= TRESET TDM

tr

IIpickup--------------- 2

1–--------------------------------×=





5

Table 5–9: IEEE CURVE OPERATE TIMES (in seconds)

Multiplier Current (I / Ipickup )(TDM) 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0

IEEE EXTREMELY INVERSE0.5 11.341 4.761 1.823 1.001 0.648 0.464 0.355 0.285 0.237 0.2031.0 22.682 9.522 3.647 2.002 1.297 0.927 0.709 0.569 0.474 0.4072.0 45.363 19.043 7.293 4.003 2.593 1.855 1.418 1.139 0.948 0.8134.0 90.727 38.087 14.587 8.007 5.187 3.710 2.837 2.277 1.897 1.6266.0 136.090 57.130 21.880 12.010 7.780 5.564 4.255 3.416 2.845 2.4398.0 181.454 76.174 29.174 16.014 10.374 7.419 5.674 4.555 3.794 3.252

10.0 226.817 95.217 36.467 20.017 12.967 9.274 7.092 5.693 4.742 4.065IEEE VERY INVERSE

0.5 8.090 3.514 1.471 0.899 0.654 0.526 0.450 0.401 0.368 0.3451.0 16.179 7.028 2.942 1.798 1.308 1.051 0.900 0.802 0.736 0.6892.0 32.358 14.055 5.885 3.597 2.616 2.103 1.799 1.605 1.472 1.3784.0 64.716 28.111 11.769 7.193 5.232 4.205 3.598 3.209 2.945 2.7566.0 97.074 42.166 17.654 10.790 7.849 6.308 5.397 4.814 4.417 4.1348.0 129.432 56.221 23.538 14.387 10.465 8.410 7.196 6.418 5.889 5.513

10.0 161.790 70.277 29.423 17.983 13.081 10.513 8.995 8.023 7.361 6.891IEEE MODERATELY INVERSE

0.5 3.220 1.902 1.216 0.973 0.844 0.763 0.706 0.663 0.630 0.6031.0 6.439 3.803 2.432 1.946 1.688 1.526 1.412 1.327 1.260 1.2072.0 12.878 7.606 4.864 3.892 3.377 3.051 2.823 2.653 2.521 2.4144.0 25.756 15.213 9.729 7.783 6.753 6.102 5.647 5.307 5.041 4.8276.0 38.634 22.819 14.593 11.675 10.130 9.153 8.470 7.960 7.562 7.2418.0 51.512 30.426 19.458 15.567 13.507 12.204 11.294 10.614 10.083 9.654

10.0 64.390 38.032 24.322 19.458 16.883 15.255 14.117 13.267 12.604 12.068





5

IEC CURVES

For European applications, the relay offers three standard curves defined in IEC 255-4 and British standardBS142. These are defined as IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, and IEC Curve C. The formulae for these curves are:

where:


I = Input CurrentIpickup = Pickup Current SettingK, E = Constants

TRESET = Reset Time in sec. (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET:Timed)tr = Characteristic Constant

Table 5–10: IEC (BS) INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IEC (BS) Curve ShapeConstants

K E tr

IEC CURVE A (BS1 42) 0.140 0.020 9.7

IEC CURVE B (BS1 42) 13.500 1.000 43.2

IEC CURVE C (BS1 42) 80.000 2.000 58.2

IEC SHORT INVERSE 0.050 0.040 0.500

T TDMK

IIpickup--------------- E

1–---------------------------------×= TRESET TDM

tr

IIpickup--------------- 2

1–--------------------------------×=





5

Table 5–11: IEC CURVE TRIP TIMES (in seconds)

Multiplier Current (I / Ipu )

(TDM) 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0

IEC CURVE A

0.05 0.860 0.501 0.315 0.249 0.214 0.192 0.176 0.165 0.156 0.149

0.10 1.719 1.003 0.630 0.498 0.428 0.384 0.353 0.330 0.312 0.297

0.20 3.439 2.006 1.260 0.996 0.856 0.767 0.706 0.659 0.623 0.594

0.40 6.878 4.012 2.521 1.992 1.712 1.535 1.411 1.319 1.247 1.188

0.60 10.317 6.017 3.781 2.988 2.568 2.302 2.117 1.978 1.870 1.782

0.80 13.755 8.023 5.042 3.984 3.424 3.070 2.822 2.637 2.493 2.376

1.00 17.194 10.029 6.302 4.980 4.280 3.837 3.528 3.297 3.116 2.971

IEC CURVE B

0.05 1.350 0.675 0.338 0.225 0.169 0.135 0.113 0.096 0.084 0.075

0.10 2.700 1.350 0.675 0.450 0.338 0.270 0.225 0.193 0.169 0.150

0.20 5.400 2.700 1.350 0.900 0.675 0.540 0.450 0.386 0.338 0.300

0.40 10.800 5.400 2.700 1.800 1.350 1.080 0.900 0.771 0.675 0.600

0.60 16.200 8.100 4.050 2.700 2.025 1.620 1.350 1.157 1.013 0.900

0.80 21.600 10.800 5.400 3.600 2.700 2.160 1.800 1.543 1.350 1.200

1.00 27.000 13.500 6.750 4.500 3.375 2.700 2.250 1.929 1.688 1.500

IEC CURVE C

0.05 3.200 1.333 0.500 0.267 0.167 0.114 0.083 0.063 0.050 0.040

0.10 6.400 2.667 1.000 0.533 0.333 0.229 0.167 0.127 0.100 0.081

0.20 12.800 5.333 2.000 1.067 0.667 0.457 0.333 0.254 0.200 0.162

0.40 25.600 10.667 4.000 2.133 1.333 0.914 0.667 0.508 0.400 0.323

0.60 38.400 16.000 6.000 3.200 2.000 1.371 1.000 0.762 0.600 0.485

0.80 51.200 21.333 8.000 4.267 2.667 1.829 1.333 1.016 0.800 0.646

1.00 64.000 26.667 10.000 5.333 3.333 2.286 1.667 1.270 1.000 0.808

IEC SHORT TIME

0.05 0.153 0.089 0.056 0.044 0.038 0.034 0.031 0.029 0.027 0.026

0.10 0.306 0.178 0.111 0.088 0.075 0.067 0.062 0.058 0.054 0.052

0.20 0.612 0.356 0.223 0.175 0.150 0.135 0.124 0.115 0.109 0.104

0.40 1.223 0.711 0.445 0.351 0.301 0.269 0.247 0.231 0.218 0.207

0.60 1.835 1.067 0.668 0.526 0.451 0.404 0.371 0.346 0.327 0.311

0.80 2.446 1.423 0.890 0.702 0.602 0.538 0.494 0.461 0.435 0.415

1.00 3.058 1.778 1.113 0.877 0.752 0.673 0.618 0.576 0.544 0.518





5

IAC CURVES

The curves for the General Electric type IAC relay family are derived from the formulae:



A, B, C, D, E = ConstantsTRESET = Reset Time in sec. (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET:Timed)

tr = Characteristic Constant

Table 5–12: GE TYPE IAC INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IAC Curve ShapeConstants

A B C D E tr

IAC EXTREME INVERSE 0.0040 0.6379 0.6200 1.7872 0.2461 6.008

IAC VERY INVERSE 0.0900 0.7955 0.1000 -1.2885 7.9586 4.678

IAC INVERSE 0.2078 0.8630 0.8000 -0.4180 0.1947 0.990

IAC SHORT INVERSE 0.0428 0.0609 0.6200 -0.0010 0.0221 0.222

T TDM A BI

Ipickup--------------- C– ------------------------------- D

IIpickup--------------- C– 2--------------------------------- E

IIpickup--------------- C– 3---------------------------------+ + +×=

TRESET TDMtr

IIpickup--------------- 2

1–--------------------------------×=





5

Table 5–13: IAC CURVE TRIP TIMES

Multiplier Current (I / Ipu )

(TDM) 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0

IAC EXTREMELY INVERSE

0.5 1.699 0.749 0.303 0.178 0.123 0.093 0.074 0.062 0.053 0.046

1.0 3.398 1.498 0.606 0.356 0.246 0.186 0.149 0.124 0.106 0.093

2.0 6.796 2.997 1.212 0.711 0.491 0.372 0.298 0.248 0.212 0.185

4.0 13.591 5.993 2.423 1.422 0.983 0.744 0.595 0.495 0.424 0.370

6.0 20.387 8.990 3.635 2.133 1.474 1.115 0.893 0.743 0.636 0.556

8.0 27.183 11.987 4.846 2.844 1.966 1.487 1.191 0.991 0.848 0.741

10.0 33.979 14.983 6.058 3.555 2.457 1.859 1.488 1.239 1.060 0.926

IAC VERY INVERSE

0.5 1.451 0.656 0.269 0.172 0.133 0.113 0.101 0.093 0.087 0.083

1.0 2.901 1.312 0.537 0.343 0.266 0.227 0.202 0.186 0.174 0.165

2.0 5.802 2.624 1.075 0.687 0.533 0.453 0.405 0.372 0.349 0.331

4.0 11.605 5.248 2.150 1.374 1.065 0.906 0.810 0.745 0.698 0.662

6.0 17.407 7.872 3.225 2.061 1.598 1.359 1.215 1.117 1.046 0.992

8.0 23.209 10.497 4.299 2.747 2.131 1.813 1.620 1.490 1.395 1.323

10.0 29.012 13.121 5.374 3.434 2.663 2.266 2.025 1.862 1.744 1.654

IAC INVERSE

0.5 0.578 0.375 0.266 0.221 0.196 0.180 0.168 0.160 0.154 0.148

1.0 1.155 0.749 0.532 0.443 0.392 0.360 0.337 0.320 0.307 0.297

2.0 2.310 1.499 1.064 0.885 0.784 0.719 0.674 0.640 0.614 0.594

4.0 4.621 2.997 2.128 1.770 1.569 1.439 1.348 1.280 1.229 1.188

6.0 6.931 4.496 3.192 2.656 2.353 2.158 2.022 1.921 1.843 1.781

8.0 9.242 5.995 4.256 3.541 3.138 2.878 2.695 2.561 2.457 2.375

10.0 11.552 7.494 5.320 4.426 3.922 3.597 3.369 3.201 3.072 2.969

IAC SHORT INVERSE

0.5 0.072 0.047 0.035 0.031 0.028 0.027 0.026 0.026 0.025 0.025

1.0 0.143 0.095 0.070 0.061 0.057 0.054 0.052 0.051 0.050 0.049

2.0 0.286 0.190 0.140 0.123 0.114 0.108 0.105 0.102 0.100 0.099

4.0 0.573 0.379 0.279 0.245 0.228 0.217 0.210 0.204 0.200 0.197

6.0 0.859 0.569 0.419 0.368 0.341 0.325 0.314 0.307 0.301 0.296

8.0 1.145 0.759 0.559 0.490 0.455 0.434 0.419 0.409 0.401 0.394

10.0 1.431 0.948 0.699 0.613 0.569 0.542 0.524 0.511 0.501 0.493





5

I²t CURVES

The curves for the I²t are derived from the formulae:

where:



TRESET = Reset Time in sec. (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET:Timed)

Table 5–14: I²t CURVE TRIP TIMES

Multiplier Current (I/Ipu)

(TDM) 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0

0.01 0.44 0.25 0.11 0.06 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01

0.10 4.44 2.50 1.11 0.63 0.40 0.28 0.20 0.16 0.12 0.10

1.00 44.44 25.00 11.11 6.25 4.00 2.78 2.04 1.56 1.23 1.00

10.00 444.44 250.00 111.11 62.50 40.00 27.78 20.41 15.63 12.35 10.00

100.00 4444.4 2500.0 1111.1 625.00 400.00 277.78 204.08 156.25 123.46 100.00

600.00 26666.7 15000.0 6666.7 3750.0 2400.0 1666.7 1224.5 937.50 740.74 600.00

T TDM100I

Ipickup--------------- 2-----------------------×= TRESET TDM

100I

Ipickup--------------- 2–--------------------------×=





5

FLEXCURVE™

The custom FlexCurve™ is described in detail in the sub-section FLEXCURVE™ A / FLEXCURVE™ B of sec-tion SYSTEM SETUP. The curve shapes for the FlexCurves™ are derived from the formulae:

where:




DEFINITE TIME CURVE

The Definite Time curve shape operates as soon as the pickup level is exceeded for a specified period of time.The base definite time curve delay is in seconds. The curve multiplier of 0.00 - 600.00 makes this delay adjust-able from instantaneous to 600.00 seconds in steps of 10 ms.

T = TDM in seconds, when I > Ipickup

TRESET= -TDM in seconds

where:




T TDM FlexcurveTime@I

Ipickup--------------- ×= When

IIpickup--------------- 1.00≥

TRESET TDM FlexcurveTime@I

Ipickup--------------- ×= When

IIpickup--------------- 0.98≤





5

b) PHASE TOC1 (PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT - ANSI 51P)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS PHASE CURRENT PHASE TOC1

The phase time overcurrent element may be used to give a desired time-delay operating characteristic versusthe applied current, or as a simple Definite Time element. The phase current input quantities may be pro-grammed as Fundamental phasor magnitude or total waveform RMS magnitude as required by the application.Two methods of resetting operation are available, “Timed” and “Instantaneous”. (Refer to section INVERSETIME OVERCURRENT CURVE CHARACTERISTICS for details on curve setup, trip times and reset opera-tion.)

The pickup setting of the element can be dynamically reduced by a Voltage Restraint mechanism. If the volt-age restraint feature is disabled, the pickup always remains at the programmed value.

When voltage restraint operation is enabled, the pickup level of each individual phase element is loweredaccording to a fixed relationship with the corresponding phase-phase input voltage, as shown in the followingfigure, VOLTAGE RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTIC FOR PHASE TOC.

PHASE TOC1

PHASE TOC1FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGEPHASE TOC1 SIGNALSOURCE: SRC 1

Range: SRC 1, ..., SRC 6

MESSAGEPHASE TOC1INPUT: Phasor

Range: Phasor, RMS

MESSAGEPHASE TOC1PICKUP: 1.000 pu

Range: 0.000 to 30.000 in steps of 0.001 pu

MESSAGEPHASE TOC1CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv

See Overcurrent Curve Types table

MESSAGEPHASE TOC1TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00


MESSAGEPHASE TOC1RESET: Instantaneous

Range: Instantaneous, Timed

MESSAGEPHASE TOC1 VOLTAGERESTRAINT: Disabled


MESSAGEPHASE TOC1 BLOCK A:Off


MESSAGEPHASE TOC1 BLOCK B:Off


MESSAGEPHASE TOC1 BLOCK C:Off


MESSAGEPHASE TOC1TARGET: Self-reset

Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGEPHASE TOC1EVENTS: Disabled






5

Figure 5–12: VOLTAGE RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTIC FOR PHASE TOC

Figure 5–13: PHASE TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

1.0

0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.00

818784A4.CDR

Mu

ltip

lier

for

Pic

ku

pC

urr

en

t

Phase-Phase Voltage ÷ VT Nominal Phase-Phase Voltage





5

c) PHASE IOC1 / IOC2 (PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT - ANSI 50P)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS PHASE CURRENT PHASE IOC1

The phase instantaneous overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentionaldelay or as a Definite Time element. The input current is the fundamental phasor magnitude.

Figure 5–14: PHASE IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC

PHASE IOC1

PHASE IOC1FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGEPHASE IOC1 SIGNALSOURCE: SRC 1


MESSAGEPHASE IOC1PICKUP: 1.000 pu


MESSAGEPHASE IOC1 PICKUPDELAY: 0.00 s


MESSAGEPHASE IOC1 RESETDELAY: 0.00 s


MESSAGEPHASE IOC1 BLOCK A:Off


MESSAGEPHASE IOC1 BLOCK B:Off


MESSAGEPHASE IOC1 BLOCK C:Off


MESSAGEPHASE IOC1TARGET: Self-reset


MESSAGEPHASE IOC1EVENTS: Disabled






5

d) PHASE DIRECTIONAL 1(2)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS PHASE CURRENT PHASE DIRECTIONAL 1

The phase directional elements (one for each of phases A, B, & C) determines the direction of flow of thephase current for steady state and fault conditions and can be used to control the operation of the phase over-current elements via the BLOCK inputs of these elements.

The design of the element emulates the electro-mechanical torque control principle, which applies a block sig-nal to a supervised element unless the direction of current flow is determined to be in the trip direction. Thedirection of current flow is determined by measuring the phase angle between the current from the phase CTsand the line-line voltage from the VTs, based on the 90° or "quadrature" connection.

To increase security for three phase faults very close to the location of the VTs used to measure the polarizingvoltage, a ‘voltage memory’ feature is incorporated. This feature remembers the measurement of the polarizingvoltage the moment before the voltage collapses, and uses it to determine direction. The voltage memoryremains valid for one second after the voltage has collapsed.

PHASE DIRECTIONAL 1

PHASE DIR 1FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGEPHASE DIR 1 SIGNALSOURCE: SRC 1


MESSAGEPHASE DIR 1 BLOCK:Off


MESSAGEPHASE DIR 1ECA: 30

Range: 0 to 359° in steps of 1°

MESSAGEPHASE DIR POL V1THRESHOLD:0.050 pu


MESSAGEPHASE DIR 1 BLOCKWHEN V MEM EXP:No

Range: No, Yes

MESSAGEPHASE DIR 1TARGET: Self-reset


MESSAGEPHASE DIR 1EVENTS: Disabled






5

Figure 5–15: PHASE-A DIRECTIONAL POLARIZATION

The main component of the phase directional element is the phase angle comparator with two inputs; the oper-ating signal (the phase current) and the polarizing signal (the line voltage, shifted in the leading direction by theElement Characteristic Angle, ECA).

The following table shows the operating and polarizing signals used for phase directional control:

MODE OF OPERATION:

• When the Phase Directional function is "Disabled", or the operating current is below 5%xCT Nominal, theelement output is "0".

Phase Operating Signal Polarizing SignalVPol (ABC phase sequence)

Polarizing SignalVPol (ACB phase sequence)

A Angle of IA Angle of VBC*(1∠ECA) Angle of VCB*(1∠ECA)

B Angle of IB Angle of VCA*(1∠ECA) Angle of VAC*(1∠ECA)

C Angle of IC Angle of VAB*(1∠ECA) Angle of VBA*(1∠ECA)





5

• When the Phase Directional function is "Enabled", the operating current is above 5%xCT Nominal and thepolarizing voltage is above the set threshold, the element output depends on the phase angle between theoperating and polarizing signals as follows:

- The element output is logic "0" when the operating current is within polarizing voltage ±90°.

- For all other angles, the element output is logic "1".

• Once the voltage memory has expired, the phase overcurrent elements under directional control can beset to block or trip on overcurrent as follows:

- When the BLOCK WHEN V MEM EXP setting is set to "Yes", the directional element will block the opera-tion of any phase overcurrent element under directional control when voltage memory expires; when set to"No", the directional element allows tripping of phase overcurrent elements under directional control whenvoltage memory expires.

In all cases, directional blocking will be permitted to resume when the polarizing voltage becomes greater thanthe "polarizing voltage threshold".

SETTINGS:

PHASE DIR 1 SIGNAL SOURCE:

This setting is used to select the source for the operating and polarizing signals.

The operating current for the phase directional element is the phase current for the selected current source.The polarizing voltage is the line voltage from the phase VTs, based on the 90° or "quadrature" connection andshifted in the leading direction by the Element Characteristic Angle, ECA.

PHASE DIR 1 ECA:

This setting is used to select the Element Characteristic Angle, i.e. the angle by which the polarizing voltage isshifted in the leading direction to achieve dependable operation.

PHASE DIR 1 POL V THRESHOLD:

This setting is used to establish the minimum level of voltage for which the phase angle measurement is reli-able. The setting is based on VT accuracy. The default value is 0.05 pu.

PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK OC WHEN V MEM EXP:

This setting is used to select the required operation upon expiration of voltage memory. When set to "Yes", thedirectional element blocks the operation of any phase overcurrent element under directional control, when volt-age memory expires; when set to "No", the directional element allows tripping of phase overcurrent elementsunder directional control.

NOTE: For increased security, 20 ms of intentional delay must be added to all overcurrent elementsunder directional control, to prevent operational errors on current ‘swings’.





5

Figure 5–16: PHASE DIRECTIONAL SCHEME LOGIC





5

e) NEUTRAL TOC1 (NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT - ANSI 51N)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS NEUTRAL CURRENT NEUTRAL TOC1

The neutral time overcurrent element may be used to give a desired time-delay operating characteristic versusthe applied current or as a simple Definite Time element. The neutral current input value is a quantity calcu-lated as 3Io from the phase currents and may be programmed as fundamental phasor magnitude or total wave-form RMS magnitude as required by the application. Two methods of resetting operation are available “Linear”and “Instantaneous”. (Refer to section INVERSE TIME OVERCURRENT CURVE CHARACTERISTICS fordetails on curve setup, trip times and reset operation.)

Figure 5–17: NEUTRAL TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC

NEUTRAL TOC1

NEUTRAL TOC1FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGENEUTRAL TOC1 SIGNALSOURCE: SRC 1


MESSAGENEUTRAL TOC1INPUT: Phasor

Range: Phasor, RMS

MESSAGENEUTRAL TOC1PICKUP: 1.000 pu


MESSAGENEUTRAL TOC1CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv


MESSAGENEUTRAL TOC1TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00


MESSAGENEUTRAL TOC1RESET: Instantaneous


MESSAGENEUTRAL TOC1 BLOCK:Off


MESSAGENEUTRAL TOC1TARGET: Self-reset


MESSAGENEUTRAL TOC1EVENTS: Disabled






5

f) NEUTRAL IOC1 / IOC2 (NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT - ANSI 50N)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS NEUTRAL CURRENT NEUTRAL IOC1

The neutral instantaneous overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentionaldelay or as a Definite Time element. The neutral current input value is a quantity calculated as 3Io from thephase currents and is the fundamental phasor magnitude.

Figure 5–18: NEUTRAL IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC

NEUTRAL IOC1

NEUTRAL IOC1FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGENEUTRAL IOC1 SIGNALSOURCE: SRC 1


MESSAGENEUTRAL IOC1PICKUP: 1.000 pu


MESSAGENEUTRAL IOC1 PICKUPDELAY: 0.00 s


MESSAGENEUTRAL IOC1 RESETDELAY: 0.00 s


MESSAGENEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK:Off


MESSAGENEUTRAL IOC1TARGET: Self-reset


MESSAGENEUTRAL IOC1EVENTS: Disabled






5

g) NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL 1(2)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS NEUTRAL CURRENT NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL 1

The neutral directional element discriminates between ground faults in the forward and reverse directions. Thisfeature can be used to control the operation of other elements, such as neutral instantaneous or neutral timeovercurrent, via the BLOCK input of those elements. The design of the element emulates the electro-mechani-cal torque control principle, which applies a block signal to a supervised element unless the direction of neutral(3I_0) current flow is determined to be in the trip direction. The direction of current flow is determined by mea-suring the angle between the residual current from the phase CTs (the operating parameter) and either theangle of the zero sequence voltage or the angle of the current from a CT inserted between ground and the neu-tral of a local source of ground fault current (the polarizing parameter).

The main component of the neutral directional element is a phase angle comparator. The comparator has twoinputs; an operating parameter and a polarizing parameter.

The following table shows the operating and polarizing parameters used in the comparators (all parametersshown are phasors):

Where: 3I_0 = IN = IA + IB + IC = the calculated residual current.

3V_0Pol = (VAG + VBG + VCG)*1∠ECA = zero sequence voltage at the relay location shifted in thelagging direction by the angle Element Characteristic Angle (ECA).

IG = the ground current.

NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL 1

NEUTRAL DIR 1FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGENEUTRAL DIR 1 SIGNALSOURCE: SRC 1


MESSAGENEUTRAL DIR 1 BLOCK:Off


MESSAGENEUTRAL DIR 1POLARIZING:Voltage

Range: Voltage, Current, Dual

MESSAGENEUTRAL DIR POL V1THRESHOLD:0.050 pu


MESSAGENEUTRAL DIR 1ECA: 75


MESSAGENEUTRAL DIR 1LIMIT ANGLE: 90


MESSAGENEUTRAL DIR 1TARGET: Self-reset


MESSAGENEUTRAL DIR 1EVENTS: Disabled


Operating Parameter Polarizing Parameter

Voltage Polarized Comparator Angle of 3I_0 Angle of 3V_0Pol

Current Polarized Comparator Angle of 3I_0 Angle of IG





5

VOLTAGE POLARIZING:

This comparator measures the angles between the residual current flowing in the protected circuit, 3I_0, andthe polarizing voltage, V_0Pol, defined above. During normal operating conditions (no fault), both 3I_0 and3V_0 have low magnitudes and the comparator output is set to logic "0", setting the element output operand tologic "1". An operating current level below 0.05 per unit of CT rating will force the comparator output to "0". Thezero sequence voltage magnitude below which the comparator output is forced to "0" is programmable.

When a fault occurs and both 3I_0 and 3V_0 increase above their operating thresholds, the comparator willstart performing the measurement. The comparator output is held at "0" until transients have been removedfrom the input phasors, when the output is determined by the angle comparison.

This comparator has two programmable angles, the ECA and the Limit Angle (LA) which define the character-istics of the unit (see the following figure, NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL VOLTAGE POLARIZATION). After thetransient period, the output of this comparator is logic "0" when the angle of operating current is in phase withthe polarizing voltage ± angle LA. For all other angles, the output is logic "1".

Figure 5–19: NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL VOLTAGE POLARIZATION





5

The above figure shows the phase comparator diagram for a single-phase to ground fault and the followingsettings:

ECA = 75°

LA = 90°

To change the blocking direction of the directional element by 180°, the ECA is shifted by an angle of (180° +75°) = 255° in the lagging direction. The settings for this situation would be:

ECA = 255°

LA = 90°

CURRENT POLARIZING:

The current comparator measures the angle between the residual current flowing in the protected circuit (3I_0)and the polarizing current (IG) defined above. During normal operating conditions (no fault), both 3I_0 and IGhave low magnitudes and the comparator output is set to logic "0", setting the element output operand to logic"1". An operating or a polarizing current level below 0.05 per unit will force the comparator output to "0".

When a fault occurs and 3I_0 increases above its operating threshold, the comparator will start performing themeasurement. The comparator output is held at "0" until transients have been removed from the input phasors,when the output is determined by the angle comparison.

After the transient period, the output of this comparator is logic "1" when the angle of operating current (3I_0) isin phase with the polarizing current (IG) ± 90°. For all other angles, the output is logic "0".

DUAL POLARIZING:

Dual polarization uses both the voltage polarized and current polarized comparators to provide more reliabilitythan a single method of polarization. If the polarizing voltage magnitude is insufficient the current polarized unitcontrols the output. If the polarizing current magnitude is insufficient the voltage polarized unit controls the out-put. If neither voltage nor current polarization is possible because of low parameter levels, both comparatorsoutputs are set to logic "0", and the element output operand to logic "1".

SETTINGS:

NEUTRAL DIR 1 SIGNAL SOURCE:

This setting is used to select the source for the operating and polarizing quantities.

The operating current will be the calculated zero sequence current for the selected set of CTs.

The polarizing voltage will be the calculated zero sequence voltage for the selected set of VTs.

The polarizing current is the ground current from a current polarizing source, usually a CT on the neutralgrounding of a transformer.

NEUTRAL DIR 1 POLARIZING:

This setting is used to select the polarizing method. If voltage polarizing is desired, enter "Voltage". If currentpolarizing is desired, enter "Current". If both voltage and current polarizing methods are desired, enter "Dual".Note that "Current" and "Dual" polarizing is possible only if the relay is connected to a current polarizingsource, and voltage polarizing requires the source VTs be connected in Wye.

NEUTRAL DIR 1 POL V THRESHOLD:

As the system zero sequence voltage is used as the polarizing voltage, a minimum level of voltage must beselected to prevent operation caused by system unbalanced voltages or VT ratio errors. For well-balanced sys-tems and 1% accuracy VTs, this setting can be as low as 2% of VT nominal voltage. For systems with high-resistance grounding or floating neutrals, this setting can be as high as 20%. The default of 5% is appropriatefor most solidly grounded systems. This setting affects the voltage element only.





5

NEUTRAL DIR 1 ECA:

This setting is used to select the Element Characteristic Angle, i.e. the angle by which the zero sequence volt-age is shifted in the lagging direction, to generate the polarizing voltage. This is the angle by which thereversed residual voltage (-3V_0) is displaced from the residual current (3I_0) and is equal to the angle of thesource and line impedances (Z0S + Z0L). This setting only affects the voltage polarized element. (See also theAPPLICATION OF SETTINGS chapter)

NEUTRAL DIR 1 LIMIT ANGLE:

This setting is used to select the angle between the ECA and the limit line for which the comparator will set theoutput to "1". This setting only affects the voltage polarized element.

Two neutral directional elements are available in the UR relay. They can be used to control the operation of theneutral overcurrent protection for two different directions.

NOTE: For increased security, 20 ms of intentional delay must be added to all overcurrent elementsunder directional control, to prevent operational errors on current ‘swings’.

Figure 5–20: NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL SCHEME LOGIC





5

h) GROUND TOC1 (GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT - ANSI 51G)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS GROUND CURRENT GROUND TOC1

The ground time overcurrent element may be used to give a desired time-delay operating characteristic versusthe applied current or as a simple Definite Time element. The ground current input value is the quantity mea-sured by the ground input CT and is the fundamental phasor or RMS magnitude. Two methods of resettingoperation are available; “Timed” and “Instantaneous”. (Refer to section INVERSE TIME OVERCURRENTCURVE CHARACTERISTICS for details on curve setup, trip times and reset operation.)

Figure 5–21: GROUND TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC

GROUND TOC1

GROUND TOC1FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGEGROUND TOC1 SIGNALSOURCE: SRC 1


MESSAGEGROUND TOC1INPUT: Phasor

Range: Phasor, RMS

MESSAGEGROUND TOC1PICKUP: 1.000 pu


MESSAGEGROUND TOC1CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv


MESSAGEGROUND TOC1TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00


MESSAGEGROUND TOC1RESET: Instantaneous


MESSAGEGROUND TOC1 BLOCK:Off


MESSAGEGROUND TOC1TARGET: Self-reset


MESSAGEGROUND TOC1EVENTS: Disabled






5

i) GROUND IOC1 / IOC2 (GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT - ANSI 50G)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS GROUND CURRENT GROUND IOC1

The ground instantaneous overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentionaldelay or as a Definite Time element. The ground current input value is the quantity measured by the groundinput CT and is the fundamental phasor magnitude.

Figure 5–22: GROUND IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC

GROUND IOC1

GROUND IOC1FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGEGROUND IOC1 SIGNALSOURCE: SRC 1


MESSAGEGROUND IOC1PICKUP: 1.000 pu


MESSAGEGROUND IOC1 PICKUPDELAY: 0.00 s


MESSAGEGROUND IOC1 RESETDELAY: 0.00 s


MESSAGEGROUND IOC1 BLOCK:Off


MESSAGEGROUND IOC1TARGET: Self-reset


MESSAGEGROUND IOC1EVENTS: Disabled






5

j) NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC1 / TOC2

(NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TIME OVERCURRENT - ANSI 51_2)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT NEQ SEQ TOC1

The negative sequence time overcurrent element may be used to determine and clear unbalance in the sys-tem. The input for calculating negative sequence current is the fundamental phasor value. Two methods ofresetting operation are available; “Timed” and “Instantaneous”. (Refer to section INVERSE TIME OVERCUR-RENT CURVE CHARACTERISTICS for details on curve setup, trip times and reset operation.)

Figure 5–23: NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC

NEG SEQ TOC1

NEG SEQ TOC1FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGENEG SEQ TOC1 SIGNALSOURCE: SRC 1


MESSAGENEG SEQ TOC1PICKUP: 1.000 pu


MESSAGENEG SEQ TOC1CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv


MESSAGENEG SEQ TOC1TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00


MESSAGENEG SEQ TOC1RESET: Instantaneous


MESSAGENEG SEQ TOC1 BLOCK:Off


MESSAGENEG SEQ TOC1TARGET: Self-reset


MESSAGENEG SEQ TOC1EVENTS: Disabled


FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

NEG SEQ TOC1 FUNCTION:

NEG SEQ TOC1 PICKUP:

NEG SEQ TOC1 CURVE:

NEG SEQ TOC1 TD MULTIPLIER:

NEG SEQ TOC1 RESET:

NEG SEQ TOC1 INPUT:

NEG SEQ TOC1 SOURCE:

NEG SEQ TOC1 BLOCK:

NEG SEQ TOC1 DPO

NEG SEQ TOC1 OP

NEG SEQ TOC1 PKP

AND

827057A4.CDR

SETTING

SETTING

Enabled=1

Disabled=0

SETTING

SETTING

Neg Seq

Off=0t

NEG SEQ PICKUP<RUN





5

k) NEGATIVE SEQUENCE IOC1 / IOC2

(NEGATIVE SEQUENCE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT - ANSI 50_2)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT NEG SEQ IOC1

The negative sequence instantaneous overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous element with nointentional delay or as a Definite Time element. The input for calculating negative sequence current is the fun-damental phasor magnitude.

Figure 5–24: NEGATIVE SEQUENCE IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC

NEG SEQ IOC1

NEG SEQ IOC1FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGENEG SEQ IOC1 SIGNALSOURCE: SRC 1


MESSAGENEG SEQ IOC1PICKUP: 1.000 pu


MESSAGENEG SEQ IOC1 PICKUPDELAY: 0.00 s


MESSAGENEG SEQ IOC1 RESETDELAY: 0.00 s


MESSAGENEG SEQ IOC1 BLOCK:Off


MESSAGENEG SEQ IOC1TARGET: Self-reset


MESSAGENEG SEQ IOC1EVENTS: Disabled


FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

NEG SEQ IOC1 FUNCTION:

NEG SEQ IOC1 PICKUP:

NEG SEQ IOC1 SOURCE:

NEG SEQ IOC1 BLOCK:

NEG SEQ IOC1 DPO

NEG SEQ IOC1 OP

NEG SEQ IOC1 PKP

RUNNEG SEQ PICKUP

AND

827058A4.CDR

SETTING

SETTINGEnabled=1

Disabled=0

SETTING

SETTING

Neg Seq

Off=0

<

SETTING

UNDERFREQRESET DELAY1 :

UNDERFREQPICKUP DELAY1 :

tPKP

tRST





5

5.5.3 BREAKER FAILURE 1(2)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS BREAKER FAILURE BREAKER FAILURE 1

BREAKER FAILURE 1

BF1 FUNCTION:Disabled


MESSAGEBF1 MODE:3-Pole

Range: 3-Pole, 1-Pole

MESSAGEBF1 NAME:Breaker 1

Range: 12 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGEBF1 SOURCE:SRC 1

Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, ..., SRC 6

MESSAGEBF1 USE AMP SUPV:Yes

Range: Yes, No

MESSAGEBF1 USE SEAL-IN:Yes

Range: Yes, No

MESSAGEBF1 3-POLE INITIATE:Off


MESSAGEBF1 BLOCK:Off


MESSAGEBF1 PH AMP SUPVPICKUP: 1.050 pu

Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 pu

MESSAGEBF1 N AMP SUPVPICKUP: 1.050 pu


MESSAGEBF1 USE TIMER 1:Yes

Range: Yes, No

MESSAGEBF1 TIMER 1 PICKUPDELAY: 0.000 s

Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 s


Range: Yes, No




Range: Yes, No



MESSAGEBF1 BKR POS1φA/3P:Off


MESSAGEBF1 BKR POS2φA/3P:Off


MESSAGEBF1 BREAKER TEST ON:Off


MESSAGEBF1 PH AMP HISETPICKUP: 1.050 pu






5

There are 2 identical Breaker Failure menus available, numbered 1 and 2.

MESSAGEBF1 N AMP HISETPICKUP: 1.050 pu


MESSAGEBF1 PH AMP LOSETPICKUP: 1.050 pu


MESSAGEBF1 N AMP LOSETPICKUP: 1.050 pu


MESSAGEBF1 LOSET TIMEDELAY: 0.000 s


MESSAGEBF1 TRIP DROPOUTDELAY: 0.000 s


MESSAGEBF1 TARGETLatched


MESSAGEBF1 EVENTSEnabled


MESSAGEBF1 PH A INITIATE:Off

Range: FlexLogic™ OperandNote: valid only for 1-Pole breaker failure schemes.

MESSAGEBF1 PH B INITIATE:Off


MESSAGEBF1 PH C INITIATE:Off


MESSAGEBF1 BKR POS1φBOff


MESSAGEBF1 BKR POS1φCOff


MESSAGEBF1 BKR POS2φBOff


MESSAGEBF1 BKR POS2φCOff






5

a) BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION

In general, a breaker failure scheme determines that a breaker signaled to trip has not cleared a fault within adefinite time, so further tripping action must be performed. Tripping from the breaker failure scheme should tripall breakers, both local and remote, that can supply current to the faulted zone. (In some applications remotebreakers cannot be directly tripped because of a lack of communications equipment.) Usually operation of abreaker failure element will cause clearing of a larger section of the power system than the initial trip. Becausebreaker failure can result in tripping a large number of breakers and this affects system safety and stability, avery high level of security is required.

Two schemes are provided, one for use with three-pole only tripping (identified by the name "3BF") and one foruse on three pole + single-pole operation (identified by the name "1BF"). The philosophy used in theseschemes is identical.

The operation of a breaker failure element includes three stages: initiation, determination of a breaker failurecondition, and output; as described below.

INITIATION:

A FlexLogic™ operand that represents the protection trip signal initially sent to the breaker, initiates thescheme. (The protection trip signal does not include other breaker commands that are not indicative of a faultin the protected zone.) The initiating signal should be sealed-in if primary fault detection can reset before thebreaker failure timers have finished timing. The seal-in is supervised by current level, so it is reset when thefault is cleared. If desired, an incomplete sequence seal-in reset can be implemented by using the initiatingoperand to also initiate a FlexLogic™ timer, set longer than any breaker failure timer, whose output operand isselected to block the breaker failure scheme.

Schemes can be initiated either directly or with current level supervision. It is particularly important in any appli-cation to decide if a current-supervised initiate is to be used. The use of a current-supervised initiate results inthe breaker failure element not being initiated for a breaker that has very little current flowing through it, whichmay be the case for transformer faults. This can also occur in breaker-and-a-half or ring bus configurationswhere the first breaker closes into a fault, the protection trips and attempts to initiate breaker failure for the sec-ond breaker, which is in the process of closing, but does not yet have current flowing through it.

Immediately when the scheme is initiated, it will send a trip signal to the breaker initially signaled to trip, a fea-ture usually described as Re-Trip. This is intended to reduce the possibility of widespread tripping that resultsfrom a declaration of a failed breaker.

DETERMINATION OF A BREAKER FAILURE CONDITION:

The schemes determine a breaker failure condition via three ‘paths’. Each of these paths is equipped with atime delay, after which a failed breaker is declared and trip signals are sent to all breakers required to clear thezone. The delayed paths are associated with Breaker Failure Timers 1, 2 and 3, which are intended to havedelays increasing with increasing timer numbers. These delayed paths are individually enabled to allow formaximum flexibility.

Timer 1 logic (Early Path) is supervised by a fast-operating breaker auxiliary contact. If the breaker is stillclosed (as indicated by the auxiliary contact) and fault current is detected after the delay interval, an output isissued. Operation of the breaker auxiliary switch indicates that the breaker has mechanically operated. Thecontinued presence of current indicates that the breaker has failed to interrupt the circuit.

Timer 2 logic (Main Path) is not supervised by a breaker auxiliary contact. If fault current is detected after thedelay interval, an output is issued. This path is intended to detect a breaker that opens mechanically but fails tointerrupt fault current; the logic therefore does not use a breaker auxiliary contact.





5

The Timer 1 and 2 paths provide two levels of current supervision, Hiset and Loset, so that the supervisionlevel can be changed from a current which flows before a breaker inserts an opening resistor into the faultedcircuit to a lower level after resistor insertion. The Hiset detector is enabled after timeout of Timer 1 or 2, alongwith a timer that will enable the Loset detector after its delay interval. The delay interval between Hiset andLoset is the expected breaker opening time.

Both current detectors provide a fast operating time for currents at small multiples of the pickup value. The O/Cdetectors are required to operate after the breaker failure delay interval to eliminate the need for very fastresetting O/C detectors.

Timer 3 logic (Slow Path) is supervised by a breaker auxiliary contact and a control switch contact used to indi-cate that the breaker is in/out of service, disabling this path when the breaker is out of service for maintenance.There is no current level check in this logic as it is intended to detect low magnitude faults and it is therefore theslowest to operate.

OUTPUT:

The outputs from the schemes are:

• FlexLogic™ operands that report on the operation of portions of the scheme

• FlexLogic™ operand used to re-trip the protected breaker

• FlexLogic™ operands that initiate tripping required to clear the faulted zone. The trip output can be sealed-in for an adjustable period.

• Target message indicating a failed breaker has been declared

• Illumination of the faceplate TRIP LED (and the PHASE A, B or C LED for 1-pole operation)

• Illumination of a user-programmed faceplate BREAKER - TROUBLE LED. Schemes with the numericalsuffix 1(2) operate the corresponding BREAKER 1(2) LED.

MAIN PATH SEQUENCE:

A diagram showing trip operating sequences is shown below:





5

Figure 5–25: BREAKER FAILURE MAIN PATH SEQUENCE





5

SETTINGS:

BF1 MODE:

This setting is used to select the breaker failure operating mode: single or three pole.

BF1 NAME:

This setting is used to identify the name of the protected breaker for record purposes.

BF1 USE AMP SUPV:

If set to Yes, the element will only be initiated if current flowing through the breaker is above the supervisionpickup level.

BF1 USE SEAL-IN:

If set to Yes, the element will only be sealed-in if current flowing through the breaker is above the supervisionpickup level.

BF1 3-POLE INITIATE:

This setting is used to select the Flexlogic™ operand that will initiate 3-pole tripping of the breaker.

BF1 PH AMP SUPV PICKUP:

This setting is used to set the phase current initiation and seal-in supervision level. Generally this settingshould detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker. It can be set as low as necessary(lower than breaker resistor current or lower than load current) - Hiset and Loset current supervision will guar-antee correct operation.

BF1 N AMP SUPV PICKUP: **

This setting is used to set the neutral current initiate and seal-in supervision level. Generally this setting shoulddetect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker. Neutral current supervision is used only inthe three phase scheme to provide increased sensitivity.

** This setting is valid only for 3-Pole breaker failure schemes.

BF1 USE TIMER 1:

If set to Yes, the Early Path is operational.

BF1 TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY:

Timer 1 is set to the shortest time required for breaker auxiliary contact Status-1 to open, from the time the ini-tial trip signal is applied to the breaker trip circuit, plus a safety margin.

BF1 USE TIMER 2:

If set to Yes, the Main Path is operational.


Timer 2 is set to the expected opening time of the breaker, plus a safety margin. Note that in bulk oil circuitbreakers, the interrupting time for currents less than 25% of the interrupting rating can be significantly longerthan the nominal interrupting time.

BF1 USE TIMER 3:

If set to Yes, the Slow Path is operational.


Timer 3 is set to the same interval as Timer 2, plus an increased safety margin. Because this path is intendedto operate only for low level faults, the delay can be in the order of 300-500 ms.





5

BF1 BKR POS1 φA/3P:

This setting is used to select the FlexLogic™ operand that represents the protected breaker early-type auxil-iary switch contact (52/a). When using 1-Pole breaker failure scheme, this FlexLogic™ operand represents theprotected breaker early-type auxiliary switch contact on pole A. This is normally a non-multiplied Form-A con-tact. The contact may even be adjusted to have the shortest possible operating time.

BF1 BKR POS2 φA/3P:

This setting is used to select the FlexLogic™ operand that represents the breaker normal-type auxiliary switchcontact (52/a). When using 1-Pole breaker failure scheme, this FlexLogic™ operand represents the protectedbreaker auxiliary switch contact on pole A. This may be a multiplied contact.

BF1 BREAKER TEST ON:

This setting is used to select the FlexLogic™ operand that represents the breaker In-Service/Out-of-Serviceswitch set to the Out-of-Service position.

BF1 PH AMP HISET PICKUP:

This setting is used to set the phase current output supervision level. Generally this setting should detect thelowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, before a breaker opening resistor is inserted.

BF1 N AMP HISET PICKUP: **

This setting is used to set the neutral current output supervision level. Generally this setting should detect thelowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, before a breaker opening resistor is inserted. Neutralcurrent supervision is used only in the three pole scheme to provide increased sensitivity.


BF1 PH AMP LOSET PICKUP:

This setting is used to set the phase current output supervision level. Generally this setting should detect thelowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, after a breaker opening resistor is inserted (approxi-mately 90% of the resistor current).

BF1 N AMP LOSET PICKUP: **

This setting is used to set the neutral current output supervision level. Generally this setting should detect thelowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, after a breaker opening resistor is inserted (approxi-mately 90% of the resistor current).


BF1 LOSET TIME DELAY:

This setting is used to set the pickup delay for current detection after opening resistor insertion.

BF1 TRIP DROPOUT DELAY:

This setting is used to set the period of time for which the trip output is sealed-in. This timer must be coordi-nated with the automatic reclosing scheme of the failed breaker, to which the breaker failure element sends acancel reclosure signal. Reclosure of a remote breaker can also be prevented by holding a Transfer Trip signalon longer than the "reclaim" time.

The following settings are valid for 1-Pole breaker failure schemes only:

BF1 PH A INITIATE:

This setting is used to select the FlexLogic™ operand that will initiate phase A 1-pole tripping of the breakerand the phase A portion of the scheme.





5

BF1 PH B INITIATE:

This setting is used to select the FlexLogic™ operand that will initiate phase B 1-pole tripping of the breakerand the phase B portion of the scheme.

BF1 PH C INITIATE:

This setting is used to select the FlexLogic™ operand that will initiate phase C 1-pole tripping of the breakerand the phase C portion of the scheme.

BF1 BKR POS1 φB:

This setting is used to select the FlexLogic™ operand that represents the protected breaker early-type auxil-iary switch contact on pole B. This contact is normally a non-multiplied Form-A contact. The contact may evenbe adjusted to have the shortest possible operating time.

BF1 BKR POS1 φC:

This setting is used to select the FlexLogic™ operand that represents the protected breaker early-type auxil-iary switch contact on pole C. This contact is normally a non-multiplied Form-A contact. The contact may evenbe adjusted to have the shortest possible operating time.

BF1 BKR POS2 φB:

This setting is used to select the FlexLogic™ operand that represents the protected breaker normal-type auxil-iary switch contact on pole B (52/a). This may be a multiplied contact.

BF1 BKR POS2 φC:

This setting is used to select the FlexLogic™ operand that represents the protected breaker normal-type auxil-iary switch contact on pole C (52/a). This may be a multiplied contact.

For single-pole operation, the scheme has the same overall general concept except that it provides re-trippingof each single pole of the protected breaker.

The approach shown in the following single pole tripping figure uses the initiating information to determinewhich pole is supposed to trip. The logic is segregated on a per-pole basis. The overcurrent detectors haveganged settings.

Upon operation of the breaker failure element for a single pole trip command, a 3-pole trip command should begiven via output operand "BF1 TRIP OP".





5

Figure 5–26: BREAKER FAILURE 1-POLE (INITIATE) [Sheet 1 of 2]

SETTING

SETTING

SETTING

SETTING

SETTING

SETTING

SETTING

SETTING

SETTING

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

SETTING

BF1 FUNCTION:

BF1 PH A INITIATE:

BF1 USE SEAL IN:

BF1 USE AMP SUPV:

BF1 BLOCK :

BF1 3 POLE INITIATE :

BF1 PH B INITIATE :

BF1 PH C INITIATE :

BF1 RETRIPA

BF1 RETRIPB

BF1 RETRIPC

BF1 SOURCE :BF1 PH AMP SUPVPICKUP :

IA IA PICKUPRUN

IB IB PICKUPRUN

IC IC PICKUPRUN

Off=0

Off=0

Off=0

Off=0

Enable=1

Off=0

YES=1

YES=1

Disable=0

NO=0

NO=0

AND

OR

OR

OR

OR

AND

OR

OR

OR

OR

OR

OR

AND

AND

AND

AND

OR

AND

AND

TO SHEET 2 OF 2(Initiated)

Initiated Ph ATO SHEET 2 OF 2

Initiated Ph BTO SHEET 2 OF 2

SEAL-IN PATH

SEAL-IN PATH

SEAL-IN PATH

Initiated Ph CTO SHEET 2 OF 2

TO SHEET 2 OF 2(827070.CDR)827069A3.CDR





5

Figure 5–27: BREAKER FAILURE 1-POLE (TIMERS) [Sheet 2 of 2]

SETTING

SETTING

SETTING

FROM SHEET 1 OF 2(Initiated)

FROM SHEET 1 OF 2Initiated Ph A

FROM SHEET 1 OF 2Initiated Ph B

FROM SHEET 1 OF 2Initiated Ph C

SETTING

SETTING

SETTING

SETTING

SETTING

SETTING

SETTING

SETTING

SETTING

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

SETTING

SETTING

SETTING

SETTING

SETTING

BF1 USE TIMER1:

BF1 USE TIMER2:

BF1 USE TIMER3:

BF1 BKR POS1 A/3P:

BF1 BKR POS2 A/3P:

BF1 BKR POS1 B:

BF1 BKR POS2 B:

BF1 BKR POS1 C:

BF1 BKR POS2 C:

BF1 TIMER3 PICKUPDELAY:

BF1 TRIP DROPOUTDELAY:

BF1 TRIP OP

BF1 T3 OP

827070A3.CDR

BF1 T2 OP

BF1 T1 OP



BF1 BKR TEST ON:

FROM SHEET 1 OF 2(827069.CDR)

BF1 PH AMP HISETPICKUP:

BF1 LOSET TIMEDELAY:

BF1 PH AMP LOSETPICKUP :

IA IA PICKUP

IA PICKUP

RUN

RUN

IB IB PICKUP

IB PICKUP

RUN

RUN

IC IC PICKUP

IC PICKUP

RUN

RUN

Off=0

Off=0

Off=0

Off=0

Off=0

Off=0

Off=0

YES=1

NO=0

YES=1

NO=0

YES=1

NO=0

AND 0

0

0

0

0

00

AND

AND

AND

AND

AND

AND

AND

OR

OR

OR

OR

0





5

Figure 5–28: BREAKER FAILURE 3-POLE (INITIATE) [Sheet 1 of 2]

³

³

³

³





5

Figure 5–29: BREAKER FAILURE 3-POLE (TIMERS) [Sheet 2 of 2]

³

³

³

³

³

³

³

³





5

5.5.4 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS MENU

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS VOLTAGE ELEMENTS

These protection elements can be used for a variety of applications such as:

Undervoltage Protection: For voltage sensitive loads, such as induction motors, a drop in voltage will result inan increase in the drawn current, which may cause dangerous overheating in the motor. The undervoltage pro-tection feature can be used to either cause a trip or generate an alarm when the voltage drops below a speci-fied voltage setting for a specified time delay.

Permissive Functions: The undervoltage feature may be used to block the functioning of external devices byoperating an output relay when the voltage falls below the specified voltage setting. The undervoltage featuremay also be used to block the functioning of other elements through the block feature of those elements.

Source Transfer Schemes: In the event of an undervoltage, a transfer signal may be generated to transfer aload from its normal source to a standby or emergency power source.

a) UNDERVOLTAGE DEFINITE TIME CHARACTERISTICS

DEFINITE TIME CURVE

The Definite Time curve shape operates as soon as the pickup level is exceeded for a specified period of time.The base definite time curve delay is in seconds. The curve multiplier of 0.00 - 600.00 makes this delay adjust-able from instantaneous to 600.00 seconds in steps of 10 ms.

T = TDM in seconds, when I > Ipickup

TRESET= -TDM in seconds

where:




VOLTAGE ELEMENTS

PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1

MESSAGE PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE2

MESSAGE PHASE OVERVOLTAGE1





5

b) UNDERVOLTAGE INVERSE TIME CHARACTERISTICS

The undervoltage elements can be programmed to have an inverse time delay characteristic. The undervolt-age delay setting defines a family of curves as illustrated by the following equation and figure.

where:T = Operating TimeD = Undervoltage Delay Setting (0.00 gives instantaneous operate)V = Secondary Voltage applied to the relayVpickup = Pickup Level

Note: At 0% of pickup, the operating time equals the Undervoltage Delay Setting.

Figure 5–30: INVERSE TIME UNDERVOLTAGE CURVES

T D

1 VVpickup-----------------–

-------------------------------=

D=5.0 2.0 1.0

0.0

2.0

4.0

6.0

8.0

10.0

12.0

14.0

16.0

18.0

20.0

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110

% of V pickup

Tim

e(s

econ

ds)





5

c) PHASE UV1 / UV2 (PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE - ANSI 27P)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS VOLTAGE ELEMENTS PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1

The phase undervoltage element may be used to give a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus theapplied fundamental voltage (phase to ground for Wye VT connection or phase to phase for Delta VT connec-tion) or as a simple Definite Time element. The element resets instantaneously if the applied voltage exceedsthe dropout voltage. The delay setting selects the minimum operating time of the phase undervoltage element.The minimum voltage setting selects the operating voltage below which the element is blocked (a setting of ‘0’will allow a dead source to be considered a fault condition).

PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1

PHASE UV1FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGEPHASE UV1 SIGNALSOURCE: SRC 1


MESSAGEPHASE UV1PICKUP: 1.000 pu


MESSAGEPHASE UV1CURVE: Definite Time

Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time

MESSAGEPHASE UV1DELAY: 1.00 s


MESSAGEPHASE UV1 MINIMUMVOLTAGE: 0.100 pu


MESSAGEPHASE UV1 BLOCK:Off


MESSAGEPHASE UV1TARGET: Self-reset


MESSAGEPHASE UV1EVENTS: Disabled






5

Figure 5–31: PHASE UV1 SCHEME LOGIC





5

d) PHASE OV1 (PHASE OVERVOLTAGE - ANSI 59P)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS VOLTAGE ELEMENTS PHASE OVERVOLTAGE1

The phase overvoltage element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional time delay or asa Definite Time element. The input voltage is the phase-to-phase voltage, either measured directly from Delta-connected VTs or as calculated from phase-to-ground (Wye) connected VTs. The specific voltages to be usedfor each phase are shown on the logic diagram.

Figure 5–32: PHASE OV1 SCHEME LOGIC

PHASE OVERVOLTAGE1

PHASE OV1FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGEPHASE OV1 SIGNALSOURCE: SRC 1


MESSAGEPHASE OV1PICKUP: 1.000 pu


MESSAGEPHASE OV1DELAY: 1.00 s


MESSAGEPHASE OV1 RESETDELAY: 1.00 s


MESSAGEPHASE OV1 BLOCK:Off


MESSAGEPHASE OV1TARGET: Self-reset


MESSAGEPHASE OV1EVENTS: Disabled





5 SETTINGS 5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS

5

5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5.6.1 OVERVIEW

CONTROL elements are generally used for control rather than for protection. See also, the section: INTRO-DUCTION TO ELEMENTS at the front of this chapter.

5.6.2 SETTING GROUPS MENU

PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS SETTING GROUPS

The Setting Groups menu controls the setup and operation of elements in the GROUPED ELEMENTS settingsmenu. At a given time, there is one "active" setting group and one "edit" setting group. The "active" group isused in each of the grouped elements to determine which settings are used to determine the state of the ele-ment. The "edit" group determines which settings are visible on the faceplate display, and thus editable. Thefaceplate LEDs indicate which active group (with a non-flashing energized LED) and edit group (with a flashingLED) are in service.

The EDIT SETTING GROUP setting determines which group of settings will be viewable on the faceplate dis-play, and thus accessable. If it is set to "Active Group", the current active group is automatically selected asthe edit group, even if subsequently, the active group is changed.

Each ACTIVATE ON setting selects a FlexLogic™ operand which, when set, will make the particular settinggroup active for use by any grouped element. A priority scheme ensures that only one group is active at agiven time – the highest-numbered group which is activated by its ACTIVATE ON parameter takes priority overthe lower-numbered groups. There is no "activate on" setting for group 1 (the default active group), becausegroup 1 automatically becomes active if no other group is active.

The relay can be set up via a FlexLogic™ equation to receive requests to activate or de-activate a particularnon-default settings group. The following FlexLogic™ equation (see figure: EXAMPLE FLEXLOGIC™ CON-TROL OF A SETTINGS GROUP) illustrates requests via remote communications (e.g. VIRTUAL INPUT 1) orfrom a local contact input (e.g. H7a) to initiate the use of a particular settings group, and requests from severalovercurrent pickup measuring elements to inhibit the use of the particular settings group. The assigned VIR-TUAL OUTPUT 1 operand is used to control the ON state of a particular settings group.

SETTING GROUPS

EDIT SETTINGGROUP: Active Group

Range: Group 1 to Group 8or “Active Group”

MESSAGEGROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON:Off

















5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5 SETTINGS

5

Figure 5–33: EXAMPLE FLEXLOGIC™ CONTROL OF A SETTINGS GROUP





5

5.6.3 UNDERFREQUENCY

PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS UNDERFREQUENCY

UNDERFREQUENCY

UNDERFREQ FUNCTION:Disabled


MESSAGEUNDERFREQ BLOCK:Off


MESSAGEUNDERFREQ MINVOLT/AMP: 0.70 pu


MESSAGEUNDERFREQ PICKUP1:59.50 Hz

Range: 20.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz

MESSAGEUNDERFREQ PICKUPDELAY1: 2.000 s


MESSAGEUNDERFREQ RESETDELAY1: 2.000 s


































5

The steady-state frequency of a power system is a certain indicator of the existing balance between the gener-ated power and the load. Whenever this balance is disrupted through the loss of an important generating unitor the isolation of a part of the system from the rest of the system, the effect will be a reduction in frequency. Ifthe control systems of the system generators do not respond fast enough, the system may collapse.

A reliable method to quickly restore the balance between load and generation is to automatically disconnectselected loads, based on the actual system frequency. This technique is called "load-shedding" and is intendedto maintain system integrity and minimize widespread outages. After the frequency returns to normal, the loadmay be automatically or manually restored.

The underfrequency element provides six independent frequency level settings, each with pickup and resettimers, to provide six blocks of load-shedding control. All pickup levels can be controlled by a common blockinginput which is often used to prevent operation if significant current is not flowing in the monitored circuit.

SETTINGS:

UNDERFREQ MIN VOLT/AMP :

This setting is used to select the minimum per unit voltage or current level required to allow the underfrequencyelement to operate, to prevent an incorrect operation caused because there is no signal to measure. The inputchannel on which the frequency is measured can be either voltage or current, and is selected by the setting"FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE" in the Power System section.

UNDERFREQ PICKUP_:

This setting is used to select the level at which the underfrequency element is to pickup. For example if thesystem frequency is 60 Hz and the load shedding is required at 59.5 Hz, the setting will be 59.50 Hz.



MESSAGEUNDERFREQ TARGET:Self-Reset

Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGEUNDERFREQ EVENTS:Disabled






5

Figure 5–34: UNDERFREQUENCY SCHEME LOGIC





5

5.6.4 SYNCHROCHECK 1(2)

PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS SYNCHROCHECK SYNCHROCHECK 1(2)

The are two identical synchrocheck elements available, numbered 1 and 2.

The synchronism check function is intended for supervising the paralleling of two parts of a system which areto be joined by the closure of a circuit breaker. The synchrocheck elements are typically used at locationswhere the two parts of the system are interconnected through at least one other point in the system.

Synchrocheck verifies that the voltages (V1 and V2) on the two sides of the supervised circuit breaker arewithin set limits of magnitude, angle and frequency differences.

The time while the two voltages remain within the admissible angle difference is determined by the setting ofthe phase angle difference ∆Φ and the frequency difference ∆F (slip frequency). It can be defined as the time itwould take the voltage phasor V1 or V2 to traverse an angle equal to 2x∆Φ at a frequency equal to the fre-quency difference ∆F. This time can be calculated by:

SYNCHROCHECK 1

SYNCHK1 FUNCTION:Disabled


MESSAGESYNCHK1 V1 SOURCE:SRC 1


MESSAGESYNCHK1 V2 SOURCE:SRC 2


MESSAGESYNCHK1 MAX VOLTDIFF: 10000 V

Range: 0 to 100,000 V in steps of 1 V

MESSAGESYNCHK1 MAX ANGLEDIFF: 30°


MESSAGESYNCHK1 MAX FREQDIFF: 1.00 Hz


MESSAGESYNCHK1 DEAD SOURCESELECT: LV1 and DV2

Range: None, LV1 and DV2, DV1 and LV2,DV1 or DV2, DV1 Xor DV2, DV1 and DV2

MESSAGESYNCHK1 DEAD V1MAX VOLT: 0.30 pu


MESSAGESYNCHK1 DEAD V2MAX VOLT: 0.30 pu


MESSAGESYNCHK1 LIVE V1MIN VOLT: 0.70 pu


MESSAGESYNCHK1 LIVE V2MIN VOLT: 0.70 pu


MESSAGESYNCHK1 TARGET:Self-reset


MESSAGESYNCHK1 EVENTS:Disabled






5

where: ∆Φ = degrees, ∆F = Hz.

As an example; for the default values (∆Φ = 30°, ∆F = 0.1 Hz), the time while the angle between the two volt-ages will be less than the set value is:

If one or both sources are de-energized, the synchrocheck programming can allow for closing of the circuitbreaker using undervoltage control to by-pass the synchrocheck measurements (Dead Source function).

SETTINGS:

SYNCHK1 V1 SOURCE:

This setting selects the source for the voltage V1.

SYNCHK1 V2 SOURCE:

This setting selects the source for the voltage V2.

SYNCHK1 MAX VOLT DIFF :

This setting selects the maximum voltage difference in ‘kV’ between the two sources. A voltage magnitude dif-ference between the two input voltages below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.

SYNCHK1 MAX ANGLE DIFF :

This setting selects the maximum angular difference in degrees between the two sources. An angular differ-ence between the two input voltage phasors below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.

SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ DIFF :

This setting selects the maximum frequency difference in ‘Hz’ between the two sources. A frequency differencebetween the two input voltage systems below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.

SYNCHK1 DEAD SOURCE SELECT:

This setting selects the combination of dead and live sources that will by-pass synchronism check function andpermit the breaker to be closed when one or both of the two voltages (V1 or/and V2) are below the maximumvoltage threshold. A dead or live source is declared by monitoring the voltage level.

Six options are available:

None: Dead Source function is disabled

LV1 and DV2: Live V1 and Dead V2

DV1 and LV2: Dead V1 and Live V2

DV1 or DV2: Dead V1 or Dead V2

DV1 Xor DV2: Dead V1 exclusive-or Dead V2 (one source is Dead and the other is Live)

DV1 and DV2: Dead V1 and Dead V2

TF

=

××

1360

2 ∆Φ∆

T =

××

=1360

2 300 1

166.

. sec





5

SYNCHK1 DEAD V1 MAX VOLT :

This setting establishes a maximum voltage magnitude for V1 in ‘pu’. Below this magnitude, the V1 voltageinput used for synchrocheck will be considered "Dead" or de-energized.

SYNCHK1 DEAD V2 MAX VOLT :

This setting establishes a maximum voltage magnitude for V2 in ‘pu’. Below this magnitude, the V2 voltageinput used for synchrocheck will be considered "Dead" or de-energized.

SYNCHK1 LIVE V1 MIN VOLT:

This setting establishes a minimum voltage magnitude for V1 in ‘pu’. Above this magnitude, the V1 voltageinput used for synchrocheck will be considered "Live" or energized.

SYNCHK1 LIVE V2 MIN VOLT:

This setting establishes a minimum voltage magnitude for V2 in ‘pu’. Above this magnitude, the V2 voltageinput used for synchrocheck will be considered "Live" or energized.

NOTES:

1. The voltages V1 and V2 will be automatically matched so that the corresponding phase/phases will beused to measure the synchronism conditions. For example, if the auxiliary voltage is Vag, the synchro-check element will automatically select Vag as the phase voltage to check the synchronism. If the compar-ison is required on specific phase/phases voltage, the user can externally connect that specific phase/phases voltage to auxiliary voltage terminals and then use this auxiliary voltage to check the synchronismconditions.

Exception : The synchronism cannot be checked between Delta-connected phase voltage VTs and phase-to-ground auxiliary voltage.

2. The frequency associated to a source is calculated using an established priority. It will use the phase volt-ages if available. If the phase voltages are not available, the relay will use the auxiliary voltage for fre-quency calculation. Consequently, when an auxiliary voltage is used for synchronism check, the sourceincluding the specific auxiliary voltage should not include phase voltages. In this way, the frequency for theauxiliary voltage will be calculated.





5

Figure 5–35: SYNCHROCHECK SCHEME LOGIC





5

5.6.5 AUTORECLOSE

PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS AUTORECLOSE AUTORECLOSE 1

AUTORECLOSE 1

AR 1 FUNCTION:Disabled


MESSAGEAR 1 INITIATE:Off


MESSAGEAR 1 BLOCK:Off


MESSAGEAR 1 MAX NUMBER OFSHOTS: 1

Range: 1, 2, 3, 4 in steps of 1

MESSAGEAR 1 MANUAL CLOSE:Off


MESSAGEAR 1 MNL RST FRM LO:Off


MESSAGEAR 1 BKR CLOSED:Off


MESSAGEAR 1 BKR OPEN:Off


MESSAGEAR 1 BLK TIME UPONMNL CLS: 10.000 s


MESSAGEAR 1 DEAD TIME1:

1.000 s



2.000 s



3.000 s



4.000 s


MESSAGEAR 1 RESET TIME:60.000 s


MESSAGEAR 1 INCOMPLETE SEQTIME: 5.000 s


MESSAGEAR 1 EVENTS:Disabled






5

AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE (AR)

The autoreclosure feature is intended for use with transmission and distribution lines, in three pole trippingschemes for single breaker applications. Up to four selectable reclosures "shots" are possible prior to lockingout. Each shot has an independently settable dead time. The protection settings can be changed betweenshots if so desired, using FlexLogic™. Logic inputs are available for disabling or blocking the scheme.

Front panel LEDs indicate the state of the autoreclose scheme as follows:

• RECLOSE ENABLED: The scheme is enabled and may reclose if initiated.

• RECLOSE DISABLED: The scheme is disabled.

• RECLOSE IN PROGRESS: An autoreclosure has been initiated but the breaker has not yet been sig-naled to close.

• RECLOSE LOCKED OUT: The scheme has generated the maximum number of breaker closuresallowed and, as the fault persist, will not close the breaker again; knownas "Lockout". The scheme may also be sent in "Lockout" when the incom-plete sequence timer times out or when a block signal occurs while in"Reclose in Progress". The scheme must be reset by operator commandor by manually closing the breaker before further recloses are permitted.

RECLOSE ENABLED :

The reclosure scheme is considered enabled when all of the following conditions are true:

• The "AR Function" is set to Enabled.

• The scheme is not in the "Lockout" state.

• The "Block" input is not asserted.

• The "AR Block Time Upon Manual Close" timer is not active.

RECLOSE INITIATION :

The autoreclose scheme is initiated by a trip signal from any selected protection feature operand. The schemeis initiated provided the circuit breaker is in the closed state before protection operation.

RECLOSE IN PROGRESS (RIP):

RIP is set when a reclosing cycle begins following a reclose initiate signal. Once the cycle is successfully initi-ated, the RIP signal will seal-in and the scheme will continue through its sequence until one of the followingconditions is satisfied:

• The close signal is issued when the dead timer times out.

• The scheme goes to lockout.

While RIP is active, the scheme checks that the breaker is open and the shot number is below the limit, andthen begins measuring the dead time.

LOCKOUT:

Scheme lockout will block all phases of the reclosing cycle, preventing automatic reclosure, if any of the follow-ing conditions occurs:

• The maximum shot number was reached.

• A "Block" input is in effect (for instance: Breaker Failure, bus differential protection operated, etc.).

• The "Incomplete Sequence" timer times out.

The recloser will be latched in the Lockout state until a "Reset from lockout" signal is asserted, either from amanual close of the breaker or from a manual reset command (local or remote).





5

CLOSE:

After the dead time elapses, the scheme issues the close signal. The close signal is latched until the breakercloses or the scheme goes to Lockout.

RESET TIME:

The reset time is used to set the total time interval for a single fault event from the first trip until either lockout orsuccessful reclosure.

SETTINGS:

AR 1 INITIATE :

This setting selects the FlexLogic™ Operand that initiates the scheme, typically the trip signal from protection.

AR 1 BLOCK :

This setting selects the FlexLogic™ Operand that blocks the Autoreclosure initiate (it could be from theBreaker Failure, Bus differential protection, etc.).

AR 1 MAX NUMBER OF SHOTS :

This setting specifies the number of reclosures that can be attempted before reclosure goes to "Lockout"because the fault is permanent.

AR 1 MANUAL CLOSE :

This setting selects the logic input set when the breaker is manually closed.

AR 1 MNL RST FRM LO :

This setting selects the FlexLogic™ Operand that resets the autoreclosure from Lockout condition. Typicallythis is a manual reset from lockout, local or remote.

AR 1 BLK TIME UPON MNL CLS :

The autoreclose scheme can be disabled for a programmable time delay after the associated circuit breaker ismanually closed. This prevents reclosing onto a fault after a manual close. This delay must be longer than theslowest expected trip from any protection not blocked after manual closing. If no overcurrent trips occur after amanual close and this time expires, the autoreclose scheme is enabled.

AR 1 DEAD TIME1 :

This is the intentional delay before first breaker automatic reclosure (1st shot) and should be set longer thanthe estimated deionizing time following a three pole trip.

AR1 DEAD TIME2 :

This is the intentional delay before second breaker automatic reclosure (2nd shot) and should be set longerthan the estimated deionizing time following a three pole trip.

AR 1 DEAD TIME3 :

This is the intentional delay before third breaker automatic reclosure (3rd shot) and should be set longer thanthe estimated deionizing time following a three pole trip.

AR 1 DEAD TIME4 :

This is the intentional delay before fourth breaker automatic reclosure (4th shot) and should be set longer thanthe estimated deionizing time following a three pole trip.

AR 1 RESET TIME:





5

The reset timer is used to set the total time interval for a single fault event, from the first trip until either lockoutor successful reclosure. This time must be set to a value greater than the sum of all programmed dead timesplus the maximum time to trip on each reclose shot.

Note : This timer must be set to a delay longer than the incomplete sequence timer.

AR 1 INCOMPLETE SEQ TIME :

This timer is used to set the maximum time interval allowed for a single reclose shot. It is started whenever areclosure is initiated and is active when the scheme is in the "RECLOSE IN PROGRESS" state. If all conditionsallowing a breaker closure are not satisfied when this time expires, the scheme goes to "Lockout".

Note : This timer must be set to a delay less than the reset timer.





5

Figure 5–36: AUTORECLOSURE SCHEME LOGIC (Sheet 1 of 2)





5

Figure 5–37: AUTORECLOSURE SCHEME LOGIC (Sheet 2 of 2)





5

Figure 5–38: SINGLE SHOT AUTORECLOSING SEQUENCE - PERMANENT FAULT

BR

EA

KE

RS

TAT

US

BK

RC

LOS

ED

FAU

LTO

CC

UR

ST

RIP

CO

MM

AN

D

FAU

LTD

UR

AT

ION

FAU

LTD

UR

AT

ION

CO

NTA

CT

SS

EPA

RA

TE

OP

EN

ING

TIM

EC

LOS

ING

TIM

EP

RO

TT

IME

OP

EN

ING

TIM

EP

RO

TT

IME

AR

CE

XT

ING

UIS

HE

SA

RC

EX

TIN

GU

ISH

ES

CLO

SE

DC

OM

MA

ND

CLO

SE

DC

OM

MA

ND

BK

RC

LOS

ED

AR

GO

ES

TO

LOC

KO

UT:

SH

OT

CO

UN

T=

MA

X

RE

SE

TFR

OM

LOC

KO

UT

AR

EN

AB

LED

LOC

KO

UT

RIP

INC

OM

PL.

SE

Q.T

IMIN

G

RE

SE

TT

IME

RIS

TIM

ING

INC

OM

PLE

TE

SE

QU

EN

CE

IST

IMIN

G

DE

AD

TIM

E

RE

CLO

SE

INP

RO

GR

ES

S

CO

NTA

CT

SC

LOS

ET

RIP

CO

MM

AN

DC

ON

TAC

TS

SE

PAR

AT

E

BK

RO

PE

N AR

EN

AB

LED

AU

TO

RE

CLO

SE

AR

INIT

IAT

EB

KR

OP

EN

8278

02A

1.C

DR





5

5.6.6 DIGITAL ELEMENTS MENU

PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS DIGITAL ELEMENTS

a) DIGITAL ELEMENT 1

There are 16 identical Digital Elements available, numbered from 1 to 16.

A Digital Element can be used to monitor any FlexLogic™ operand, and to present a target message and/orenable events recording depending on the output operand state. The digital element settings include a ‘name’which will be referenced in any target message, a blocking input from any selected FlexLogic™ operand, and atimer for pickup and reset delays for the output operand.

DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 INPUT:

This setting is used to select a FlexLogic™ operand to be monitored by the Digital Element.

DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 PICKUP DELAY:

This setting is used to set the time delay to pickup. If a pickup delay is not required, set this function to ‘0’.

DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 RESET DELAY:

This setting is used to set the time delay to reset. If a reset delay is not required, set this function to ‘0’.

DIGITAL ELEMENTS

DIGITAL ELEMENT 1

MESSAGE DIGITAL ELEMENT 2

::

MESSAGE DIGITAL ELEMENT 16

DIGITAL ELEMENT 1

DIGITAL ELEMENT 1FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGEDIG ELEM 1 NAME:Dig Element 1


MESSAGEDIG ELEM 1 INPUT:Off


MESSAGEDIG ELEM 1 PICKUPDELAY: 0.000 s


MESSAGEDIG ELEM 1 RESETDELAY: 0.000 s


MESSAGEDIG ELEM 1 BLOCK:Off


MESSAGEDIGITAL ELEMENT 1TARGET: Self-reset


MESSAGEDIGITAL ELEMENT 1EVENTS: Disabled






5

Figure 5–39: DIGITAL ELEMENT SCHEME LOGIC

b) CIRCUIT MONITORING APPLICATIONS

The UR relay includes an active Voltage Monitor circuit connected across each Form-A contact. The VoltageMonitor circuit limits the trickle current through the output circuit (see Technical Specifications for Form-A).

As long as the current through the Voltage Monitor is above a threshold (see Technical Specifications for Form-A), the FlexLogic™ operand "Cont Op # VOn" will be set. (# represents the output contact number).

If the output circuit has a high resistance or the DC current is interrupted, the trickle current will drop below thethreshold and the FlexLogic™ operand "Cont Op # VOff" will be set.

Consequently, the state of these operands can be used as indicators of the integrity of the circuits in whichForm-A contacts are inserted.

BREAKER TRIP CIRCUIT INTEGRITY MONITORING:

In many applications it is desired to monitor the breaker trip circuit integrity so problems can be detected beforea trip operation is required. The circuit is considered to be healthy when the Voltage Monitor connected acrossthe trip output contact detects a low level of current, well below the operating current of the breaker trip coil. Ifthe circuit presents a high resistance, the trickle current will fall below the monitor threshold and an alarmwould be declared.

Example 1:

In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact which isopen when the breaker is open (see Figure: TRIP CIRCUIT - EXAMPLE 1). To prevent unwanted alarms in thissituation, the trip circuit monitoring logic must include the breaker position.





5

Figure 5–40: TRIP CIRCUIT - EXAMPLE 1

Assume the output contact H1 is a trip contact. Using the contact output settings, this output will be given an IDname, e.g. "Cont Op 1".

Assume a 52a breaker auxiliary contact is connected to contact input H7a to monitor breaker status. Using thecontact input settings, this input will be given an ID name, e.g. "Cont Ip 1" and will be set "ON" when thebreaker is closed. Using Digital Element 1 to monitor the breaker trip circuit, the settings will be:

NOTE: The PICKUP DELAY setting should be greater than the operating time of the breaker to avoidnuisance alarms.

DIGITAL ELEMENT 1

DIGITAL ELEMENT 1FUNCTION: Enabled

MESSAGEDIG ELEM 1 NAME:Bkr Trip Cct Out

MESSAGEDIG ELEM 1 INPUT:Cont Op 1 VOff



MESSAGEDIG ELEM 1 BLOCK:Cont Ip 1


MESSAGEDIGITAL ELEMENT 1EVENTS: Enabled





5

Example 2:

If it is required to monitor the trip circuit continuously, independent of the breaker position (open or closed), amethod to maintain the monitoring current flow through the trip circuit when the breaker is open must be pro-vided (as shown in Figure: TRIP CIRCUIT - EXAMPLE 2). This can be achieved by connecting a suitable resis-tor (as listed in the VALUES OF RESISTOR ‘R’ table) across the auxiliary contact in the trip circuit. In this case,it is not required to supervise the monitoring circuit with the breaker position - the BLOCK setting is selected toOff. In this case, the settings will be:

Figure 5–41: TRIP CIRCUIT - EXAMPLE 2

DIGITAL ELEMENT 1

DIGITAL ELEMENT 1FUNCTION: Enabled

MESSAGEDIG ELEM 1 NAME:Bkr Trip Cct Out

MESSAGEDIG ELEM 1 INPUT:Cont Op 1 VOff



MESSAGEDIG ELEM 1 BLOCK:Off


MESSAGEDIGITAL ELEMENT 1EVENTS: Enabled





5

Table 5–15: VALUES OF RESISTOR ‘R’

Power Supply(VDC)

Resistance(Ohms)

Power(Watts)

24 1000 2

30 5000 2

48 10000 2

110 25000 5

125 25000 5

250 50000 5





5

5.6.7 DIGITAL COUNTERS

PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS DIGITAL COUNTERS COUNTER 1

There are 8 identical digital counters available, numbered from 1 to 8.

A digital counter counts the number of state transitions from Logic 0 to Logic 1. The counter can be used tocount operations such as the pickups of an element, the changes of state of an external contact such as abreaker auxiliary switch, or pulses from a watt-hour meter, etc.

COUNTER 1 UNITS:

This setting is used to assign a label to identify the unit of measure pertaining to the digital transitions to becounted. The units label will appear in the corresponding Actual Values status.

COUNTER 1 PRESET:

This setting is used to set the count to a required preset value before counting operations begin, as in the casewhere a substitute relay is to be installed in place of an in-service relay, or while the counter is running.

COUNTER 1 COMPARE:

This setting is used to set the value to which the accumulated count value is compared. Three FlexLogic™ out-put operands are provided to indicate if the present value is "more than (HI)", "equal to (EQL)", or "less than(LO)" the set value.

COUNTER 1

COUNTER 1FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGECOUNTER 1 NAME:Counter 1


MESSAGECOUNTER 1 UNITS: Range: 6 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGECOUNTER 1 PRESET:

0

Range: +2,147,483,647 to-2,147,483,647

MESSAGECOUNTER 1 COMPARE:

0

Range: +2,147,483,647 to-2,147,483,647

MESSAGECOUNTER 1 UP:Off


MESSAGECOUNTER 1 DOWN:Off


MESSAGECOUNTER 1 BLOCK:Off


MESSAGECNT1 SET TO PRESET:Off


MESSAGECOUNTER 1 RESET:Off


MESSAGECOUNT1 FREEZE/RESET:Off


MESSAGECOUNT1 FREEZE/COUNT:Off






5

COUNTER 1 UP:

This setting is used to select the FlexLogic™ operand for incrementing the counter. If an enabled UP input isreceived when the accumulated value is at the limit of +2,147,483,647 counts, the counter will rollover to

-2,147,483,647.

COUNTER 1 DOWN:

This setting is used to select the FlexLogic™ operand for decrementing the counter. If an enabled DOWN inputis received when the accumulated value is at the limit of -2,147,483,647 counts, the counter will rollover to+2,147,483,647.

COUNTER 1 BLOCK:

This setting is used to select the FlexLogic™ operand for blocking the counting operation.

CNT1 SET TO PRESET:

This setting is used to select the FlexLogic™ operand used to set the count to the preset value. The counterwill be set to the preset value in the following situations:

1. When the counter is enabled and the "CNT1 SET TO PRESET" operand has the value 1. (When thecounter is enabled and the "CNT1 SET TO PRESET" operand has the value 0, thecounter will be set to 0.)

2. When the counter is running and the "CNT1 SET TO PRESET" operand changes the state from 0 to 1.(The change of state of the "CNT1 SET TO PRESET" operand from 1 to 0 while the counter is running hasno effect on the count.)

3. When a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the "CNT1 SET TO PRESET" operandhas the value 1. (When a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the "CNT1 SET TOPRESET" operand has the value 0, the counter will be set to 0.)

COUNTER 1 RESET:

This setting is used to select the FlexLogic™ operand for setting the count to either ‘0’ or the preset valuedepending on the state of the "CNT1 SET TO PRESET" operand.

COUNTER 1 FREEZE/RESET:

This setting is used to select the FlexLogic™ operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value intoa separate register with the date and time of the operation, and resetting the count to ‘0’ or the preset value.

COUNTER 1 FREEZE/COUNT:

This setting is used to select the FlexLogic™ operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value intoa separate register with the date and time of the operation, and continuing counting.

The present accumulated value and captured frozen value with the associated date/time stamp are availableas Actual Values. If control power to the relay is interrupted, the accumulated and frozen values will be savedinto non-volatile memory during the powerdown operation.





5Figure 5–42: DIGITAL COUNTER SCHEME LOGIC





5

5.6.8 MONITORING ELEMENTS

a) BREAKER 1(2) ARCING CURRENT

PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS MONITORING ELEMENTS BREAKER 1 ARCING CURRENT

There are 2 identical Breaker Arcing Current features available for Breakers 1 and 2.

This element calculates an estimate of the per-phase wear on the breaker contacts by measuring and integrat-ing the current squared passing through the breaker contacts as an arc. These per-phase values are added toaccumulated totals for each phase and compared to a programmed threshold value. When the threshold isexceeded in any phase, the relay can set an output operand to "1". The accumulated value for each phase canbe displayed as an actual value.

The operation of the scheme is shown schematically in the figure BREAKER ARCING CURRENT SCHEMELOGIC. The same output operand that is selected to operate the output relay used to trip the breaker, indicat-ing a tripping sequence has begun, is used to initiate this feature. A time delay is introduced between initiationand the starting of integration to prevent integration of current flow through the breaker before the contactshave parted. This interval includes the operating time of the output relay, any other auxiliary relays and thebreaker mechanism. For maximum measurement accuracy, the interval between change-of-state of the oper-and (from 0 to 1)and contact separation should be measured for the specific installation. Integration of themeasured current continues for 100 milli-seconds, which is expected to include the total arcing period.

BKR 1 ARC AMP INIT:

This setting is used to select the same output operand that is selected to operate the output relay used to tripthe breaker.

BKR 1 ARC AMP DELAY:

This setting is used to program the delay interval between the time the tripping sequence is initiated and thetime the breaker contacts are expected to part, starting the integration of the measured current.

BKR 1 ARC AMP LIMIT:

This setting is used to select the threshold value above which the output operand is set.

BREAKER 1 ARCING CURRENT

BKR 1 ARC AMPFUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGEBKR 1 ARC AMPSOURCE: SRC 1


MESSAGEBKR 1 ARC AMP INIT:Off


MESSAGEBKR 1 ARC AMPDELAY: 0.000 s


MESSAGEBKR 1 ARC AMP LIMIT:

1000 kA2-cycRange: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1 kA2-cycle

MESSAGEBKR 1 ARC AMP BLOCK:Off


MESSAGEBKR 1 ARC AMPTARGET: Self-reset


MESSAGEBKR 1 ARC AMPEVENTS: Disabled






5

Figure 5–43: ARCING CURRENT MEASUREMENT

Figure 5–44: BREAKER ARCING CURRENT SCHEME LOGIC

Initiate

BreakerContacts

PartArc

Extinguished

100 msProgrammableStart Delay

StartIntegration

StopIntegration

Total Area =BreakerArcingCurrent(kA·cycle)

827792A1.CDR

SETTING

SETTING

SETTING

SETTING

COMMAND

ACTUAL VALUE

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

SETTING

BREAKER 1 ARCINGAMP FUNCTION:

BREAKER 1 ARCINGAMP BLOCK:

BREAKER 1 ARCINGAMP INIT:

BREAKER 1 ARCINGAMP LIMIT:

CLEAR BREAKER 1ARCING AMPS: BKR 1 ARCING AMP A

BKR 1 ARCING AMP B

BKR 1 ARCING AMP C

BKR1 ARC OP

BREAKER 1 ARCINGAMP SOURCE:

IA

IB

IC

Off=0

Off=0

NO=0

YES=1

Enabled=1

Disabled=0

AND

AND

OR

827071A2.CDR

KA Cycle Limit2

*

SETTING

BREAKER 1 ARCINGAMP DELAY: 100 ms

0 0

Set All To Zero

Add toAccumulator

IntegrateSelectHighestValue

Integrate

Integrate

RUN

IB -Cycle

IA -Cycle

IC -Cycle

2

2

2





5

5.6.9 COLD LOAD PICKUPS

PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS COLD LOAD PICKUP COLD LOAD PICKUP 1

There are 2 identical Cold Load Pickup features available, numbered 1 and 2.

This feature can be used to change protection element settings when (by changing to another settings group)a cold load condition is expected to occur. A cold load condition can be caused by a prolonged outage of theload, by opening of the circuit breaker, or by a loss of supply even if the breaker remains closed. Upon thereturn of the source, the circuit will experience inrush current into connected transformers, accelerating cur-rents into motors, and simultaneous demand from many other loads because the normal load diversity hasbeen lost. During the cold load condition, the current level can be above the pickup setting of some protectionelements, so this feature can be used to prevent the tripping that would otherwise be caused by the normal set-tings. Without historical data on a particular feeder, some utilities assume an initial cold load current of about500% of normal load, decaying to 300% after 1 second, 200% after 2 seconds, and 150% after 4 seconds.

Figure 5–45: TYPICAL COLD LOAD PICKUP CHARACTERISTIC

There are two methods of initiating the operation of this feature. The first method is intended to automaticallyrespond to a loss of the source to the feeder, by detecting that all phase currents have declined to zero forsome time. When zero current on all phases has been detected, a timer is started. This timer is set to an inter-val after which it is expected the normal load diversity will have been lost, so setting groups are not changed forshort duration outages. After the delay interval, the output operand is set. The second initiation method isintended to automatically respond to an event that will set an operand, such as an operator-initiated virtualinput. This second method of initiation sets the output operand immediately.

COLD LOAD PICKUP 1

COLD LOAD 1FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGECOLD LOAD 1 INIT:Off


MESSAGECOLD LOAD 1 BLK:Off


MESSAGEOUTAGE TIME BEFORECOLD LOAD1: 1000 s

Range: 0 to 1000 s in steps of 1 s

MESSAGEON-LOAD TIME BEFORERESET1: 100.000

Range:0.000 to 1000 000.000 s in steps of .001 s





5

Both initiating inputs can be inhibited by a blocking input. Once cold load pickup is in operation, the outputoperand will remain set until at least one phase of the load has returned to a level above 2% of CT nominal forthe interval programmed by setting ON-LOAD TIME BEFORE RESET has expired. The reset delay interval isintended to be set to a period until the feeder load has decayed to normal levels, after which other featuresmay be used to switch setting groups.

Figure 5–46: COLD LOAD PICKUP SCHEME LOGIC




5 SETTINGS 5.7 INPUTS / OUTPUTS

5

5.7 INPUTS / OUTPUTS 5.7.1 CONTACT INPUTS MENU

PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT INPUTS

The contact inputs menu consists of configuration settings for each individual contact input as well as voltagethresholds for each group of four contact inputs. Upon startup of the relay, the main processor will determine,from an assessment of the modules installed in the chassis, which contact inputs are available and then dis-play settings for only these inputs.

a) CONTACT INPUT EXAMPLE

PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT INPUTS CONTACT INPUT H5a

The contact input function may be ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’. If Disabled, the input state will be forced to ‘OFF’(Logic 0) regardless of the state of the input. An alphanumeric ID may be assigned to a contact input, which willbe used for diagnostic purposes. The contact input ‘ON’ (Logic 1) state corresponds to the contact input beingclosed. If the contact input events is set to Enabled, every change in the contact input state will trigger anevent.

CONTACT INPUTS

CONTACT INPUT H5a

::

MESSAGE CONTACT INPUT xxx

MESSAGE CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLDS

CONTACT INPUT H5a

CONTACT INPUT H5aFUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGECONTACT INPUT H5a IDCont Ip 1


MESSAGECONTACT INPUT H5aEVENTS: Disabled





5.7 INPUTS / OUTPUTS 5 SETTINGS

5

b) CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLDS

PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT INPUTS CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLDS

Contact inputs are isolated in groups of four to allow connection of wet contacts from different voltage sourcesfor each group. The contact input threshold determines the minimum voltage required to detect a closed con-tact input. This value should be selected according to the following criteria: 16 for 24 volt sources, 30 for 48 voltsources, 80 for 110-125 volt sources and 140 for 250 volt sources.

Example : To use contact input H5a as a status input from the breaker 52b contact to seal-in the trip relay andrecord it in the Event Recorder, program it as follows:

CONTACT INPUT H5a

CONTACT INPUT H5aFUNCTION: Enabled

MESSAGECONTACT INPUT H5a IDBreaker Closed (52b)

MESSAGECONTACT INPUT H5aEVENTS: Enabled

(NOTE: 52b is closed when the breaker is open and open when the breaker is closed)

CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLDS

Ips H5a,H5c,H6a,H6cTHRESHOLD: 30 Vdc

Range: 16, 30, 80, 140 Vdc

MESSAGEIps H7a,H7c,H8a,H8cTHRESHOLD: 30 Vdc

Range: 16, 30, 80, 140 Vdc

::

MESSAGEIps xxx,xxx,xxx,xxxTHRESHOLD: 30 Vdc

Range: 16, 30, 80, 140 Vdc





5

5.7.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS VIRTUAL INPUTS VIRTUAL INPUT 1

There are 32 virtual inputs that can be individually programmed to respond to input signals from (a) the keypad(COMMANDS menu) and non-UCA2 communications protocols only or (b) the UCA2 communications protocolonly. Virtual inputs programmed for UCA2 protocol operations provide the Select Before Operate (SBO) fea-ture. All virtual output operands are defaulted to OFF = 0 unless the appropriate input signal is received.

Note : Virtual input states are preserved through a control power loss.

VIRTUAL INPUT 1 FUNCTION :

If set to Disabled, the input will be forced to 'OFF' (Logic 0) regardless of any attempt to alter the input. If set toEnabled, the input will operate as shown on the scheme logic diagram, and generate output FlexLogic™ oper-ands in response to received input signals and the applied settings.

VIRTUAL INPUT 1 TYPE :

There are two non-UCA2 protocol types of operation, Self-Reset and Normal. If set to Self-Reset, when theinput signal transits from OFF = 0 to ON = 1, the output operand will be set to ON = 1 for only one evaluation ofthe FlexLogic™ equations and then return to OFF = 0. If set to Normal, the virtual input sets the state of theoutput operand to the same state as the most recent received input, ON =1 or OFF = 0.

There are two UCA2 protocol types of operation, 'SBO-Once' and 'SBO-Many.' In both of these operatingmodes, a "Select" signal must be received before an "Operate" signal will be allowed to set the output operandto ON = 1. At any time after a point has been selected, it can be deselected by receipt of a Deselect signal.

If set to SBO-Once, after the virtual input is selected by receiving the Select signal, the output is enabled andthe SBO TIMEOUT timer is started. If the input Operate signal transits from OFF = 0 to ON = 1 while selected,the output operand will be set to ON = 1 for only one evaluation of the FlexLogic™ equations and then return toOFF = 0. The point will be automatically deselected either after the output operand is set to ON = 1 or the timerreaches timeout.

If set to SBO-Many, after the virtual input is selected by receiving the Select signal, the output is enabled andthe SBO TIMEOUT timer is started. If the input Operate signal transits from OFF = 0 to ON = 1 while selected,the output operand will be set to ON = 1 for only one evaluation of the Flexlogic equations and then return toOFF = 0. The point will be automatically deselected when the timer reaches timeout.

Every virtual input has its own deselection timer, all of which are set to the period programmed in the single set-ting SBO TIMEOUT.

NOTE:

Virtual Input operating modes Self-Reset, SBO-Many and SBO-Once, generate the output operand for a singleevaluation of the FlexLogic™ equations. If the operand is to be used anywhere other than internally in a Flex-Logic™ equation it will most probably have to be lengthened in time. A FlexLogic™ Timer with a delayed resetcan perform this function.

VIRTUAL INPUT 1

VIRTUAL INPUT 1FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGEVIRTUAL INPUT 1 ID:Virt Ip 1


MESSAGEVIRTUAL INPUT 1TYPE: Self-Reset

Range: Normal, Self-Reset, SBO-Once, SBO-Many

MESSAGEVIRTUAL INPUT 1EVENTS: Disabled






5

a) SBO TIMER

PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS VIRTUAL INPUTS SBO TIMER

This timer sets the interval from the receipt of an Operate signal to the automatic deselection of the virtualinput, so that an input does not remain selected indefinitely.

Figure 5–47: VIRTUAL INPUTS SCHEME LOGIC

SBO TIMER

SBO INPUTS TIMEOUT:30 s

Range: 1 to 60 s in steps of 1 s





5

5.7.3 REMOTE DEVICES

a) REMOTE INPUTS / OUTPUTS - OVERVIEW

Remote inputs and outputs, which are a means of exchanging information regarding the state of digital pointsbetween remote devices, are provided in accordance with the Electric Power Research Institute’s (EPRI)UCA2 “Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE)” specifications.

NOTE: The UCA2 specification requires that communications between devices be implemented onEthernet communications facilities. For UR relays, Ethernet communications is provided onlyon the type 9C and 9D versions of the CPU module.

The sharing of digital point state information between GOOSE equipped relays is essentially an extension toFlexLogic™ to allow distributed FlexLogic™ by making operands available to/from devices on a common com-munications network. In addition to digital point states, GOOSE messages identify the originator of the mes-sage and provide other information required by the communication specification. All devices listen to networkmessages and capture data from only those messages that have originated in selected devices.

GOOSE messages are designed to be short, high priority and with a high level of reliability. The GOOSE mes-sage structure contains space for 128 bit pairs representing digital point state information. The UCA specifica-tion provides 32 “DNA” bit pairs, which are status bits representing pre-defined events. All remaining bit pairsare “UserSt” bit pairs, which are status bits representing user-definable events. The UR implementation pro-vides 32 of the 96 available UserSt bit pairs.

The UCA2 specification includes features that are used to cope with the loss of communication between trans-mitting and receiving devices. Each transmitting device will send a GOOSE message upon a successfulpower-up, when the state of any included point changes, or after a specified interval (the “default update” time)if a change-of-state has not occurred. The transmitting device also sends a “hold time” which is set to threetimes the programmed default time, which is required by the receiving device.

Receiving devices are constantly monitoring the communications network for messages they require, as rec-ognized by the identification of the originating device carried in the message. Messages received from remotedevices include the message “hold” time for the device. The receiving relay sets a timer assigned to the origi-nating device to the “hold” time interval, and if it has not received another message from this device at time-out,the remote device is declared to be non-communicating, so it will use the programmed default state for allpoints from that specific remote device. This mechanism allows a receiving device to fail to detect a singletransmission from a remote device which is sending messages at the slowest possible rate, as set by its“default update” timer, without reverting to use of the programmed default states. If a message is received froma remote device before the “hold” time expires, all points for that device are updated to the states contained inthe message and the hold timer is restarted. The status of a remote device, where ‘Offline’ indicates ‘non-com-municating’, can be displayed.

b) LOCAL DEVICES - ID of Device for Transmitting GOOSE Messages

In a UR relay, the device ID that identifies the originator of the message is programmed in the setting ‘RELAYNAME’ under the heading ‘INSTALLATION’ in the ‘PRODUCT SETUP’ section.

c) REMOTE DEVICES - ID of Device for Receiving GOOSE Messages

PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE DEVICES REMOTE DEVICE 1

Sixteen Remote Devices, numbered from 1 to 16, can be selected for setting purposes.

REMOTE DEVICE 1

REMOTE DEVICE 1 ID:Remote Device 1






5

A receiving relay must be programmed to capture messages from only those originating remote devices ofinterest. This setting is used to select specific remote devices by entering the exact identification (ID) assignedto those devices.

5.7.4 REMOTE INPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE INPUTS REMOTE INPUT 1

Remote Inputs which create FlexLogic™ operands at the receiving relay, are extracted from GOOSE mes-sages originating in remote devices. The relay provides 32 Remote Inputs, each of which can be selected froma list consisting of 64 selections; DNA-1 through DNA-32 and UserSt-1 through UserSt-32. The function ofDNA inputs is defined in the UCA2 specifications and is presented in the UCA2 DNA ASSIGNMENTS table inthe section on Remote Outputs. The function of UserSt inputs is defined by the user selection of the Flex-Logic™ operand whose state is represented in the GOOSE message. A user must program a DNA point fromthe appropriate operand.

Remote Input 1 must be programmed to replicate the logic state of a specific signal from a specific remotedevice for local use. This programming is performed via the three settings shown above.

Setting ‘REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE’ is used to select the number (1-16) of the Remote Device which originates thesignal required, as previously assigned to the remote device via the setting ‘REMOTE DEVICE nn ID’ (see theREMOTE DEVICES section). Setting ‘REMOTE IN 1 BIT PAIR’ is used to select the specific bits of theGOOSE message required. Setting ‘REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE’ is used to select the logic state that willbe used for this point if the local relay has just completed startup or the remote device sending this point isdeclared to be non-communicating.

NOTE: For more information on GOOSE specifications, see REMOTE INPUTS/OUTPUTS - OVERVIEWin the REMOTE DEVICES section.

REMOTE INPUT 1

REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE:Remote Device 1

Range: 1 to 16 inclusive

MESSAGEREMOTE IN 1 BITPAIR: None

Range: None, DNA-1 to DNA-32, andUserSt-1 to UserSt-32

MESSAGEREMOTE IN 1 DEFAULTSTATE: Off

Range: Off, On





5

5.7.5 CONTACT OUTPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUT H1

Upon startup of the relay, the main processor will determine from an assessment of the modules installed in thechassis which contact outputs are available and present the settings for only these outputs.

An ID may be assigned to each contact output. If the CONTACT OUTPUT LED CONTROL is selected as ‘Trip’or ‘Alarm’ the appropriate LED indicator will activate when the contact output operates. If ‘None’ is selected asthe CONTACT OUTPUT LED CONTROL, the contact output will operate without activating any LEDs. The sig-nal that can operate a contact output may be any FlexLogic™ operand (virtual output, element state, contactinput, or virtual input). An additional FlexLogic™ operand may be used to seal-in the relay. Any change of stateof a contact output can be logged as an event if programmed to do so.

CONTACT OUTPUT H1

CONTACT OUTPUT H1 IDCont Op 1


MESSAGECONTACT OUTPUT H1LED CONTROL: Trip

Range: Trip, Alarm, None

MESSAGEOUTPUT H1 OPERATE:Off

Range: Flexlogic™ operand

MESSAGEOUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN:Off

Range: Flexlogic™ operand

MESSAGECONTACT OUTPUT H1EVENTS: Enabled






5

Example : The trip circuit current is monitored by providing a current threshold detector in series with eachForm-A contact (see the TRIP CIRCUIT - EXAMPLE figures in the DIGITAL ELEMENTS section).The monitor will set a flag (see Technical Specifications for Form-A). The name of the FlexLogic™operand set by the monitor, consists of the output relay designation, followed by the name of theflag; e.g. ‘Cont Op 1 IOn’ or ‘Cont Op 1 IOff’.

In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contactused to interrupt current flow after the breaker has tripped, to prevent damage to the less robustinitiating contact. This can be done by monitoring an auxiliary contact on the breaker which openswhen the breaker has tripped, but this scheme is subject to incorrect operation caused by differ-ences in timing between breaker auxiliary contact change-of-state and interruption of current inthe trip circuit. The most dependable protection of the initiating contact is provided by directlymeasuring current in the tripping circuit, and using this parameter to control resetting of the initiat-ing relay. This scheme is often called "trip seal-in".

In UR relays, this can be realized using the ‘Cont Op 1 IOn’ FlexLogic™ operand to seal-in theContact Output. For example:

CONTACT OUTPUT H1

CONTACT OUTPUT H1 IDCont Op 1

MESSAGECONTACT OUTPUT H1LED CONTROL: Trip

MESSAGEOUTPUT H1 OPERATE:Off

MESSAGEOUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN:Cont Op 1 IOn

MESSAGECONTACT OUTPUT H1EVENTS: Enabled





5

5.7.6 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS VIRTUAL OUTPUTS VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1

There are 64 virtual outputs that may be assigned via FlexLogic™. If not assigned, the output will be forced to‘OFF’ (Logic 0). An ID may be assigned to each virtual output. Virtual outputs are resolved in each passthrough the evaluation of the FlexLogic™ equations. Any change of state of a virtual output can be logged asan event if programmed to do so.

VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1

VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 IDVirt Op 1


MESSAGEVIRTUAL OUTPUT 1EVENTS: Disabled


Example : If Virtual Output 1 is the trip signal from FlexLogic™ and the trip relay is used to signal events, thesettings would be programmed as follows:

VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1

VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 IDTrip

MESSAGEVIRTUAL OUTPUT 1EVENTS: Disabled





5

5.7.7 REMOTE OUTPUTS - DNA BIT PAIRS

PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA BIT PAIRS REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA-1 BIT PAIR

Remote Outputs (1-32) are FlexLogic™ operands inserted into GOOSE messages that are transmitted toremote devices. Each digital point in the message must be programmed to carry the state of a specific Flex-Logic™ operand. The setting above is used to select the operand which represents a specific DNA function (asshown in the UCA2 DNA ASSIGNMENTS table) to be transmitted.


REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA- 1 BIT PAIR

DNA- 1 OPERAND:Off


Table 5–16: UCA2 DNA ASSIGNMENTS

DNA Definition Intended Function Logic 0 Logic 11 OperDev Trip Close

2 Lock Out LockoutOff LockoutOn

3 Initiate Reclosing Initiate remote reclose sequence InitRecloseOff InitRecloseOn

4 Block Reclosing Prevent/cancel remote reclose sequence BlockOff BlockOn

5 Breaker Failure Initiate Initiate remote breaker failure scheme BFIOff BFIOn

6 Send Transfer Trip Initiate remote trip operation TxXfrTripOff TxXfrTripOn

7 Receive Transfer Trip Report receipt of remote transfer trip command RxXfrTripOff RxXfrTripOn

8 Send Perm Report permissive affirmative TxPermOff TxPermOn

9 Receive Perm Report receipt of permissive affirmative RxPermOff RxPermOn

10 Stop Perm Override permissive affirmative StopPermOff StopPermOn

11 Send Block Report block affirmative TxBlockOff TxBlockOn

12 Receive Block Report receipt of block affirmative RxBlockOff RxBlockOn

13 Stop Block Override block affirmative StopBlockOff StopBlockOn

14 BkrDS Report breaker disconnect 3-phase state Open Closed

15 BkrPhsADS Report breaker disconnect phase A state Open Closed

16 BkrPhsBDS Report breaker disconnect phase B state Open Closed

17 BkrPhsCDS Report breaker disconnect phase C state Open Closed

18 DiscSwDS Open Closed

19 Interlock DS DSLockOff DSLockOn

20 LineEndOpen Report line open at local end Open Closed

21 Status Report operating status of local GOOSE device Offline Available

22 Event EventOff EventOn

23 Fault Present FaultOff FaultOn

24 Sustained Arc Report sustained arc SustArcOff SustArcOn

25 Downed Conductor Report downed conductor DownedOff DownedOn

26 Sync Closing SyncClsOff SyncClsOn

27 Mode Report mode status of local GOOSE device Normal Test

28 Reserved

29 Reserved

30 Reserved

31 Reserved

32 Reserved





5

5.7.8 REMOTE OUTPUTS - UserSt BIT PAIRS

PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt BIT PAIRS REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt-1 BIT PAIR

Remote Outputs (1-32) originate as GOOSE messages to be transmitted to remote devices. Each digital pointin the message must be programmed to carry the state of a specific FlexLogic™ operand. The setting above isused to select the operand which represents a specific UserSt function (as selected by the user) to be transmit-ted.

The following setting represents the time between sending GOOSE messages when there has been nochange of state of any selected digital point. This setting is located under the menu heading COMMUNICA-TIONS in the SETTINGS \ PRODUCT SETUP section.


5.7.9 RESETTING

PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS RESETTING

Some events can be programmed to latch the faceplate LED event indicators and the target message on thedisplay. Once set, the latching mechanism will hold all of the latched indicators or messages in the set stateafter the initiating condition has cleared until a RESET command is received to return these latches (not includ-ing FlexLogic™ latches) to the reset state. The RESET command can be sent from the faceplate RESET push-button, a remote device via a communications channel, or any programmed operand.

When the RESET command is received by the relay, two FlexLogic™ operands are created. These operands,which are stored as events, reset the latches if the initiating condition has cleared. The three sources ofRESET commands each create the FlexLogic™ operand "RESET OP". Each individual source of a RESETcommand also creates its individual operand "RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON), RESET OP (COMMS) or RESETOP (OPERAND) to identify the source of the command. The setting shown above selects the operand that willcreate the RESET OP (OPERAND) operand.

REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt- 1 BIT PAIR

UserSt- 1 OPERAND:Off


DEFAULT GOOSE UPDATETIME: 60 s

Range: 1-60

RESETTING

RESET OPERAND:Off





5.8 TRANSDUCER I/O 5 SETTINGS

5

5.8 TRANSDUCER I/O 5.8.1 DCMA INPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS TRANSDUCER I/O DCMA INPUTS

Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from external transducers and convert these signals intoa digital format for use as required. The relay will accept inputs in the range of -1 to +20 mAdc, suitable for usewith most common transducer output ranges; all inputs are assumed to be linear over the complete range.Specific hardware details are contained in the HARDWARE chapter.

Before the DCMA input signal can be used, the value of the signal measured by the relay must be converted tothe range and quantity of the external transducer primary input parameter, such as DC voltage or temperature.The relay simplifies this process by internally scaling the output from the external transducer and displaying theactual primary parameter.

DCMA input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. The user configures individualchannels with the settings shown here.

The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom.On power-up, the relay will automatically generate configuration settings for every channel, based on the ordercode, in the same general manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followedby the row number, 1 through 8 inclusive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actualvalue for each available input channel.

Settings are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown below for thefirst channel of a type 5F transducer module installed in slot M.

The function of the channel may be either "Enabled" or "Disabled." If Disabled, there will not be an actual valuecreated for the channel. An alphanumeric "ID" is assigned to the channel - this ID will be included in the displayof the channel actual value, along with the programmed "UNITS" associated with the parameter measured bythe transducer, such as Volt, °C, MegaWatts, etc. This ID is also used to reference the channel as the inputparameter to features designed to measure this type of parameter. The RANGE setting is used to select thespecific mAdc range of the transducer connected to the input channel.

DCMA INPUTS

DCMA INPUT H1

::

MESSAGE DCMA INPUT U8

DCMA INPUT M1

DCMA INPUT M1FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGEDCMA INPUT M1 ID:DCMA Ip 1


MESSAGEDCMA INPUT M1UNITS: mA


MESSAGEDCMA INPUT M1RANGE: 0 to -1 mA

Range: 0 to -1, 0 to +1, -1 to +1, 0 to 5, 0 to 10, 0 to 20,4 to 20 mA

MESSAGEDCMA INPUT M1 MINVALUE: 0.000

Range: -9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001

MESSAGEDCMA INPUT M1 MAXVALUE: 0.000

Range: -9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001




5 SETTINGS 5.8 TRANSDUCER I/O

5

The MIN VALUE and MAX VALUE settings are used to program the span of the transducer in primary units.For example, a temperature transducer might have a span from 0°C to 250°C; in this case the MIN value wouldbe 0 and the MAX value 250. Another example would be a Watt transducer with a span from -20 MW to +180MW; in this case the MIN value would be -20 and the MAX value 180. Intermediate values between the MINand MAX are scaled linearly.

5.8.2 RTD INPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS TRANSDUCER I/O RTD INPUTS

Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from external Resistance Temperature Detectors andconvert these signals into a digital format for use as required. These channels are intended to be connected toany of the RTD types in common use. Specific hardware details are contained in the HARDWARE chapter.

RTD input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. The user configures individualchannels with the settings shown here.

The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom.On power-up, the relay will automatically generate configuration settings for every channel, based on the ordercode, in the same general manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followedby the row number, 1 through 8 inclusive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actualvalue for each available input channel.

Settings are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown below for thefirst channel of a type 5C transducer module installed in slot M.

The function of the channel may be either "Enabled" or "Disabled." If Disabled, there will not be an actual valuecreated for the channel. An alphanumeric "ID" is assigned to the channel - this ID will be included in the displayof the channel actual value. This ID is also used to reference the channel as the input parameter to featuresdesigned to measure this type of parameter. Selecting the type of RTD connected to the channel configuresthe channel.

RTD INPUTS

RTD INPUT H1

::

MESSAGE RTD INPUT U8

RTD INPUT M5

RTD INPUT M5FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGERTD INPUT M5 ID:RTD Ip 1


MESSAGERTD INPUT M5 TYPE:100 Ω Platinum

Range: 100Ω Platinum, 120Ω Nickel, 100Ω Nickel,

10Ω Copper




5.9 TESTING 5 SETTINGS

5

5.9 TESTING 5.9.1 INTRODUCTION

The relay provides test settings to verify that the relay is functional using simulated conditions to test all contactinputs and outputs. While the relay is in TEST MODE, the feature being tested overrides normal functioning ofthe relay. During this time the TEST MODE LED will remain on. Once out of TEST MODE, the normal function-ing of the relay will be restored.

5.9.2 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS TESTING FORCE CONTACT INPUTS

The Force Contact Inputs test feature of the relay provides a method of performing checks on the function of allcontact inputs. Once enabled, the relay will be placed into Test Mode, allowing this feature to override the nor-mal function of contact inputs. The TEST MODE LED will be ON indicating that the relay is in test mode. Thestate of each contact input may be programmed as Disabled, Open or Closed. All contact input operationsreturn to normal when all settings for this feature are disabled.

5.9.3 FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS TESTING FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS

The Force Contact Output test feature of the relay, provides a method of performing checks on all contact out-puts. Once enabled, the relay will be placed into a Test Mode, allowing this feature to override the normal func-tion of contact outputs. The TEST MODE LED will be ON. The state of each contact output may beprogrammed as Disabled, Energized, De-energized or Freeze. The Freeze option maintains the output contactin the state at which it was frozen. All contact output operations return to normal when all the settings for thisfeature are disabled.

FORCE CONTACT INPUTS

FORCE Cont Ip 1: Disabled

Range: Disabled, Open, Closed

MESSAGEFORCE Cont Ip 2: Disabled


::

MESSAGEFORCE Cont Ip xx: Disabled


FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS

FORCE Cont Op 1: Disabled

Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized, Freeze

MESSAGEFORCE Cont Op 2: Disabled


::

MESSAGEFORCE Cont Op xx: Disabled





6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 OVERVIEW

6

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 OVERVIEW 6.1.1 ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU


CONTACT INPUTS

VIRTUAL INPUTS

REMOTE INPUTS

CONTACT OUTPUTS

VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

AUTORECLOSE

REMOTE DEVICES STATUS

REMOTE DEVICES STATISTICS

DIGITAL COUNTERS

FLEX STATES

CLOCK

ETHERNET

ACTUAL VALUES METERING

SOURCE SRC 1

SOURCE SRC 2

SOURCE SRC 3

SOURCE SRC 4

SOURCE SRC 5

SOURCE SRC 6

SYNCHROCHECK

AC INPUTS




6.1 OVERVIEW 6 ACTUAL VALUES

6

TRANSDUCER I/O DCMA INPUTS

TRANSDUCER I/O RTD INPUTS

ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS

EVENT RECORD

OSCILLOGRAPHY

MAINTENANCE

ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO

MODEL INFORMATION

FIRMWARE REVISIONS




6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.2 STATUS

6

6.2 STATUS

NOTE: For status reporting, ‘On’ represents Logic 1 and ‘Off’ represents Logic 0.

6.2.1 CONTACT INPUTS

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CONTACT INPUTS

The present status of the contact inputs is shown here.

The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact input.

e.g. ‘Cont Ip 1’ refers to the contact input in terms of the default name-array index.

The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the contact input.


PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS VIRTUAL INPUTS

The present status of the 32 virtual inputs is shown here.

The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the virtual input.

e.g. ‘Virt Ip 1’ refers to the virtual input in terms of the default name-array index.

The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the virtual input.

CONTACT INPUTS

Cont Ip 1Off

::

MESSAGECont Ip xxOff

VIRTUAL INPUTS

Virt Ip 1Off

::

MESSAGEVirt Ip 32Off




6.2 STATUS 6 ACTUAL VALUES

6

6.2.3 REMOTE INPUTS

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE INPUTS

The present status of the 32 remote inputs is shown here.

The status displayed will be that of the remote point unless the remote device has been established to be"Offline" in which case the value shown will be the programmed default status for the remote input.

6.2.4 CONTACT OUTPUTS

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CONTACT OUTPUTS

The present status of the contact outputs is shown here.

The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact output.

e.g. ‘Cont Op 1’ refers to the contact output in terms of the default name-array index.

The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the contact output.

Note: For Form-A outputs, the status of the voltage(V) and/or current(I) detectors will show as: Off,VOff, IOff, On, VOn, and/or IOn. For Form-C outputs, the status will show as Off or On.

REMOTE INPUTS

REMOTE INPUT 1STATUS: Off

Range: On, Off

::

MESSAGEREMOTE INPUT 32STATUS: Off

Range: On, Off

CONTACT OUTPUTS

Cont Op 1Off

::

MESSAGECont Op xxOff





6

6.2.5 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

The present status of up to 64 virtual outputs is shown here.

The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the virtual output.

e.g. ‘Virt Op 1’ refers to the virtual output in terms of the default name-array index.

The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the virtual output, as calculated by the FlexLogic™equation for that output.

6.2.6 AUTORECLOSE

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS AUTORECLOSE AUTORECLOSE 1

The automatic reclosure shot count is shown here.

6.2.7 REMOTE DEVICES STATUS

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE DEVICES STATUS

The present status of up to 16 programmed Remote Devices is shown here.

The ALL REMOTE DEVICES ONLINE message indicates whether or not all programmed Remote Devices areonline. If the corresponding status is ‘No’, then at least one required Remote Device is not online.

VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

Virt Op 1Off

::

MESSAGEVirt Op 64Off

AUTORECLOSE 1

AUTORECLOSE 1SHOT COUNT: 0

Range: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4

REMOTE DEVICES STATUS

All REMOTE DEVICESONLINE: No

Range: Yes, No

MESSAGEREMOTE DEVICE 1STATUS: Offline

Range: Online, Offline

::

MESSAGEREMOTE DEVICE 16STATUS: Offline

Range: Online, Offline




6.2 STATUS 6 ACTUAL VALUES

6

6.2.8 REMOTE DEVICES STATISTICS

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE DEVICES STATISTICS REMOTE DEVICE 1

Statistical data (2 types) for up to 16 programmed Remote Devices is shown here.

• The ‘StNum’ number is obtained from the indicated Remote Device and is incremented whenever achange of state of at least one DNA or UserSt bit occurs.

• The ‘SqNum’ number is obtained from the indicated Remote Device and is incremented whenever aGOOSE message is sent. This number will rollover to zero when a count of 4,294,967,295 is incremented.

6.2.9 DIGITAL COUNTERS

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS DIGITAL COUNTERS DIGITAL COUNTERS Counter 1

The present status of the 8 digital counters is shown here.

The status of each counter, with the user-defined counter name, includes the accumulated and frozen counts(the count units label will also appear). Also included, is the date/time stamp for the frozen count. The‘MICROS’ value refers to the microsecond portion of the time stamp.

REMOTE DEVICE 1

REMOTE DEVICE 1StNum: 0

MESSAGEREMOTE DEVICE 1SqNum: 0

DIGITAL COUNTERS Counter 1

Counter 1 ACCUM:0

MESSAGECounter 1 FROZEN:

0

MESSAGECounter 1 FROZEN:YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS

MESSAGECounter 1 MICROS:

0





6

6.2.10 FLEX STATES

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS FLEX STATES

There are 256 FlexState bits available, numbered from 1 to 256. The second line value indicates the state ofthe given FlexState bit.

6.2.11 CLOCK

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CLOCK

The current date and time are shown here. The time is displayed using the 24 hour clock. If the date or timehas never been programmed, the message will display “Unavailable”.

6.2.12 ETHERNET

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS ETHERNET

FLEX STATES

PARAM 1: OffOff

Range: Off, On

MESSAGEPARAM 2: OffOff

Range: Off, On

::

MESSAGEPARAM 256: OffOff

Range: Off, On

CLOCK

THU SEP 30 199910:26:14

ETHERNET

ETHERNET PRI LINKSTATUS: Fail

Range: OK, Fail

MESSAGEETHERNET SEC LINKSTATUS: Fail

Range: OK, Fail




6.3 METERING 6 ACTUAL VALUES

6

6.3 METERING 6.3.1 METERING CONVENTIONS

The following figure illustrates the conventions established for use in UR relays.

Figure 6–1: FLOW DIRECTION OF SIGNED VALUES FOR WATTS AND VARS




6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.3 METERING

6

6.3.2 SOURCES

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1

PHASE CURRENT SRC 1

SRC 1 RMS Ia:0.000 A

MESSAGESRC 1 RMS Ib:

0.000 A

MESSAGESRC 1 RMS Ic:

0.000 A

MESSAGESRC 1 RMS In:

0.000 A

MESSAGESRC 1 PHASOR Ia:

0.000 A 0.0°

MESSAGESRC 1 PHASOR Ib:

0.000 A 0.0°

MESSAGESRC 1 PHASOR Ic:

0.000 A 0.0°

MESSAGESRC 1 PHASOR In:

0.000 A 0.0°

MESSAGESRC 1 ZERO SEQ I0:

0.000 A 0.0°

MESSAGESRC 1 POS SEQ I1:

0.000 A 0.0°

MESSAGESRC 1 NEG SEQ I2:

0.000 A 0.0°

GROUND CURRENT SRC 1

SRC 1 RMS Ig:0.000 A

MESSAGESRC 1 PHASOR Ig:

0.000 A 0.0°

PHASE VOLTAGE SRC 1

SRC 1 RMS Vag:0.000 V

MESSAGESRC 1 RMS Vbg:

0.000 V

MESSAGESRC 1 RMS Vcg:

0.000 V

MESSAGESRC 1 PHASOR Vag:

0.000 V 0.0°

MESSAGESRC 1 PHASOR Vbg:

0.000 V 0.0°

MESSAGESRC 1 PHASOR Vcg:

0.000 V 0.0°

MESSAGESRC 1 RMS Vab:

0.000 V





6

MESSAGESRC 1 RMS Vbc:

0.000 V

MESSAGESRC 1 RMS Vca:

0.000 V

MESSAGESRC 1 PHASOR Vab:

0.000 V 0.0°

MESSAGESRC 1 PHASOR Vbc:

0.000 V 0.0°

MESSAGESRC 1 PHASOR Vca:

0.000 V 0.0°

MESSAGESRC 1 ZERO SEQ V0:

0.000 V 0.0°

MESSAGESRC 1 POS SEQ V1:

0.000 V 0.0°

MESSAGESRC 1 NEG SEQ V2:

0.000 V 0.0°

AUXILIARY VOLTAGE SRC 1

SRC 1 RMS Vx:0.000 V

MESSAGESRC 1 PHASOR Vx:

0.000 V 0.0°

POWER SRC 1

SRC 1 REAL POWER3φ: 0.000 W

MESSAGESRC 1 REAL POWERφa: 0.000 W

MESSAGESRC 1 REAL POWERφb: 0.000 W

MESSAGESRC 1 REAL POWERφc: 0.000 W

MESSAGESRC 1 REACTIVE PWR3φ: 0.000 var

MESSAGESRC 1 REACTIVE PWRφa: 0.000 var

MESSAGESRC 1 REACTIVE PWRφb: 0.000 var

MESSAGESRC 1 REACTIVE PWRφc: 0.000 var

MESSAGESRC 1 APPARENT PWR3φ: 0.000 VA

MESSAGESRC 1 APPARENT PWRφa: 0.000 VA

MESSAGESRC 1 APPARENT PWRφb: 0.000 VA





6

There are up to 6 identical Source actual value menus available, numbered from SRC 1 to SRC 6.

"SRC 1" will be replaced by whatever name was programmed by the user for the associated source (see Set-tings \ System Setup \ Signal Sources).

MESSAGESRC 1 APPARENT PWRφc: 0.000 VA

MESSAGESRC 1 POWER FACTOR3φ: -0.999

MESSAGESRC 1 POWER FACTORφa: -0.999

MESSAGESRC 1 POWER FACTORφb: -0.999

MESSAGESRC 1 POWER FACTORφc: -0.999

ENERGY SRC 1

SRC 1 POS WATTHOUR:0.000 Wh

MESSAGESRC 1 NEG WATTHOUR:0.000 Wh

MESSAGESRC 1 POS VARHOUR:0.000 varh

MESSAGESRC 1 NEG VARHOUR:0.000 varh

FREQUENCY SRC 1

SRC 1 FREQUENCY:0.00 Hz

MESSAGESRC 1 FREQUENCYRATE: 0.00 Hz/s

HARMONIC CONTENT SRC 1

SRC 1 THD Ia:

MESSAGESRC 1 THD Ib:

MESSAGESRC 1 THD Ic:

MESSAGESRC 1 THD Ig:

MESSAGESRC 1 [ ] HARM Ia:

MESSAGESRC 1 [ ] HARM Ib:

MESSAGESRC 1 [ ] HARM Ic:

MESSAGESRC 1 [ ] HARM Ig:





6

6.3.3 SYNCHROCHECK

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SYNCHROCHECK SYNCHROCHECK1

The Actual Values menu for SYNCHROCHECK2 is identical to that of SYNCHROCHECK1.

If a Synchrocheck Function setting is set to Disabled, the corresponding Actual Values menu item will not bedisplayed.

SYNCHROCHECK1

SYNCHROCHECK 1 DELTAVOLT: 0 V

MESSAGESYNCHROCHECK 1 DELTAPHASE: 0°

MESSAGESYNCHROCHECK 1 DELTAFREQ: 0.00 Hz





6

6.3.4 AC INPUTS

a) CURRENT BANKS

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING AC INPUTS CURRENT BANK X1

‘X’ = F, M, or U .

Up To 6 identical Current Bank actual value menus are available.

b) VOLTAGE BANKS

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK X1

‘X’ = F, M, or U .

Up to 3 identical Voltage Bank actual value menus are available.

c) FREQUENCY

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING AC INPUTS FREQUENCY

Frequency is displayed here. Frequency is measured from the VAG input for ‘Wye’, the VAB (ABC rotation) orVAC (ACB rotation) input for ‘Delta’, or the IA input if voltages are not available.

CURRENT BANK X1

X1 PHASOR Ia:0.000 A 0.0°

MESSAGEX1 PHASOR Ib:

0.000 A 0.0°

MESSAGEX1 PHASOR Ic:

0.000 A 0.0°

MESSAGEX1 PHASOR Ig:

0.000 A 0.0°

VOLTAGE BANK X5

X5 PHASOR Va:0.000 V 0.0°

MESSAGEX5 PHASOR Vb:

0.000 V 0.0°

MESSAGEX5 PHASOR Vc:

0.000 V 0.0°

MESSAGEX5 PHASOR Vx:

0.000 V 0.0°

FREQUENCY

REFERENCE FREQUENCY:0.00 Hz





6

6.3.5 TRANSDUCER I/O

a) DCMA INPUTS

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING TRANSDUCER I/O DCMA INPUTS DCMA INPUT xx

Actual values for each DCMA input channel that is Enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmedchannel "ID" and the bottom line as the value followed by the programmed units.

b) RTD INPUTS

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING TRANSDUCER I/O RTD INPUTS RTD INPUT xx

Actual values for each RTD input channel that is Enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmedchannel "ID" and the bottom line as the value.

DCMA INPUT xx

DCMA INPUT xx0.000 mA

RTD INPUT xx

RTD INPUT xx-50 ° C




6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.4 RECORDS

6

6.4 RECORDS 6.4.1 EVENT RECORD

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS EVENT RECORD

The Event Record refers to the contextual data associated with the last 1024 events, listed in chronologicalorder from most recent to oldest. If all 1024 event records have been filled, the oldest record will be removedas a new record is added.

Each event record will show the event identifier/sequence number, cause, and date/time stamp associated withthe event trigger.

In addition, a snapshot record is available for each of the last 256 trip events. This record contains frequency,current and voltage information at the time of the event. Voltage quantities will be phase to phase for both Wyeand Delta connections.

EVENT RECORD

EVENT: 1000CONTACT OP H1 Off

Snapshot Record

MESSAGEEVENT: 999PHASE T0C1 OP

DATE STAMP YY/MM/DD:1999/06/19

MESSAGEEVENT: 998PHASE T0C1 PKP

TIME STAMP:10:27:00.024135

::

FREQUENCY0.00 Hz

::

IA FUNDAMENTAL0.0 A 0.0 °

::

IB FUNDAMENTAL0.0 A 0.0 °

::

IC FUNDAMENTAL0.0 A 0.0 °

::

VAB FUNDAMENTAL0 V 0.0 °

::

VBC FUNDAMENTAL0 V 0.0 °

::

VCA FUNDAMENTAL0 V 0.0 °

MESSAGEEVENT: 4GROUND I0C1 OP

MESSAGEEVENT: 3OSCILLOGRPHY TRIGGER

DATE STAMP YY/MM/DD:1999/06/04

MESSAGEEVENT: 2GROUND I0C1 PKP

TIME STAMP:12:03:00.034051

MESSAGEEVENT: 1EVENTS CLEARED

Date and Time Stamp




6.4 RECORDS 6 ACTUAL VALUES

6

6.4.2 OSCILLOGRAPHY

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS OSCILLOGRAPHY

This menu allows the user to view the number of triggers involved and number of oscillography traces avail-able.

6.4.3 MAINTENANCE

a) BREAKER 1(2)

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS MAINTENANCE BREAKER 1

There is an identical Actual Value menu for each of the 2 Breakers. The Arcing AMP values are in units of kA2-cycles. Refer to the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing breaker arcing current records.

OSCILLOGRAPHY

NUMBER OF TRIGGERS:0

MESSAGEAVAILABLE RECORDS:

0

BREAKER 1

BKR 1 ARCING AMPφA:0.00 kA2-cyc

MESSAGEBKR 1 ARCING AMPφB:0.00 kA2-cyc

MESSAGEBKR 1 ARCING AMPφC:0.00 kA2-cyc




6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION

6

6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION 6.5.1 MODEL INFORMATION

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO MODEL INFORMATION

The product’s order code, serial number, Ethernet MAC address, and date/time of manufacture are shownhere.

6.5.2 FIRMWARE REVISIONS

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO FIRMWARE REVISIONS

A modification file number of 0 indicates that currently, there are no modifications.

MODEL INFORMATION

ORDER CODE LINE 1:F60-A00-HCH-F8A-H6A example code shown

MESSAGEORDER CODE LINE 2:



MESSAGESERIAL NUMBER:

MESSAGEETHERNET MAC ADDRESS000000000000

MESSAGEMANUFACTURING DATE:

0

FIRMWARE REVISIONS

F60 Feeder RelayREVISION: 1.80

Range: 0.00 to 655.35Revision number of the application firmware.

MESSAGEMODIFICATION FILENUMBER: 0

Range: 0 to 65535 (References the MOD FILE.)Value is 0 for each standard firmware release.

MESSAGEBOOT PROGRAMREVISION: 0.08

Range: 0.00 to 655.35Revision number of the boot program firmware.

MESSAGEFRONT PANEL PROGRAMREVISION: 0.08

Range: 0.00 to 655.35Revision number of the front panel program firmware.

MESSAGEPLATFORMREVISION: 1.80

Range: 0.00 to 655.35Revision number of the platform firmware.

MESSAGEBUILT ON: THU SEP 30

12:34:56 1999

Range: Any valid date & time.Day, date, and time when the firmware was built.




6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION 6 ACTUAL VALUES

6




7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.1 COMMANDS

7

7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.1 COMMANDS 7.1.1 COMMANDS MENU

The COMMANDS menu contains directives to the relay that are intended to be available to operations person-nel.

All commands can be protected from unauthorized access via the Command Password; see the PasswordSecurity menu description in the Settings \ Product Setup section.

After successfully entering any command, the following flash message will appear:


PATH: COMMANDS COMMANDS VIRTUAL INPUTS

The states of the 32 virtual inputs may be changed here.

The first line of the display indicates the ID of the virtual input. The second line indicates the current status ofthe virtual inputs. This status will be a logical state ‘Off’ (0) or ‘On’ (1).

COMMANDS

MESSAGE COMMANDS VIRTUAL INPUTS

MESSAGE COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS

MESSAGE COMMANDS RELAY MAINTENANCE

CommandExecuted

COMMANDS VIRTUAL INPUTS

Virt Ip 1Off

Range: Off, On

::

MESSAGEVirt Ip 32Off

Range: Off, On




7.1 COMMANDS 7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS

7

7.1.3 CLEAR RECORDS

PATH: COMMANDS COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS

This menu contains commands for clearing historical data such as the Event Records.

Changing a command setting to ‘Yes’ and then clicking the key will clear the corresponding data. Thecommand setting will then automatically revert to ‘No’.

7.1.4 RELAY MAINTENANCE

PATH: COMMANDS COMMANDS RELAY MAINTENANCE

This menu contains commands for relay maintenance purposes.

The PERFORM LAMPTEST command turns on all LEDs and display pixels for a short duration.

The UPDATE ORDER CODE command causes the relay to scan the backplane for the hardware modules andupdate the order code to match. There will be no impact if there have been no changes to the hardware mod-ules.

Changing a command setting to ‘Yes’ and then clicking the key will activate the command. The com-mand setting will then automatically revert to ‘No’.


CLEAR EVENT RECORDS?No

Range: No, Yes

CLEAR BREAKER 1ARCING AMPS? No

Range: No, Yes

CLEAR BREAKER 2ARCING AMPS? No

Range: No, Yes

COMMANDS RELAY MAINTENANCE

PERFORM LAMPTEST?No

Range: No, Yes

UPDATE ORDER CODE?No

Range: No, Yes




7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.2 TARGETS

7

7.2 TARGETS 7.2.1 TARGETS MENU

The status of any active targets will be displayed in the TARGETS menu. If no targets are active, the displaywill be:

a) TARGET MESSAGES

When there are no active targets, the first target to become active will cause the display to immediately defaultto that message. If there are active targets and the user is navigating through other messages, and when thedefault message timer times out (i.e. the keypad has not been used for a determined period of time), the dis-play will again default back to the target message.

The range of variables for the target messages is described below. Phase information will be included if appli-cable. If a target message status changes, the status with the highest priority will be displayed.

If a self test error is detected, a message will appear indicating the cause of the error.

For example:

TARGETS

MESSAGEDIGITAL ELEMENT 1:LATCHED

Displayed only if targets for this element areactive. Example shown.

MESSAGEDIGITAL ELEMENT 16:LATCHED

Displayed only if targets for this element areactive. Example shown.

MESSAGE::

No ActiveTargets

Table 7–1: TARGET MESSAGE PRIORITY STATUS

Priority Active Status Description

1 OP element operated and still picked up

2 PKP element picked up and timed out

3 LATCHED element had operated but has dropped out

UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED:Self Test Error




7.2 TARGETS 7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS

7

7.2.2 RELAY SELF-TESTS

The relay performs a number of diagnostic checks on itself to ensure its integrity. Self-test errors shown in thetable below will de-energize the critical fail relay on the power supply module and all other output relays, gen-erate a target message and event, extinguish the faceplate IN SERVICE indicator and turn the TROUBLE indi-cator on.

In the event that a major self-test error message is generated, such as UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED, a RELAYOUT OF SERVICE event message will also be generated to signify that the relay is no longer in protectionmode. Once the error is resolved, a RELAY IN SERVICE event message will be generated to signify that therelay is operating in protection mode.

Table 7–2: SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES (Sheet 1 of 2)

Self-test ErrorMessage

Self-resetTarget

MessageDescription Of Problem What To Do

EEPROM CORRUPTED No The non-volatile memoryhas been corrupted.

Contact the factory.

UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED Yes PRODUCT SETUP \INSTALLATION settingindicates relay is not in aprogrammed state.

Program all settings (especiallythose under PRODUCT SETUP \INSTALLATION).

EQUIPMENT MISMATCHwith 2nd-line detail message

Yes Configuration of modulesdoes not match the ordercode stored in the CPU.

Check all module types againstthe order code; make sure theyare inserted properly, and cyclethe control power (if problem per-sists, contact the factory).

UNIT NOT CALIBRATED Yes Settings indicate the unit isnot calibrated.


IRIG-B FAILURE Yes Bad IRIG-B input signal. • Check to ensure that theIRIG-B cable is connected tothe relay.

• Check the functionality of thecable (i.e. look for physicaldamage or perform a continu-ity test).

• Check to ensure the IRIG-Breceiver is functioning prop-erly.

• Check the input signal level; itmay be lower than the specifi-cation.

• If none of the above itemsapply, contact the factory.

FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKENwith 2nd-line detail message

Yes FlexLogic equations do notcompile properly.

Finish all equation editing and useself test to debug any errors.




7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.2 TARGETS

7

A/D RESET FAILUREA/D CAL FAILUREA/D INT. MISSINGA/D VOLT REF. FAILNO DSP INTERRUPTSDSP CHECKSUM FAILEDDSP FAILED

No CT/VT module with digitalsignal processor may havea problem.

Cycle the control power (if theproblem recurs, contact the fac-tory).

FLASH PROGRAMMINGwith 2nd-line detail message:• MMU problem• System Is restarting• Mode On• Reading at <hex_addr>• Locking at <hex_addr>• Can’t Lock <hex_addr>• Erasing at <hex_addr>• Fail Erase <hex_addr>• Address <hex_addr>• Fail <hex_addr> W-- R--• Bad Size• Verifying CRC• Flash CRC OK• Flash CRC Bad

PROGRAM MEMORYTest Failed

Error was found whilechecking Flash memory.


BATTERY FAIL Battery is not functioning. Replace the battery.

PROTOTYPE FIRMWARE A prototype version of thefirmware is loaded.


Table 7–2: SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES (Sheet 2 of 2)

Self-test ErrorMessage

Self-resetTarget

MessageDescription Of Problem What To Do




7.2 TARGETS 7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS

7




8 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 8.1 APPLICATION GUIDELINES

8

8 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 8.1 APPLICATION GUIDELINES

8.1.1 NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL ELEMENT

a) SOURCE:

The neutral directional source provides the operating and polarizing quantities for the directional element andmust include:

• The CTs which measure the current on the protected element. The operating current for the neutral direc-tional element will be the calculated zero sequence current for the selected CTs.

• A set of VTs connected in "Wye", measuring the voltage at the relay location. The polarizing voltage will bethe calculated zero sequence voltage for the selected set of VTs.

• Optional or where available, the ground current from a current polarizing source, usually a CT on the neu-tral grounding of a transformer. This will constitute the polarizing current of the neutral directional element.

To establish the suitability of any zero-sequence current polarizing source, studies must be performed. Forexample, a Delta-Wye grounded transformer bank provides an adequate ground polarizing current for lines onthe Wye side of the bank. Some three-winding transformers may be suitable for using polarizing current. Theneutral of an autotransformer cannot be used as a current polarization source, because of the change in direc-tion of the current in the neutral of the autotransformer for different faults. If an adequate source of polarizingcurrent is not available, the zero-sequence current polarization method cannot be used.

b) POLARIZATION:

To suit different power system configurations, voltage, current or both parameters can be selected for polariz-ing. Alternatively, a negative sequence directional element can be used to control the neutral overcurrent ele-ments in situations where zero sequence polarizing quantities are not reliable.

Zero-sequence voltage polarization compares the phasor relationship between the zero-sequence currentflowing in the protected line (3I_0) and the zero-sequence voltage at the relay location (3V_0). The zero-sequence voltage at the relay location varies depending of the location of the fault, the zero-sequence sourceimpedance behind the relay location, and the length of the transmission line.

A minimum level of voltage must be selected to prevent operation caused by system unbalanced voltages orVT ratio errors. For well-balanced systems and 1% accuracy VTs, this setting can be as low as 2% of VT nom-inal voltage. For systems with high-resistance grounding or floating neutrals, this setting can be as high as20%. The default of 5% is appropriate for most solidly grounded systems.

At stations with small zero-sequence source impedance (large, solidly grounded transformer banks), the zero-sequence voltage must be checked for remote faults to assure that an adequate magnitude of 3V_0 is presentfor proper operation of the directional element.

If the magnitude of 3V_0 is too low for some system fault conditions, zero-sequence current polarization, dualpolarization or negative-sequence polarization may be used.

Note that voltage polarizing requires the source VTs be connected in Wye.

Zero-sequence current polarization is commonly applied at stations having power transformers from which asuitable ground current can be used as a polarizing current (Ipol). The polarizing current must flow in the samedirection relative to the current flowing to the fault for all system ground faults for this method to be adequate.This method compares the phase angle of the zero sequence current flowing in the polarizing source (trans-former neutral) with 3I_0 flowing in the line.




8.1 APPLICATION GUIDELINES 8 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS

8

c) ELEMENT CHARACTERISTIC ANGLE (ECA):

The Element Characteristic Angle is the angle by which the zero sequence voltage is shifted in the laggingdirection, to generate the polarizing voltage. This is the angle by which the reversed residual voltage (-3V_0) isdisplaced from the residual current (3I_0) and is equal to the angle of the source and line impedances (Z0S +Z0L). In many situations (depending on the system and the protected line characteristics) it is acceptable to setECA equal to the protected line zero sequence impedance angle, ∠Z0L. This setting only affects the voltagepolarized element.

EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE ECA:

The setting of the ECA for a Neutral Directional Element depends on the system and the protected line charac-teristics. Suppose the following line having a Neutral Directional Element installed on breaker A:

ECA = angle of (12∠78° + 75∠73°) = 73.7°

As can be seen in this example, the calculated ECA is very close to the line Z0 angle. In many cases, settingECA equal to the protected line zero sequence impedance angle (∠Z0L) is acceptable.

d) LIMIT ANGLE (LA):

The limit of operation different from ±90° should allow for fine compensation of CT and VT errors.

PROTECTEDLINE

A B E2E1

120 KV DISTRIBUTION LINE

NOTE: ALL IMPEDANCES ARE GIVEN IN PRIMARYSYSTEM OHMS.

Z1 = 15 @ 80 o

Z0 = 12 @ 78 o

Z1 = 25 @ 75 o

Z0 = 75 @ 73 o




9 COMMISSIONING 9.1 SETTINGS - PRODUCT SETUP

9

9 COMMISSIONING 9.1 SETTINGS - PRODUCT SETUPThe following tables are provided to keep a record of settings to be used on a relay.

9.1.1 PRODUCT SETUP

PASSWORD SECURITY

Access Level

Command Password

Setting Password

Encrypted Command Password

Encrypted Setting Password

DISPLAY PROPERTIES

Flash Message Time

Default Message Timeout

Default Message Intensity

COMMUNICATIONS

Modbus Slave Address

RS485 Com1 Baud Rate

RS485 Com1 Parity

RS485 Com2 Baud Rate

RS485 Com2 Parity

Ethernet IP Address

Gateway IP Address

OSI Network Address (NSAP)

Default GOOSE Update Time

Ethernet Primary Link Monitor

Ethernet Secondary Link Monitor

REAL TIME CLOCK

Date

Time

IRIG-B Signal Type

OSCILLOGRAPHY

Number of Records

Trigger Mode

Trigger Position

Trigger Source

Digital Channel 1

Digital Channel 2

Digital Channel 3

Digital Channel 4

Digital Channel 5

Digital Channel 6

Digital Channel 7

Digital Channel 8

Digital Channel 9

Digital Channel 10

Digital Channel 11

Digital Channel 12

Digital Channel 13

Digital Channel 14

Digital Channel 15

Digital Channel 16

Digital Channel 17

Digital Channel 18

Digital Channel 19

Digital Channel 20

Digital Channel 21

Digital Channel 22

Digital Channel 23

Digital Channel 24

Digital Channel 25

Digital Channel 26

Digital Channel 27

Digital Channel 28

Digital Channel 29

Digital Channel 30

Digital Channel 31

Digital Channel 32

Digital Channel 33




9.1 SETTINGS - PRODUCT SETUP 9 COMMISSIONING

9

Digital Channel 34

Digital Channel 35

Digital Channel 36

Digital Channel 37

Digital Channel 38

Digital Channel 39

Digital Channel 40

Digital Channel 41

Digital Channel 42

Digital Channel 43

Digital Channel 44

Digital Channel 45

Digital Channel 46

Digital Channel 47

Digital Channel 48

Digital Channel 49

Digital Channel 50

Digital Channel 51

Digital Channel 52

Digital Channel 53

Digital Channel 54

Digital Channel 55

Digital Channel 56

Digital Channel 57

Digital Channel 58

Digital Channel 59

Digital Channel 60

Digital Channel 61

Digital Channel 62

Digital Channel 63

Digital Channel 64

OSCILLOGRAPHY





9


LED 1 Operand

LED 2 Operand

LED 3 Operand

LED 4 Operand

LED 5 Operand

LED 6 Operand

LED 7 Operand

LED 8 Operand

LED 9 Operand

LED 10 Operand

LED 11 Operand

LED 12 Operand

LED 13 Operand

LED 14 Operand

LED 15 Operand

LED 16 Operand

LED 17 Operand

LED 18 Operand

LED 19 Operand

LED 20 Operand

LED 21 Operand

LED 22 Operand

LED 23 Operand

LED 24 Operand

LED 25 Operand

LED 26 Operand

LED 27 Operand

LED 28 Operand

LED 29 Operand

LED 30 Operand

LED 31 Operand

LED 32 Operand

LED 33 Operand

LED 34 Operand

LED 35 Operand

LED 36 Operand

LED 37 Operand

LED 38 Operand

LED 39 Operand

LED 40 Operand

LED 41 Operand

LED 42 Operand

LED 43 Operand

LED 44 Operand

LED 45 Operand

LED 46 Operand

LED 47 Operand

LED 48 Operand






9

Table 9–1: FLEX STATE PARAMETERS

PARAMETERNUMBER

FLEXLOGICOPERAND

PARAMETERNUMBER

FLEXLOGICOPERAND

PARAMETERNUMBER

FLEXLOGICOPERAND

PARAMETERNUMBER

FLEXLOGICOPERAND

1 33 65 97

2 34 66 98

3 35 67 99

4 36 68 100

5 37 69 101

6 38 70 102

7 39 71 103

8 40 72 104

9 41 73 105

10 42 74 106

11 43 75 107

12 44 76 108

13 45 77 109

14 46 78 110

15 47 79 111

16 48 80 112

17 49 81 113

18 50 82 114

19 51 83 115

20 52 84 116

21 53 85 117

22 54 86 118

23 55 87 119

24 56 88 120

25 57 89 121

26 58 90 122

27 59 91 123

28 60 92 124

29 61 93 125

30 62 94 126

31 63 95 127

32 64 96 128





9

Table 9–2: FLEX STATE PARAMETERS (Continued)

PARAMETERNUMBER

FLEXLOGICOPERAND

PARAMETERNUMBER

FLEXLOGICOPERAND

PARAMETERNUMBER

FLEXLOGICOPERAND

PARAMETERNUMBER

FLEXLOGICOPERAND

129 161 193 225

130 162 194 226

131 163 195 227

132 164 196 228

133 165 197 229

134 166 198 230

135 167 199 231

136 168 200 232

137 169 201 233

138 170 202 234

139 171 203 235

140 172 204 236

141 173 205 237

142 174 206 238

143 175 207 239

144 176 208 240

145 177 209 241

146 178 210 242

147 179 211 243

148 180 212 244

149 181 213 245

150 182 214 246

151 183 215 247

152 184 216 248

153 185 217 249

154 186 218 250

155 187 219 251

156 188 220 252

157 189 221 253

158 190 222 254

159 191 223 255

160 192 224 256





9

MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD

TEXT 1

TEXT 2

TEXT 3

TEXT 4

TEXT 5

INSTALLATION

Relay Settings

Relay Name




9 COMMISSIONING 9.2 SETTINGS - SYSTEM SETUP

9

9.2 SETTINGS - SYSTEM SETUP 9.2.1 SYSTEM SETUP

a) CURRENT BANKS

b) VOLTAGE BANKS

CURRENT BANK 1

Phase CT _____ Primary

Phase CT _____ Secondary

Ground CT _____ Primary

Ground CT _____ Secondary

CURRENT BANK 2





CURRENT BANK 3





CURRENT BANK 4





CURRENT BANK 5





CURRENT BANK 6





VOLTAGE BANK 1

Phase VT _____ Connection

Phase VT _____ Secondary

Phase VT _____ Ratio

Auxiliary VT _____ Connection

Auxiliary VT _____ Secondary

Auxiliary VT _____ Ratio

VOLTAGE BANK 2







VOLTAGE BANK 3










9.2 SETTINGS - SYSTEM SETUP 9 COMMISSIONING

9

c) POWER SYSTEM

d) SIGNAL SOURCES

POWER SYSTEM

Nominal Frequency

Phase Rotation

Frequency and Phase Reference

Frequency Tracking

SIGNAL SOURCE 1

Source Name

Phase CT

Ground CT

Phase VT

Auxiliary VT

SIGNAL SOURCE 2

Source Name

Phase CT

Ground CT

Phase VT

Auxiliary VT

SIGNAL SOURCE 3

Source Name

Phase CT

Ground CT

Phase VT

Auxiliary VT

SIGNAL SOURCE 4

Source Name

Phase CT

Ground CT

Phase VT

Auxiliary VT

SIGNAL SOURCE 5

Source Name

Phase CT

Ground CT

Phase VT

Auxiliary VT

SIGNAL SOURCE 6

Source Name

Phase CT

Ground CT

Phase VT

Auxiliary VT





9

e) BREAKERS

BREAKER 1

Function

Pushbutton Control

Name

Mode

Open

Close

φA/3-Pole

φB

φC

Ext Alarm

Alarm Delay

Manual Close Recall Time

BREAKER 2

Function

Pushbutton Control

Name

Mode

Open

Close

φA/3-Pole

φB

φC

Ext Alarm

Alarm Delay

Manual Close Recall Time




9.2 SETTINGS - SYSTEM SETUP 9 COMMISSIONING

9

f) FLEXCURVES

Table 9–3: FLEXCURVE A

Reset Time(ms)

Reset Time(ms)

Operate Time(ms)

Operate Time(ms)

Operate Time(ms)

Operate Time(ms)

0.00 0.68 1.03 2.9 4.9 10.5

0.05 0.70 1.05 3.0 5.0 11.0

0.10 0.72 1.1 3.1 5.1 11.5

0.15 0.74 1.2 3.2 5.2 12.0

0.20 0.76 1.3 3.3 5.3 12.5

0.25 0.78 1.4 3.4 5.4 13.0

0.30 0.80 1.5 3.5 5.5 13.5

0.35 0.82 1.6 3.6 5.6 14.0

0.40 0.84 1.7 3.7 5.7 14.5

0.45 0.86 1.8 3.8 5.8 15.0

0.48 0.88 1.9 3.9 5.9 15.5

0.50 0.90 2.0 4.0 6.0 16.0

0.52 0.91 2.1 4.1 6.5 16.5

0.54 0.92 2.2 4.2 7.0 17.0

0.56 0.93 2.3 4.3 7.5 17.5

0.58 0.94 2.4 4.4 8.0 18.0

0.60 0.95 2.5 4.5 8.5 18.5

0.62 0.96 2.6 4.6 9.0 19.0

0.64 0.97 2.7 4.7 9.5 19.5

0.66 0.98 2.8 4.8 10.0 20.0





9

Table 9–4: FLEXCURVE B

Reset Time(ms)

Reset Time(ms)

Operate Time(ms)

Operate Time(ms)

Operate Time(ms)

Operate Time(ms)

0.00 0.68 1.03 2.9 4.9 10.5

0.05 0.70 1.05 3.0 5.0 11.0

0.10 0.72 1.1 3.1 5.1 11.5

0.15 0.74 1.2 3.2 5.2 12.0

0.20 0.76 1.3 3.3 5.3 12.5

0.25 0.78 1.4 3.4 5.4 13.0

0.30 0.80 1.5 3.5 5.5 13.5

0.35 0.82 1.6 3.6 5.6 14.0

0.40 0.84 1.7 3.7 5.7 14.5

0.45 0.86 1.8 3.8 5.8 15.0

0.48 0.88 1.9 3.9 5.9 15.5

0.50 0.90 2.0 4.0 6.0 16.0

0.52 0.91 2.1 4.1 6.5 16.5

0.54 0.92 2.2 4.2 7.0 17.0

0.56 0.93 2.3 4.3 7.5 17.5

0.58 0.94 2.4 4.4 8.0 18.0

0.60 0.95 2.5 4.5 8.5 18.5

0.62 0.96 2.6 4.6 9.0 19.0

0.64 0.97 2.7 4.7 9.5 19.5

0.66 0.98 2.8 4.8 10.0 20.0




9.3 SETTINGS - FLEXLOGIC™ 9 COMMISSIONING

9

9.3 SETTINGS - FLEXLOGIC™ 9.3.1 FLEXLOGIC™

a) FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR

FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION EDITOR

FlexLogic Entry 1

FlexLogic Entry 2

FlexLogic Entry 3

FlexLogic Entry 4

FlexLogic Entry 5

FlexLogic Entry 6

FlexLogic Entry 7

FlexLogic Entry 8

FlexLogic Entry 9

FlexLogic Entry 10

FlexLogic Entry 11

FlexLogic Entry 12

FlexLogic Entry 13

FlexLogic Entry 14

FlexLogic Entry 15

FlexLogic Entry 16

FlexLogic Entry 17

FlexLogic Entry 18

FlexLogic Entry 19

FlexLogic Entry 20

FlexLogic Entry 21

FlexLogic Entry 22

FlexLogic Entry 23

FlexLogic Entry 24

FlexLogic Entry 25

FlexLogic Entry 26

FlexLogic Entry 27

FlexLogic Entry 28

FlexLogic Entry 29

FlexLogic Entry 30

FlexLogic Entry 31

FlexLogic Entry 32

FlexLogic Entry 33

FlexLogic Entry 34

FlexLogic Entry 35

FlexLogic Entry 36

FlexLogic Entry 37

FlexLogic Entry 38

FlexLogic Entry 39

FlexLogic Entry 40

FlexLogic Entry 41

FlexLogic Entry 42

FlexLogic Entry 43

FlexLogic Entry 44

FlexLogic Entry 45

FlexLogic Entry 46

FlexLogic Entry 47

FlexLogic Entry 48

FlexLogic Entry 49

FlexLogic Entry 50

FlexLogic Entry 51

FlexLogic Entry 52

FlexLogic Entry 53

FlexLogic Entry 54

FlexLogic Entry 55

FlexLogic Entry 56

FlexLogic Entry 57

FlexLogic Entry 58

FlexLogic Entry 59

FlexLogic Entry 60

FlexLogic Entry 61

FlexLogic Entry 62

FlexLogic Entry 63

FlexLogic Entry 64

FlexLogic Entry 65

FlexLogic Entry 66

FlexLogic Entry 67

FlexLogic Entry 68

FlexLogic Entry 69

FlexLogic Entry 70

FlexLogic Entry 71

FlexLogic Entry 72

FlexLogic Entry 73

FlexLogic Entry 74

FlexLogic Entry 75

FlexLogic Entry 76

FlexLogic Entry 77

FlexLogic Entry 78





9 COMMISSIONING 9.3 SETTINGS - FLEXLOGIC™

9

FlexLogic Entry 79

FlexLogic Entry 80

FlexLogic Entry 81

FlexLogic Entry 82

FlexLogic Entry 83

FlexLogic Entry 84

FlexLogic Entry 85

FlexLogic Entry 86

FlexLogic Entry 87

FlexLogic Entry 88

FlexLogic Entry 89

FlexLogic Entry 90

FlexLogic Entry 91

FlexLogic Entry 92

FlexLogic Entry 93

FlexLogic Entry 94

FlexLogic Entry 95

FlexLogic Entry 96

FlexLogic Entry 97

FlexLogic Entry 98

FlexLogic Entry 99

FlexLogic Entry 100

FlexLogic Entry 101

FlexLogic Entry 102

FlexLogic Entry 103

FlexLogic Entry 104

FlexLogic Entry 105

FlexLogic Entry 106

FlexLogic Entry 107

FlexLogic Entry 108

FlexLogic Entry 109

FlexLogic Entry 110

FlexLogic Entry 111

FlexLogic Entry 112

FlexLogic Entry 113

FlexLogic Entry 114

FlexLogic Entry 115

FlexLogic Entry 116

FlexLogic Entry 117

FlexLogic Entry 118

FlexLogic Entry 119


FlexLogic Entry 120

FlexLogic Entry 121

FlexLogic Entry 122

FlexLogic Entry 123

FlexLogic Entry 124

FlexLogic Entry 125

FlexLogic Entry 126

FlexLogic Entry 127

FlexLogic Entry 128

FlexLogic Entry 129

FlexLogic Entry 130

FlexLogic Entry 131

FlexLogic Entry 132

FlexLogic Entry 133

FlexLogic Entry 134

FlexLogic Entry 135

FlexLogic Entry 136

FlexLogic Entry 137

FlexLogic Entry 138

FlexLogic Entry 139

FlexLogic Entry 140

FlexLogic Entry 141

FlexLogic Entry 142

FlexLogic Entry 143

FlexLogic Entry 144

FlexLogic Entry 145

FlexLogic Entry 146

FlexLogic Entry 147

FlexLogic Entry 148

FlexLogic Entry 149

FlexLogic Entry 150

FlexLogic Entry 151

FlexLogic Entry 152

FlexLogic Entry 153

FlexLogic Entry 154

FlexLogic Entry 155

FlexLogic Entry 156

FlexLogic Entry 157

FlexLogic Entry 158

FlexLogic Entry 159

FlexLogic Entry 160






9

FlexLogic Entry 161

FlexLogic Entry 162

FlexLogic Entry 163

FlexLogic Entry 164

FlexLogic Entry 165

FlexLogic Entry 166

FlexLogic Entry 167

FlexLogic Entry 168

FlexLogic Entry 169

FlexLogic Entry 170

FlexLogic Entry 171

FlexLogic Entry 172

FlexLogic Entry 173

FlexLogic Entry 174

FlexLogic Entry 175

FlexLogic Entry 176

FlexLogic Entry 177

FlexLogic Entry 178

FlexLogic Entry 179

FlexLogic Entry 180

FlexLogic Entry 181

FlexLogic Entry 182

FlexLogic Entry 183

FlexLogic Entry 184

FlexLogic Entry 185

FlexLogic Entry 186

FlexLogic Entry 187

FlexLogic Entry 188

FlexLogic Entry 189

FlexLogic Entry 190

FlexLogic Entry 191

FlexLogic Entry 192

FlexLogic Entry 193

FlexLogic Entry 194

FlexLogic Entry 195

FlexLogic Entry 196

FlexLogic Entry 197

FlexLogic Entry 198

FlexLogic Entry 199

FlexLogic Entry 200

FlexLogic Entry 201


FlexLogic Entry 202

FlexLogic Entry 203

FlexLogic Entry 204

FlexLogic Entry 205

FlexLogic Entry 206

FlexLogic Entry 207

FlexLogic Entry 208

FlexLogic Entry 209

FlexLogic Entry 210

FlexLogic Entry 211

FlexLogic Entry 212

FlexLogic Entry 213

FlexLogic Entry 214

FlexLogic Entry 215

FlexLogic Entry 216

FlexLogic Entry 217

FlexLogic Entry 218

FlexLogic Entry 219

FlexLogic Entry 220

FlexLogic Entry 221

FlexLogic Entry 222

FlexLogic Entry 223

FlexLogic Entry 224

FlexLogic Entry 225

FlexLogic Entry 226

FlexLogic Entry 227

FlexLogic Entry 228

FlexLogic Entry 229

FlexLogic Entry 230

FlexLogic Entry 231

FlexLogic Entry 232

FlexLogic Entry 233

FlexLogic Entry 234

FlexLogic Entry 235

FlexLogic Entry 236

FlexLogic Entry 237

FlexLogic Entry 238

FlexLogic Entry 239

FlexLogic Entry 240

FlexLogic Entry 241

FlexLogic Entry 242






9

FlexLogic Entry 243

FlexLogic Entry 244

FlexLogic Entry 245

FlexLogic Entry 246

FlexLogic Entry 247

FlexLogic Entry 248

FlexLogic Entry 249

FlexLogic Entry 250

FlexLogic Entry 251

FlexLogic Entry 252

FlexLogic Entry 253

FlexLogic Entry 254

FlexLogic Entry 255

FlexLogic Entry 256

FlexLogic Entry 257

FlexLogic Entry 258

FlexLogic Entry 259

FlexLogic Entry 260

FlexLogic Entry 261

FlexLogic Entry 262

FlexLogic Entry 263

FlexLogic Entry 264

FlexLogic Entry 265

FlexLogic Entry 266

FlexLogic Entry 267

FlexLogic Entry 268

FlexLogic Entry 269

FlexLogic Entry 270

FlexLogic Entry 271

FlexLogic Entry 272

FlexLogic Entry 273

FlexLogic Entry 274

FlexLogic Entry 275

FlexLogic Entry 276

FlexLogic Entry 277

FlexLogic Entry 278

FlexLogic Entry 279

FlexLogic Entry 280

FlexLogic Entry 281

FlexLogic Entry 282

FlexLogic Entry 283


FlexLogic Entry 284

FlexLogic Entry 285

FlexLogic Entry 286

FlexLogic Entry 287

FlexLogic Entry 288

FlexLogic Entry 289

FlexLogic Entry 290

FlexLogic Entry 291

FlexLogic Entry 292

FlexLogic Entry 293

FlexLogic Entry 294

FlexLogic Entry 295

FlexLogic Entry 296

FlexLogic Entry 297

FlexLogic Entry 298

FlexLogic Entry 299

FlexLogic Entry 300

FlexLogic Entry 301

FlexLogic Entry 302

FlexLogic Entry 303

FlexLogic Entry 304

FlexLogic Entry 305

FlexLogic Entry 306

FlexLogic Entry 307

FlexLogic Entry 308

FlexLogic Entry 309

FlexLogic Entry 310

FlexLogic Entry 311

FlexLogic Entry 312

FlexLogic Entry 313

FlexLogic Entry 314

FlexLogic Entry 315

FlexLogic Entry 316

FlexLogic Entry 317

FlexLogic Entry 318

FlexLogic Entry 319

FlexLogic Entry 320

FlexLogic Entry 321

FlexLogic Entry 322

FlexLogic Entry 323

FlexLogic Entry 324






9

FlexLogic Entry 325

FlexLogic Entry 326

FlexLogic Entry 327

FlexLogic Entry 328

FlexLogic Entry 329

FlexLogic Entry 330

FlexLogic Entry 331

FlexLogic Entry 332

FlexLogic Entry 333

FlexLogic Entry 334

FlexLogic Entry 335

FlexLogic Entry 336

FlexLogic Entry 337

FlexLogic Entry 338

FlexLogic Entry 339

FlexLogic Entry 340

FlexLogic Entry 341

FlexLogic Entry 342

FlexLogic Entry 343

FlexLogic Entry 344

FlexLogic Entry 345

FlexLogic Entry 346

FlexLogic Entry 347

FlexLogic Entry 348

FlexLogic Entry 349

FlexLogic Entry 350

FlexLogic Entry 351

FlexLogic Entry 352

FlexLogic Entry 353

FlexLogic Entry 354

FlexLogic Entry 355

FlexLogic Entry 356

FlexLogic Entry 357

FlexLogic Entry 358

FlexLogic Entry 359

FlexLogic Entry 360

FlexLogic Entry 361

FlexLogic Entry 362

FlexLogic Entry 363

FlexLogic Entry 364

FlexLogic Entry 365


FlexLogic Entry 366

FlexLogic Entry 367

FlexLogic Entry 368

FlexLogic Entry 369

FlexLogic Entry 370

FlexLogic Entry 371

FlexLogic Entry 372

FlexLogic Entry 373

FlexLogic Entry 374

FlexLogic Entry 375

FlexLogic Entry 376

FlexLogic Entry 377

FlexLogic Entry 378

FlexLogic Entry 379

FlexLogic Entry 380

FlexLogic Entry 381

FlexLogic Entry 382

FlexLogic Entry 383

FlexLogic Entry 384

FlexLogic Entry 385

FlexLogic Entry 386

FlexLogic Entry 387

FlexLogic Entry 388

FlexLogic Entry 389

FlexLogic Entry 390

FlexLogic Entry 391

FlexLogic Entry 392

FlexLogic Entry 393

FlexLogic Entry 394

FlexLogic Entry 395

FlexLogic Entry 396

FlexLogic Entry 397

FlexLogic Entry 398

FlexLogic Entry 399

FlexLogic Entry 400

FlexLogic Entry 401

FlexLogic Entry 402

FlexLogic Entry 403

FlexLogic Entry 404

FlexLogic Entry 405

FlexLogic Entry 406






9

FlexLogic Entry 407

FlexLogic Entry 408

FlexLogic Entry 409

FlexLogic Entry 410

FlexLogic Entry 411

FlexLogic Entry 412

FlexLogic Entry 413

FlexLogic Entry 414

FlexLogic Entry 415

FlexLogic Entry 416

FlexLogic Entry 417

FlexLogic Entry 418

FlexLogic Entry 419

FlexLogic Entry 420

FlexLogic Entry 421

FlexLogic Entry 422

FlexLogic Entry 423

FlexLogic Entry 424

FlexLogic Entry 425

FlexLogic Entry 426

FlexLogic Entry 427

FlexLogic Entry 428

FlexLogic Entry 429

FlexLogic Entry 430

FlexLogic Entry 431

FlexLogic Entry 432

FlexLogic Entry 433

FlexLogic Entry 434

FlexLogic Entry 435

FlexLogic Entry 436

FlexLogic Entry 437

FlexLogic Entry 438

FlexLogic Entry 439

FlexLogic Entry 440

FlexLogic Entry 441

FlexLogic Entry 442

FlexLogic Entry 443

FlexLogic Entry 444

FlexLogic Entry 445

FlexLogic Entry 446

FlexLogic Entry 447


FlexLogic Entry 448

FlexLogic Entry 449

FlexLogic Entry 450

FlexLogic Entry 451

FlexLogic Entry 452

FlexLogic Entry 453

FlexLogic Entry 454

FlexLogic Entry 455

FlexLogic Entry 456

FlexLogic Entry 457

FlexLogic Entry 458

FlexLogic Entry 459

FlexLogic Entry 460

FlexLogic Entry 461

FlexLogic Entry 462

FlexLogic Entry 463

FlexLogic Entry 464

FlexLogic Entry 465

FlexLogic Entry 466

FlexLogic Entry 467

FlexLogic Entry 468

FlexLogic Entry 469

FlexLogic Entry 470

FlexLogic Entry 471

FlexLogic Entry 472

FlexLogic Entry 473

FlexLogic Entry 474

FlexLogic Entry 475

FlexLogic Entry 476

FlexLogic Entry 477

FlexLogic Entry 478

FlexLogic Entry 479

FlexLogic Entry 480

FlexLogic Entry 481

FlexLogic Entry 482

FlexLogic Entry 483

FlexLogic Entry 484

FlexLogic Entry 485

FlexLogic Entry 486

FlexLogic Entry 487

FlexLogic Entry 488






9

b) FLEXLOGIC TIMERS

FlexLogic Entry 489

FlexLogic Entry 490

FlexLogic Entry 491

FlexLogic Entry 492

FlexLogic Entry 493

FlexLogic Entry 494

FlexLogic Entry 495

FlexLogic Entry 496

FlexLogic Entry 497

FlexLogic Entry 498

FlexLogic Entry 499

FlexLogic Entry 500

FlexLogic Entry 501

FlexLogic Entry 502

FlexLogic Entry 503

FlexLogic Entry 504

FlexLogic Entry 505

FlexLogic Entry 506

FlexLogic Entry 507

FlexLogic Entry 508

FlexLogic Entry 509

FlexLogic Entry 510

FlexLogic Entry 511

FlexLogic Entry 512

FLEXLOGIC™ TIMER 1

Timer 1 Type

Timer 1 Pickup

Timer 1 Dropout Delay


Timer 2 Type

Timer 2 Pickup


FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION EDITORFLEXLOGIC™ TIMER 3

Timer 3 Type

Timer 3 Pickup



Timer 4 Type

Timer 4 Pickup



Timer 5 Type

Timer 5 Pickup



Timer 6 Type

Timer 6 Pickup



Timer 7 Type

Timer 7 Pickup



Timer 8 Type

Timer 8 Pickup






9


Timer 9 Type

Timer 9 Pickup



Timer 10 Type

Timer 10 Pickup



Timer 11 Type

Timer 11 Pickup



Timer 12 Type

Timer 12 Pickup



Timer 13 Type

Timer 13 Pickup



Timer 14 Type

Timer 14 Pickup



Timer 15 Type

Timer 15 Pickup



Timer 16 Type

Timer 16 Pickup



Timer 17 Type

Timer 17 Pickup



Timer 18 Type

Timer 18 Pickup



Timer 19 Type

Timer 19 Pickup



Timer 20 Type

Timer 20 Pickup



Timer 21 Type

Timer 21 Pickup



Timer 22 Type

Timer 22 Pickup






9


Timer 23 Type

Timer 23 Pickup



Timer 24 Type

Timer 24 Pickup



Timer 25 Type

Timer 25 Pickup



Timer 26 Type

Timer 26 Pickup



Timer 27 Type

Timer 27 Pickup



Timer 28 Type

Timer 28 Pickup



Timer 29 Type

Timer 29 Pickup



Timer 30 Type

Timer 30 Pickup



Timer 31 Type

Timer 31 Pickup



Timer 32 Type

Timer 32 Pickup





9 COMMISSIONING 9.4 SETTINGS - GROUPED ELEMENTS

9

9.4 SETTINGS - GROUPED ELEMENTS 9.4.1 GROUPED ELEMENTS

a) CURRENT ELEMENTS

PHASE TOC1

Phase TOC1 Function

Phase TOC1 Signal Source

Phase TOC1 Input

Phase TOC1 Pickup

Phase TOC1 Curve

Phase TOC1 TD Multiplier

Phase TOC1 Reset

Phase TOC1 Voltage Restraint

Phase TOC1 Block A

Phase TOC1 Block B

Phase TOC1 Block C

Phase TOC1 Target

Phase TOC1 Events

PHASE IOC1

Phase IOC1 Function

Phase IOC1 Signal Source

Phase IOC1 Pickup

Phase IOC1 Pickup Delay

Phase IOC1 Reset Delay

Phase IOC1 Block A

Phase IOC1 Block B

Phase IOC1 Block C

Phase IOC1 Target

Phase IOC1 Events

PHASE IOC2

Phase IOC2 Function

Phase IOC2 Signal Source

Phase IOC2 Pickup

Phase IOC2 Pickup Delay

Phase IOC2 Reset Delay

Phase IOC2 Block A

Phase IOC2 Block B

Phase IOC2 Block C

Phase IOC2 Target

Phase IOC2 Events




9.4 SETTINGS - GROUPED ELEMENTS 9 COMMISSIONING

9

NEUTRAL TOC1

Neutral TOC1 Function

Neutral TOC1 Signal Source

Neutral TOC1 Input

Neutral TOC1 Pickup

Neutral TOC1 Curve

Neutral TOC1 TD Multiplier

Neutral TOC1 Reset

Neutral TOC1 Block

Neutral TOC1 Target

Neutral TOC1 Events

NEUTRAL IOC1

Neutral IOC1 Function

Neutral IOC1 Signal Source

Neutral IOC1 Pickup

Neutral IOC1 Pickup Delay

Neutral IOC1 Reset Delay

Neutral IOC1 Block

Neutral IOC1 Target

Neutral IOC1 Events

NEUTRAL IOC2

Neutral IOC2 Function

Neutral IOC2 Signal Source

Neutral IOC2 Pickup

Neutral IOC2 Pickup Delay

Neutral IOC2 Reset Delay

Neutral IOC2 Block

Neutral IOC2 Target

Neutral IOC2 Events

GROUND TOC1

Ground TOC1 Function

Ground TOC1 Signal Source

Ground TOC1 Input

Ground TOC1 Pickup

Ground TOC1 Curve

Ground TOC1 TD Multiplier

Ground TOC1 Reset

Ground TOC1 Block

Ground TOC1 Target

Ground TOC1 Events

GROUND IOC1

Ground IOC1 Function

Ground IOC1 Signal Source

Ground IOC1 Pickup

Ground IOC1 Pickup Delay

Ground IOC1 Reset Delay

Ground IOC1 Block

Ground IOC1 Target

Ground IOC1 Events

GROUND IOC2

Ground IOC2 Function

Ground IOC2 Signal Source

Ground IOC2 Pickup

Ground IOC2 Pickup Delay

Ground IOC2 Reset Delay

Ground IOC2 Block

Ground IOC2 Target

Ground IOC2 Events





9

NEG SEQ TOC1

NEG SEQ TOC1 Function

NEG SEQ TOC1 Signal Source

NEG SEQ TOC1 Pickup

NEG SEQ TOC1 Curve

NEG SEQ TOC1 TD Multiplier

NEG SEQ TOC1 Reset

NEG SEQ TOC1 Block

NEG SEQ TOC1 Target

NEG SEQ TOC1 Events

NEG SEQ TOC2

NEG SEQ TOC2 Function

NEG SEQ TOC2 Signal Source

NEG SEQ TOC2 Pickup

NEG SEQ TOC2 Curve

NEG SEQ TOC2 TD Multiplier

NEG SEQ TOC2 Reset

NEG SEQ TOC2 Block

NEG SEQ TOC2 Target

NEG SEQ TOC2 Events

NEG SEQ IOC1

NEG SEQ IOC1 Function

NEG SEQ IOC1 Signal Source

NEG SEQ IOC1 Pickup

NEG SEQ IOC1 Pickup Delay

NEG SEQ IOC1 Reset Delay

NEG SEQ IOC1 Block

NEG SEQ IOC1 Target

NEG SEQ IOC1 Events

NEG SEQ IOC2

NEG SEQ IOC2 Function

NEG SEQ IOC2 Signal Source

NEG SEQ IOC2 Pickup

NEG SEQ IOC2 Pickup Delay

NEG SEQ IOC2 Reset Delay

NEG SEQ IOC2 Block

NEG SEQ IOC2 Target

NEG SEQ IOC2 Events





9


Neutral Dir 1 Function

Neutral Dir 1 Signal Source

Neutral Dir 1 Block

Neutral Dir 1 Polarizing

Neutral Dir Pol V1 Threshold

Neutral Dir 1 ECA

Neutral Dir 1 Limit Angle

Neutral Dir 1 Target

Neutral Dir 1 Events


Neutral Dir 2 Function

Neutral Dir 2 Signal Source

Neutral Dir 2 Block

Neutral Dir 2 Polarizing

Neutral Dir Pol V2 Threshold

Neutral Dir 2 ECA

Neutral Dir 2 Limit Angle

Neutral Dir 2 Target

Neutral Dir 2 Events

PHASE DIRECTIONAL 1

Phase Dir 1 Function

Phase Dir 1 Signal Source

Phase Dir 1 Block

Phase Dir 1 ECA

Phase Dir Pol V1 Threshold

Phase Dir 1 Block OC When VMem Exp

Phase Dir 1 Target

Phase Dir 1 Events

PHASE DIRECTIONAL 2

Phase Dir 2 Function

Phase Dir 2 Signal Source

Phase Dir 2 Block

Phase Dir 2 ECA

Phase Dir Pol V2 Threshold

Phase Dir 2 Block OC When VMem Exp

Phase Dir 2 Target

Phase Dir 2 Events





9

b) BREAKER FAILURE ELEMENTS

BREAKER FAILURE 1

Function

Mode

Name

Source

Use AMP SUPV

Use Seal-In

3-Pole Initiate

Block

PH AMP SUPV

N AMP SUPV

Use Timer 1

Timer 1 Pickup Delay

Use Timer 2


Use Timer 3


BKR POS1 φA/3P

BKR POS2 φA/3P

Breaker Test On

PH AMP HISET

N AMP HISET

PH AMP LOSET

N AMP LOSET

LOSET Time Delay

Trip Dropout Delay

Target

Events

PH A Initiate

PH B Initiate

PH C Initiate

BKR POS1 φB

BKR POS1 φC

BKR POS2 φB

BKR POS2 φC

BREAKER FAILURE 2

Function

Mode

Name

Source

Use AMP SUPV

Use Seal-In

3-Pole Initiate

Block

PH AMP SUPV

N AMP SUPV

Use Timer 1


Use Timer 2


Use Timer 3


BKR POS1 φA/3P

BKR POS2 φA/3P

Breaker Test On

PH AMP HISET

N AMP HISET

PH AMP LOSET

N AMP LOSET

LOSET Time Delay

Trip Dropout Delay

Target

Events

PH A Initiate

PH B Initiate

PH C Initiate

BKR POS1 φB

BKR POS1 φC

BKR POS2 φB

BKR POS2 φC





9

c) VOLTAGE ELEMENTS

PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1

Phase UV1 Function

Phase UV1 Signal Source

Phase UV1 Pickup

Phase UV1 Curve

Phase UV1 Delay

Phase UV1 Minimum Voltage

Phase UV1 Block

Phase UV1 Target

Phase UV1 Events

PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE2

Phase UV2 Function

Phase UV2 Signal Source

Phase UV2 Pickup

Phase UV2 Curve

Phase UV2 Delay

Phase UV2 Minimum Voltage

Phase UV2 Block

Phase UV2 Target

Phase UV2 Events

PHASE OVERVOLTAGE1

Phase OV1 Function

Phase OV1 Signal Source

Phase OV1 Pickup

Phase OV1 Delay

Phase OV1 Reset Delay

Phase OV1 Block

Phase OV1 Target

Phase OV1 Events




9 COMMISSIONING 9.5 SETTINGS - CONTROL ELEMENTS

9

9.5 SETTINGS - CONTROL ELEMENTS 9.5.1 CONTROL ELEMENTS

a) SETTING GROUPS b) UNDERFREQUENCY

SETTING GROUPS

Edit Setting Group

Group 2 Activate

Group 3 Activate

Group 4 Activate

Group 5 Activate

Group 6 Activate

Group 7 Activate

Group 8 Activate

UNDERFREQUENCY

Function

Block

Minimum Volt/Amp

Pickup 1

Pickup Delay 1

Reset Delay 1

Pickup 2

Pickup Delay 2

Reset Delay 2

Pickup 3

Pickup Delay 3

Reset Delay 3

Pickup 4

Pickup Delay 4

Reset Delay 4

Pickup 5

Pickup Delay 5

Reset Delay 5

Pickup 6

Pickup Delay 6

Reset Delay 6

Target

Events




9.5 SETTINGS - CONTROL ELEMENTS 9 COMMISSIONING

9

c) SYNCHROCHECK d) AUTORECLOSE

SYNCHROCHECK 1

Function

V1 Source

V2 Source

Max. Voltage Difference

Max. Angle Difference

Max. Frequency Difference

Dead Source Select

Dead V1 Max. Volt

Dead V2 Max. Volt

Live V1 Min. Volt

Live V2 Min. Volt

Target

Events

SYNCHROCHECK 2

Function

V1 Source

V2 Source

Max. Voltage Difference

Max. Angle Difference

Max. Frequency Difference

Dead Source Select

Dead V1 Max. Volt

Dead V2 Max. Volt

Live V1 Min. Volt

Live V2 Min. Volt

Target

Events

AUTORECLOSE 1

Function

Initiate

Block

Maximum number of shots

Manual close

Manual reset from lockout

Breaker closed

Breaker open

Block time upon manual close

Dead time shot 1

Dead time shot 2

Dead time shot 3

Dead time shot 4

Reset time

Incomplete sequence time

Events





9

e) DIGITAL ELEMENTS

DIGITAL ELEMENT 1

Function

Name

Input

Pickup Delay

Reset Delay

Block

Target

Events

DIGITAL ELEMENT 2

Function

Name

Input

Pickup Delay

Reset Delay

Block

Target

Events

DIGITAL ELEMENT 3

Function

Name

Input

Pickup Delay

Reset Delay

Block

Target

Events

DIGITAL ELEMENT 4

Function

Name

Input

Pickup Delay

Reset Delay

Block

Target

Events

DIGITAL ELEMENT 5

Function

Name

Input

Pickup Delay

Reset Delay

Block

Target

Events

DIGITAL ELEMENT 6

Function

Name

Input

Pickup Delay

Reset Delay

Block

Target

Events





9

DIGITAL ELEMENT 7

Function

Name

Input

Pickup Delay

Reset Delay

Block

Target

Events

DIGITAL ELEMENT 8

Function

Name

Input

Pickup Delay

Reset Delay

Block

Target

Events

DIGITAL ELEMENT 9

Function

Name

Input

Pickup Delay

Reset Delay

Block

Target

Events

DIGITAL ELEMENT 10

Function

Name

Input

Pickup Delay

Reset Delay

Block

Target

Events

DIGITAL ELEMENT 11

Function

Name

Input

Pickup Delay

Reset Delay

Block

Target

Events

DIGITAL ELEMENT 12

Function

Name

Input

Pickup Delay

Reset Delay

Block

Target

Events





9

DIGITAL ELEMENT 13

Function

Name

Input

Pickup Delay

Reset Delay

Block

Target

Events

DIGITAL ELEMENT 14

Function

Name

Input

Pickup Delay

Reset Delay

Block

Target

Events

DIGITAL ELEMENT 15

Function

Name

Input

Pickup Delay

Reset Delay

Block

Target

Events

DIGITAL ELEMENT 16

Function

Name

Input

Pickup Delay

Reset Delay

Block

Target

Events





9

f) DIGITAL COUNTERS

DIGITAL COUNTER 1

Counter 1 Function

Counter 1 Name

Counter 1 Units

Counter 1 Preset

Counter 1 Compare

Counter 1 Up

Counter 1 Down

Counter 1 Block

Counter 1 Set To Preset

Counter 1 Reset

Counter 1 Freeze/Reset

Counter 1 Freeze/Count

DIGITAL COUNTER 2

Counter 2 Function

Counter 2 Name

Counter 2 Units

Counter 2 Preset

Counter 2 Compare

Counter 2 Up

Counter 2 Down

Counter 2 Block


Counter 2 Reset



DIGITAL COUNTER 3

Counter 3 Function

Counter 3 Name

Counter 3 Units

Counter 3 Preset

Counter 3 Compare

Counter 3 Up

Counter 3 Down

Counter 3 Block


Counter 3 Reset



DIGITAL COUNTER 4

Counter 4 Function

Counter 4 Name

Counter 4 Units

Counter 4 Preset

Counter 4 Compare

Counter 4 Up

Counter 4 Down

Counter 4 Block


Counter 4 Reset







9

DIGITAL COUNTER 5

Counter 5 Function

Counter 5 Name

Counter 5 Units

Counter 5 Preset

Counter 5 Compare

Counter 5 Up

Counter 5 Down

Counter 5 Block


Counter 5 Reset



DIGITAL COUNTER 6

Counter 6 Function

Counter 6 Name

Counter 6 Units

Counter 6 Preset

Counter 6 Compare

Counter 6 Up

Counter 6 Down

Counter 6 Block


Counter 6 Reset



DIGITAL COUNTER 7

Counter 7 Function

Counter 7 Name

Counter 7 Units

Counter 7 Preset

Counter 7 Compare

Counter 7 Up

Counter 7 Down

Counter 7 Block


Counter 7 Reset



DIGITAL COUNTER 8

Counter 8 Function

Counter 8 Name

Counter 8 Units

Counter 8 Preset

Counter 8 Compare

Counter 8 Up

Counter 8 Down

Counter 8 Block


Counter 8 Reset







9

g) BREAKER ARCING CURRENTS h) COLD LOAD PICKUPS


Function

Source

INIT

Delay

Limit

Block

Target

Events


Function

Source

INIT

Delay

Limit

Block

Target

Events

COLD LOAD PICKUP 1

Function

INIT

Block

Outage Time Before Cold Load

On-Load Time Before Reset

COLD LOAD PICKUP 2

Function

INIT

Block

Outage Time Before Cold Load

On-Load Time Before Reset




9 COMMISSIONING 9.6 SETTINGS - INPUTS / OUTPUTS

9

9.6 SETTINGS - INPUTS / OUTPUTS 9.6.1 INPUTS / OUTPUTS

a) CONTACT INPUTS

Table 9–5: CONTACT INPUT CONFIGURATION

CONTACTINPUT

CONTACT INPUTFUNCTION

CONTACT INPUT ID CONTACT INPUTEVENTS




9.6 SETTINGS - INPUTS / OUTPUTS 9 COMMISSIONING

9

Table 9–6: CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLDS

CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLD





9

b) VIRTUAL INPUTS

VIRTUAL INPUT 1

Virtual Input 1 Function

Virtual Input 1 ID

Virtual Input 1 Type

Virtual Input 1 Events

VIRTUAL INPUT 2


Virtual Input 2 ID



VIRTUAL INPUT 3


Virtual Input 3 ID



VIRTUAL INPUT 4


Virtual Input 4 ID



VIRTUAL INPUT 5


Virtual Input 5 ID



VIRTUAL INPUT 6


Virtual Input 6 ID



VIRTUAL INPUT 7


Virtual Input 7 ID



VIRTUAL INPUT 8


Virtual Input 8 ID



VIRTUAL INPUT 9


Virtual Input 9 ID



VIRTUAL INPUT 10


Virtual Input 10 ID







9

VIRTUAL INPUT 11


Virtual Input 11 ID



VIRTUAL INPUT 12


Virtual Input 12 ID



VIRTUAL INPUT 13


Virtual Input 13 ID



VIRTUAL INPUT 14


Virtual Input 14 ID



VIRTUAL INPUT 15


Virtual Input 15 ID



VIRTUAL INPUT 16


Virtual Input 16 ID



VIRTUAL INPUT 17


Virtual Input 17 ID



VIRTUAL INPUT 18


Virtual Input 18 ID



VIRTUAL INPUT 19


Virtual Input 19 ID



VIRTUAL INPUT 20


Virtual Input 20 ID



VIRTUAL INPUT 21


Virtual Input 21 ID



VIRTUAL INPUT 22


Virtual Input 22 ID







9

c) SBO TIMER

VIRTUAL INPUT 23


Virtual Input 23 ID



VIRTUAL INPUT 24


Virtual Input 24 ID



VIRTUAL INPUT 25


Virtual Input 25 ID



VIRTUAL INPUT 26


Virtual Input 26 ID



VIRTUAL INPUT 27


Virtual Input 27 ID



VIRTUAL INPUT 28


Virtual Input 28 ID



VIRTUAL INPUT 29


Virtual Input 29 ID



VIRTUAL INPUT 30


Virtual Input 30 ID



VIRTUAL INPUT 31


Virtual Input 31 ID



VIRTUAL INPUT 32


Virtual Input 32 ID



SBO TIMER

SBO inputs timeout





9

d) REMOTE DEVICES

Table 9–7: REMOTE DEVICES

REMOTEDEVICE

REMOTE DEVICEID

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16





9

e) REMOTE INPUTS

Table 9–8: REMOTE INPUTS

REMOTEINPUT

REMOTEDEVICE

BITPAIR

DEFAULTSTATE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

Table 9–8: REMOTE INPUTS (Continued)

REMOTEINPUT

REMOTEDEVICE

BITPAIR

DEFAULTSTATE





9

f) CONTACT OUTPUTS

Table 9–9: CONTACT OUTPUT CONFIGURATION

CONTACTOUTPUT

CONTACTOUTPUT ID

CONTACTOUTPUT LED

CONTACT OUTPUTOPERATE

CONTACTOUTPUT SEAL-IN

CONTACTOUTPUT EVENTS





9

g) VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

Table 9–10: VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

VIRTUALOUTPUT

VIRTUALOUTPUT ID

VIRTUALOUTPUT EVENTS

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

Table 9–10: VIRTUAL OUTPUTS (Continued)

VIRTUALOUTPUT

VIRTUALOUTPUT ID






9

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

63

64

Table 9–10: VIRTUAL OUTPUTS (Continued)

VIRTUALOUTPUT

VIRTUALOUTPUT ID






9

h) REMOTE OUTPUTS - DNA BIT PAIRS

Table 9–11: REMOTE OUTPUTS - DNA

DNA- OPERAND

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

Table 9–11: REMOTE OUTPUTS - DNA

DNA- OPERAND





9

i) REMOTE OUTPUTS - UserSt BIT PAIRS

j) RESETTING

Table 9–12: REMOTE OUTPUTS - UserSt

UserSt- OPERAND

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

Table 9–13: RESETTING

RESETTING

Reset Operand

Table 9–12: REMOTE OUTPUTS - UserSt

UserSt- OPERAND




9 COMMISSIONING 9.7 SETTINGS - TRANSDUCER I/O

9

9.7 SETTINGS - TRANSDUCER I/O 9.7.1 TRANSDUCER I/O

a) DCMA INPUTS

Table 9–14: DCMA INPUTS

DCMAINPUT

FUNCTION ID UNITS RANGE MINVALUE

MAXVALUE




9.7 SETTINGS - TRANSDUCER I/O 9 COMMISSIONING

9

b) RTD INPUTS

Table 9–15: RTD INPUTS

RTDINPUT

FUNCTION ID TYPE




9 COMMISSIONING 9.8 SETTINGS - TESTING

9

9.8 SETTINGS - TESTING 9.8.1 TESTING

a) FORCE CONTACT INPUTS b) FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS

Table 9–16: FORCE CONTACT INPUTS

FORCE CONTACT INPUT

Table 9–17: FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS

FORCE CONTACT OUTPUT




9.8 SETTINGS - TESTING 9 COMMISSIONING

9



GE Power Management F60 Feeder Management Relay A- 1

APPENDIX A A.1 OVERVIEW

AAPPENDIX A MODBUS ® RTU PROTOCOLA.1 OVERVIEW A.1.1 INTRODUCTION

The UR type relays communicate with other computerized equipment such as programmable logic controllers,personal computers, or plant master computers using the AEG Modicon or Modbus® RTU protocol. Followingare some general notes:

• The units always act as slave devices meaning that they never initiate communications; they only listenand respond to requests issued by a master computer.

• For Modbus®, a subset of the Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) format of the protocol is supported, whichallows extensive monitoring, programming and control functions using read and write register commands.

A.1.2 PHYSICAL LAYER

The Modbus® RTU protocol is hardware-independent so that the physical layer can be any of a variety of stan-dard hardware configurations including RS232, RS485, fiber optics, 10BaseT or 10BaseF Ethernet, etc. Therelay unit includes a faceplate (front panel) RS232 port and two rear terminal communications ports, whichmay be configured as RS485, fiber optic, 10BaseT, or 10 BaseF. Data flow is half duplex in all configurations.See Chapter 3 HARDWARE for details on wiring.

Each data byte is transmitted in an asynchronous format consisting of 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, andpossibly 1 parity bit. This produces a 10 or 11 bit data frame. This is important for transmission throughmodems at high bit rates (11 bit data frames are not supported by many modems at baud rates greater than300).

The baud rate and parity are independently programmable for each communications port. Baud rates of 300,1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bps are available. Even, odd, and no parity areavailable. See Chapter 5 SETTINGS \ PRODUCT SETUP \ COMMUNICATIONS for further details.

The master device in any system must know the address of the slave device with which it is to communicate.The unit will not act on a request from a master if the address in the request does not match the relay’s slaveaddress (unless the address is the broadcast address -- see below).

A single setting selects the slave address used for all ports, with the exception that for the faceplate port, therelay will accept any address when the Modbus® RTU protocol is used. The slave address is otherwise thesame regardless of the protocol in use, but note that the broadcast address is 0 for Modbus®. The relay recog-nizes and processes a master request (under conditions that are protocol-specific) if the broadcast address isused but never returns a response.

A.1.3 DATA LINK LAYER

Communications takes place in packets which are groups of asychronously framed byte data. The mastertransmits a packet to the slave and the slave responds with a packet. The end of a packet is marked by ‘dead-time’ on the communications line. The following describes general format for both transmit and receive pack-ets. For exact details on packet formatting, refer to subsequent sections describing each function code.

Table A–1: MODBUS ® PACKET FORMAT

SLAVE ADDRESS 1 byteFUNCTION CODE 1 byteDATA N bytesCRC 2 bytesDEAD TIME 3.5 bytes transmission time



A-2 F60 Feeder Management Relay GE Power Management

A.1 OVERVIEW APPENDIX A

ASLAVE ADDRESS

This is the address of the slave device that is intended to receive the packet sent by the master and to performthe desired action. Each slave device on a communications bus must have a unique address to prevent buscontention. All of the relay’s ports have the same address which is programmable from 1 to 254; see Chapter 5for details. Only the addressed slave will respond to a packet that starts with its address. Note that the face-plate port is an exception to this rule; it will act on a message containing any slave address.

A master transmit packet with a slave address of 0 indicates a broadcast command. All slaves on the commu-nication link will take action based on the packet, but none will respond to the master. Broadcast mode is onlyrecognized when associated with FUNCTION CODE 05h. For any other function code, a packet with broadcastmode slave address 0 will be ignored.

FUNCTION CODE

This is one of the supported functions codes of the unit which tells the slave what action to perform. See theSUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES section for complete details. An exception response from the slave is indi-cated by setting the high order bit of the function code in the response packet. See the EXCEPTIONRESPONSES section for further details.

DATA

This will be a variable number of bytes depending on the function code. This may include actual values, set-tings, or addresses sent by the master to the slave or by the slave to the master.

CRC

This is a two byte error checking code. The RTU version of Modbus® includes a 16 bit cyclic redundancy check(CRC-16) with every packet which is an industry standard method used for error detection. If a Modbus® slavedevice receives a packet in which an error is indicated by the CRC, the slave device will not act upon orrespond to the packet thus preventing any erroneous operations. See the CRC-16 ALGORITHM section for adescription of how to calculate the CRC.

DEAD TIME

A packet is terminated when no data is received for a period of 3.5 byte transmission times (about 15 ms at2400 bps, 2 ms at 19200 bps, and 300 µs at 115200 bps). Consequently, the transmitting device must not allowgaps between bytes longer than this interval. Once the dead time has expired without a new byte transmission,all slaves start listening for a new packet from the master except for the addressed slave.




APPENDIX A A.1 OVERVIEW

AA.1.4 CRC-16 ALGORITHM

The CRC-16 algorithm essentially treats the entire data stream (data bits only; start, stop and parity ignored)as one continuous binary number. This number is first shifted left 16 bits and then divided by a characteristicpolynomial (11000000000000101B). The 16 bit remainder of the division is appended to the end of the packet,MSByte first. The resulting packet including CRC, when divided by the same polynomial at the receiver willgive a zero remainder if no transmission errors have occurred. This algorithm requires the characteristic poly-nomial to be reverse bit ordered. The most significant bit of the characteristic polynomial is dropped, since itdoes not affect the value of the remainder.

Note: A C programming language implementation of the CRC algorithm will be provided upon request.

Table A–2: CRC-16 ALGORITHM

Symbols: --> data transferA 16 bit working registerAlow low order byte of A

Ahigh high order byte of A

CRC 16 bit CRC-16 resulti,j loop counters(+) logical EXCLUSIVE-OR operatorN total number of data bytesDi i-th data byte (i = 0 to N-1)

G 16 bit characteristic polynomial = 1010000000000001 (binary) with MSbitdropped and bit order reversed

shr (x) right shift operator (th LSbit of x is shifted into a carry flag, a '0' is shiftedinto the MSbit of x, all other bits are shifted right one location)

Algorithm: 1. FFFF (hex) --> A2. 0 --> i3. 0 --> j4. Di (+) Alow --> Alow

5. j + 1 --> j6. shr (A)7. Is there a carry? No: go to 8

Yes: G (+) A --> A and continue.8. Is j = 8? No: go to 5

Yes: continue9. i + 1 --> i10. Is i = N? No: go to 3

Yes: continue11. A --> CRC




A.2 FUNCTION CODES APPENDIX A

AA.2 FUNCTION CODES A.2.1 SUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES

Modbus® officially defines function codes from 1 to 127 though only a small subset is generally needed. Therelay supports some of these functions, as summarized in the following table. Subsequent sections describeeach function code in detail.

A.2.2 FUNCTION CODE 03H/04H - READ ACTUAL VALUES OR SETTINGS

This function code allows the master to read one or more consecutive data registers (actual values or settings)from a relay. Data registers are always 16 bit (two byte) values transmitted with high order byte first. The maxi-mum number of registers that can be read in a single packet is 120. See the section MODBUS® MEMORYMAP for exact details on the data registers.

Since some PLC implementations of Modbus® only support one of function codes 03h and 04h, the relay inter-pretation allows either function code to be used for reading one or more consecutive data registers. The datastarting address will determine the type of data being read. Function codes 03h and 04h are therefore identical.

The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master devicerequesting 3 register values starting at address 4050h from slave device 11h (17 dec); the slave deviceresponds with the values 40, 300, and 0 from registers 4050h, 4051h, and 4052h respectively.

FUNCTION CODEMODBUS® DEFINITION GE MULTILIN DEFINITION

HEX DEC

03 3 Read Holding Registers Read Actual Values or Settings

04 4 Read Holding Registers Read Actual Values or Settings

05 5 Force Single Coil Execute Operation

06 6 Preset Single Register Store Single Setting

10 16 Preset Multiple Registers Store Multiple Settings

Table A–3: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE

Master Transmission Slave Response

Packet Format Example (hex) Packet Format Example (hex)

SLAVE ADDRESS 11 SLAVE ADDRESS 11

FUNCTION CODE 04 FUNCTION CODE 04

DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi 40 BYTE COUNT 06

DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo 50 DATA #1 - hi 00

NUMBER OF REGISTERS - hi 00 DATA #1 - lo 28

NUMBER OF REGISTERS - lo 03 DATA #2 - hi 01

CRC - lo A7 DATA #2 - lo 2C

CRC - hi 4A DATA #3 - hi 00

DATA #3 - lo 00

CRC - lo 0D

CRC - hi 60




APPENDIX A A.2 FUNCTION CODES

AA.2.3 FUNCTION CODE 05H - EXECUTE OPERATION

This function code allows the master to perform various operations in the relay. Available operations are in thetable SUMMARY OF OPERATION CODES.

The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master devicerequesting the slave device 11H (17 dec) to perform a reset. The hi and lo CODE VALUE bytes always havethe values ‘FF’ and ‘00’ respectively and are a remnant of the original Modbus® definition of this function code..






OPERATION CODE - hi 00 OPERATION CODE - hi 00

OPERATION CODE - lo 01 OPERATION CODE - lo 01

CODE VALUE - hi FF CODE VALUE - hi FF

CODE VALUE - lo 00 CODE VALUE - lo 00

CRC - lo DF CRC - lo DF

CRC - hi 6A CRC - hi 6A

Table A–5: SUMMARY OF OPERATION CODES (for Function Code 05h)

OperationCode (hex)

Definition Description

0000 NO OPERATION Does not do anything.

0001 RESET Performs the same function as the faceplate RESET key.

0005 CLEAR EVENT RECORDS Performs the same function as the faceplate CLEAR EVENTSRECORD menu command.

0006 CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY Clears all oscillography records.

1000 -101F VIRTUAL IN 1-32 ON/OFF Sets the states of Virtual Inputs 1 to 32 either “ON” or “OFF”.




A.2 FUNCTION CODES APPENDIX A

AA.2.4 FUNCTION CODE 06H - STORE SINGLE SETTING

This function code allows the master to modify the contents of a single setting register in an relay. Setting reg-isters are always 16 bit (two byte) values transmitted high order byte first.

The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master devicestoring the value 200 at memory map address 4051h to slave device 11h (17 dec).

A.2.5 FUNCTION CODE 10H - STORE MULTIPLE SETTINGS

This function code allows the master to modify the contents of a one or more consecutive setting registers in arelay. Setting registers are 16 bit (two byte) values transmitted high order byte first. The maximum number ofsetting registers that can be stored in a single packet is 60. The following table shows the format of the masterand slave packets. The example shows a master device storing the value 200 at memory map address 4051h,and the value 1 at memory map address 4052h to slave device 11h (17 dec).






DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi 40 DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi 40

DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo 51 DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo 51

DATA - hi 00 DATA - hi 00

DATA - lo C8 DATA - lo C8

CRC - lo CE CRC - lo CE

CRC - hi DD CRC - hi DD



Packet Format Example (hex) Packet FormatExample(hex)



DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi 40 DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi 40

DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo 51 DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo 51

NUMBER OF SETTINGS - hi 00 NUMBER OF SETTINGS - hi 00

NUMBER OF SETTINGS - lo 02 NUMBER OF SETTINGS - lo 02

BYTE COUNT 04 CRC - lo 07

DATA #1 - high order byte 00 CRC - hi 64

DATA #1 - low order byte C8

DATA #2 - high order byte 00

DATA #2 - low order byte 01

CRC - low order byte 12

CRC - high order byte 62




APPENDIX A A.3 EXCEPTION RESPONSES

AA.3 EXCEPTION RESPONSES A.3.1 EXCEPTION RESPONSES

Programming or operation errors happen because of illegal data in a packet, hardware or software problems inthe slave device, etc. These errors result in an exception response from the slave. The slave detecting one ofthese errors sends a response packet to the master with the high order bit of the function code set to 1.

The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master devicesending the unsupported function code 39h to slave device 11.





FUNCTION CODE 39 FUNCTION CODE B9

CRC - low order byte CD ERROR CODE 01

CRC - high order byte F2 CRC - low order byte 93

CRC - high order byte 95




A.4 FILE TRANSFERS APPENDIX A

AA.4 FILE TRANSFERS A.4.1 READING THE EVENT RECORDER

a) BASICS

1. Read 3400..3404 to get information about the event recorder

2. Write 1 to 3406 to clear the event recorder

3. Write appropriate values to 3420..3424 to start a file transfer – any write to these registers clears 3425 tozero.

4. Read up to 124 registers from 3425 to get a block of data

5. If the block is OK, read again (starting from 3425) to read the next block. You’ll find that 3425 has changedto reflect the "high water mark", so register 3427 will contain the two bytes which follow after the last oneyou read so far

b) DETAILS

3400 - Events_Since_Last_ClearIndicates the total number of events, even though only the last 1024 are held in the relay.

3402 - Number_of_Available_EventsWill never exceed 1024.

3404 - Event_Recorder_Last_Cleared_DateRead only. This register is automatically updated when the event recorder is cleared, either via communica-tions (register 3406) or MMI.

3406 - Event_Recorder_Clear_CommandWriting 1 clears the event recorder. Reading will always show zero.

3420 - Event_File_First_EventWrite the event number of the first event you wish to extract from the relay. Zero is a special case, meaning"starting with the oldest available event".

3422 - Event_File_Last_EventWrite the event number of the last event you wish to extract from the relay. Zero is a special case, meaning"ending with the newest available event".

3424 - Event_File_TypeWrite the type of file you wish to read (see format F142).

3425 - Event_File_PositionIndicates the number of characters read so far. It increments automatically as described below.

3427 - Event_File_Access [123]Read the text here. The first register contains the first two characters. The next register contains the next twocharacters, and so on. Whenever you read Event_File_Acces[n], Event_File_Position changes to 2 times(1+n). The data doesn’t actually change until you re-read Event_File_Position, though, so you can use severalreads to obtain a block without disturbing the position counter. You can also get a re-transmission of a block byreading Event_File_Access without reading Event_File_Position.

c) FILE FORMATS

Each line ends with CR, LF (0x0D, 0x0A).

At the start of the file, there are format descriptions. Each is one line, like so:FORMAT,<format name>,<field 1 name>,<field 2 name>, …

The rest of the lines each conform to one of the formats, like so:<format name>,<field 1 value>,<field 2 value>, …




APPENDIX A A.4 FILE TRANSFERS

ASpecial characters work with the normal Windows fonts. This aspect will probably change in the future by, forexample, using "deg." instead of the degree symbol.

"Normal" file format:

FORMAT,SHORT_EVENT,Event Number,Date/Time,Cause

FORMAT,SNAPSHOT_EVENT,Event Number,Date/Time,Cause,Frequency,Phase A Current Magnitude,Phase A CurrentAngle,Phase B Current Magnitude,Phase B Current Angle,Phase C Current Magnitude,Phase C Current Angle,Phase AGVoltage Magnitude,Phase AG Voltage Angle,Phase BG Voltage Magnitude,Phase BG Voltage Angle,Phase CG VoltageMagnitude,Phase CG Voltage Angle

SHORT_EVENT,1,May 12 1998 14:17:31.000000,EVENTS CLEARED

SNAPSHOT_EVENT,2,May 12 1998 14:18:45.000000,PHASE IOC1 PKP A,0.00 Hz,3897.4 A,0.00 °,0.0 A,0.00 °,3897.4A,-120.00 °,0 V,0.00 °,0 V,0.00 °,0 V,0.00 °

SNAPSHOT_EVENT,3,May 12 1998 14:18:45.000000,PHASE IOC1 PKP C,0.00 Hz,3897.4 A,0.00 °,0.0 A,0.00 °,3897.4A,-120.00 °,0 V,0.00 °,0 V,0.00 °,0 V,0.00 °

SNAPSHOT_EVENT,4,May 12 1998 14:18:47.000000,PHASE IOC1 PKP A,0.00 Hz,461.5 A,0.00 °,0.0 A,0.00 °,461.5 A,-120.00 °,0 V,0.00 °,0 V,0.00 °,0 V,0.00 °

SNAPSHOT_EVENT,5,May 12 1998 14:18:47.000000,PHASE IOC1 PKP C,0.00 Hz,461.5 A,0.00 °,0.0 A,0.00 °,461.5 A,-120.00 °,0 V,0.00 °,0 V,0.00 °,0 V,0.00 °

SNAPSHOT_EVENT,6,May 12 1998 14:18:48.000000,PHASE IOC1 OP A,0.00 Hz,1333.3 A,0.00 °,0.0 A,0.00 °,1333.3 A,-120.00 °,0 V,0.00 °,0 V,0.00 °,0 V,0.00 °

SNAPSHOT_EVENT,7,May 12 1998 14:18:48.000000,PHASE IOC1 OP C,0.00 Hz,1333.3 A,0.00 °,0.0 A,0.00 °,1333.3 A,-120.00 °,0 V,0.00 °,0 V,0.00 °,0 V,0.00 °

SHORT_EVENT,8,May 12 1998 14:18:48.000000,Contact O/P H1 ON

SHORT_EVENT,9,May 12 1998 14:18:49.000000,Contact O/P H1 OFF

"Headers only" file format:

FORMAT,SHORT_EVENT,Event Number,Date/Time,Cause

SHORT_EVENT,1,May 12 1998 14:17:31.000000,EVENTS CLEARED

SHORT_EVENT,2,May 12 1998 14:18:45.000000,PHASE IOC1 PKP A

SHORT_EVENT,3,May 12 1998 14:18:45.000000,PHASE IOC1 PKP C

SHORT_EVENT,4,May 12 1998 14:18:47.000000,PHASE IOC1 PKP A

SHORT_EVENT,5,May 12 1998 14:18:47.000000,PHASE IOC1 PKP C

SHORT_EVENT,6,May 12 1998 14:18:48.000000,PHASE IOC1 OP A

SHORT_EVENT,7,May 12 1998 14:18:48.000000,PHASE IOC1 OP C

SHORT_EVENT,8,May 12 1998 14:18:48.000000,Contact O/P H1 ON

SHORT_EVENT,9,May 12 1998 14:18:49.000000,Contact O/P H1 OFF

A.4.2 READING OSCILLOGRAPHY DATA

Oscillography data can be read from the UR memory map in COMTRADE file format (as per IEEE PC37.111)via the Modbus® registers found in the address range 3000h to 30A0h. In order to understand the descriptionthat follows, familiarity with the Oscillography settings is required; refer to Chapter 5 SETTINGS \ PRODUCTSETUP \ OSCILLOGRAPHY for details.




A.4 FILE TRANSFERS APPENDIX A

AThe Oscillography_Number_of_Triggers register is incremented by one every time a new oscillography file istriggered (captured). Oscillography_Number_of_Triggers register is cleared to zero when oscillography data iscleared. When a new trigger occurs, the associated oscillography file is assigned a file identifier number equalto the incremented value of this register; the newest file will have a number equal to theOscillography_Number_of_Triggers register. This register can be used to determine if any new data has beencaptured by periodically reading it to see if the value has changed; if the number has increased then there isnew data available.

The Oscillography_Number_of_Records setting specifies the maximum number of files (and the number ofcycles of data per file) that can be stored in memory of the relay. The Oscillography_Available_Records regis-ter specifies the actual number of files that are stored and still available to be read out of the relay.

Writing ‘Yes’ (i.e. the value 1) to the Oscillography_Clear_Data register clears oscillography data files, clearsboth Oscillography_Number_of_Triggers and Oscillography_Available_Records registers to zero, and sets theOscillography_Last_Cleared_Date to the present date and time.

Writing the desired file identifier number to the Oscillography_File_Identifier register specifies to the relaywhich record is to be read. For example, to read oscillography record number 3, the value 3 must first be writ-ten to this register.

Writing the desired file type to the Oscillography_File_Type register specifies to the relay which COMTRADEfile (i.e. data, configuration, or header file) is to be read. For example, to read the configuration file of the oscil-lography record, ‘Configuration File’ (i.e. the value 1) must first be written to this register.

Now that the record number and file type have been selected, the specified file can be read from the relayusing the Oscillography_File_Size, Oscillography_File_Position, and Oscillography_File_Access registers.The Oscillography_File_Size register specifies the number of 16-bit registers (or pairs of 8-bit characters) inthe file. The Oscillography_File_Access is actually an array of 123 registers (Modbus® addresses 3026h to30A0h) from which the file contents can be read. For the purposes of the description that follows,Oscillography_File_Access[0] refers to Modbus® address 3026h, Oscillography_File_Access[1] to Modbus®

address 3027h, and so on, up to Oscillography_File_Access[122], which refers to Modbus® address 30A0h.

Since most files will have a file size much greater than 123 registers, the Oscillography_File_Access registersare only a window into the file to be read, and Oscillography_File_Position register is the offset into the file fromwhich the data is accessible. When the Oscillography_File_Position register is 0,Oscillography_File_Access[0] contains the 1st 16-bit register (or pair of 8-bit characters) of the file,Oscillography_File_Access[1] the 2nd 16-bit register, and so on. After setting the Oscillography_File_Positionregister to 123, Oscillography_File_Access[0] will contain the 124th 16-bit register of the file,Oscillography_File_Access[1] the 125th 16-bit register, and so on. The Oscillography_File_Position register,therefore specifies which register in the file will be accessed.

One way the data of a file can be read is by alternately writing to the Oscillography_File_Position register, andreading from the Oscillography_File_Access registers. To read a file for which the Oscillography_File_Size is260 registers, for example, would be as follows:

1. Write 0 to Oscillography_File_Position.

2. Read Oscillography_File_Access[0] to Oscillography_File_Access[122]. These are the first 123 registersof the file.


4. Read Oscillography_File_Access[0] to Oscillography_File_Access[122]. These are the next 123 registersof the file.


6. Read Oscillography_File_Access[0] to Oscillography_File_Access[13]. These are the last 14 registers ofthe file.




APPENDIX A A.4 FILE TRANSFERS

AAlthough this procedure will work, there is an easier way. A feature has been built into theOscillography_File_Position register to make writing to it unnecessary. The Oscillography_File_Position regis-ter keeps track of the number of registers last read via the Oscillography_File_Access registers. Subsequentreading of the contents of the Oscillography_File_Position register automatically updates theOscillography_File_Position to point to the next block of unread registers in the file. Using this convenience,reading a 260 register size file would be as follows:


2. Read Oscillography_File_Position and Oscillography_File_Access[0] to Oscillography_File_Access[122](in one 125 register Modbus® read command). Oscillography_File_Position will be 0, and the first 123 reg-isters of the file will have been read.

3. Read Oscillography_File_Position and Oscillography_File_Access[0] to Oscillography_File_Access[122](in one 125 register Modbus® read command). Oscillography_File_Position will be 123, and the next 123registers of the file will have been read.

4. Read Oscillography_File_Position and Oscillography_File_Access[0] to Oscillography_File_Access[13] (inone 16 register Modbus® read command). Oscillography_File_Position will be 246, and the last 14 regis-ters of the file will have been read.




A.5 MEMORY MAPPING APPENDIX A

AA.5 MEMORY MAPPING A.5.1 MODBUS ® MEMORY MAP SUMMARY

Table A–9: MODBUS ® MEMORY MAP SUMMARY (Sheet 1 of 2)

ModuleStart

AddressLast

AddressNumber ofRegisters

Gap to NextModule

Product Information (Read Only) 0000 0002 3 13Product Information (Read Only -- Written by Factory) 0010 0092 131 365Self Test Targets (Read Only) 0200 0201 2 2Front Panel (Read Only) 0204 0247 68 440Virtual Input Commands (Read/Write Command) 0400 041F 32 992Digital Counter States (Read Only Non-Volatile)[8 modules] 0800 083F 64 192FlexStates (Read Only) 0900 090F 16 1776Element States (Read Only) 1000 103F 64 1152Element Targets (Read Only) 14C0 14C1 2 0Element Targets (Read/Write) 14C2 14C2 1 0Element Targets (Read Only) 14C3 14D6 20 41Digital I/O States (Read Only) 1500 1533 52 12Remote I/O States (Read Only) 1540 1550 17 0Remote Device Status (Read Only)[16 modules] 1551 1590 64 127Ethernet Fibre Channel Status (Read/Write) 1610 1611 2 238Current Inputs (Read Only)[6 modules] 1700 1747 72 56Voltage Inputs (Read Only)[3 modules] 1780 17A3 36 92Source Values (Read Only)[6 modules] 1800 20FF 2304 256Breaker Arcing Current Actuals (Read Only Non-Volatile)[2 modules] 2200 220B 12 0Breaker Arcing Current Commands (Read/Write Command)[2 modules] 220C 220D 2 498Synchrocheck Actuals (Read Only)[2 modules] 2400 2407 8 8Autoreclose Status (Read Only)[6 modules] 2410 2415 6 3050Oscillography Status and Access Registers (Read Only) 3000 3003 4 0Oscillography Status and Access Registers (Read/Write Command) 3004 3004 1 27Oscillography File Transfer (Read/Write) 3020 3021 2 0Oscillography File Transfer (Read Only) 3022 30A0 127 863Event Recorder (Read Only) 3400 3405 6 0Event Recorder (Read/Write Command) 3406 3406 1 25Event Recorder File Transfer (Read/Write) 3420 3424 5 0Event Recorder File Transfer (Read Only) 3425 34A1 125 30DCMA Input Values (Read Only)[24 modules] 34C0 34EF 48 0RTD Input Values (Read Only)[48 modules] 34F0 351F 48 0Ohm Input Values (Read Only)[2 modules] 3520 3521 2 2782Passwords (Read Only) 4000 4003 4 76Preferences (Read/Write Setting) 4050 4052 3 45Communications (Read/Write Setting) 4080 4097 24 264Clock (Read/Write Setting) 41A0 41A1 2 2Real Time Clock (Read/Write Setting) 41A4 41A4 1 27Oscillography (Read/Write Setting) 41C0 4223 100 92User Programmable LEDs (Read/Write Setting) 4280 42AF 48 80Scratchpad (Read/Write Setting) 4300 43B3 180 44Installation (Read/Write Setting) 43E0 43EA 11 149Current Sensing (Read/Write Setting)[6 modules] 4480 4497 24 104Voltage Sensing (Read/Write Setting)[3 modules] 4500 4517 24 104Source Configuration (Read/Write Setting)[6 modules] 4580 45A9 42 86Power System (Read/Write Setting) 4600 4603 4 252Breaker Control (Read/Write Setting)[2 modules] 4700 472F 48 80Synchrocheck (Read/Write Setting)[2 modules] 4780 479F 32 96Flexcurve A (Read/Write Setting) 4800 4877 120 120Flexcurve B (Read/Write Setting) 48F0 4967 120 1688Flexlogic (Read/Write Setting) 5000 51FF 512 1536Flexlogic Timers (Read/Write Setting)[32 modules] 5800 58FF 256 0




APPENDIX A A.5 MEMORY MAPPING

APhase TOC (Read/Write Grouped Setting)[6 modules] 5900 595F 96 160Phase IOC (Read/Write Grouped Setting)[12 modules] 5A00 5ABF 192 64Neutral TOC (Read/Write Grouped Setting)[6 modules] 5B00 5B5F 96 160Neutral IOC (Read/Write Grouped Setting)[12 modules] 5C00 5CBF 192 64Ground TOC (Read/Write Grouped Setting)[6 modules] 5D00 5D5F 96 160Ground IOC (Read/Write Grouped Setting)[2 modules] 5E00 5E1F 32 112Negative Sequence TOC (Read/Write Grouped Setting)[2 modules] 5E90 5EAF 32 0Negative Sequence IOC (Read/Write Grouped Setting)[2 modules] 5EB0 5ECF 32 880Autoreclose (Read/Write Setting)[6 modules] 6240 629F 96 3424Phase Undervoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting)[2 modules] 7000 701F 32 224Phase Overvoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) 7100 710F 16 208Underfrequency (Read/Write Setting) 71E0 71F6 23 9Breaker Failure (Read/Write Grouped Setting)[2 modules] 7200 724D 78 18Phase Directional (Read/Write Grouped Setting)[2 modules] 7260 727F 32 0Neutral Directional (Read/Write Grouped Setting)[2 modules] 7280 729F 32 32Breaker Arcing Current Settings (Read/Write Setting)[2 modules] 72C0 72CF 16 48DCMA Inputs (Read/Write Setting)[24 modules] 7300 753F 576 0RTD Inputs (Read/Write Setting)[48 modules] 7540 783F 768 0Ohm Inputs (Read/Write Setting)[2 modules] 7840 785F 32 1952Frequency (Read Only) 8000 8000 1 2047FlexState Settings (Read/Write Setting) 8800 88FF 256 5888Setting Groups (Read/Write Setting) A000 A008 9 7Cold Load Pickup (Read/Write Setting)[2 modules] A010 A01F 16 4064Digital Elements (Read/Write Setting)[16 modules] B000 B1FF 512 256Digital Counter (Read/Write Setting)[8 modules] B300 B3FF 256 3072Contact Inputs (Read/Write Setting)[96 modules] C000 C5FF 1536 0Contact Input Thresholds (Read/Write Setting) C600 C617 24 104Virtual Inputs Global Settings (Read/Write Setting) C680 C680 1 15Virtual Inputs (Read/Write Setting)[32 modules] C690 C88F 512 1024Virtual Outputs (Read/Write Setting)[64 modules] CC90 D08F 1024 512Contact Outputs (Read/Write Setting)[64 modules] D290 D68F 1024 368Reset (Read/Write Setting) D800 D800 1 175Force Contact Inputs (Read/Write Setting) D8B0 D90F 96 0Force Contact Outputs (Read/Write Setting) D910 D94F 64 1712Remote Devices (Read/Write Setting)[16 modules] E000 E09F 160 96Remote Inputs (Read/Write Setting)[32 modules] E100 E15F 96 1184Remote Output DNA Pairs (Read/Write Setting)[32 modules] E600 E61F 32 0Remote Output UserSt Pairs (Read/Write Setting)[32 modules] E620 FFFF 32 0

Table A–9: MODBUS ® MEMORY MAP SUMMARY (Sheet 2 of 2)

ModuleStart

AddressLast

AddressNumber ofRegisters

Gap to NextModule





AA.5.2 MODBUS® MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS

Table A–10: MODBUS ® MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS (Sheet 1 of 17)

FormatName

Format Type/Bitmask

Format Definition

F000_NEW BITFIELD PHASE SELECT ELEMENT STATEF001 UR_UINT16 UNSIGNED 16 BIT INTEGERF002 UR_SINT16 SIGNED 16 BIT INTEGERF003 UR_UINT32 UNSIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER (2 registers)

High order word is stored in the first register.Low order word is stored in the second register.

F004 UR_SINT32 SIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER (2 registers)High order word is stored in the first register.Low order word is stored in the second register.

F005 UR_UINT8 UNSIGNED 8 BIT INTEGERF006 UR_SINT8 SIGNED 8 BIT INTEGERF011 UR_UINT16 FLEXCURVE DATA (120 POINTS)

A FlexCurve is an array of 120 consecutive data points (x,y) which are interpolatedto generate a smooth curve. The y-axis is the user defined trip or operation timesetting; the x-axis is the pickup ratio and is pre-defined. Refer to format F119 fora listing of the pickup ratios; the enumeration value for the pickup ratio indicatesthe offset into the FlexCurve base address where the corresponding time value is stored.

F012 DISPLAY_SCALE DISPLAY SCALING (UNSIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER)MSB indicates the SI units as a power of ten.LSB indicates the number of decimal points to display.Example: Current values are stored as 32 bit numbers with three decimal placesand base units in Amps. If the retrieved value is 12345.678 A and the display scaleequals 0x0302 then the displayed value on the unit is 12.35 kA.

F013 POWER_FACTOR POWER FACTOR (SIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER)Positive values indicate lagging power factor; negative values indicate leading.

F040 UR_UINT48 48-BIT UNSIGNED INTEGERF050 UR_UINT32 TIME and DATE (UNSIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER)

Gives the current time in seconds elapsed since 00:00:00 January 1, 1970.F060 FLOATING_POINT IEE FLOATING POINT (32 bits)F070 HEX2 2 BYTES - 4 ASCII DIGITSF071 HEX4 4 BYTES - 8 ASCII DIGITSF072 HEX6 6 BYTES - 12 ASCII DIGITSF073 HEX8 8 BYTES - 16 ASCII DIGITSF074 HEX20 20 BYTES - 40 ASCII DIGITSF100 ENUMERATION VT CONNECTION TYPE

0 Wye1 Delta

F101 ENUMERATION MESSAGE DISPLAY INTENSITY0 25%1 50%2 75%3 100%

F102 ENUMERATION DISABLED/ENABLED0 Disabled1 Enabled

F103 ENUMERATION CURVE SHAPES0 IEEE Mod Inv1 IEEE Very Inv2 IEEE Ext Inv3 IEC Curve A4 IEC Curve B





A5 IEC Curve C6 IEC Short Inv7 IAC Ext Inv8 IAC Very Inv9 IAC Inverse

10 IAC Short Inv11 I2t12 Definite Time13 Flexcurve A14 Flexcurve B

F104 ENUMERATION RESET TYPE0 Instantaneous1 Timed

F105 ENUMERATION LOGIC INPUT0 Disabled1 Input 12 Input 2

F106 ENUMERATION PHASE ROTATION0 ABC1 ACB

F108 ENUMERATION OFF/ON0 Off1 On

F109 ENUMERATION CONTACT OUTPUT OPERATION0 Self-reset1 Latched2 Disabled

F110 ENUMERATION CONTACT OUTPUT LED CONTROL0 Trip1 Alarm2 None

F111 ENUMERATION UNDERVOLTAGE CURVE SHAPES0 Definite Time1 Inverse Time

F112 ENUMERATION RS485 BAUD RATES0 3001 12002 24003 48004 96005 192006 384007 576008 115200

F113 ENUMERATION PARITY0 None1 Odd2 Even

F114 ENUMERATION IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE0 None1 DC Shift2 Amplitude Modulated

F115 ENUMERATION BREAKER STATUS0 Auxiliary A1 Auxiliary B


FormatName

Format Type/Bitmask

Format Definition





AF117 ENUMERATION NUMBER OF OSCILLOGRAPHY RECORDS

0 1 x 72 Cycles1 3 x 36 Cycles2 7 x 18 Cycles3 15 x 9 Cycles

F118 ENUMERATION OSCILLOGRAPHY MODE0 Automatic Overwrite1 Protected

F119 ENUMERATION FLEXCURVE PICKUP RATIOS0 01 0.052 0.13 0.154 0.25 0.256 0.37 0.358 0.49 0.45

10 0.4811 0.512 0.5213 0.5414 0.5615 0.5816 0.617 0.6218 0.6419 0.6620 0.6821 0.722 0.7223 0.7424 0.7625 0.7826 0.827 0.8228 0.8429 0.8630 0.8831 0.932 0.9133 0.9234 0.9335 0.9436 0.9537 0.9638 0.9739 0.9840 1.0341 1.0542 1.143 1.244 1.345 1.4


FormatName

Format Type/Bitmask

Format Definition





A46 1.547 1.648 1.749 1.850 1.951 252 2.153 2.254 2.355 2.456 2.557 2.658 2.759 2.860 2.961 362 3.163 3.264 3.365 3.466 3.567 3.668 3.769 3.870 3.971 472 4.173 4.274 4.375 4.476 4.577 4.678 4.779 4.880 4.981 582 5.183 5.284 5.385 5.486 5.587 5.688 5.789 5.890 5.991 692 6.593 794 7.595 896 8.597 998 9.599 10

100 10.5


FormatName

Format Type/Bitmask

Format Definition





A101 11102 11.5103 12104 12.5105 13106 13.5107 14108 14.5109 15110 15.5111 16112 16.5113 17114 17.5115 18116 18.5117 19118 19.5119 20

F122 ENUMERATION ELEMENT INPUT SIGNAL TYPE0 Phasor1 RMS

F123 ENUMERATION CT SECONDARY0 1 A1 5 A

F124 ENUMERATION LIST OF ELEMENTS0 PHASE IOC11 PHASE IOC22 PHASE IOC33 PHASE IOC44 PHASE IOC55 PHASE IOC66 PHASE IOC77 PHASE IOC88 PHASE IOC99 PHASE IOC10

10 PHASE IOC1111 PHASE IOC1216 PHASE TOC117 PHASE TOC218 PHASE TOC319 PHASE TOC420 PHASE TOC521 PHASE TOC624 PH DIR125 PH DIR232 NEUTRAL IOC133 NEUTRAL IOC234 NEUTRAL IOC335 NEUTRAL IOC436 NEUTRAL IOC537 NEUTRAL IOC638 NEUTRAL IOC739 NEUTRAL IOC840 NEUTRAL IOC9


FormatName

Format Type/Bitmask

Format Definition





A41 NEUTRAL IOC1042 NEUTRAL IOC1143 NEUTRAL IOC1248 NEUTRAL TOC149 NEUTRAL TOC250 NEUTRAL TOC351 NEUTRAL TOC452 NEUTRAL TOC553 NEUTRAL TOC656 NTRL DIR157 NTRL DIR264 GROUND IOC165 GROUND IOC266 GROUND IOC367 GROUND IOC468 GROUND IOC569 GROUND IOC670 GROUND IOC771 GROUND IOC872 GROUND IOC973 GROUND IOC1074 GROUND IOC1175 GROUND IOC1280 GROUND TOC181 GROUND TOC282 GROUND TOC383 GROUND TOC484 GROUND TOC585 GROUND TOC696 NEG SEQ IOC197 NEG SEQ IOC2112 NEG SEQ TOC1113 NEG SEQ TOC2144 PHASE UV1145 PHASE UV2152 PHASE OV1160 PH DIST Z1161 PH DIST Z2162 PH DIST Z3163 PH DIST Z4168 LINE PICKUP176 GND DIST Z1177 GND DIST Z2178 GND DIST Z3179 GND DIST Z4184 DUTT185 PUTT186 POTT187 HYBRID POTT188 BLOCK SCHEME208 XFMR INST DIFF209 XFMR PCNT DIFF224 VTFF232 CT FAIL240 87L DIFF


FormatName

Format Type/Bitmask

Format Definition





A241 IT TRIP242 OPEN POLE243 PHASE SELECT244 50DD245 CONT MONITOR246 IB LOW SET247 TRIP PERM248 TRIP SELECT249 TRIP OUTPUT250 STUB BUS256 87PC272 BREAKER 1273 BREAKER 2280 BKR FAIL 1281 BKR FAIL 2288 BKR ARC 1289 BKR ARC 2304 AR 1305 AR 2306 AR 3307 AR 4308 AR 5309 AR 6312 SYNC 1313 SYNC 2320 COLD LOAD 1321 COLD LOAD 2336 SETTING GROUP337 RESET352 UNDERFREQ512 DIG ELEM 1513 DIG ELEM 2514 DIG ELEM 3515 DIG ELEM 4516 DIG ELEM 5517 DIG ELEM 6518 DIG ELEM 7519 DIG ELEM 8520 DIG ELEM 9521 DIG ELEM 10522 DIG ELEM 11523 DIG ELEM 12524 DIG ELEM 13525 DIG ELEM 14526 DIG ELEM 15527 DIG ELEM 16544 COUNTER 1545 COUNTER 2546 COUNTER 3547 COUNTER 4548 COUNTER 5549 COUNTER 6550 COUNTER 7551 COUNTER 8

F125 ENUMERATION ACCESS LEVEL


FormatName

Format Type/Bitmask

Format Definition





A0 Restricted1 Command2 Setting3 Factory Service

F126 ENUMERATION NO/YES CHOICE0 No1 Yes

F127 ENUMERATION VIRTUAL INPUT TYPE0 Normal1 Self-Reset2 SBO-Once3 SBO-Many

F128 ENUMERATION CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLD0 16 Vdc1 30 Vdc2 80 Vdc3 140 Vdc

F129 ENUMERATION FLEXLOGIC TIMER TYPE0 millisecond1 second2 minute

F130 ENUMERATION SIMULATION MODE0 Off1 Pre-Fault2 Fault3 Post-Fault

F131 ENUMERATION FORCED CONTACT OUTPUT STATE0 Disabled1 Energized2 De-energized3 Freeze

F133 ENUMERATION PROGRAM STATE0 Not Programmed1 Programmed

F134 ENUMERATION PASS/FAIL0 Fail1 OK2 n/a

F135 ENUMERATION GAIN CALIBRATION0 x11 x16

F136 ENUMERATION NUMBER OF OSCILLOGRAPHY RECORDS0 31 x 8 cycles1 15 x 16 cycles2 7 x 32 cycles3 3 x 64 cycles4 1 x 128 cycles

F138 ENUMERATION OSCILLOGRAPHY FILE TYPE0 Data File1 Configuration File2 Header File

F139 ENUMERATION OK/FAIL0 Failed1 Passed2 n/a


FormatName

Format Type/Bitmask

Format Definition





AF140 ENUMERATION CURRENT, SENS CURRENT, VOLTAGE, DISABLED

0 Disabled1 Current2 Voltage3 Sens Current

F141 ENUMERATION SELF TEST ERROR0 Any Self-Tests1 IRIG-B FAILURE2 DSP ERROR4 NO DSP INTERRUPTS7 UNIT NOT CALIBRATED8 EEPROM CORRUPTED9 CLOCK NOT SET

10 FLASH MEMORY FAIL11 FACTORY SERVICE MODE12 PROTOTYPE FIRMWARE13 FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN14 EQUIPMENT MISMATCH15 RAM CODE FAILURE16 UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED19 CPU EXCEPTION20 SYNCHRONIZING21 CHANNEL 1 FAILED22 CHANNEL 2 FAILED23 FLASH PROGRAMMING24 BATTERY FAIL25 PRI ETHERNET FAIL26 SEC ETHERNET FAIL27 EEPROM DATA ERROR28 SRAM DATA ERROR29 PROGRAM MEMORY30 CPU OVERLOADED

F142 ENUMERATION EVENT RECORDER ACCESS FILE TYPE0 All Record Data1 Headers Only2 Numeric Event Cause

F143 UR_UINT32 32 BIT ERROR CODE (F141 specifies the bit number)A bit value of 0 = no error, 1 = error

F144 ENUMERATION FORCED CONTACT INPUT STATE0 Disabled1 Open2 Closed

F145 ENUMERATION ALPHABET LETTER0 null1 A2 B3 C4 D5 E6 F7 G8 H9 I

10 J11 K


FormatName

Format Type/Bitmask

Format Definition





A12 L13 M14 N15 O16 P17 Q18 R19 S20 T21 U22 V23 W24 X25 Y26 Z

F146 ENUMERATION MISC. EVENT CAUSES0 EVENTS CLEARED1 OSCILLOGRAPHY TRIG'D2 DATE/TIME CHANGED3 DEF SETTINGS LOADED4 TEST MODE ON5 TEST MODE OFF6 POWER ON7 POWER OFF8 RELAY IN SERVICE9 RELAY OUT OF SERVICE

F147 ENUMERATION LINE LENGTH UNITS0 km1 miles

F148 ENUMERATION FAULT TYPE0 None1 AG2 BG3 CG4 AB5 BC6 AC7 ABG8 BCG9 ACG

10 ABC11 ABCG

F149 ENUMERATION 87L PHASE COMP SCHEME SELECTION0 2TL-PT-DPC-3FC1 2TL-PT-SPC-2FC2 2TL-PT-DPC-2FC3 2TL-BL-DPC-2FC4 2/3TL-BL-SPC-AMC5 3TL-PT-SPC-2FC6 3TL-BL-SPC-2FC

F150 ENUMERATION 87L PHASE COMP SCHEME SIGNAL SELECTION0 Composite1 310

F151 ENUMERATION 87L PH CMP 52B KEYING SELECT0 FDL


FormatName

Format Type/Bitmask

Format Definition





A1 FDM

F152 ENUMERATION SETTING GROUP0 Active Group1 Group 12 Group 23 Group 34 Group 45 Group 56 Group 67 Group 78 Group 8

F154 ENUMERATION DISTANCE DIRECTION0 Forward1 Reverse

F155 ENUMERATION REMOTE DEVICE STATE0 Offline1 Online

F156 ENUMERATION REMOTE INPUT BIT PAIRS0 None1 DNA-12 DNA-23 DNA-34 DNA-45 DNA-56 DNA-67 DNA-78 DNA-89 DNA-9

10 DNA-1011 DNA-1112 DNA-1213 DNA-1314 DNA-1415 DNA-1516 DNA-1617 DNA-1718 DNA-1819 DNA-1920 DNA-2021 DNA-2122 DNA-2223 DNA-2324 DNA-2425 DNA-2526 DNA-2627 DNA-2728 DNA-2829 DNA-2930 DNA-3031 DNA-3132 DNA-3233 UserSt-134 UserSt-235 UserSt-336 UserSt-4


FormatName

Format Type/Bitmask

Format Definition





A37 UserSt-538 UserSt-639 UserSt-740 UserSt-841 UserSt-942 UserSt-1043 UserSt-1144 UserSt-1245 UserSt-1346 UserSt-1447 UserSt-1548 UserSt-1649 UserSt-1750 UserSt-1851 UserSt-1952 UserSt-2053 UserSt-2154 UserSt-2255 UserSt-2356 UserSt-2457 UserSt-2558 UserSt-2659 UserSt-2760 UserSt-2861 UserSt-2962 UserSt-3063 UserSt-3164 UserSt-32

F157 ENUMERATION BREAKER MODE0 3-Pole1 1-Pole

F158 ENUMERATION SCHEME CALIBRATION TEST0 Normal1 Symmetry 12 Symmetry 23 Delay 14 Delay 2

F159 ENUMERATION BREAKER AUX CONTACT KEYING0 52a1 52b2 None

F160 ENUMERATION TRANSFORMER PHASE COMPENSATION0 Internal (software)1 External (with CTs)

F161 ENUMERATION TRANSFORMER RATED WINDING TEMP RISE0 55°C (oil)1 65°C (oil)2 80°C (dry)3 115°C (dry)4 150°C (dry)

F162 ENUMERATION TRANSFORMER TYPE OF COOLING0 OA1 FA2 Non-directed FOA/FOW3 Directed FOA/FOW


FormatName

Format Type/Bitmask

Format Definition





AF163 ENUMERATION TRANSFORMER WINDING CONNECTION

0 Wye1 Delta2 Zig-zag

F164 ENUMERATION TRANSFORMER WINDING GROUNDING0 Not within zone1 Within zone

F165 ENUMERATION TRANSFORMER TAP INPUT0 None1 Tap Input 12 Tap Input 23 Auto-detect

F166 ENUMERATION AUXILIARY VT CONNECTION TYPE0 Vn1 Vag2 Vbg3 Vcg4 Vab5 Vbc6 Vca

F167 ENUMERATION SIGNAL SOURCE0 SRC 11 SRC 22 SRC 33 SRC 44 SRC 55 SRC 6

F168 ENUMERATION INRUSH INHIBIT FUNCTION0 Disabled1 2nd

F169 ENUMERATION OVEREXCITATION INHIBIT FUNCTION0 Disabled1 5th

F170 ENUMERATION LOW/HIGH OFFSET&GAIN TRANSDUCER IO SELECTION0 LOW1 HIGH

F171 ENUMERATION TRANSDUCER CHANNEL INPUT TYPE0 dcmA IN1 OHMS IN2 RTD IN3 dcmA OUT

F172 ENUMERATION SLOT LETTERS0 F1 G2 H3 J4 K5 L6 M7 N8 P9 R

10 S11 T12 U


FormatName

Format Type/Bitmask

Format Definition





A13 V14 W15 X

F173 ENUMERATION TRANSDUCER DCMA INPUT/OUTPUT RANGE0 0 to -1 mA1 0 to 1 mA2 -1 to 1 mA3 0 to 5 mA4 0 to 10 mA5 0 to 20 mA6 4 to 20 mA

F174 ENUMERATION TRANSDUCER RTD INPUT TYPE0 100 Ohm Platinum1 120 Ohm Nickel2 100 Ohm Nickel3 10 Ohm Copper

F175 ENUMERATION PHASE LETTERS0 A1 B2 C

F176 ENUMERATION SYNCHROCHECK DEAD SOURCE SELECT0 None1 LV1 and DV22 DV1 and LV23 DV1 or DV24 DV1 Xor DV25 DV1 and DV2

F200 TEXT40 40 CHARACTER ASCII TEXT20 registers -16 Bits: 1st Char MSB, 2nd Char. LSB

F201 TEXT8 8 CHARACTER ASCII PASSCODE4 registers -16 Bits: 1st Char MSB, 2nd Char. LSB

F202 TEXT20 20 CHARACTER ASCII TEXT10 registers -16 Bits: 1st Char MSB, 2nd Char. LSB

F203 TEXT16 16 CHARACTER ASCII TEXTF204 TEXT80 80 CHARACTER ASCII TEXTF205 TEXT12 12 CHARACTER ASCII TEXTF206 TEXT6 6 CHARACTER ASCII TEXTF222 ENUMERATION TEST ENUMERATION

0 Test Enumeration 01 Test Enumeration 1

F230 ENUMERATION DIRECTIONAL POLARIZING0 Voltage1 Current2 Dual

F300 UR_UINT16 FLEXLOGIC BASE TYPE (6 bit type)The flexlogic BASE type is 6 bits and is combined with a 9 bit descriptor and 1 bit for protectionelement to form a 16 bit value. The combined bits are of the form : PTTTTTTDDDDDDDDDwhere P bit if set, indicates that the flexlogic type is associated with a protection element stateand T represents bits for the BASE type, and D represents bits for the descriptor.The values in square brackets indicate the base type with P prefix [PTTTTTT] andthe values in round brackets indicate the descriptor range.[0] Off(0) this is boolean FALSE value[0] On (1)This is boolean TRUE value[2] CONTACT INPUTS (1 - 96)[3] CONTACT INPUTS OFF (1-96)


FormatName

Format Type/Bitmask

Format Definition





A[4] VIRTUAL INPUTS (1-64)[6] VIRTUAL OUTPUTS (1-64)[10] CONTACT OUTPUTS VOLTAGE DETECTED ( 1-64)[11] CONTACT OUTPUTS VOLTAGE OFF DETECTED (1-64)[12] CONTACT OUTPUTS CURRENT DETECTED (1-64)[13] CONTACT OUTPUTS CURRENT OFF DETECTED (1-64)[14] REMOTE INPUTS (1-32)[28] INSERT (Via Keypad only)[32] END[34] NOT (1 INPUT)[36] 2 INPUT XOR (0)[38] LATCH SET/RESET (2 INPUTS)[40] OR (2-16 INPUTS)[42] AND (2-16 INPUTS)[44] NOR (2-16 INPUTS)[46] NAND (2-16 INPUTS)[48] TIMER (1-32)[50] ASSIGN VIRTUAL OUTPUT (1 - 64)[52] SELF-TEST ERROR (See F141 for range)[56] ACTIVE SETTING GROUP (1-8)[62] MISCELLANEOUS EVENTS (See F146 for range)[64-127] ELEMENT STATES (Refer to Memory Map Element States Section)

F400 UR_UINT16 CT/VT BANK SELECTION0 Card 1 Contact 1 to 41 Card 1 Contact 5 to 82 Card 2 Contact 1 to 43 Card 2 Contact 5 to 84 Card 3 Contact 1 to 45 Card 3 Contact 5 to 8

F500 UR_UINT16 PACKED BITFIELDFirst register indicates I/O state with bits 0(MSB)-15(LSB) corresponding to I/0 state 1-16Second register indicates I/O state with bits 0-15 corresponding to I/0 state 17-32Third register indicates I/O state with bits 0-15 corresponding to I/0 state 33-48Fourth register indicates I/O state with bits 0-15 corresponding to I/0 state 49-64A bit value of 0 = Off, 1 = On

F501 UR_UINT16 LED STATUSLow byte of register indicates LED status with bit 0 representing the top LED andbit 7 the bottom LED. A bit value of 1 indicates the LED is on, 0 indicates the LED is off.

F502 BITFIELD ELEMENT OPERATE STATESEach bit contains the operate state for an element.Bit 0 of the first register is the "any element operated" state.See the F124 format code for a list of element IDs.The operate bit for element ID X is bit [X mod 16] in register [X/16].

F504 BITFIELD 3 PHASE ELEMENT STATE0 Pickup1 Operate2 Pickup Phase A3 Pickup Phase B4 Pickup Phase C5 Operate Phase A6 Operate Phase B7 Operate Phase C

F505 BITFIELD CONTACT OUTPUT STATE0 Contact State1 Voltage Detected


FormatName

Format Type/Bitmask

Format Definition





A2 Current Detected

F506 BITFIELD 1 PHASE ELEMENT STATE0 Pickup1 Operate

F507 BITFIELD COUNTER ELEMENT STATE0 Count Greater Than1 Count Equal To2 Count Less Than

F508 BITFIELD DISTANCE ELEMENT STATE0 Pickup1 Operate2 Pickup AB3 Pickup BC4 Pickup CA5 Operate AB6 Operate BC7 Operate CA8 Timed9 Operate IAB

10 Operate IBC11 Operate ICA

F509 BITFIELD SIMPLE ELEMENT STATE0 Operate

F510 BITFIELD 87L ELEMENT STATE0 Operate A1 Operate B2 Operate C3 Recevied DTT4 Operate5 Key DTT6 PFLL Fail7 PFLL OK8 Channel 1 Fail9 Channel 2 Fail

10 Channel 1 Lost Packet11 Channel 2 Lost Packet12 Channel 1 CRC Fail13 Channel 2 CRC Fail

F511 BITFIELD 3 PHASE SIMPLE ELEMENT STATE0 Operate1 Operate A2 Operate B3 Operate C

F512 ENUMERATION HARMONIC NUMBER0 2ND1 3RD2 4TH3 5TH4 6TH5 7TH6 8TH7 9TH8 10TH9 11TH

10 12TH


FormatName

Format Type/Bitmask

Format Definition





A11 13TH12 14TH13 15TH14 16TH15 17TH16 18TH17 19TH18 20TH19 21ST20 22ND21 23RD


FormatName

Format Type/Bitmask

Format Definition





AA.5.3 MODBUS ® MEMORY MAP

Table A–11: MODBUS ® MEMORY MAP (Sheet 1 of 20)

Addr Register Name Range Units Step Format Factory DefaultProduct Information (Read Only)

0000 UR Product Type 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 00002 Product Version 0 to 655.35 --- 0.01 F001 1

Product Information (Read Only -- Written by Factory)0010 Serial Number --- --- --- F203 "0"0020 Manufacturing Date 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 00022 Modification Number 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 00040 Order Code --- --- --- F204 "Order Code x "0090 Ethernet MAC Address --- --- --- F072 0

Self Test Targets (Read Only)0200 Self Test States 0 to 4294967295 0 1 F143 0

Front Panel (Read Only)0204 LED Column x State (9 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F501 00220 Display Message --- --- --- F204 (none)

Virtual Input Commands (Read/Write Command)0400 Virtual Input x State (32 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)

Digital Counter States (Read Only Non-Volatile) (8 modules)0800 Digital Counter x Value -2147483647 to

2147483647--- 1 F004 0

0802 Digital Counter x Frozen -2147483647 to2147483647

--- 1 F004 0

0804 Digital Counter x Frozen Time Stamp 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 00806 Digital Counter x Frozen Time Stamp us 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 00808 ...Repeated for module number 20810 ...Repeated for module number 30818 ...Repeated for module number 40820 ...Repeated for module number 50828 ...Repeated for module number 60830 ...Repeated for module number 70838 ...Repeated for module number 8

FlexStates (Read Only)0900 FlexState Bits (16 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0

Element States (Read Only)1000 Element Operate Flags (64 items) --- --- --- F502 0

Element Targets (Read Only)14C0 Target Sequence 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 014C1 Number of Targets 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0

Element Targets (Read/Write)14C2 Target to Read 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0

Element Targets (Read Only)14C3 Target Message --- --- --- F200 "."

Digital I/O States (Read Only)1500 Contact Input States (6 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 01508 Virtual Input States (2 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 01510 Contact Output States (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 01518 Contact Output Current States (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 01520 Contact Output Voltage States (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 01528 Virtual Output States (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 01530 Contact Output Detectors (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0

Remote I/O States (Read Only)1540 Remote Device x States 0 to 4 --- 1 F500 01542 Remote Input x States (2 items) 0 to 4 --- 1 F500 01550 Remote Devices Online 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)





ARemote Device Status (Read Only) (16 modules)

1551 Remote Device x StNum 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 01553 Remote Device x SqNum 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 01555 ...Repeated for module number 21559 ...Repeated for module number 3155D ...Repeated for module number 41561 ...Repeated for module number 51565 ...Repeated for module number 61569 ...Repeated for module number 7156D ...Repeated for module number 81571 ...Repeated for module number 91575 ...Repeated for module number 101579 ...Repeated for module number 11157D ...Repeated for module number 121581 ...Repeated for module number 131585 ...Repeated for module number 141589 ...Repeated for module number 15158D ...Repeated for module number 16

Ethernet Fibre Channel Status (Read/Write)1610 Ethernet Primary Fibre Channel Status 0 to 2 --- 1 F134 0 (Fail)1611 Ethernet Secondary Fibre Channel Status 0 to 2 --- 1 F134 0 (Fail)

Current Inputs (Read Only) (6 modules)1700 Phase A CT Magnitude 0 to 5000000 A 0.001 F060 01702 Phase A CT Angle -359.9 to 0 º 0.1 F002 01703 Phase B CT Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 01705 Phase B CT Angle -359.9 to 0 º 0.1 F002 01706 Phase C CT Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 01708 Phase C CT Angle -359.9 to 0 º 0.1 F002 01709 Ground CT Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0170B Ground CT Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 0170C ...Repeated for module number 21718 ...Repeated for module number 31724 ...Repeated for module number 41730 ...Repeated for module number 5173C ...Repeated for module number 6

Voltage Inputs (Read Only) (3 modules)1780 Phase A VT Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 01782 Phase A VT Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 01783 Phase VT B Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 1 F060 01785 Phase VT B Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 01786 Phase VT C Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 01788 Phase VT C Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 01789 Auxiliary VT Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0178B Auxiliary VT Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 0178C ...Repeated for module number 21798 ...Repeated for module number 3

Source Values (Read Only) (6 modules)1800 Phase A Current RMS 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 01802 Phase B Current RMS 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 01804 Phase C Current RMS 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 01806 Neutral Current RMS 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 01808 Phase A Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0180A Phase A Current Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 0180B Phase B Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0180D Phase B Current Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 0180E Phase C Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0


Addr Register Name Range Units Step Format Factory Default





A1810 Phase C Current Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 01811 Neutral Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 01813 Neutral Current Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 01814 Ground Current RMS 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 01816 Ground Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 01818 Ground Current Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 01819 Phase AG Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0181B Phase BG Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0181D Phase CG Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0181F Phase AG Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 01821 Phase AG Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 01822 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 01824 Phase BG Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 01825 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 01827 Phase CG Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 01828 Phase AB or AC Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0182A Phase BC or BA Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0182C Phase CA or CB Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0182E Phase AB or AC Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 01830 Phase AB or AC Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 01831 Phase BC or BA Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 01833 Phase BC or BA Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 01834 Phase CA or CB Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 01836 Phase CA or CB Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 01837 Auxiliary Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 01839 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0183B Auxiliary Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 0183C Zero Sequence Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0183E Zero Sequence Current Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 0183F Positive Sequence Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 01841 Positive Sequence Current Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 01842 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 01844 Negative Sequence Current Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 01845 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 01847 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 01848 Positive Sequence Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0184A Positive Sequence Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 0184B Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0184D Negative Sequence Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 0184E Three Phase Real Power -1000000000000 to

1000000000000W 0.001 F060 0

1850 Phase A Real Power -1000000000000 to1000000000000

W 0.001 F060 0

1852 Phase B Real Power -1000000000000 to1000000000000

W 0.001 F060 0

1854 Phase C Real Power -1000000000000 to1000000000000

W 0.001 F060 0

1856 Three Phase Reactive Power -1000000000000 to1000000000000

var 0.001 F060 0

1858 Phase A Reactive Power -1000000000000 to1000000000000

var 0.001 F060 0

185A Phase B Reactive Power -1000000000000 to1000000000000

var 0.001 F060 0

185C Phase C Reactive Power -1000000000000 to1000000000000

var 0.001 F060 0

185E Three Phase Apparent Power -1000000000000 to1000000000000

VA 0.001 F060 0







A1860 Phase A Apparent Power -1000000000000 to

1000000000000VA 0.001 F060 0

1862 Phase B Apparent Power -1000000000000 to1000000000000

VA 0.001 F060 0

1864 Phase C Apparent Power -1000000000000 to1000000000000

VA 0.001 F060 0

1866 Three Phase Power Factor -0.999 to 1 --- 0.001 F013 01867 Phase A Power Factor -0.999 to 1 --- 0.001 F013 01868 Phase B Power Factor -0.999 to 1 --- 0.001 F013 01869 Phase C Power Factor -0.999 to 1 --- 0.001 F013 0186A Positive Watthour 0 to 2147483.647 Wh 3 F060 0186C Negative Watthour -2147483.647 to 0 Wh 3 F060 0186E Positive Varhour 0 to 2147483.647 varh 3 F060 01870 Negative Varhour -2147483.647 to 0 varh 3 F060 01872 UNDEFINED 2 to 90 --- 0.01 F001 01874 THD Phase A Current 0 to 999.9 % fo 0.1 F001 01875 THD Phase B Current 0 to 999.9 % fo 0.1 F001 01876 THD Phase C Current 0 to 999.9 % fo 0.1 F001 01877 THD Ground Current 0 to 999.9 % fo 0.1 F001 01878 Harmonics Phase A Current (22 items) 0 to 999.9 % fo 0.1 F001 0188E Harmonics Phase B Current (22 items) 0 to 999.9 % fo 0.1 F001 018A4 Harmonics Phase C Current (22 items) 0 to 999.9 % fo 0.1 F001 018BA Harmonics Ground Current (22 items) 0 to 999.9 % fo 0.1 F001 018D0 Reserved (176 items) --- --- --- F001 01980 ...Repeated for module number 21B00 ...Repeated for module number 31C80 ...Repeated for module number 41E00 ...Repeated for module number 51F80 ...Repeated for module number 6

Breaker Arcing Current Actuals (Read Only Non-Volatile) (2 modules)2200 Breaker x Arcing Amp Phase A 0 to 99999999 kA2-cyc 1 F060 02202 Breaker x Arcing Amp Phase B 0 to 99999999 kA2-cyc 1 F060 02204 Breaker x Arcing Amp Phase C 0 to 99999999 kA2-cyc 1 F060 02206 ...Repeated for module number 2

Breaker Arcing Current Commands (Read/Write Command) (2 modules)220C Breaker x Arcing Clear Command 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)220D ...Repeated for module number 2

Synchrocheck Actuals (Read Only) (2 modules)2400 Synchrocheck X Delta Voltage -1000000000000 to

1000000000000V 1 F060 0

2402 Synchrocheck X Delta Frequency 0 to 655.35 Hz 0.01 F001 02403 Synchrocheck X Delta Phase 0 to 359.9 ° 0.1 F001 02404 ...Repeated for module number 2

Autoreclose Status (Read Only) (6 modules)2410 Autoreclose Count 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 02411 ...Repeated for module number 22412 ...Repeated for module number 32413 ...Repeated for module number 42414 ...Repeated for module number 52415 ...Repeated for module number 6

Oscillography Status and Access Registers (Read Only)3000 Oscillography Number of Triggers 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 03001 Oscillography Available Records 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 03002 Oscillography Last Cleared Date 0 to 400000000 --- 1 F050 0

Oscillography Status and Access Registers (Read/Write Command)3004 Oscillography Clear Data 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)







AOscillography File Transfer (Read/Write)

3020 Oscillography File Identifier 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 03021 Oscillography File Type 0 to 2 --- 1 F138 0 (Data File)

Oscillography File Transfer (Read Only)3022 Oscillography File Size 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 03024 Oscillography File Position 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 03026 Oscillography File Access (123 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0

Event Recorder (Read Only)3400 Events Since Last Clear 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 03402 Number of Available Events 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 03404 Event Recorder Last Cleared Date 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0

Event Recorder (Read/Write Command)3406 Event Recorder Clear Command 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)

Event Recorder File Transfer (Read/Write)3420 Event File First Event 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 03422 Event File Last Event 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 03424 Event File Type 0 to 2 --- 1 F142 0 (All Record Data)

Event Recorder File Transfer (Read Only)3425 Event File Position 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 03427 Event File Access (123 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0

DCMA Input Values (Read Only) (24 modules)34C0 DCMA Inputs x Value -9999.999 to

9999.999--- 0.001 F004 0

34C2 ...Repeated for module number 234C4 ...Repeated for module number 334C6 ...Repeated for module number 434C8 ...Repeated for module number 534CA ...Repeated for module number 634CC ...Repeated for module number 734CE ...Repeated for module number 834D0 ...Repeated for module number 934D2 ...Repeated for module number 1034D4 ...Repeated for module number 1134D6 ...Repeated for module number 1234D8 ...Repeated for module number 1334DA ...Repeated for module number 1434DC ...Repeated for module number 1534DE ...Repeated for module number 1634E0 ...Repeated for module number 1734E2 ...Repeated for module number 1834E4 ...Repeated for module number 1934E6 ...Repeated for module number 2034E8 ...Repeated for module number 2134EA ...Repeated for module number 2234EC ...Repeated for module number 2334EE ...Repeated for module number 24

RTD Input Values (Read Only) (48 modules)34F0 RTD Inputs x Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 034F1 ...Repeated for module number 234F2 ...Repeated for module number 334F3 ...Repeated for module number 434F4 ...Repeated for module number 534F5 ...Repeated for module number 634F6 ...Repeated for module number 734F7 ...Repeated for module number 834F8 ...Repeated for module number 9







A34F9 ...Repeated for module number 1034FA ...Repeated for module number 1134FB ...Repeated for module number 1234FC ...Repeated for module number 1334FD ...Repeated for module number 1434FE ...Repeated for module number 1534FF ...Repeated for module number 163500 ...Repeated for module number 173501 ...Repeated for module number 183502 ...Repeated for module number 193503 ...Repeated for module number 203504 ...Repeated for module number 213505 ...Repeated for module number 223506 ...Repeated for module number 233507 ...Repeated for module number 243508 ...Repeated for module number 253509 ...Repeated for module number 26350A ...Repeated for module number 27350B ...Repeated for module number 28350C ...Repeated for module number 29350D ...Repeated for module number 30350E ...Repeated for module number 31350F ...Repeated for module number 323510 ...Repeated for module number 333511 ...Repeated for module number 343512 ...Repeated for module number 353513 ...Repeated for module number 363514 ...Repeated for module number 373515 ...Repeated for module number 383516 ...Repeated for module number 393517 ...Repeated for module number 403518 ...Repeated for module number 413519 ...Repeated for module number 42351A ...Repeated for module number 43351B ...Repeated for module number 44351C ...Repeated for module number 45351D ...Repeated for module number 46351E ...Repeated for module number 47351F ...Repeated for module number 48

Ohm Input Values (Read Only) (2 modules)3520 Ohm Inputs x Value 0 to 65535 Þ 1 F001 03521 ...Repeated for module number 2

Passwords (Read Only)4000 Encrypted Command Password 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 04002 Encrypted Setting Password 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0

Preferences (Read/Write Setting)4050 Flash Message Time 0.5 to 10 s 0.1 F001 104051 Default Message Timeout 10 to 900 s 1 F001 3004052 Default Message Intensity 0 to 3 --- 1 F101 0 (25 %)

Communications (Read/Write Setting)4080 Modbus Slave Address 1 to 254 --- 1 F001 2544083 RS485 Com1 Baud Rate 0 to 8 --- 1 F112 8 (300)4084 RS485 Com1 Parity 0 to 2 --- 1 F113 0 (None)4085 RS485 Com2 Baud Rate 0 to 8 --- 1 F112 8 (300)4086 RS485 Com2 Parity 0 to 2 --- 1 F113 0 (None)4087 Ethernet IP Address 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 56554706







A4089 Gateway IP Address 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 56554497408B Network Address NSAP --- --- --- F074 04095 Default GOOSE Update Time 1 to 60 s 1 F001 604096 Ethernet Primary Fibre Channel Link Monitor 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)4097 Ethernet Secondary Fibre Channel Link Monitor 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)

Clock (Read/Write Setting)41A0 Current Date 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0

Real Time Clock (Read/Write Setting)41A4 IRIG-B Signal Type 0 to 2 --- 1 F114 0 (None)

Oscillography (Read/Write Setting)41C0 Oscillography Number of Records 1 to 64 --- 1 F001 1541C1 Oscillography Trigger Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F118 0 (Automatic

Overwrite)41C2 Oscillography Trigger Position 0 to 100 % 1 F001 5041C3 Oscillography Trigger Source 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 041E4 Oscillography Digital Channel X (64 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0

User Programmable LEDs (Read/Write Setting)4280 FlexLogic Operand to Activate LED (48 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0

Scratchpad (Read/Write Setting)4300 Scratchpad 1 --- --- --- F200 "Text 1"4328 Scratchpad 2 --- --- --- F200 "Text 2"4350 Scratchpad 3 --- --- --- F200 "Text 3"4378 Scratchpad 4 --- --- --- F200 "Text 4"43A0 Scratchpad 5 --- --- --- F200 "Text 5"

Installation (Read/Write Setting)43E0 Relay Programmed State 0 to 1 --- 1 F133 0 (Not Programmed)43E1 Relay Name --- --- --- F202 "Relay-1"

Current Sensing (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)4480 Phase CT Primary 1 to 65000 A 1 F001 14481 Phase CT Secondary 0 to 1 --- 1 F123 0 (1 A)4482 Ground CT Primary 1 to 65000 A 1 F001 14483 Ground CT Secondary 0 to 1 --- 1 F123 0 (1 A)4484 ...Repeated for module number 24488 ...Repeated for module number 3448C ...Repeated for module number 44490 ...Repeated for module number 54494 ...Repeated for module number 6

Voltage Sensing (Read/Write Setting) (3 modules)4500 Phase VT Connection 0 to 1 --- 1 F100 0 (Wye)4501 Phase VT Secondary 50 to 240 V 0.1 F001 12004502 Phase VT Ratio 1 to 24000 :1 1 F060 14504 Auxiliary VT Connection 0 to 6 --- 1 F166 1 (Vn)4505 Auxiliary VT Secondary 50 to 240 V 0.1 F001 12004506 Auxiliary VT Ratio 1 to 24000 :1 1 F060 14508 ...Repeated for module number 24510 ...Repeated for module number 3

Source Configuration (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)4580 Source Name --- --- --- F206 "SRC 1 "4583 Source Phase CT 0 to 63 --- 1 F400 04584 Source Ground CT 0 to 63 --- 1 F400 04585 Source Phase VT 0 to 63 --- 1 F400 04586 Source Auxiliary VT 0 to 63 --- 1 F400 04587 ...Repeated for module number 2458E ...Repeated for module number 34595 ...Repeated for module number 4459C ...Repeated for module number 5







A45A3 ...Repeated for module number 6

Power System (Read/Write Setting)4600 Nominal Frequency 25 to 60 Hz 1 F001 604601 Phase Rotation 0 to 1 --- 1 F106 0 (ABC)4602 Frequency And Phase Reference 0 to 63 --- 1 F001 04603 Frequency Tracking 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Disabled)

Breaker Control (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)4700 Breaker x Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)4701 Breaker x Name --- --- --- F206 "Bkr 1 "4704 Breaker x Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F157 0 (3-Pole)4705 Breaker x Open 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 04706 Breaker x Close 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 04707 Breaker x Phase A 3 Pole 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 04708 Breaker x Phase B 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 04709 Breaker x Phase C 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0470A Breaker x External Alarm 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0470B Breaker x Alarm Delay 0 to 1000000 s 0.001 F003 0470D Breaker x Push Button Control 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)470E Breaker x Manual Close Recal Time 0 to 1000000 s 0.001 F003 04710 Breaker x Reserved (8 items) 0 to 65535 s 1 F001 04718 ...Repeated for module number 2

Synchrocheck (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)4780 Synchrocheck Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)4781 Synchrocheck V1 Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)4782 Synchrocheck V2 Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 1 (SRC 1)4783 Synchrocheck Max Volt Diff 0 to 100000 V 1 F060 100004785 Synchrocheck Max Angle Diff 0 to 100 ° 1 F001 304786 Synchrocheck Max Freq Diff 0 to 2 Hz 0.01 F001 1004787 Synchrocheck Dead Source Select 0 to 5 --- 1 F176 1 (None)4788 Synchrocheck Dead V1 Max Volt 0 to 1.25 pu 0.01 F001 304789 Synchrocheck Dead V2 Max Volt 0 to 1.25 pu 0.01 F001 30478A Synchrocheck Live V1 Min Volt 0 to 1.25 pu 0.01 F001 70478B Synchrocheck Live V2 Min Volt 0 to 1.25 pu 0.01 F001 70478C Synchrocheck Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)478D Synchrocheck Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)478E Synchrocheck X Reserved (2 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 04790 ...Repeated for module number 2

Flexlogic (Read/Write Setting)5000 FlexLogic Entry (512 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 16384

Flexlogic Timers (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)5800 Timer x Type 0 to 2 --- 1 F129 0 (millisecond)5801 Timer x Pickup Delay 0 to 60000 --- 1 F001 05802 Timer x Dropout Delay 0 to 60000 --- 1 F001 05803 Timer x Reserved (5 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 05808 ...Repeated for module number 25810 ...Repeated for module number 35818 ...Repeated for module number 45820 ...Repeated for module number 55828 ...Repeated for module number 65830 ...Repeated for module number 75838 ...Repeated for module number 85840 ...Repeated for module number 95848 ...Repeated for module number 105850 ...Repeated for module number 115858 ...Repeated for module number 125860 ...Repeated for module number 13







A5868 ...Repeated for module number 145870 ...Repeated for module number 155878 ...Repeated for module number 165880 ...Repeated for module number 175888 ...Repeated for module number 185890 ...Repeated for module number 195898 ...Repeated for module number 2058A0 ...Repeated for module number 2158A8 ...Repeated for module number 2258B0 ...Repeated for module number 2358B8 ...Repeated for module number 2458C0 ...Repeated for module number 2558C8 ...Repeated for module number 2658D0 ...Repeated for module number 2758D8 ...Repeated for module number 2858E0 ...Repeated for module number 2958E8 ...Repeated for module number 3058F0 ...Repeated for module number 3158F8 ...Repeated for module number 32

Autoreclose (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)6240 Autoreclose Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)6241 Autoreclose Initiate 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 06242 Autoreclose Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 06243 Autoreclose Max Number of Shots 1 to 4 --- 1 F001 16244 Autoreclose Manual Close 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 06245 Autoreclose Manual Reset from LO 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 06246 Autoreclose Breaker Closed 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 06247 Autoreclose Breaker Open 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 06248 Autoreclose Block Time Upon Manual Close 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 100006249 Autoreclose Dead Time Shot 1 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 1000624A Autoreclose Dead Time Shot 2 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 2000624B Autoreclose Dead Time Shot 3 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 3000624C Autoreclose Dead Time Shot 4 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 4000624D Autoreclose Reset Time 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 60000624E Autoreclose Incomplete Sequence Time 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 5000624F Autoreclose Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)6250 ...Repeated for module number 26260 ...Repeated for module number 36270 ...Repeated for module number 46280 ...Repeated for module number 56290 ...Repeated for module number 6

Phase Undervoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)7000 Phase UV1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)7001 Phase UV1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)7002 Phase UV1 Pickup 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 10007003 Phase UV1 Curve 0 to 1 --- 1 F111 0 (Definite Time)7004 Phase UV1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 1007005 Phase UV1 Minimum Voltage 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 1007006 Phase UV1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 07007 Phase UV1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)7008 Phase UV1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)7009 Reserved (7 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 07010 ...Repeated for module number 2

Breaker Failure (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)7200 Breaker Failure x Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)7201 Breaker Failure x Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F157 0 (3-Pole)







A7202 Breaker Failure x Name --- --- --- F205 "Breaker 1 "7208 Breaker Failure x Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)7209 Breaker Failure x Amp Supervision 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 1 (No)720A Breaker Failure x Use Seal-In 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 1 (No)720B Breaker Failure x Three Pole Initiate 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0720C Breaker Failure x Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0720D Breaker Failure x Phase Amp Supv Pickup 0.001 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1050720E Breaker Failure x Neutral Amp Supv Pickup 0.001 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1050720F Breaker Failure x Use Timer 1 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 1 (No)7210 Breaker Failure x Timer 1 Pickup 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 07211 Breaker Failure x Use Timer 2 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 1 (No)7212 Breaker Failure x Timer 2 Pickup 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 07213 Breaker Failure x Use Timer 3 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 1 (No)7214 Breaker Failure x Timer 3 Pickup 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 07215 Breaker Failure x Breaker Status 1 Phase A/3P 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 07216 Breaker Failure x Breaker Status 2 Phase A/3P 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 07217 Breaker Failure x Breaker Test On 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 07218 Breaker Failure x Phase Amp Hiset Pickup 0.001 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 10507219 Breaker Failure x Neutral Amp Hiset Pickup 0.001 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1050721A Breaker Failure x Phase Amp Loset Pickup 0.001 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1050721B Breaker Failure x Neutral Amp Loset Pickup 0.001 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1050721C Breaker Failure x Loset Time 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0721D Breaker Failure x Trip Dropout Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0721E Breaker Failure x Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 1 (Self-reset)721F Breaker Failure x Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Disabled)7220 Breaker Failure x Phase A Initiate 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 07221 Breaker Failure x Phase B Initiate 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 07222 Breaker Failure x Phase C Initiate 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 07223 Breaker Failure x Breaker Status 1 Phase B 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 07224 Breaker Failure x Breaker Status 1 Phase C 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 07225 Breaker Failure x Breaker Status 2 Phase B 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 07226 Breaker Failure x Breaker Status 2 Phase C 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 07227 ...Repeated for module number 2

Breaker Arcing Current Settings (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)72C0 Breaker x Arcing Amp Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)72C1 Breaker x Arcing Amp Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)72C2 Breaker x Arcing Amp Init 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 072C3 Breaker x Arcing Amp Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 072C4 Breaker x Arcing Amp Limit 0 to 50000 kA2-cyc 1 F001 100072C5 Breaker x Arcing Amp Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 072C6 Breaker x Arcing Amp Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)72C7 Breaker x Arcing Amp Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)72C8 ...Repeated for module number 2

DCMA Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (24 modules)7300 DCMA Inputs x Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)7301 DCMA Inputs x ID --- --- --- F202 "DCMA Ip 1 "730B DCMA Inputs x Units --- --- --- F206 "mA"730E DCMA Inputs x Range 0 to 6 --- 1 F173 0 (0 to -1 mA)730F DCMA Inputs x Minimum Value -9999.999 to

9999.999--- 0.001 F004 0

7311 DCMA Inputs x Maximum Value -9999.999 to9999.999

--- 0.001 F004 0

7313 DCMA Inputs x Reserved (5 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 07318 ...Repeated for module number 27330 ...Repeated for module number 37348 ...Repeated for module number 4







A7360 ...Repeated for module number 57378 ...Repeated for module number 67390 ...Repeated for module number 773A8 ...Repeated for module number 873C0 ...Repeated for module number 973D8 ...Repeated for module number 1073F0 ...Repeated for module number 117408 ...Repeated for module number 127420 ...Repeated for module number 137438 ...Repeated for module number 147450 ...Repeated for module number 157468 ...Repeated for module number 167480 ...Repeated for module number 177498 ...Repeated for module number 1874B0 ...Repeated for module number 1974C8 ...Repeated for module number 2074E0 ...Repeated for module number 2174F8 ...Repeated for module number 227510 ...Repeated for module number 237528 ...Repeated for module number 24

RTD Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (48 modules)7540 RTD Inputs x Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)7541 RTD Inputs x ID --- --- --- F202 (none)754B RTD Inputs x Type 0 to 3 --- 1 F174 0 (100 Ohm

Platinum)754C RTD Inputs x Reserved (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 07550 ...Repeated for module number 27560 ...Repeated for module number 37570 ...Repeated for module number 47580 ...Repeated for module number 57590 ...Repeated for module number 675A0 ...Repeated for module number 775B0 ...Repeated for module number 875C0 ...Repeated for module number 975D0 ...Repeated for module number 1075E0 ...Repeated for module number 1175F0 ...Repeated for module number 127600 ...Repeated for module number 137610 ...Repeated for module number 147620 ...Repeated for module number 157630 ...Repeated for module number 167640 ...Repeated for module number 177650 ...Repeated for module number 187660 ...Repeated for module number 197670 ...Repeated for module number 207680 ...Repeated for module number 217690 ...Repeated for module number 2276A0 ...Repeated for module number 2376B0 ...Repeated for module number 2476C0 ...Repeated for module number 2576D0 ...Repeated for module number 2676E0 ...Repeated for module number 2776F0 ...Repeated for module number 287700 ...Repeated for module number 297710 ...Repeated for module number 307720 ...Repeated for module number 31







A7730 ...Repeated for module number 327740 ...Repeated for module number 337750 ...Repeated for module number 347760 ...Repeated for module number 357770 ...Repeated for module number 367780 ...Repeated for module number 377790 ...Repeated for module number 3877A0 ...Repeated for module number 3977B0 ...Repeated for module number 4077C0 ...Repeated for module number 4177D0 ...Repeated for module number 4277E0 ...Repeated for module number 4377F0 ...Repeated for module number 447800 ...Repeated for module number 457810 ...Repeated for module number 467820 ...Repeated for module number 477830 ...Repeated for module number 48

Ohm Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)7840 Ohm Inputs x Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)7841 Ohm Inputs x ID --- --- --- F202 (none)784B Ohm Inputs x Reserved (5 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 07850 ...Repeated for module number 2

Frequency (Read Only)8000 Frequency 5 to 90 Hz 0.01 F001 0

FlexState Settings (Read/Write Setting)8800 FlexState Parameters (256 items) --- --- --- F300 0

Setting Groups (Read/Write Setting)A000 Setting Group for Communications (0 means group 1) 0 to 7 --- 1 F001 0A001 Setting Group for Display Editing 0 to 8 --- 1 F152 0 (Active Group)A002 FlexLogic Operands to Activate Groups 2 through 8 (7

items)0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0

Digital Elements (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)B000 Digital Element x Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)B001 Digital Element x Name --- --- --- F203 "Dig Element 1 "B015 Digital Element x Input 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0B016 Digital Element x Pickup Delay 0 to 999999.999 s 0.001 F003 0B018 Digital Element x Reset Delay 0 to 999999.999 s 0.001 F003 0B01A Digital Element x Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0B01B Digital Element x Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)B01C Digital Element x Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)B01D Digital Element x Reserved (3 items) --- --- --- F001 0B020 ...Repeated for module number 2B040 ...Repeated for module number 3B060 ...Repeated for module number 4B080 ...Repeated for module number 5B0A0 ...Repeated for module number 6B0C0 ...Repeated for module number 7B0E0 ...Repeated for module number 8B100 ...Repeated for module number 9B120 ...Repeated for module number 10B140 ...Repeated for module number 11B160 ...Repeated for module number 12B180 ...Repeated for module number 13B1A0 ...Repeated for module number 14B1C0 ...Repeated for module number 15B1E0 ...Repeated for module number 16







ADigital Counter (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)

B300 Digital Counter x Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)B301 Digital Counter x Name --- --- --- F205 "Counter 1 "B307 Digital Counter x Units --- --- --- F206 (none)B30A Digital Counter x Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0B30B Digital Counter x Up 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0B30C Digital Counter x Down 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0B30D Digital Counter x Preset -2147483647 to

2147483647--- 1 F004 0

B30F Digital Counter x Compare -2147483647 to2147483647

--- 1 F004 0

B311 Digital Counter x Reset 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0B312 Digital Counter x Freeze/Reset 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0B313 Digital Counter x Freeze/Count 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0B314 Digital Counter Set To Preset 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0B315 Digital Counter x Reserved (11 items) --- --- --- F001 0B320 ...Repeated for module number 2B340 ...Repeated for module number 3B360 ...Repeated for module number 4B380 ...Repeated for module number 5B3A0 ...Repeated for module number 6B3C0 ...Repeated for module number 7B3E0 ...Repeated for module number 8

Contact Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules)C000 Contact Input x Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)C001 Contact Input x Name --- --- --- F205 "Cont Ip 1 "C00C Contact Input x Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)C00D Contact Input x Reserved (3 items) --- --- --- F001 0C010 ...Repeated for module number 2C020 ...Repeated for module number 3C030 ...Repeated for module number 4C040 ...Repeated for module number 5C050 ...Repeated for module number 6C060 ...Repeated for module number 7C070 ...Repeated for module number 8C080 ...Repeated for module number 9C090 ...Repeated for module number 10C0A0 ...Repeated for module number 11C0B0 ...Repeated for module number 12C0C0 ...Repeated for module number 13C0D0 ...Repeated for module number 14C0E0 ...Repeated for module number 15C0F0 ...Repeated for module number 16C100 ...Repeated for module number 17C110 ...Repeated for module number 18C120 ...Repeated for module number 19C130 ...Repeated for module number 20C140 ...Repeated for module number 21C150 ...Repeated for module number 22C160 ...Repeated for module number 23C170 ...Repeated for module number 24C180 ...Repeated for module number 25C190 ...Repeated for module number 26C1A0 ...Repeated for module number 27C1B0 ...Repeated for module number 28C1C0 ...Repeated for module number 29







AC1D0 ...Repeated for module number 30C1E0 ...Repeated for module number 31C1F0 ...Repeated for module number 32C200 ...Repeated for module number 33C210 ...Repeated for module number 34C220 ...Repeated for module number 35C230 ...Repeated for module number 36C240 ...Repeated for module number 37C250 ...Repeated for module number 38C260 ...Repeated for module number 39C270 ...Repeated for module number 40C280 ...Repeated for module number 41C290 ...Repeated for module number 42C2A0 ...Repeated for module number 43C2B0 ...Repeated for module number 44C2C0 ...Repeated for module number 45C2D0 ...Repeated for module number 46C2E0 ...Repeated for module number 47C2F0 ...Repeated for module number 48C300 ...Repeated for module number 49C310 ...Repeated for module number 50C320 ...Repeated for module number 51C330 ...Repeated for module number 52C340 ...Repeated for module number 53C350 ...Repeated for module number 54C360 ...Repeated for module number 55C370 ...Repeated for module number 56C380 ...Repeated for module number 57C390 ...Repeated for module number 58C3A0 ...Repeated for module number 59C3B0 ...Repeated for module number 60C3C0 ...Repeated for module number 61C3D0 ...Repeated for module number 62C3E0 ...Repeated for module number 63C3F0 ...Repeated for module number 64C400 ...Repeated for module number 65C410 ...Repeated for module number 66C420 ...Repeated for module number 67C430 ...Repeated for module number 68C440 ...Repeated for module number 69C450 ...Repeated for module number 70C460 ...Repeated for module number 71C470 ...Repeated for module number 72C480 ...Repeated for module number 73C490 ...Repeated for module number 74C4A0 ...Repeated for module number 75C4B0 ...Repeated for module number 76C4C0 ...Repeated for module number 77C4D0 ...Repeated for module number 78C4E0 ...Repeated for module number 79C4F0 ...Repeated for module number 80C500 ...Repeated for module number 81C510 ...Repeated for module number 82C520 ...Repeated for module number 83C530 ...Repeated for module number 84C540 ...Repeated for module number 85







AC550 ...Repeated for module number 86C560 ...Repeated for module number 87C570 ...Repeated for module number 88C580 ...Repeated for module number 89C590 ...Repeated for module number 90C5A0 ...Repeated for module number 91C5B0 ...Repeated for module number 92C5C0 ...Repeated for module number 93C5D0 ...Repeated for module number 94C5E0 ...Repeated for module number 95C5F0 ...Repeated for module number 96

Contact Input Thresholds (Read/Write Setting)C600 Contact Input x Threshold (24 items) 0 to 3 --- 1 F128 1 (16 Vdc)

Virtual Inputs Global Settings (Read/Write Setting)C680 Virtual Inputs SBO Timeout 1 to 60 s 1 F001 30

Virtual Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)C690 Virtual Input x Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)C691 Virtual Input x Name --- --- --- F205 "Virt Ip 1 "C69B Virtual Input x Programmed Type 0 to 3 --- 1 F127 1 (Normal)C69C Virtual Input x Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)C69D Virtual Input x Reserved (3 items) --- --- --- F001 0C6A0 ...Repeated for module number 2C6B0 ...Repeated for module number 3C6C0 ...Repeated for module number 4C6D0 ...Repeated for module number 5C6E0 ...Repeated for module number 6C6F0 ...Repeated for module number 7C700 ...Repeated for module number 8C710 ...Repeated for module number 9C720 ...Repeated for module number 10C730 ...Repeated for module number 11C740 ...Repeated for module number 12C750 ...Repeated for module number 13C760 ...Repeated for module number 14C770 ...Repeated for module number 15C780 ...Repeated for module number 16C790 ...Repeated for module number 17C7A0 ...Repeated for module number 18C7B0 ...Repeated for module number 19C7C0 ...Repeated for module number 20C7D0 ...Repeated for module number 21C7E0 ...Repeated for module number 22C7F0 ...Repeated for module number 23C800 ...Repeated for module number 24C810 ...Repeated for module number 25C820 ...Repeated for module number 26C830 ...Repeated for module number 27C840 ...Repeated for module number 28C850 ...Repeated for module number 29C860 ...Repeated for module number 30C870 ...Repeated for module number 31C880 ...Repeated for module number 32

Virtual Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)CC90 Virtual Output x Name --- --- --- F205 "Virt Op 1 "CC9A Virtual Output x Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)CC9B Virtual Output x Reserved (5 items) --- --- --- F001 0







ACCA0 ...Repeated for module number 2CCB0 ...Repeated for module number 3CCC0 ...Repeated for module number 4CCD0 ...Repeated for module number 5CCE0 ...Repeated for module number 6CCF0 ...Repeated for module number 7CD00 ...Repeated for module number 8CD10 ...Repeated for module number 9CD20 ...Repeated for module number 10CD30 ...Repeated for module number 11CD40 ...Repeated for module number 12CD50 ...Repeated for module number 13CD60 ...Repeated for module number 14CD70 ...Repeated for module number 15CD80 ...Repeated for module number 16CD90 ...Repeated for module number 17CDA0 ...Repeated for module number 18CDB0 ...Repeated for module number 19CDC0 ...Repeated for module number 20CDD0 ...Repeated for module number 21CDE0 ...Repeated for module number 22CDF0 ...Repeated for module number 23CE00 ...Repeated for module number 24CE10 ...Repeated for module number 25CE20 ...Repeated for module number 26CE30 ...Repeated for module number 27CE40 ...Repeated for module number 28CE50 ...Repeated for module number 29CE60 ...Repeated for module number 30CE70 ...Repeated for module number 31CE80 ...Repeated for module number 32CE90 ...Repeated for module number 33CEA0 ...Repeated for module number 34CEB0 ...Repeated for module number 35CEC0 ...Repeated for module number 36CED0 ...Repeated for module number 37CEE0 ...Repeated for module number 38CEF0 ...Repeated for module number 39CF00 ...Repeated for module number 40CF10 ...Repeated for module number 41CF20 ...Repeated for module number 42CF30 ...Repeated for module number 43CF40 ...Repeated for module number 44CF50 ...Repeated for module number 45CF60 ...Repeated for module number 46CF70 ...Repeated for module number 47CF80 ...Repeated for module number 48CF90 ...Repeated for module number 49CFA0 ...Repeated for module number 50CFB0 ...Repeated for module number 51CFC0 ...Repeated for module number 52CFD0 ...Repeated for module number 53CFE0 ...Repeated for module number 54CFF0 ...Repeated for module number 55D000 ...Repeated for module number 56D010 ...Repeated for module number 57







AD020 ...Repeated for module number 58D030 ...Repeated for module number 59D040 ...Repeated for module number 60D050 ...Repeated for module number 61D060 ...Repeated for module number 62D070 ...Repeated for module number 63D080 ...Repeated for module number 64

Contact Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)D290 Contact Output x Name --- --- --- F205 "Cont Op 1 "D29A Contact Output x Operation 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0D29B Contact Output x Sealin 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0D29C Contact Output x LED Control 0 to 2 --- 1 F110 0 (Trip)D29D Contact Output x Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Disabled)D29E Contact Output x Reserved (2 items) --- --- --- F001 0D2A0 ...Repeated for module number 2D2B0 ...Repeated for module number 3D2C0 ...Repeated for module number 4D2D0 ...Repeated for module number 5D2E0 ...Repeated for module number 6D2F0 ...Repeated for module number 7D300 ...Repeated for module number 8D310 ...Repeated for module number 9D320 ...Repeated for module number 10D330 ...Repeated for module number 11D340 ...Repeated for module number 12D350 ...Repeated for module number 13D360 ...Repeated for module number 14D370 ...Repeated for module number 15D380 ...Repeated for module number 16D390 ...Repeated for module number 17D3A0 ...Repeated for module number 18D3B0 ...Repeated for module number 19D3C0 ...Repeated for module number 20D3D0 ...Repeated for module number 21D3E0 ...Repeated for module number 22D3F0 ...Repeated for module number 23D400 ...Repeated for module number 24D410 ...Repeated for module number 25D420 ...Repeated for module number 26D430 ...Repeated for module number 27D440 ...Repeated for module number 28D450 ...Repeated for module number 29D460 ...Repeated for module number 30D470 ...Repeated for module number 31D480 ...Repeated for module number 32D490 ...Repeated for module number 33D4A0 ...Repeated for module number 34D4B0 ...Repeated for module number 35D4C0 ...Repeated for module number 36D4D0 ...Repeated for module number 37D4E0 ...Repeated for module number 38D4F0 ...Repeated for module number 39D500 ...Repeated for module number 40D510 ...Repeated for module number 41D520 ...Repeated for module number 42D530 ...Repeated for module number 43







AD540 ...Repeated for module number 44D550 ...Repeated for module number 45D560 ...Repeated for module number 46D570 ...Repeated for module number 47D580 ...Repeated for module number 48D590 ...Repeated for module number 49D5A0 ...Repeated for module number 50D5B0 ...Repeated for module number 51D5C0 ...Repeated for module number 52D5D0 ...Repeated for module number 53D5E0 ...Repeated for module number 54D5F0 ...Repeated for module number 55D600 ...Repeated for module number 56D610 ...Repeated for module number 57D620 ...Repeated for module number 58D630 ...Repeated for module number 59D640 ...Repeated for module number 60D650 ...Repeated for module number 61D660 ...Repeated for module number 62D670 ...Repeated for module number 63D680 ...Repeated for module number 64

Reset (Read/Write Setting)D800 FlexLogic operand which initiates a reset 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0

Force Contact Inputs (Read/Write Setting)D8B0 Force Contact Input x State (96 items) 0 to 2 --- 1 F144 0 (Disabled)

Force Contact Outputs (Read/Write Setting)D910 Force Contact Output x State (64 items) 0 to 3 --- 1 F131 0 (Disabled)

Remote Devices (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)E000 Remote Device x ID --- --- --- F202 "Remote Device 1 "E00A ...Repeated for module number 2E014 ...Repeated for module number 3E01E ...Repeated for module number 4E028 ...Repeated for module number 5E032 ...Repeated for module number 6E03C ...Repeated for module number 7E046 ...Repeated for module number 8E050 ...Repeated for module number 9E05A ...Repeated for module number 10E064 ...Repeated for module number 11E06E ...Repeated for module number 12E078 ...Repeated for module number 13E082 ...Repeated for module number 14E08C ...Repeated for module number 15E096 ...Repeated for module number 16

Remote Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)E100 Remote Input x Device 1 to 16 --- 1 F001 1E101 Remote Input x Bit Pair 0 to 64 --- 1 F156 0 (None)E102 Remote Input x Default State 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)E103 ...Repeated for module number 2E106 ...Repeated for module number 3E109 ...Repeated for module number 4E10C ...Repeated for module number 5E10F ...Repeated for module number 6E112 ...Repeated for module number 7E115 ...Repeated for module number 8E118 ...Repeated for module number 9







AE11B ...Repeated for module number 10E11E ...Repeated for module number 11E121 ...Repeated for module number 12E124 ...Repeated for module number 13E127 ...Repeated for module number 14E12A ...Repeated for module number 15E12D ...Repeated for module number 16E130 ...Repeated for module number 17E133 ...Repeated for module number 18E136 ...Repeated for module number 19E139 ...Repeated for module number 20E13C ...Repeated for module number 21E13F ...Repeated for module number 22E142 ...Repeated for module number 23E145 ...Repeated for module number 24E148 ...Repeated for module number 25E14B ...Repeated for module number 26E14E ...Repeated for module number 27E151 ...Repeated for module number 28E154 ...Repeated for module number 29E157 ...Repeated for module number 30E15A ...Repeated for module number 31E15D ...Repeated for module number 32

Remote Output DNA Pairs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)E600 Remote Output DNA x Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0E601 ...Repeated for module number 2E602 ...Repeated for module number 3E603 ...Repeated for module number 4E604 ...Repeated for module number 5E605 ...Repeated for module number 6E606 ...Repeated for module number 7E607 ...Repeated for module number 8E608 ...Repeated for module number 9E609 ...Repeated for module number 10E60A ...Repeated for module number 11E60B ...Repeated for module number 12E60C ...Repeated for module number 13E60D ...Repeated for module number 14E60E ...Repeated for module number 15E60F ...Repeated for module number 16E610 ...Repeated for module number 17E611 ...Repeated for module number 18E612 ...Repeated for module number 19E613 ...Repeated for module number 20E614 ...Repeated for module number 21E615 ...Repeated for module number 22E616 ...Repeated for module number 23E617 ...Repeated for module number 24E618 ...Repeated for module number 25E619 ...Repeated for module number 26E61A ...Repeated for module number 27E61B ...Repeated for module number 28E61C ...Repeated for module number 29E61D ...Repeated for module number 30E61E ...Repeated for module number 31E61F ...Repeated for module number 32







ARemote Output UserSt Pairs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)

E620 Remote Output UserSt x Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0E621 ...Repeated for module number 2E622 ...Repeated for module number 3E623 ...Repeated for module number 4E624 ...Repeated for module number 5E625 ...Repeated for module number 6E626 ...Repeated for module number 7E627 ...Repeated for module number 8E628 ...Repeated for module number 9E629 ...Repeated for module number 10E62A ...Repeated for module number 11E62B ...Repeated for module number 12E62C ...Repeated for module number 13E62D ...Repeated for module number 14E62E ...Repeated for module number 15E62F ...Repeated for module number 16E630 ...Repeated for module number 17E631 ...Repeated for module number 18E632 ...Repeated for module number 19E633 ...Repeated for module number 20E634 ...Repeated for module number 21E635 ...Repeated for module number 22E636 ...Repeated for module number 23E637 ...Repeated for module number 24E638 ...Repeated for module number 25E639 ...Repeated for module number 26E63A ...Repeated for module number 27E63B ...Repeated for module number 28E63C ...Repeated for module number 29E63D ...Repeated for module number 30E63E ...Repeated for module number 31E63F ...Repeated for module number 32





GE Power Management F60 Feeder Management Relay B- 1

APPENDIX B B.1 UCA/MMS OVERVIEW

B

APPENDIX B UCA/MMSB.1 UCA/MMS OVERVIEW B.1.1 UCA

OVERVIEW:

The Utility Communications Architecture (UCA) version 2 represents an attempt by utilities and vendors ofelectronic equipment to produce standardized communications systems. There is a set of reference docu-ments available from the Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) and vendors of UCA/MMS software librariesthat describe the complete capabilities of the UCA. This appendix provides a description of the subset of UCA/MMS features that are supported by the UR relay. The reference document set includes:

• Introduction to UCA version 2

• Generic Object Models for Substation & Feeder Equipment (GOMSFE)

• Common Application Service Models (CASM) and Mapping to MMS

• UCA Version 2 Profiles

These documents can be obtained from ftp://www.sisconet.com/epri/subdemo/uca2.0.

It is strongly recommended that all those involved with any UCA implementation obtain this document set.

COMMUNICATION PROFILES:

The UCA specifies a number of possibilities for communicating with electronic devices based on the OSI Ref-erence Model. The UR relay uses the seven layer OSI stack (TP4/CLNP and TCP/IP profiles). Refer to the"UCA Version 2 Profiles" reference document for details. The TP4/CLNP profile requires the UR relay to havea network address or Network Service Access Point (NSAP) in order to establish a communication link. TheTCP/IP profile requires the UR relay to have an IP address in order to establish a communication link. Theseaddresses can be set from the COMMUNICATIONS menu in the SETTINGS \ PRODUCT SETUP menu. Notethat the UR relay supports UCA operation over either of the TP4/CLNP and TCP/IP stacks and also supportsoperation over both stacks simultaneously. It is possible to have up to four simultaneous connections. This isin addition to Modbus/TCP (non-UCA) connections.

B.1.2 MMS

The UCA specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) at the upper (Application) layerfor transfer of real-time data. This protocol has been in existence for a number of years and provides a set ofservices suitable for the transfer of data within a substation LAN environment. Data can be grouped to formobjects and be mapped to MMS services. Refer to the “GOMSFE” and “CASM” reference documents fordetails.

SUPPORTED OBJECTS:

The "GOMSFE" document describes a number of communication objects. Within these objects are items,some of which are mandatory and some of which are optional, depending on the implementation. The UR relaysupports the following GOMSFE objects:

• IOC (used for UR relay IOC protection elements)

• TOC (used for UR relay TOC protection elements)

• UVR (used for UR relay Undervoltage protection elements)

• PDIF (used for UR relay 87L differential element)

• MU (used for UR relay metering quantities)

• UCA data can be accessed through the "UCA Device" MMS domain.



B-2 F60 Feeder Management Relay GE Power Management

B.1 UCA/MMS OVERVIEW APPENDIX B

B

PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATION:

Peer-to-peer communication of digital state information using the UCA GOOSE data object, is supported viathe use of the UR relay's Remote Inputs/Outputs feature. This feature allows digital points to be transferredbetween any UCA conformant devices.

FILE SERVICES:

MMS file services are supported to allow the transfer of Oscillography and Event Record files from a UR relay.

COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE UTILITIES:

The exact structure and values of the objects implemented in the UR relay can be seen by connecting to a URrelay with an MMS browser such as the MMS Object Explorer and AXS4-MMS DDE/OPC server from SiscoInc.

NON-UCA DATA:

The UR relay makes available a number of non-UCA data items. These data items can be accessed throughthe "UR" MMS domain. UCA data can be accessed through the "UCA Device" MMS domain.





B

a) PROTOCOL IMPLEMENT AND CONFORM STATEMENT (PICS)

Note : The UR relay functions as a server only; a UR relay cannot be configured as a client. Thus, the follow-ing list of supported services is for server operation only:

Figure B–1: MMS SUPPORTED SERVICES

Connection Management Services

Initiate, Conclude, Cancel, Abort, Reject

VMD Support Services

Status, GetNameList, Identify

Variable Access Services

Read, Write, InformatiionReport, GetVariableAccessAttributes,GetNamedVariableListAttributes

Operator Communication Services

None

Semaphore Management Services

None

Domain Management Services

GetDomainAttributes

Program Invocation Management Services

None

Event Management Services

None

Journal Management Services

None

File Management Services

ObtainFile, FileOpen, FileRead, FileClose, FileDirectory





B

Figure B–2: MMS SUPPORTED PARAMETERS

STR1 (Arrays)

STR2 (Structures)

NEST (Nesting Levels of STR1 & 2) - 1

VNAM (Named Variables)

VADR (Unnamed Variables)

VALT (Alternate Access Variables)

VLIS (Named Variable Lists)

REAL (ASN.1 REAL Type)





B

b) MODEL IMPLEMENTATION CONFORMANCE (MIC)

This section describes the details of the UCA object models supported by the UR relay. Note that not all of theprotective device functions are applicable to all UR relays.

Figure B–3: PIOC - INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE

Note: Actual instantiation of PIOC objects is as follows:

• PIOC1 = Phase IOC1

• PIOC2 = Phase IOC2

• PIOC3 = Neutral IOC1

• PIOC4 = Neutral IOC2

• PIOC5 = Ground IOC1

• PIOC6 = Ground IOC2

FC Object Name Class rwec DescriptionST Operation

Out BOOL r 1 = Element operated, 0 = Element not operatedPuGrp INT8U r Settings Group selected for use

SG Relay SettingsPu PUG rw Pickup level – per unitPuDelTim INT32U rw Pickup Time DelayDODelTim INT32U rw Reset Time Delay

CO EnaDisFct DCO w 1 = Element function enabled, 0 = disabledRsTar BO w Reset ALL Elements/TargetsRsLat BO w Reset ALL Elements/Targets

CF Pu ACF rw Configuration for PuPuDelTim ACF rw Configuration for PuDelTimDODelTim ACF rw Configuration for DODelTim

DC Target d rw Display string for enumerated values





B

Figure B–4: PTOC - TIME OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE

Note: Actual instantiation of PTOC objects is as follows:

• PTOC1 = Phase TOC1

• PTOC2 = Phase TOC2

• PTOC3 = Neutral TOC1

• PTOC4 = Ground TOC1



SG Relay SettingsPu PUG rw Pickup level – per unitCrvMult PUG Time Dial MultiplierCrvTyp TimCrv Curve type enumeration (F103)RsChar ENUM8 Reset Type enumeration (F104)


CF Pu ACF rw Configuration for PuCrvMult ACF rw Configuration for CrvMult

DC CrvTyp d rw Display string for enumerated valuesRsChar d rw Display string for enumerated valuesTarget d rw Display string for enumerated values





B

Figure B–5: PUVR - UNDERVOLTAGE RELAY PROTECTION DEVICE

Note: Actual instantiation of PUVR objects is as follows:

• PUVR1 = Phase UV1

• PUVR2 = Phase UV2



SG Relay SettingsPu PUG rw Pickup level – per unitCrvTyp TimCrv rw Curve type enumeration (F103)PuDelTim INT32U rw Pickup Time DelayMinV INT16U rw Minimum voltage (per unit) required for operation


CF Pu ACF rw Configuration for PuCrvMult ACF rw Configuration for CrvMult

DC CrvTyp d rw Display string for enumerated valuesRsChar d rw Display string for enumerated valuesTarget d rw Display string for enumerated values





B

Figure B–6: PDIF - DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTIVE DEVICE

Note: Actual instantiation of PDIF objects is as follows:

• PDIF1 = 87L element in UR L90 relay


Out BOOL r 1 = Element operated, 0 = Element not operatedSG Relay Settings

TapSet AO rw 87L Tap SettingPu PUG rw 87L Minimum Phase and Ground Current SensitivityPhsSlp1 AO rw 87L Phase Percent Restraint 1PhsSlp2 AO rw 87L Phase Percent Restraint 2PhsBrkPnt AO rw 87L Phase Dual Slope BreakpointGndSlp1 AO rw 87L Ground Percent Restraint 1GndSlp2 AO rw 87L Ground Percent Restraint 2GndBrkPnt AO rw 87L Ground Dual Slope BreakpointDTT BO rw 87L Key Direct Transfer TripTarget ENUM16 rw 87L Target Configuration (F109)Events BO rw 87L Input to Event Recorder (1 = enabled, 0 = disabled)


CF TapSet AO rw Configuration for TapSetPu PUG rw Configuration for PuPhsSlp1 AO rw Configuration for PhsSlp1PhsSlp2 AO rw Configuration for PhsSlp2PhsBrkPnt AO rw Configuration for PhsBrkPntGndSlp1 AO rw Configuration for GndSlp1GndSlp2 AO rw Configuration for GndSlp2GndBrkPnt AO rw Configuration for GndBrkPnt

DC Target d rw Display string for enumerated values





B

Figure B–7: MU - MEASUREMENT UNIT

Note: The Measurement Unit object is described in GOMSFE version 0.7.

FC Object Name Class rwec DescriptionMX A WYE rw RMS Phase/Neutral Currents, fundamental

Phase/Neutral Current Magnitudes and AnglesV WYE rw RMS Phase Voltages, fundamental Phase VoltagesPhsPhsV DELTA rw RMS Line Voltages, fundamental Line VoltagesW WYE rw Watts per phaseTotW AI rw Total Watts in all 3 phases.Var WYE rw VAr per phaseTotVAr AI rw Total VArs in all 3 phases.VA WYE rw VA per phaseTotVA AI rw Total VA in all 3 phases.PF WYE rw Power Factor for each phaseTotPF AI rw Total Power Factor of all 3 phases.Hz AI rw Frequency

CF A ACF rw Configuration for AV ACF rw Configuration for VPhsPhsV ACF rw Configuration for PhsPhsVW ACF rw Configuration for WTotW ACF rw Configuration for TotWVar ACF rw Configuration for VarTotVAr ACF rw Configuration for TotVArVA ACF rw Configuration for VATotVA ACF rw Configuration for TotVAPF ACF rw Configuration for PFTotPF ACF rw Configuration for TotPClockTOD BTIME6 rw Date and Time

DC EqRtg EqRtg rw Equipment ratingConCkt ConCkt rw Connected CircuitA d rw Description of AV d rw Description of VPhsPhsV d rw Description of PhsPhsVW d rw Description of WTotW d Rw Description of TotWVar d Rw Description of VarTotVAr D rw Description of TotVArVA d rw Description of VATotVA d rw Description of TotVAPF d rw Description of PFTotPF d rw Description of TotPF





BFigure B–8: GCTL - GENERIC CONTROL

Note: Actual instantiation of GCTL objects is as follows:

• GCTL1 = Virtual Inputs (32 total points - SI1-SI32)

Figure B–9: GIND - GENERIC INDICATOR

Note: Actual instantiation of GIND objects is as follows:

• GIND1 = Contact Inputs (96 total points - SIG1-SIG6)

• GIND2 = Contact Outputs (64 total points - SIG1-SIG4)

• GIND3 = Virtual Inputs (32 total points - SIG1-SIG2)

• GIND4 = Virtual Outputs (64 total points - SIG1-SIG4)

• GIND5 = Remote Inputs (32 total points - SIG1-SIG2)

Figure B–10: GLOBE - GLOBAL DATA

FC Name Class rwecs DescriptionST BO<n> SI rw Generic Single Point Indication

FC Name Class rwec DescriptionST SIG<n> SIG r Generic Indication (block of 16)


ModeDS SIT r Device is: in test, off-line, available, or unhealthyLocRemDS SIT r The mode of control, local or remote (DevST)ActSG INT8U r Active Settings GroupEditSG INT8U r Settings Group selected for read / write operations

CO CopySG INT8U w Selects Settings Group for read / write operationsIndRs BOOL w Resets ALL Targets

CF ClockTOD BTIME rw Date and TimeCTRat RATIO rw Phase CT Ratio (for Source SrcIndex)GndCTRat RATIO rw Ground CT Ratio (for Source SrcIndex)VTRat RATIO rw VT Ratio (for Source SrcIndex)VTConn ENUM8 rw VT Connection (for Source SrcIndex) (F100)NomHz INT16U rw Nominal FrequencyPhsRotat ENUM8 rw Phase Rotation (F106)SrcIndex INT16U rw Source Index for read / write operations



GE Power Management F60 Feeder Management Relay C- 1

APPENDIX C C.1 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS

C

APPENDIX C ABBREVIATIONSC.1 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONSTable C–1: UR PRODUCT STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS (Sheet 1 of 6)

ABBREVIATION MEANING

A ampere

AC alternating current

A/D analog to digital

AE accidental energization

AE application entity

AMP ampere

ANSI american national standards institute

AR automatic reclosure

AUTO automatic

AUX auxiliary

AVG average

BER bit error rate

BF breaker fail

BFI breaker failure initiate

BKR breaker

BLK block

BLKG blocking

CAP capacitor

CC coupling capacitor

CCVT coupling capacitor voltage transformer

CFG configure / configurable

.CFG file name extension for oscillography files

CHK check

CHNL channel

CLS close

CLSD closed

CMND command

CMPRSN comparison

CO contact output

COM communication

COMM communications

COMP compensated

CONN connection

CO-ORD coordination

CPU central processing unit

CT current transformer

CVT capacitive voltage transformer

D/A digital to analog

DC(dc) direct current

DD disturbance detector

DFLT default

DGNST diagnostics

DI digital input

DIFF differential



C-2 F60 Feeder Management Relay GE Power Management

C.1 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS APPENDIX C

C

DIR directional

DISCREP discrepancy

DIST distance

DMD demand

DPO dropout

DSP digital signal processor

DTT direct transfer trip

DUTT direct under-reaching transfer trip

EPRI Electric Power Research Institute

.EVT file name extension for event recorder files

EXT extension

F field

FAIL failure

FD fault detector

FDH fault detector high-set

FDL fault detector low-set

FLA full load current

FO fiber optic

FREQ frequency

FSK frequency-shift keying

FWD forward

G generator

GE General Electric

GND ground

GNTR generator

GOOSE general object oriented substation event

HARM harmonic / harmonics

HGF high-impedance ground fault (CT)

HIZ high-impedance & arcing ground

HMI human-machine interface

HYB hybrid

I instantaneous

I_0 zero sequence current

I_1 positive sequence current

I_2 negative sequence current

IA phase A current

IAB phase A minus B current

IB phase B current

IBC phase B minus C current

IC phase C current

ICA phase C minus A current

ID identification

IEEE Institute of Electrical & Electronic Engineers

IG ground (not residual) current

Table C–1: UR PRODUCT STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS (Sheet 2 of 6)






C

IN CT residual current (3Io) or input

INC SEQ incomplete sequence

INIT initiate

INST instantaneous

INV inverse

I/O input/output

IOC instantaneous overcurrent

IOV instantaneous overvoltage

IRIG inter-range instrumentation group

IUV instantaneous undervoltage

K0 zero sequence current compensation

kA kiloAmpere

kV kiloVolt

LED light emitting diode

LEO line end open

LOOP loopback

LPU line pickup

LRA locked-rotor current

LTC load tap-changer

M machine

mA milliAmpere

MAN manual / manually

MMI man machine interface

MMS Manufacturing Message Specification

MSG message

MTA maximum torque angle

MTR motor

MVA MegaVolt-Ampere (total 3-phase)

MVA_A MegaVolt-Ampere (phase A)

MVA_B MegaVolt-Ampere (phase B)

MVA_C MegaVolt-Ampere (phase C)

MVAR MegaVar (total 3-phase)

MVAR_A MegaVar (phase A)

MVAR_B MegaVar (phase B)

MVAR_C MegaVar (phase C)

MVARH MegaVar-Hour

MW MegaWatt (total 3-phase)

MW_A MegaWatt (phase A)

MW_B MegaWatt (phase B)

MW_C MegaWatt (phase C)

MWH MegaWatt-Hour

N neutral

NEG negative

NMPLT nameplate

NOM nominal







C

NTR neutral

O over

OC, O/C overcurrent

O/P, Op output

OP operate

OPER operate

OPERATG operating

O/S operating system

OSB out-of-step blocking

OUT output

OV overvoltage

OVERFREQ overfrequency

OVLD overload

P phase

PC phase comparison, personal computer

PCNT percent

PF power factor (total 3-phase)

PF_A power factor (phase A)

PF_B power factor (phase B)

PF_C power factor (phase C)

PHS phase

PKP pickup

PLC power line carrier

POS positive

POTT permissive over-reaching transfer trip

PRESS pressure

PROT protection

PSEL presentation selector

PU per unit

PUIB pickup current block

PUIT pickup current trip

PUTT permissive under-reaching transfer trip

PWM pulse width modulated

PWR power

R rate, reverse

REM remote

REV reverse

RI reclose initiate

RIP reclose in progress

ROD remote open detector

RST reset

RSTR restrained

RTD resistance temperature detector

RTU remote terminal unit

RX (Rx) receiver







C

s second

S sensitive

SBO select before operate

SEL select / selector / selection

SENS sensitive

SEQ sequence

SRC source

SSB single side band

SSEL session selector

STATS statistics

SUPN supervision

SUPV supervise / supervision

SV supervision

SYNCHCHK synchrocheck

T time, transformer

TC thermal capacity

TD MULT time dial multiplier

TEMP temperature

THD total harmonic distortion

TOC time overcurrent

TOV time overvoltage

TRANSF transfer

TSEL transport selector

TUC time undercurrent

TUV time undervoltage

TX (Tx) transmitter

U under

UC undercurrent

UCA Utility Communications Architecture

UNBAL unbalance

UR universal relay

.URS file name extension for settings files

UV undervoltage

V_0 zero sequence voltage

V_1 positive sequence voltage

V_2 negative sequence voltage

VA phase A voltage

VAB phase A to B voltage

VAG phase A to ground voltage

VARH var-hour voltage

VB phase B voltage

VBA phase B to A voltage

VBG phase B to ground voltage

VC phase C voltage

VCA phase C to A voltage

VCG phase C to ground voltage







C

VF variable frequency

VIBR vibration

VT voltage transformer

VTFF voltage transformer fuse failure

VTLOS voltage transformer loss of signal

WDG winding

WH Watt-hour

WRT with respect to

X reactance

XDUCER transducer

XFMR transformer

Z impedance





GE Power Management F60 Feeder Management Relay D- 1

APPENDIX D D.1 CHANGE NOTES

D

APPENDIX D REVISIONSD.1 CHANGE NOTES D.1.1 REVISION HISTORY

D.1.2 CHANGES TO F60 MANUAL

Table D–1: REVISION HISTORY

MANUAL P/N F60 REVISION RELEASE DATE ECO

1601-0093-A1 1.5X 23 March 1999

1601-0093-A2 1.6X 10 August 1999 URF-012

1601-0093-A3 1.8X 29 October 1999 URF-014

1601-0093-A4 1.8X 15 October 1999 URF-015

Table D–2: MAJOR UPDATES FOR F60 MANUAL-A4

Page(F60-A3)

Change FromTo

(page of F60-A4)

Title Updated P/N …A3 P/N …A4

Addendum Updated

2-5 Updated Technical Specifications(Protection Elements)

Added Factory preset LED Panel 2 settings(page 5-16)

5-30 Updated FlexLogic Operands (page 5-30)

Table D–3: MAJOR UPDATES FOR F60 MANUAL-A3 (Sheet 1 of 2)

Page(F60-A2)

Change FromTo

(page of F60-A3)

Title Updated F60 Revision: 1.6X F60 Revision: 1.8X

Title Updated P/N …A2 P/N …A3

Addendum Updated

2-3 Added Low Voltage (48 V) power supply to OrderCodes

2-5 Updated Technical Specifications

3-8 Deleted Section 3.2.4:AC Voltage Transformer Inputs



D-2 F60 Feeder Management Relay GE Power Management

D.1 CHANGE NOTES APPENDIX D

D

4-16 Updated LED Panel 2 (page 4-16)

Added LED Panel 3 (page 4-16)

Added Custom Labeling of LEDs (page 4-17)

5-1 Updated Settings Main Menu

5-13 Updated Oscillography (page 5-14)

Added User-programmable LEDs (page 5-16)

5-26 Updated FlexLogic Operand Types (page 5-28)

5-27 Updated FlexLogic Operands (page 5-30)

Added Figure 5-26:Breaker Failure Main Path Sequence(page 5-79)

Added Underfrequency (page 5-92)

Added Synchrocheck (page 5-95)

Added Autoreclose (page 5-99)

5-101 Updated Virtual Inputs (page 5-120)

Added SBO Timer (page 5-121)

6-1 Updated Actual Values Main Menu

Added Autoreclose (page 6-5)

Added Synchrocheck (page 6-12)

7-1 Updated Commands Menu

Added Relay Maintenance (page 7-2)

9-1 Updated Commissioning settings templates

A-12 Updated Memory Mapping

Table D–3: MAJOR UPDATES FOR F60 MANUAL-A3 (Sheet 2 of 2)

Page(F60-A2)

Change FromTo

(page of F60-A3)



GE Power Management F60 Feeder Management Relay E- 1

APPENDIX E E.1 FIGURES AND TABLES

E

APPENDIX E LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLESE.1 FIGURES AND TABLES E.1.1 LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 1–1: REAR NAME-PLATE ....................................................................................................................................................... 1-1Figure 1–2: RELAY COMMUNICATIONS OPTIONS ......................................................................................................................... 1-5Figure 1–3: DISPLAY.......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-6Figure 1–4: KEYPAD .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-6Figure 2–1: SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM ................................................................................................................................................. 2-2Figure 3–1: UR RELAY MOUNTING AND DIMENSIONS DRAWING................................................................................................ 3-1Figure 3–2: UR MODULE WITHDRAWAL/INSERTION ..................................................................................................................... 3-2Figure 3–3: REAR TERMINAL VIEW.................................................................................................................................................. 3-3Figure 3–4: EXAMPLE OF DSP & DIGITAL I/O MODULES IN F & H SLOTS .................................................................................. 3-4Figure 3–5: TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM.......................................................................................................................................... 3-5Figure 3–6: CONTROL POWER CONNECTION................................................................................................................................ 3-6Figure 3–7: ZERO SEQUENCE CORE BALANCE CT INSTALLATION ............................................................................................ 3-7Figure 3–8: CT/VT MODULE WIRING................................................................................................................................................ 3-8Figure 3–9: DIGITAL I/O MODULE WIRING (Sheet 1 of 2).............................................................................................................. 3-11Figure 3–10: DIGITAL I/O MODULE WIRING (Sheet 2 of 2)............................................................................................................ 3-12Figure 3–11: DRY AND WET CONTACT INPUT CONNECTIONS .................................................................................................. 3-13Figure 3–12: TRANSDUCER I/O MODULE WIRING ....................................................................................................................... 3-14Figure 3–13: RS232 FACEPLATE PORT CONNECTION................................................................................................................ 3-15Figure 3–14: CPU MODULE COMMUNICATIONS WIRING............................................................................................................ 3-16Figure 3–15: RS485 SERIAL CONNECTION................................................................................................................................... 3-17Figure 3–16: IRIG-B CONNECTION................................................................................................................................................. 3-18Figure 4–1: EXAMPLE URPC® SOFTWARE SCREEN ..................................................................................................................... 4-1Figure 4–2: URPC® SOFTWARE MAIN WINDOW ............................................................................................................................ 4-4Figure 4–3: MAIN WINDOW MENU BAR ........................................................................................................................................... 4-5Figure 4–4: FILE MENU...................................................................................................................................................................... 4-5Figure 4–5: EDIT MENU ..................................................................................................................................................................... 4-6Figure 4–6: SITE LIST MENU............................................................................................................................................................. 4-6Figure 4–7: SETTINGS LIST MENU................................................................................................................................................... 4-7Figure 4–8: VIEW MENU .................................................................................................................................................................... 4-8Figure 4–9: ACTION MENU................................................................................................................................................................ 4-9Figure 4–10: WINDOW MENU.......................................................................................................................................................... 4-10Figure 4–11: HELP MENU................................................................................................................................................................ 4-10Figure 4–12: SITE LIST POP-UP MENU .......................................................................................................................................... 4-11Figure 4–13: SETTINGS LIST POP-UP MENU ................................................................................................................................ 4-11Figure 4–14: MAIN WINDOW TOOL BAR ........................................................................................................................................ 4-12Figure 4–15: DATA VIEW TOOL BAR .............................................................................................................................................. 4-12Figure 4–16: UR FACEPLATE ARRANGEMENT............................................................................................................................. 4-14Figure 4–17: LED PANEL 1 .............................................................................................................................................................. 4-14Figure 4–18: LED PANEL 2 (TEMPLATE)........................................................................................................................................ 4-16Figure 4–19: LED PANEL 3 (TEMPLATE)........................................................................................................................................ 4-16Figure 4–20: CUSTOMIZED LED PANEL INSTALLATION.............................................................................................................. 4-17Figure 4–21: LED PANEL CUSTOMIZATION TEMPLATES............................................................................................................ 4-18Figure 4–22: LED PANEL CUSTOMIZATION DETAILED INSTRUCTIONS.................................................................................... 4-19Figure 4–23: DISPLAY...................................................................................................................................................................... 4-20Figure 4–24: KEYPAD ...................................................................................................................................................................... 4-20Figure 5–1: BREAKER-AND-A-HALF SCHEME................................................................................................................................. 5-7Figure 5–2: EXAMPLE USE OF SOURCES..................................................................................................................................... 5-23Figure 5–3: DUAL BREAKER CONTROL SCHEME LOGIC ............................................................................................................ 5-26Figure 5–4: UR ARCHITECTURE OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................................ 5-28Figure 5–5: EXAMPLE LOGIC SCHEME ......................................................................................................................................... 5-38Figure 5–6: LOGIC EXAMPLE WITH VIRTUAL OUTPUTS ............................................................................................................. 5-39Figure 5–7: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3 ................................................................................................................................ 5-39Figure 5–8: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4 ................................................................................................................................ 5-40Figure 5–9: FLEXLOGIC™ WORKSHEET ....................................................................................................................................... 5-40Figure 5–10: FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION & LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3 .............................................................................. 5-41Figure 5–11: FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION & LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4 .............................................................................. 5-43Figure 5–12: VOLTAGE RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTIC FOR PHASE TOC................................................................................ 5-58Figure 5–13: PHASE TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC.................................................................................................................................. 5-58Figure 5–14: PHASE IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC................................................................................................................................... 5-59Figure 5–15: PHASE-A DIRECTIONAL POLARIZATION................................................................................................................. 5-61Figure 5–16: PHASE DIRECTIONAL SCHEME LOGIC ................................................................................................................... 5-63Figure 5–17: NEUTRAL TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC ............................................................................................................................ 5-64



E-2 F60 Feeder Management Relay GE Power Management

E.1 FIGURES AND TABLES APPENDIX E

E

Figure 5–18: NEUTRAL IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC .............................................................................................................................. 5-65Figure 5–19: NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL VOLTAGE POLARIZATION.............................................................................................. 5-67Figure 5–20: NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL SCHEME LOGIC .............................................................................................................. 5-69Figure 5–21: GROUND TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC.............................................................................................................................. 5-70Figure 5–22: GROUND IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC ............................................................................................................................... 5-71Figure 5–23: NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC ...................................................................................................... 5-72Figure 5–24: NEGATIVE SEQUENCE IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC........................................................................................................ 5-73Figure 5–25: BREAKER FAILURE MAIN PATH SEQUENCE.......................................................................................................... 5-78Figure 5–26: BREAKER FAILURE 1-POLE (INITIATE) [Sheet 1 of 2] ............................................................................................. 5-82Figure 5–27: BREAKER FAILURE 1-POLE (TIMERS) [Sheet 2 of 2] .............................................................................................. 5-83Figure 5–28: BREAKER FAILURE 3-POLE (INITIATE) [Sheet 1 of 2] ............................................................................................. 5-84Figure 5–29: BREAKER FAILURE 3-POLE (TIMERS) [Sheet 2 of 2] .............................................................................................. 5-85Figure 5–30: INVERSE TIME UNDERVOLTAGE CURVES............................................................................................................. 5-87Figure 5–31: PHASE UV1 SCHEME LOGIC .................................................................................................................................... 5-89Figure 5–32: PHASE OV1 SCHEME LOGIC .................................................................................................................................... 5-90Figure 5–33: EXAMPLE FLEXLOGIC™ CONTROL OF A SETTINGS GROUP .............................................................................. 5-92Figure 5–34: UNDERFREQUENCY SCHEME LOGIC ..................................................................................................................... 5-95Figure 5–35: SYNCHROCHECK SCHEME LOGIC.......................................................................................................................... 5-99Figure 5–36: AUTORECLOSURE SCHEME LOGIC (Sheet 1 of 2) ............................................................................................... 5-104Figure 5–37: AUTORECLOSURE SCHEME LOGIC (Sheet 2 of 2) ............................................................................................... 5-105Figure 5–38: SINGLE SHOT AUTORECLOSING SEQUENCE - PERMANENT FAULT ............................................................... 5-106Figure 5–39: DIGITAL ELEMENT SCHEME LOGIC ...................................................................................................................... 5-108Figure 5–40: TRIP CIRCUIT - EXAMPLE 1 .................................................................................................................................... 5-109Figure 5–41: TRIP CIRCUIT - EXAMPLE 2 .................................................................................................................................... 5-110Figure 5–42: DIGITAL COUNTER SCHEME LOGIC...................................................................................................................... 5-114Figure 5–43: ARCING CURRENT MEASUREMENT ..................................................................................................................... 5-116Figure 5–44: BREAKER ARCING CURRENT SCHEME LOGIC.................................................................................................... 5-116Figure 5–45: TYPICAL COLD LOAD PICKUP CHARACTERISTIC ............................................................................................... 5-117Figure 5–46: COLD LOAD PICKUP SCHEME LOGIC ................................................................................................................... 5-118Figure 5–47: VIRTUAL INPUTS SCHEME LOGIC ......................................................................................................................... 5-122Figure 6–1: FLOW DIRECTION OF SIGNED VALUES FOR WATTS AND VARS ............................................................................ 6-8Figure B–1: MMS SUPPORTED SERVICES......................................................................................................................................B-3Figure B–2: MMS SUPPORTED PARAMETERS ...............................................................................................................................B-4Figure B–3: PIOC - INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE...........................................................................B-5Figure B–4: PTOC - TIME OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE................................................................................................B-6Figure B–5: PUVR - UNDERVOLTAGE RELAY PROTECTION DEVICE..........................................................................................B-7Figure B–6: PDIF - DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTIVE DEVICE .............................................................................................................B-8Figure B–7: MU - MEASUREMENT UNIT ..........................................................................................................................................B-9Figure B–8: GCTL - GENERIC CONTROL.......................................................................................................................................B-10Figure B–9: GIND - GENERIC INDICATOR .....................................................................................................................................B-10Figure B–10: GLOBE - GLOBAL DATA ............................................................................................................................................B-10



GE Power Management F60 Feeder Management Relay E- 3

APPENDIX E E.1 FIGURES AND TABLES

E

E.1.2 LIST OF TABLES

Table: 2–1 DEVICE NUMBERS AND FUNCTIONS ........................................................................................................................... 2-2Table: 2–2 ORDER CODES .............................................................................................................................................................. 2-3Table: 2–3 ORDER CODES FOR ORDERING REPLACEMENT MODULES.................................................................................... 2-4Table: 3–1 CONTROL POWER VOLTAGE RANGE .......................................................................................................................... 3-6Table: 3–2 DIGITAL I/O MODULE ASSIGNMENTS.......................................................................................................................... 3-9Table: 3–3 CPU COMMUNICATION PORT OPTIONS .................................................................................................................... 3-16Table: 5–1 OSCILLOGRAPHY CAPACITIES................................................................................................................................... 5-15Table: 5–2 FLEXCURVE™ TABLE.................................................................................................................................................. 5-27Table: 5–3 FLEXLOGIC™ OPERAND TYPES................................................................................................................................. 5-29Table: 5–4 FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS ........................................................................................................................................... 5-31Table: 5–5 FLEXLOGIC™ GATE CHARACTERISTICS................................................................................................................... 5-36Table: 5–6 FLEXLOGIC™ OPERATORS......................................................................................................................................... 5-36Table: 5–7 OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES .................................................................................................................................. 5-48Table: 5–8 IEEE INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS................................................................................................................. 5-49Table: 5–9 IEEE CURVE OPERATE TIMES (in seconds)................................................................................................................ 5-50Table: 5–10 IEC (BS) INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS......................................................................................................... 5-51Table: 5–11 IEC CURVE TRIP TIMES (in seconds)......................................................................................................................... 5-52Table: 5–12 GE TYPE IAC INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS ................................................................................................ 5-53Table: 5–13 IAC CURVE TRIP TIMES ............................................................................................................................................. 5-54Table: 5–14 I²t CURVE TRIP TIMES ................................................................................................................................................ 5-55Table: 5–15 VALUES OF RESISTOR ‘R’ ....................................................................................................................................... 5-111Table: 5–16 UCA2 DNA ASSIGNMENTS....................................................................................................................................... 5-128Table: 7–1 TARGET MESSAGE PRIORITY STATUS........................................................................................................................ 7-3Table: 7–2 SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES.................................................................................................................................... 7-4Table: 9–1 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS........................................................................................................................................... 9-4Table: 9–2 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS (Continued) ....................................................................................................................... 9-5Table: 9–3 FLEXCURVE A ............................................................................................................................................................... 9-10Table: 9–4 FLEXCURVE B ............................................................................................................................................................... 9-11Table: 9–5 CONTACT INPUT CONFIGURATION............................................................................................................................ 9-35Table: 9–6 CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLDS ................................................................................................................................. 9-36Table: 9–7 REMOTE DEVICES........................................................................................................................................................ 9-40Table: 9–8 REMOTE INPUTS........................................................................................................................................................... 9-41Table: 9–9 CONTACT OUTPUT CONFIGURATION........................................................................................................................ 9-42Table: 9–10 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS..................................................................................................................................................... 9-43Table: 9–11 REMOTE OUTPUTS - DNA.......................................................................................................................................... 9-45Table: 9–12 REMOTE OUTPUTS - UserSt ...................................................................................................................................... 9-46Table: 9–13 RESETTING.................................................................................................................................................................. 9-46Table: 9–14 DCMA INPUTS ............................................................................................................................................................. 9-47Table: 9–15 RTD INPUTS................................................................................................................................................................. 9-48Table: 9–16 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS ......................................................................................................................................... 9-49Table: 9–17 FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS ..................................................................................................................................... 9-49Table: A–1 MODBUS® PACKET FORMAT ........................................................................................................................................A-1Table: A–2 CRC-16 ALGORITHM ......................................................................................................................................................A-3Table: A–3 MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE .........................................................................A-4Table: A–4 MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE .........................................................................A-5Table: A–5 SUMMARY OF OPERATION CODES (for Function Code 05h) ......................................................................................A-5Table: A–6 MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE .........................................................................A-6Table: A–7 MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE .........................................................................A-6Table: A–8 MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE .........................................................................A-7Table: A–9 MODBUS® MEMORY MAP SUMMARY ........................................................................................................................A-12Table: A–10 MODBUS® MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS.............................................................................................................A-14Table: A–11 MODBUS® MEMORY MAP..........................................................................................................................................A-31Table: C–1 UR PRODUCT STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS...............................................................................................................C-1Table: D–1 REVISION HISTORY .......................................................................................................................................................D-1Table: D–2 MAJOR UPDATES FOR F60 MANUAL-A4......................................................................................................................D-1Table: D–3 MAJOR UPDATES FOR F60 MANUAL-A3......................................................................................................................D-1



E-4 F60 Feeder Management Relay GE Power Management

E.1 FIGURES AND TABLES APPENDIX E

E



GE Power Management F60 Feeder Management Relay F- 1

APPENDIX F F.1 WARRANTY INFORMATION

F

APPENDIX F WARRANTYF.1 WARRANTY INFORMATION

GE MULTILIN RELAY WARRANTY

General Electric Multilin Inc. (GE Multilin) warrants each relay it manufactures to be free fromdefects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of 24 monthsfrom date of shipment from factory.

In the event of a failure covered by warranty, GE Multilin will undertake to repair or replace therelay providing the warrantor determined that it is defective and it is returned with all transporta-tion charges prepaid to an authorized service centre or the factory. Repairs or replacementunder warranty will be made without charge.

Warranty shall not apply to any relay which has been subject to misuse, negligence, accident,incorrect installation or use not in accordance with instructions nor any unit that has beenaltered outside a GE Multilin authorized factory outlet.

GE Multilin is not liable for special, indirect or consequential damages or for loss of profit or forexpenses sustained as a result of a relay malfunction, incorrect application or adjustment.

For complete text of Warranty (including limitations and disclaimers), refer to GE Multilin Stan-dard Conditions of Sale.



F-2 F60 Feeder Management Relay GE Power Management

F.1 WARRANTY INFORMATION APPENDIX F

F



GE Power Management F60 Feeder Management Relay i

INDEX

IND

EX

INDEX

Numerics

10BASE-F ................................................................. 3-16fiber optic port ......................................................... 3-17fiber optic port overview ............................................. 2-1redundant................................................................ 3-16

A

ABBREVIATIONS ........................................................ C-1AC CURRENT

specifications ............................................................ 2-7transformer inputs ..................................................... 3-7

AC INPUTSactual values ........................................................... 6-13settings ................................................................... 5-19

AC VOLTAGEspecifications ............................................................ 2-7

ACTIVE SETTING GROUP ................................. 5-46, 5-91ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU .................................... 6-1APPARENT POWER VA ............................................... 2-7APPLICATION OF SETTINGS ...................................... 8-1APPLICATIONS

circuit monitoring ....................................................5-108APPROVALS ............................................................... 2-9AUTORECLOSE ......................................... 2-6, 5-100, 6-5

B

BANKS ................................................................5-8, 6-13channels ......................................................... 5-19, 5-20

BLOCKsetting ....................................................................... 5-5

BREAKER 1 / BREAKER 2 ......................................... 5-24BREAKER ARCING CURRENT......................... 5-115, 6-16BREAKER CONTROL ........................................ 4-21, 5-24

control mode ........................................................... 4-21dual breaker scheme logic ....................................... 5-26settings ................................................................... 5-24setup example ......................................................... 4-22single breaker ......................................................... 4-22two breakers ........................................................... 4-21USER keys .............................................................. 4-21

BREAKER FAILURE ................................... 2-6, 5-74, 5-76BREAKER TRIP CIRCUIT

integrity monitoring .................................................5-108BREAKER-AND-A-HALF SCHEME ............................... 5-7

C

CAUTIONS .................................................................. 1-1CHANGES TO F60 MANUAL ........................................ D-1CHANGING EXISTING PASSWORDS ......................... 4-29CHANNELS

analog ..................................................................... 5-14banks .............................................................. 5-19, 5-20digital ...................................................................... 5-14

CHARACTERISTICSinverse time overcurrent ...........................................5-48undervoltage inverse time .........................................5-87

CIRCUIT MONITORING APPLICATIONS ...................5-108CLEANING .................................................................. 2-9CLEAR EVENT RECORDS ........................................... 7-2CLEAR RECORDS ....................................................... 7-2CLOCK ........................................................................ 6-7COLD LOAD PICKUP ................................................5-117COMMANDS

clear event records .................................................... 7-2clear records ............................................................. 7-2main menu ................................................................ 7-1perform lamptest ....................................................... 7-2relay maintenance ..................................................... 7-2update order code ..................................................... 7-2virtual inputs ............................................................. 7-1

COMMISSIONING ....................................................... 1-8COMMUNICATIONS ............................................1-5, 5-12

Ethernet port ............................................................. 2-8module wiring ...........................................................3-16options ...................................................................... 1-5RS232 ..............................................................2-8, 3-15RS485 ..............................................................2-8, 3-17specifications ............................................................ 2-8

COMTRADE ................................................................ A-9CONTACT INPUTS ................................................2-7, 6-3

configuration ..........................................................5-119menu .....................................................................5-119thresholds ..............................................................5-120

CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS ..................................... 3-9CONTACT OUTPUTS ........................................ 5-125, 6-4CONTROL ELEMENTS ...............................................5-91CONTROL MODE SELECTION & MONITORING ..........4-21CONTROL OF ONE BREAKER ....................................4-22CONTROL OF TWO BREAKERS .................................4-21CONTROL POWER ...................................................... 3-6

connection ................................................................ 3-6voltage range ............................................................ 3-6

CONTROL POWER EXTERNAL O/Pdry contact input ........................................................ 2-8

COUNTERblock ......................................................................5-113compare .................................................................5-112down ......................................................................5-113freeze/count ...........................................................5-113freeze/reset ............................................................5-113preset ....................................................................5-112reset ......................................................................5-113set to preset ...........................................................5-113units ......................................................................5-112up ..........................................................................5-113

CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS .................................3-16CRC-16 ALGORITHM .................................................. A-3CT INSTALLATION ...................................................... 3-7CT/VT MODULE ASSIGNMENTS ................................. 3-8CURRENT BANKS ............................................. 5-19, 6-13CURRENT ELEMENTS MENU .....................................5-46CURRENT POLARIZING .............................................5-68CURVES

definite time .................................................... 5-56, 5-86FlexCurve™ .............................................................5-56I²t ............................................................................5-55



ii F60 Feeder Management Relay GE Power Management

INDEX

IND

EX

IAC (GE) ..................................................................5-53IAC inverse time constants .......................................5-53IEC ..........................................................................5-51IEC (BS) inverse time constants ................................5-51IEC trip times ...........................................................5-52IEEE ........................................................................5-49IEEE curve operate times .........................................5-50IEEE inverse time constants .....................................5-49inverse time overcurrent ...........................................5-48inverse time undervoltage .........................................5-87

CUSTMOD.ZIP ...........................................................4-17CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDs ....................................4-17

D

DATA LINK LAYER ...................................................... A-1DCMA INPUTS ......................................... 2-7, 5-130, 6-14DEFINITE TIME CURVE .................................... 5-56, 5-86DEVICE NUMBERS (ANSI) .......................................... 2-1DIAGNOSTIC CHECKS ................................................ 7-4DIELECTRIC STRENGTH ............................................ 2-9DIGITAL COUNTERS

settings .................................................................. 5-112status ....................................................................... 6-6

DIGITAL ELEMENTSinput ...................................................................... 5-107menu ..................................................................... 5-107pickup delay ........................................................... 5-107reset delay ............................................................. 5-107scheme logic .......................................................... 5-108

DIGITAL I/O MODULE ASSIGNMENTS ........................ 3-9DIGITAL I/O WIRING MODULES ........................ 3-11, 3-12DISPLAY ............................................................. 1-6, 4-20DISPLAY PROPERTIES ..............................................5-11DNA ......................................................................... 5-123DOWNLOADABLE ZIP FILE ........................................4-17DRY AND WET CONTACT INPUT CONNECTIONS ......3-13DUAL POLARIZING ....................................................5-68

E

EARLY PATH .............................................................5-76EDIT SETTING GROUP ..............................................5-91ELEMENTS

classes ..................................................................... 5-4control .....................................................................5-91grouped ...................................................................5-46

ENTERINGalphanumeric text .....................................................4-26enumeration data .....................................................4-26numerical data .........................................................4-25

ENVIRONMENTALspecifications ............................................................ 2-8

EQUATIONSDefinite Time curve ......................................... 5-56, 5-86FlexCurve™ .............................................................5-56I²t curves .................................................................5-55IAC curves ...............................................................5-53IEC curves ...............................................................5-51IEEE curves .............................................................5-49

ERRORS ..................................................................... 7-4ETHERNET ................................................................. 6-7

IP address ...............................................................5-12link monitors ............................................................5-12port ............................................................................2-8

EVENT CAUSE INDICATORS .....................................4-15EVENT RECORDER ............................................ 2-7, 6-15

basics ....................................................................... A-8details ....................................................................... A-8file formats ................................................................ A-8

EVENTSsetting .......................................................................5-5

EXCEPTION RESPONSES .......................................... A-7

F

F60firmware revisions ....................................................6-17model information .....................................................6-17ordering .....................................................................2-3overview ....................................................................2-1

FACEPLATE...............................................................4-14display .....................................................................4-20keypad .....................................................................4-20LED indicator panels ................................................4-14menus .....................................................................4-23reset key ..................................................................4-14user key control .......................................................4-21

FACTORY PRESET LED PANEL 2 SETTINGS ............5-16FAST FORM-C RELAY

specifications .............................................................2-8FIBER OPTIC PORT See 10BASE-FFIRMWARE ................................................................5-12

revisions ..................................................................6-17FLEX STATES ..................................................... 5-17, 6-7FLEXCURVE™ ......................................... 5-27, 5-48, 5-56FLEXCURVE™ A / FLEXCURVE™ B...........................5-27FLEXCURVE™ TABLE ...............................................5-27FLEXLOGIC™ ..............................................................1-8

equation & logic for virtual output 3 ...........................5-41equation & logic for virtul output 4 .............................5-43equation editor .........................................................5-45equations .................................................................5-44evaluation ................................................................5-37example equation .....................................................5-91gate characteristics ..................................................5-36introduction to ..........................................................5-28operand types ..........................................................5-29operands .................................................................5-31operators .................................................................5-36procedure example ...................................................5-38rules ........................................................................5-37timers ......................................................................5-45worksheet ................................................................5-40

FORCE CONTACT INPUTS ...................................... 5-132FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS ................................... 5-132FORM-A CURRENT MONITOR .....................................2-8FORM-A OUTPUTS ............................................. 3-9, 3-13

high impedance circuits ..............................................3-9FORM-A RELAY

specifications .............................................................2-8FORM-A VOLTAGE MONITOR ......................................2-8FORM-C AND CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY

specifications .............................................................2-8FORM-C OUTPUTS ............................................. 3-9, 3-13



GE Power Management F60 Feeder Management Relay iii

INDEX

IND

EX

FREQUENCYmetering .................................................................. 6-13nominal ................................................................... 5-21system .................................................................... 5-21

FUNCTIONsetting ....................................................................... 5-4

FUNCTION CODE03H / 04H.................................................................. A-405H - execute operation ............................................. A-506H - store single setting ........................................... A-610H - store multiple settings ...................................... A-6

FUSE .......................................................................... 2-8

G

GOOSE ....................................................................5-123UCA2 DNA assignments .........................................5-128

GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE .................................. 4-1GROUND IOC1 / IOC2 ............................................... 5-71GROUND IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC ............................... 5-71GROUND TOC1 ......................................................... 5-70GROUND TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC .............................. 5-70GROUPED ELEMENTS .............................................. 5-46GUI ............................................................................. 4-1

H

HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS ......... 1-2

I

I²t CURVES ............................................................... 5-55IAC CURVES ............................................................. 5-53

GE type IAC inverse time constants ......................... 5-53IEC CURVES ............................................................. 5-51

(BS) inverse time constants ..................................... 5-51trip times ................................................................. 5-52

IEEE CURVES ........................................................... 5-49inverse time curve constants .................................... 5-49operate times .......................................................... 5-50

IN SERVICE INDICATOR ...................................... 1-8, 7-4INDICATORS

event cause ............................................................ 4-15status ...................................................................... 4-15user-programmable ................................................. 4-16

INITIAL PASSWORD SETUP ...................................... 4-28INPUTS ....................................................................... 2-7

AC current................................................................. 2-7AC voltage ................................................................ 2-7contact inputs ............................................................ 2-7DCMA inputs ............................................................. 2-7IRIG-B ...................................................................... 2-7

INSPECTION CHECKLIST ........................................... 1-1INSTALLATION ......................................................... 5-18

AC CT inputs ............................................................. 3-7communications module wiring ................................. 3-16control power ............................................................ 3-6digital I/O wiring .............................................. 3-11, 3-12relay settings not programmed ................................. 4-27RS232 faceplate program port .................................. 3-15

RS485 serial connection ...........................................3-17software .................................................................... 1-2wiring diagram ........................................................... 3-5

INTERNAL FUSE ......................................................... 2-8INVERSE TIME OVERCURRENT

characteristics ..........................................................5-48INVERSE TIME UNDERVOLTAGE

curves ......................................................................5-87IP ADDRESSES .........................................................5-12IRIG-B ............................................................... 3-18, 5-13

connection ...............................................................3-18input specification ..................................................... 2-7

K

KEYPAD..............................................................1-6, 4-20

L

LAMPTEST ................................................................. 7-2LED

custom labeling ........................................................4-17event cause indicators ..............................................4-15factory preset panel 2 ...............................................5-16indicators .................................................................4-14panel 1 ....................................................................4-14panels 2 & 3 .............................................................4-16status indicators .......................................................4-15

LOST PASSWORD .....................................................5-10

M

MAIN PATH ................................................................5-76MAINTENANCE

breakers ..................................................................6-16cleaning .................................................................... 2-9relay ......................................................................... 7-2

MENUhierarchy ...........................................................1-7, 4-23navigation .........................................................1-7, 4-23

METERING ................................................................. 2-7conventions ............................................................... 6-8

MMSoverview ............................................................ 2-1, B-1

MODBUS® .................................................................5-12function code 03H/04H .............................................. A-4memory map data formats ....................................... A-14memory map summary ............................................. A-12supported function codes ........................................... A-4

MODBUS® MEMORY MAP ........................................ A-31MODEL INFORMATION ..............................................6-17MODULES

communications wiring .............................................3-16digital I/O module assignments .................................. 3-9digital I/O wiring .............................................. 3-11, 3-12withdrawal and insertion ............................................ 3-2

MONITORING ............................................................. 2-7elements ................................................................5-115

MOUNTING AND DIMENSIONS ................................... 3-1MOUNTING AND WIRING ............................................ 1-5



iv F60 Feeder Management Relay GE Power Management

INDEX

IND

EX

N

NEGATIVE SEQUENCE IOC1 / IOC2 ..........................5-73NEGATIVE SEQUENCE IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC ...........5-73NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC1 / TOC2 ........................5-72NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC ..........5-72NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL .................................... 5-66, 8-1NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL SCHEME LOGIC .................5-69NEUTRAL IOC1 / IOC2 ...............................................5-65NEUTRAL IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC ................................5-65NEUTRAL TOC1 .........................................................5-64NEUTRAL TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC ...............................5-64NOT PROGRAMMED ................................................... 1-8NSAP ADDRESS ........................................................5-12

O

OPERATION CODES (for Function Code 05h) .............. A-5ORDER CODES .......................................................... 2-3

replacement modules ................................................ 2-4update ...................................................................... 7-2

OSCILLOGRAPHY ...................................... 2-7, 5-14, 6-16reading data .............................................................. A-9specificatons ............................................................. 2-7

OUTPUTS ................................................................... 2-8control power external ............................................... 2-8fast form-c relay ........................................................ 2-8form-a relay .............................................................. 2-8form-c and critical failure relay ................................... 2-8

OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES ................................5-48OVERVOLTAGE

protection .................................................................5-90

P

PANEL CUTOUT ......................................................... 3-1PASSWORD

changing ..................................................................4-29command .................................................................5-10lost ................................................................. 4-29, 5-10security ....................................................................5-10setting .....................................................................5-10setup .......................................................................4-28syntax ......................................................................5-10

PERMISSIVE FUNCTIONS .........................................5-86PER-UNIT QUANTITY.................................................. 5-4PHASE DIRECTIONAL ...............................................5-60PHASE DIRECTIONAL SCHEME LOGIC .....................5-63PHASE IOC1 / IOC2 ...................................................5-59PHASE IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC ....................................5-59PHASE OV1 ...............................................................5-90PHASE OV1 SCHEME LOGIC .....................................5-90PHASE OVERVOLTAGE .............................................. 2-6PHASE SEQUENCE ...................................................5-21PHASE TOC1 .............................................................5-57PHASE TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC ...................................5-58PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE ............................................ 2-6PHASE UV1 / UV2 ......................................................5-88PHASE UV1 SCHEME LOGIC .....................................5-89PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND IOC ................................. 2-5

PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND TOC .................................2-5PHYSICAL LAYER ....................................................... A-1POWER FACTOR

specifications .............................................................2-7POWER SUPPLY ..................................................2-8, 3-6

high range .................................................................2-8low range ...................................................................2-8

POWER SYSTEM .......................................................5-21phase sequence .......................................................5-21

PRODUCT INFORMATIONactual values ............................................................6-17

PRODUCTION TESTS ..................................................2-9PROTECTION ELEMENTS............................................2-5

autoreclosure .............................................................2-6breaker failure ............................................................2-6negative sequence IOC ..............................................2-5negative sequence TOC .............................................2-5neutral directional ......................................................2-6phase directional ........................................................2-6phase overvoltage ......................................................2-6phase undervoltage ....................................................2-6phase/neutral/ground IOC ...........................................2-5phase/neutral/ground TOC ..........................................2-5synchrocheck .............................................................2-6underfrequency ..........................................................2-6

PU QUANTITY .............................................................5-4PUSH BUTTON CONTROL .........................................4-21

R

REACTIVE POWER varspecifications .............................................................2-7

READING OSCILLOGRAPHY DATA ............................. A-9READING THE EVENT RECORDER ............................. A-8REAL POWER W

specifications .............................................................2-7REAL TIME CLOCK ....................................................5-13REAR NAME-PLATE .....................................................1-1REAR TERMINAL

assignments ...............................................................3-4layout ........................................................................3-3view ...........................................................................3-3

RECORDSactual values ............................................................6-15

REDUNDANT 10BASE-F .............................................3-16RELAY IN SERVICE .....................................................7-4RELAY MAINTENANCE ................................................7-2RELAY NAME ............................................................5-18RELAY OUT OF SERVICE ............................................7-4RELAY PASSWORDS

command ...................................................................1-8setting .......................................................................1-8

RELAY SELF-TESTS ....................................................7-4RELAY SETTINGS NOT PROGRAMMED.............. 1-8, 4-27REMOTE DEVICES .................................................. 5-123

statistics ....................................................................6-6status ........................................................................6-5

REMOTE INPUTS ..................................................... 5-124status ........................................................................6-4

REMOTE INPUTS/OUTPUTS .................................... 5-123REMOTE OUTPUTS

DNA bit pairs ......................................................... 5-128UserSt bit pairs ...................................................... 5-129



GE Power Management F60 Feeder Management Relay v

INDEX

IND

EX

RESET KEY .............................................................. 4-14RESET OPERANDS ..................................................5-129RESETTING .............................................................5-129RE-TRIP .................................................................... 5-76REVISION HISTORY ................................................... D-1RMS CURRENT

specifications ............................................................ 2-7RMS VOLTAGE

specifications ............................................................ 2-7RS232 ....................................................................... 3-15RS485 ........................................................ 2-8, 3-16, 3-17RTD INPUTS ................................................... 5-131, 6-14

S

SBO TIMER ..............................................................5-122SCRATCHPAD .......................................................... 5-18SEAL-IN ...................................................................5-120SECURITY ................................................................ 5-10SELECT BEFORE OPERATE ....................................5-121SELF-TEST ERRORS .................................................. 7-4SETTING GROUPS ................................................... 5-46

menu ...................................................................... 5-91SETTINGS

entering alphanumeric text ....................................... 4-26entering enumeration data ....................................... 4-26entering numerical data ........................................... 4-25main menu ................................................................ 5-1not programmed ........................................................ 1-8

SIGNAL SOURCES .................................................... 5-22SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM .............................................. 2-2SLOW PATH .............................................................. 5-77SNAPSHOT RECORD ................................................ 6-15SOURCE TRANSFER SCHEMES ............................... 5-86SOURCES

actual values ............................................................. 6-9introduction ............................................................... 5-6settings ................................................................... 5-22

SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................... 2-5SRC .................................................................. 5-22, 6-11ST TYPE CONNECTORS ........................................... 3-17STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS ..................................... C-1STATUS

actual values ............................................................. 6-3STATUS INDICATORS ............................................... 4-15SYNCHROCHECK

actual values ........................................................... 6-12settings ................................................................... 5-96specifications ............................................................ 2-6

T

TARGETsetting ....................................................................... 5-5

TARGETS ................................................................... 7-3message priority status .............................................. 7-3

TIMERdropout delay .......................................................... 5-45

pickup delay .............................................................5-45type .........................................................................5-45

TRANSDUCER I/O .................................. 3-14, 5-130, 6-14TROUBLE INDICATOR ..........................................1-8, 7-4TYPE TESTS ............................................................... 2-9

U

UCAcommunication profile ................................................ B-1overview ................................................................... B-1

UCA2 .......................................................................5-123DNA assignments ...................................................5-128overview ................................................................... 2-1

UNDERFREQUENCY ...........................................2-6, 5-93UNDERVOLTAGE

definite time characteristic ........................................5-86inverse time characteristic ........................................5-87protection .................................................................5-86

UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED .........................................5-18UPDATE ORDER CODE .............................................. 7-2URPC®

communications status .............................................4-13creating a site list ...................................................... 4-1example screen ......................................................... 4-1faceplate port ...........................................................3-15help program .....................................................4-1, 4-10main window ............................................................. 4-4off-line mode ............................................................. 4-1on-line mode ............................................................. 4-1overview ................................................................... 4-2software installation ................................................... 1-2

USER KEYS ...............................................................4-21USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS ......................... 4-16, 5-16UserSt ......................................................................5-123

V

VIRTUAL INPUTS ....................................... 5-121, 6-3, 7-1VIRTUAL OUTPUTS .......................................... 5-127, 6-5VOLTAGE BANKS ............................................. 5-20, 6-13VOLTAGE ELEMENTS MENU .....................................5-86VOLTAGE POLARIZING .............................................5-67VOLTAGE RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTIC .................5-57

W

WARNINGS ................................................................. 1-1WARRANTY ................................................................ F-1WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................................... 3-5

Z

ZERO SEQUENCE CORE BALANCE ............................ 3-7



vi F60 Feeder Management Relay GE Power Management

INDEX

IND

EX



F60 Feeder Management Relay Instruction Manual · PDF fileF60 Feeder Management Relay...

Documents

Transcript of F60 Feeder Management Relay Instruction Manual · PDF fileF60 Feeder Management Relay...